B 63945en 02 v2004 07 26 100

Convertional Automatic Programming
Function II for Lathe
Operator's Manual
B-61804E-2/05
B61804E2/05
Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1
I. GENERAL
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
II. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL

1. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN FAPT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3. SOFT KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
III. PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT

1. SYMBOLIC FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2. START OF SYMBOLIC FAPT PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3. EXECUTION OF SYMBOLIC FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.1
3.2
BLANK AND DRAWING (DRAWING AND BLANK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BLANK AND PART (PART FIGURE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1
Drawing of Program Coordinate System and Blank Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2
Part Figure Input (Input Method of with Figure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3
Input and Modification of Part Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4
Blank Figure Input of Special Figure Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5
Part Figure Input (Directory Input System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6
Batch Input Functions for Chamfering and Corner R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.7
Pattern Figure Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.8
Function for Defining the Center of an Arc According to a Given Single Coordinate . . . . . . . .
3.3
MACHINE ZERO POINT AND TURRET POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4
MACHINING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1
Selection of Kinds of Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2
Process Change and Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3
Output of Only Single Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c1
33
38
39
39
55
57
60
61
65
80
85
86
87
91
92
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.5
3.6
B61804E2/05
3.4.4
Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.4.5
Machining Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.4.6
Passing Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.4.7
Specifying the Direction and Area of Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.4.8
Function for Automatically Setting Area Division Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.4.9
Cutting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.4.10
Setting the Tool Data and Tooling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.4.11
Drawing a Cutting Area and Painting a Blank Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
NC DATA PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

3.5.1
Preparations of NC Data and Registrations of Machining Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
3.5.2
Precautions to be Taken with Background Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3.5.3
Display of Machining Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.5.4
Process Editing Function (Only with 2path Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.5.5
Special Block Output to both Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3.5.6
Outputting the NC Data of a Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
CHECKING NC DATA (ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

3.6.1
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3.6.2
Flow of Animation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
3.6.3
Starting an Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
3.6.4
Setting of Parameters for Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
3.6.5
Setting of Chuck Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.6.6
Setting of Tailstock Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
3.6.7
Setting of Tool Holder Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3.6.8
Enlargement and Reduction in the Animated Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3.6.9
Related System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
3.6.10
Input/Output of Graphic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4. SUB CYCLE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

4.1
SETTING OF SUB CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.2
INPUT/OUTPUT OF SUB CYCLE FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.3
DEFINITION OF SUB CYCLE PROCESS IN DEFINITION OF MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
4.4
PROCESS EDITING OF SUB CYCLE (2PATH LATHE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
4.5
OUTPUT OF NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.6
CAUTIONS AND NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION (2PATH LATHE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

5.1
BALANCE CUTTING PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
5.2
SPECIFICATION METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.3
USING THE AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
5.4
PROCESS EDITING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
5.5
NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
5.6
RELATED PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5.7
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL FOR BALANCE CUT B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5.8
CAUTION AND NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

c2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
6. AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION (15TTFB ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
199
203
204
205
IV. VARIOUS FILE AND DATA

1. MEMORY COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
1.1
MAIN MEMORY AND SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1.1
Submemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2
Main Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
DISPLAY OF SUBMEMORY FILE NAME AND FILE DELETION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3
ADDITIONAL PARAMETER OF SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
NO. OF FILES REGISTERABLE IN SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
210
211
212
213
213
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
INPUT/OUTPUT WITH SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.1
System Parameter, MTF, Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2
Family Program, Material Data, Tooling Information Sub Cycle File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.3
File Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4
Function For Automatically Registering Parameters and Data in Submemory . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COLLATION AND INPUT/OUTPUT WITH FLOPPY CASSETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1
System Parameter, MTF, Tool Data, Setting Data, Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2
Family Program, Material Data, Tooling Information, Sub Cycle File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3
Handling of Floppy Cassette and Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAPT I/O INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGISTRATION OF FILE NAME ONTO FLOPPY CASSETTE, HANDY FILE (OPTION) . . . .
FILE DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.3
Input/Output Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.4
File Name Registration in the Floppy Cassette or Handy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
215
215
219
222
223
223
225
225
227
228
229
229
229
230
231
V. SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA

1. MATERIAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
1.1
1.2
1.3
MATERIAL DATA AND MATERIAL FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SETTING AND DATA WHICH CAN DISPLAYED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1
Method of Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2
Method of Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.3
Method of Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
INPUT/OUTPUT OF MATERIAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5
NOTES ON MATERIAL FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c3
236
237
238
238
239
240
241
241
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
2. TOOL DATA AND TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

2.1
2.2
2.3
TOOL DATA, TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TOOL DATA DISPLAY AND SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1
Tool Data Input/Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4
TOOLING INFORMATION DISPLAY AND SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5
INITIALIZATION OF TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6
TOOL FIGURE DATA AND SETTING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1
General Lathe Setting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2
Vertical Lathe Setting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243
244
248
249
251
255
256
256
269
3. SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
DISPLAY AND SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OUTPUT/INPUT AND COLLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORMAT OF PARAMETER TAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERROR DISPLAY MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
287
288
289
290
VI. AUXILIARY JOBS

1. SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
2. CONVERSION OF INPUT UNIT (MM/INCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
3. CHANGING THE NUMBER OF REGISTERED TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
VII. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT

1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
1.1
1.2
1.3
SKIP FUNCTION OF PAGE AND QUESTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INCREMENTAL DESIGNATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1
Designation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
NC DATA OUTPUT BY SINGLE STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1
Single Step of Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.2
Single Step of Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5
REOUTPUT OF NC DATA BY EACH PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6
OUTPUT IN MAIN PROGRAM AND SUBPROGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7
S CODE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8
SIMULTANEOUS 1 AXIS MOVEMENT IN APPROACH AND RETURN RELIEF . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.1
Setting of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.2
NC Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9
UTILIZATION OF DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10
APPLICATION FOR NC CHASER LATHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c4
306
308
310
310
313
313
314
316
318
320
322
322
323
325
327
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
1.11
INTERFERENCE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11.1
Interference Check by Tool Shape and Machining Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11.2
Interference Check in Approach and Return relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11.3
Grooving when the Tool Width and Groove Width are the Same . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11.4
Approach and Relief to Inner Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12
INITIAL SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.1 Screen Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.2 Setting Initial Screen Display Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.3 Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.4 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.5 System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.13
OUTPUTTING NC DATA IN THE FS15T/16T FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.13.1 MTF Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.13.2 Supplementary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.14
FUNCTION FOR PREPARING THE NEXT TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.15
OUTPUT FUNCTION FOR INTERPOLATION RIGID TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
332
332
332
334
335
336
336
337
341
342
343
344
344
348
349
351
2. CAUTIONS FOR USING Symbolic FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
TOOL FIGURE AND SETTING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CUTTING DIRECTION AND CUTTING EDGE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROUGH CUTTING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JUDGEMENT OF POCKETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIVISION OF MACHINING AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SURPLUS THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1
Finish Allowance and Surplus Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2
Surplus Thickness and Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.3
Closed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.4
Definition of Optional Blank Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7
GROOVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.1
Tool Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.2
Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.3
Blank Figure in Grooving Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.4
Groove Bottom Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.5
Concaved Parts in Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8
DEPTH OF CUT (D) IN DRILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9
THREADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.1
Threading Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.2
Threading Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.3
Depth of Screw Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10
CUTTING OVERHUNG PORTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.11
ERROR WHEN NC DATA IS PREPARED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12
OTHER PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.1 Chucking Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.2 Cutting Start Position and Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.3 Method of Stopping the Tool on Z Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.4 Tool Path in Finish Cutting and Semifinish Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c5
357
363
364
365
367
370
370
370
371
371
372
372
373
373
373
374
375
376
376
377
377
378
380
383
383
383
384
385
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
VIII. CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

1. PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
1.1
1.2
1.3
KIND OF MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFICATION OF CAXIS MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGNATION OF CAXIS FIGURE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1
Inserting or Deleting Caxis Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2
Details of Caxis Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
MILLING IN MULTIPLE PLANES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5
CAXIS MACHINING WITH A MACHINING PLANE SPECIFIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
390
391
392
392
393
407
408
2. MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

2.1
SPECIFICATION OF CAXIS MACHINING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.1
Kind of Caxis Machining Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2
Tool Data for Caxis Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.3
Machining Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4
Cutting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.5
Specifying the Cutting Position for Caxis Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
BLIND HOLE AND THROUGH HOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
412
412
412
415
416
427
428
3. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION (MENU 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

3.1
3.2
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1
Caxis FAPT Animated Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2
Parameter Screen for Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
430
431
431
434
4. MATERIAL AND TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

4.1
4.2
MATERIAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1
Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2
Input and Output of the Tool Data and Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3
Displaying and Setting of Tooling Informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
436
437
437
438
439
5. MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
MTF SETTING WHEN CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION IS USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NC DATA OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIGID TAPPING NC DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FACE MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIDE MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G85/G89 BORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
443
447
458
460
466
470
6. CAUTIONS ON CAXIS FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

6.1
SIMULTANEOUS AXIS MOVE CONTROL OF APPROACH AND RETURN RELIEF . . . . . . .

6.1.1
Setting of Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2
Specification of Move Order at the Time of the Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3
Type of NC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2
SPINDLE POSITIONING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c6
472
472
472
472
473
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
7. INFEED MACHINING IN CAXIS FACE MILLING PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
FIGURE DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MACHINING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL PATH DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
475
476
478
478
479
IX. YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

1. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
1.1
1.2
1.3
DRILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
ROTATING THE MACHINING PLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
2. PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

2.1
2.2
SPECIFYING A YAXIS MACHINING PROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

SPECIFYING THE YAXIS FIGURE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
3. SPECIFYING HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS (MENU 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

4. DEFINING MACHINING (MENU 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
MACHINING DEFINITION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUTTING AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUTTING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
513
515
517
518
5. ANIMATED SIMULATION (MENU 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
7. NC MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
7.1
SETTING MTF PARAMETERS WHEN THE YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION IS SUPPORTED . . . . 554
8. NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
X. BACK MACHINING FAPT

1. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
2. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
2.1
PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1
Material Data Input (Menu No.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2
Part Figure Input (Menu No.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.3
Home Position and Turret Index Position (Menu No.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4
Machining Definition (Menu No.4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.5
NC Data Preparation (Menu No.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.6
Animation Drawing (Menu No.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c7
563
563
563
564
564
568
569
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
2.2
PARAMETERS, ETC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2
MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3
Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3
WARNINGS AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
570
570
571
573
574
3. EXAMPLE OF NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
XI. AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION

1. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
2.1
2.2
DEFINING A NEW PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

MODIFYING A DEFINED PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
3. SETTING THE MACHINING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION AND
NOTES ON ITS USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
AUTOMATIC SELECTION OF A TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DETERMINING INVERSE PROCESSES
(AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION B OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUTTING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AREA DIVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESIDUAL MACHINING AND THREADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CENTER DRILLING AND BAR FEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MULTITIER DRILLING
(B OPTION FOR THE AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION) . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FOR A CLOSED FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MACHINING FOR WHICH AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION
CANNOT BE USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
590
592
596
598
601
601
602
615
616
5. SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
XII. DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING

1. SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
2. DEFINITION OF BLANK FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
3. DEFINITION OF PART FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
4. HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
c8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

5.1
5.2
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEFINITION BY MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1
Tool Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2
Cutting Area Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3
Cutting Condition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3
AUTOMATIC PROCESSING DECISION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1
Processing Area Division Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2
Process Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3
Automatic Processing Decision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.4
Process Area Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
627
628
629
630
630
631
631
633
633
634
6. NC DATA PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

7. MACHINING TIME DISPLAY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
8. SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
9. NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELATION WITH BACKSIDE MACHINING FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELATION WITH 4AXIS LATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
641
641
641
641
XIII. ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II

1. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
2. FLOW OF ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
3. OPERATION PROCEDURE FOR ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
4. ANIMATED SIMULATION SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
ANIMATED SIMULATION OF TURNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ANIMATED SIMULATION WITH GRADATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAXIS ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YAXIS ANIMATED SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANIMATED SIMULATION FOR TWOPATH LATHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
5. SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

6. SUPPLEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
c9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
A. SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
SETTING DATA TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SYSTEM PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF) TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUNCTION TABLE (MTF 2000S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4.1
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4.2
Function Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4.3
Size of Function Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4.4
Reference of Function Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4.5
Referencing an Optional Function Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.5
ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.5.1
Errors Common to All Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.5.2
Errors at Defining Figures (Menu 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.5.3
Errors at Machining Definition (Menu 4) and NC Data Preparation (Menu 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.5.4
Errors at Animation Drawing (Menu 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.5.5
Errors at Accessing the Submemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.5.6
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
662
668
695
704
704
709
720
725
740
744
744
745
746
746
747
748
B. RESTRICTIONS ON EACH SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749

B.1
MACHINING DEFINITION FOR 5700 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.1.1
Machining Definition of Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.1.1 Selection of kinds of machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.1.2 Process change and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.1.3 Output of only single process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.1.4 Tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.1.5 Machining start position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.1.6 Passing point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.1.7 Cutting direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.1.8 Cutting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.1.9 Cutting area definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.2
Cut off Machining, Bar Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.2.1 Cut off machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.2.2 Bar feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.3
Machining Definition of Caxis Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.3.1 Specification of Caxis machining definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.3.2 Explanatory drawing of cutting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.3.3 Blind hole and through hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2
AUTOMATIC PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR 5700 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.1
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.3
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.3.1 Setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.3.2 Tool data and tooling information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.4
Cautions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c10
752
752
753
755
756
756
761
761
763
764
773
776
776
780
784
784
789
792
793
793
793
797
797
802
803
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions
be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this
section assume this configuration).
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied
by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control the operation
of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant manual
supplied by the machine tool builder.
s1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B61804E2/05
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
D Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B61804E2/05
GENERAL WARNINGS
WARNING
1. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data on the screen. Operating the
machine with incorrect data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
2. When the tool offset function is used, before activating the machine, check the direction and
value of the offset to ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. Any
collision may cause damage to the tool and/or machine, or injury to the user.
3. Before starting the NC program prepared using the conversational function, thoroughly check
the contents of the NC data to ensure that the tool path and machining processes are set correctly,
and that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine (including the chuck and
tailstock). Before starting a production run, perform a dry run to ensure that the tool will not
collide with the workpiece or machine (including the chuck and tailstock). For example, start
the machining program without mounting a workpiece on the machine. Any collision may cause
damage to the tool and/or machine, or injury to the user.
4. Before using the conversational function to prepare a machining program, determine whether
the tool data, material data, setting data, system parameters, and MTF data are set as specified
by the machine tool builder. If these data values are not set appropriately, the cutting conditions
necessary for machining may not be set properly, possibly causing damage to the tool, or injury
to the user.
s3
I. GENERAL
GENERAL
B61804E2/05
1. GENERAL
GENERAL
This manual is for conversational automatic programming function.

The conversational automatic programming function II is software in
which functions of an epochmaking automatic programming system
Symbolic FAPT are assembled, and this Symbolic FAPT allows even
unexperienced NC programmers to produce NC data for machining at
once simply by depressing buttons according to the instructions on the
graphic display CRT. The CNC can execute machining according to a
program soon after programming it at a site, or it can execute another
programming during machining.
The Symbolic FAPT produces NC data and loads them into builtin
memory (machining memory). Machining is made according to the NC
data in memory (also called NC program).
During machining, another program can also be produced by using
Symbolic FAPT function. When the machining memory has been
unloaded after machining, another program being prepared at the
automatic programming section is registered to the machining memory.
Since NC data loaded in machining memory are prepared in standard NC
language, an operator who knows the standard NC language can directly
check or modify NC data of standard NC language in machining memory
by using the CRT.
(Since NC data can be registered again to machining memory after
modifying NC data at the automatic programming section without any
need of modifying machining memory data, it is not necessary to modify
machining memory data usually.)
1. GENERAL
GENERAL
B61804E2/05
Chapter III describes the programming and operation by Symbolic FAPT.

After understanding these description, you can start machining at once,
referring to the machine tool builders manual.
B61804E2/05
GENERAL
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
(1) The NC data thus produced automatically by Symbolic FAPT are not
directly used for machining, but they are once loaded to the machining
memory.
(2) The automatic programming unit is not capable of storing various
information of machine tools and machine control unit.
Note that control information of machine tools can be processed only
in machine control unit.
(3) The machining information can be input to CNC by the following two
methods.
(a) Method of loading automatic programming results into the
machining memory after automatic programming has been made
by using the Symbolic FAPT. This is a standard method, which can
be used without any knowledge on NC tape format.
(b) Method of inputting the machining information into the machining
memory of the machine control unit by MDI operation.
Since this operation is the same as in NC unit for ordinary MDI
input, you are requested to be familiar with NC tape format, etc.
3. NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL
GENERAL
B61804E2/05
NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are:

Name of product
FANUC Series 15TFB
Abbreviation
15TFB
15TFB
FANUC Series 15TTFB
15TTFB
FANUC Series 16TA (CAP II)
16TA CAP II
FANUC Series 16/18TB (CAP II)
16TB CAP II
FANUC Series 16/18TC (CAP II)
16TC CAP II
FANUC Series 16i/18iTA (CAPII)
16iTA CAPII
FANUC Series 16TTA (CAPII)
16TTA CAPII
FANUC Series 16/18TB

(2path lathe, CAP II)
16TB CAP II
FANUC Series 16/18TC

16TC CAP II
FANUC Series 16i/18iTA

16iTA CAP II
16T CAP II
(1) This manual does not cover the functions on the NC side.
(2) The function of an NC machine tool system does not depend only on
the NC, but on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic
cabinet, servo system, the NC, operators panels, etc. It is too difficult
to describe the function, programming, and operation in various
combinations of them. This manual generally describes them from the
standpoint of the NC. So, for a particular NC machine tool, refer to
the manual issued by the machine tool builder, which should take
precedence over this manual.
(3) Notes refer to detailed and specific items. So, when a note will be
encountered, terms used in it sometimes will not have been explained
it. In such a case, first skip the note, then return to it after having read
the manual in outline for details.
(4) For 16T CAP II, the manual covers only the 5710 system and the
5800 system series and later. The earlier series may not support some
functions described in the manual. See Appendix 2 for the
unsupported functions.
II. EXPLANATION FOR

CRT/MDI PANEL
B61804E2/05
EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
CRT/MDI panel is composed of a 14inch CRT or 10.4inch LCD color

graphic display and keys which consist of alphabet, numerics, and the
others. It is as shown below.
MDI panel for 15TFB/15TTFB
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
MDI panel for 16T/16TT CAP II
10
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
Text type
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II (10.4inch horizontal type LCD/MDI unit)
11
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
Text type
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II (10.4inch vertical type LCD/MDI unit)
12
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
Text type
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II (14inch horizontal type CRT/MDI unit)
13
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
MDI panel for 16iTA CAP II (separate type MDI unit: text type)
MDI panel for 16iTA CAP II (separate type MDI unit: symbol type)
14
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
Fig. 1 14inch color CRT/MDI panel external view
The mode in which the CRT/MDI unit is used for the creation of CNC data
with the Symbolic FAPT is called FAPT mode. The mode in which the
CRT/MDI is used for operations related to the CNC functions, such as
editing of created data, setting and check of various parameters for CNC
machining and tool offset amounts, and check of travel during CNC
machining, is called CNC mode.
To change the mode of the CRT/MDI unit between FAPT and CNC/PMC,
press the mode selector keys with lamps as shown below.
D For 15TFB
When
MMC/
FAPT
is pressed, FAPT screen is displayed.
When
PMC/
CNC
is pressed, CNC screen is displayed.
D For 16T CAP II

When
FAPT
is pressed, the FAPT screen is displayed.
To display the CNC screen, press one of the other function keys.
15
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN
FAPT MODE
B61804E2/05
KEYS EFFECTIVE IN FAPT MODE
The diagram at under shows only the keys used in the Symbolic FAPT.
The symbols omitted are not used in FAPT mode.
16
B61804E2/05
FAPT MODE
Fig. 2 (a) 15TFB/TTFB
17
FAPT MODE
Fig. 2 (b) 16T/TT CAP II
18
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
Text type
FAPT MODE
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II (10.4inch horizontal type LCD/MDI unit)
19
FAPT MODE
Text type
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II (10.4inch vertical type LCD/MDI unit)
20
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
Text type
FAPT MODE
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II (14inch horizontal type CRT/MDI unit)
21
FAPT MODE
MDI panel for 16iTA CAP II (separate type MDI unit: text type)
MDI panel for 16iTA CAP II (separate type MDI unit: symbol type)
22
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
FAPT MODE
(1) Keys for parts figure input

Used for increment amount input. (See CHAPTER III,
3.2.3) Can also be used for inputting the alphabet I.
Used when commanding thread. Can also be used for

inputting the alphabet T.
Used when commanding chamfer. Can also be used for
inputting the alphabet C.
Used when commanding rounding. Can also be used
for inputting the alphabet R.
Used when commanding grooving. Can also be used
for inputting the alphabet G.
Used when commanding neck. Can also be used for inputting the alphabet N.
Called delete key. This key is used to set undefined
data.
Called the cancel key. Only 1 character is
erased if this key is proceed after inputting
data and before pressing the INPUT key.
To cancel all the data input so far, press
SHIFT , CAN .
Arithmetical function keys (The can also
be used as minus signs).
23
FAPT MODE
B61804E2/05
(2) Other keys

Used when inputting the alphabet at the right bottom of the key.
All the data in the keyin buffer line is cancelled
if CAN is pressed after pressing this key.
Used to input space.
Atmark key. Pressed before writing the file

name, to display a @, when storing or calling family programs and material files in the sub memory.
Input key. This key is used to write the entered

data into memory.
24
B61804E2/05
3. SOFT KEY
SOFT KEY
The 12 keys under the CRT are called soft keys. The function of the keys
change according to the screen displayed. The function for each screen
are framed at the bottom of the screen.
25
III. PROGRAMMING AND

OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
1. SYMBOLIC FAPT
SYMBOLIC FAPT
The Symbolic FAPT is an epoch making NC automatic programming

system which enables even unexperienced NC operators to prepare NC
tape immediately according to the instructions on the graphic display
CRT.
Each process from design drawings to NC tape preparation is entirely
advanced by the conversational operation with the graphic display CRT.
For (1) selection of coordinate system by drawing methods (2) selection
of figures of blank and input of dimensions (3) input of parts figures and
dimensions, and (4) selection of machining process and decision or
cutting conditions etc., the operator has only to answer questions from the
CRT.
The parts figure can be input simply by depressing corresponding symbol
keys on the operators panel according to the profiles of a workpiece
described on design drawings.
When dimensions and various data are input, various pieces of reference
information are illustrated on the CRT from time to time, and questions
are given to the operator using daily language.
When data are input, the figure of blank and parts profile are drawn
immediately, and automatic calculations of NC command data are started.
The tool path is concurrently displayed as figures.
Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the screens of the 15TFB
or 16T CAP II to describe functions.
29
2. START OF SYMBOLIC
FAPT PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
START OF SYMBOLIC FAPT PROGRAMMING
CAUTION
After turning on the power, do not touch the keyboard until
the initial FAPT screen is displayed. Some keys are
specifically designed for maintenance or other special
operations; if any of these keys is pressed before the initial
screen is displayed, the machine may behave
unexpectedly.
The programming by Symbolic FAPT can be started by turning on the

power.
The initial screen is displayed 20 seconds after turning power on.
Symbolic FAPT
side initial screen
(16T CAP II).
After the SYSTEM EDITION, the series/version number will be displayed.

Immediately after the series/version number, the language of the message
currently being displayed will be indicated in English.
Various jobs are selectable by depressing soft keys, while the initial pattern appears on CRT screen.
[FAPT EXEC] . . . . . Depress this key for NC programming, while

monitoring the CRT screen.
[FAMILY PROGRAM] . . . For calling a family program from
submemory, floppy cassette or paper tape,
depress this key.
For using the memory cassette, the memory
cassette adapter is necessary.
For using the paper tape, FANUC PPR is
necessary.
30
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
2. START OF SYMBOLIC
FAPT PROGRAMMING
[DATA SET] . . . . . . This key is used for input/output and setting of

system parameter, machine tool file (MTF),
setting data, material file and tooling data. For
storage of material files and tooling files,the
submemory, the memory cassette or paper tape is
used.
[AUXILIARY] . . . . This key is used to initialize sub memory
FAPT execution
Press the FAPT execution on the initial screen to allow the FAPT
execution procedures menu to be displayed, By pressing the Software key
Execution, programming is initiated according to the procedures.
Correction can be easily made by directly selecting any menu on
correcting programs. For example, press the Software key 2 for
selecting input of final parts figure. Press the 5 for creating the NC data.
However, it is not possible to execute programming in the reverse order,
namely from larger memory number to smaller one.
Press the End when the above screen is being displayed to return to the
initial screen.
31
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
EXECUTION OF SYMBOLIC FAPT
It is possible to perform NC programming, monitoring the drawing in the

FAPT screen. Proceed with programming, monitoring the CRT screen
according to the following procedures:
32
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.1
BLANK AND
DRAWING (DRAWING
AND BLANK)
WARNING
1 Select the same material as that of the workpiece to be
machined. If a desired material option is not displayed on
the material menu, cancel the machining of the workpiece.
Failure to select the correct material may result in the
machining being performed under incorrect cutting
conditions, or the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or
machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or
tool itself, or injury to the user.
2 Select the blank figure corresponding to that of workpiece
to be machined. Failure to select the correct figure may
result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or
3 Enter the correct blank dimensional data for the workpiece
to be machined. Failure to enter the correct data may result
in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
Soft key 1
Go to the screen for the above processes. The meaning of each question
is as follows:
(a) MATERIAL NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MN =
This is a question for selecting the material of blank. Input the number
corresponding to the material NO. For example, key in 4 when
selecting aluminum.
33
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(b) STANDARD SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . NR =

, 3.
, 4.
)
(1. , 2.
This is a question used to select the surface roughness. Input the
number of marks on the machining drawing. For example, key in
. It is possible
2 if nearly all areas of machining drawing have
to skip this question using system parameter No.10.
(c) DRAWING FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DF =
This question is used to select the drawing format.
When the horizontal figure drawing is performed:
1.
2.
When the vertical figure drawing is performed:
In the case of horizontal drawing, select the drawing format 1 or 3 and

2 or 4 to easily input the dimension data on programming while the
dimension value of drawing is written based on the left and right sides,
respectively. This question can be skipped by setting of the system
parameter No.9.
34
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(d) BLANK FIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BF =

(1. Cylinder 2. Hollow cylinder 3. Special blank)
This question is used to select the blank figure. Input the number
corresponding to the blank figure. For example, key in 1 to select the
cylinder.
BLANK SIZE
DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D =
INNER DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D0=
LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L =
The diameter (D) and length of blank (L) are indicated.
In the case of hollow cylinder, the inner diameter (D0) is also
displayed.
BASE LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZP =
It is used to specify at which part of blank the coordinate system (X
axis) to be programmed exists.
SURPLUS THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX =
TZ =
If a special blank is selected as blank figure, the X and Y components
of surplus thickness are displayed.
When data is input to the TX and TZ, it is assumed that the blank has
a constant surplus thickness. When nothing is input to the TX and TZ,
it is possible to define a free blank figure. The definition method is
described in the following item of Blank and Part (Part Figure).
DEPTH OF CHUNKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZC =
Input the data to determine the drawing position of chuck when the
animation drawing function option is provided. See Chapter 3
Section 3.6 Check of NC data (animation drawing function) for
details.
Insert the , mark between data on inputting data to allow plural
number of data to be input simultaneously.
Example)
Input as in the following to to allow several data to be input
simultaneously when BF=1, L=100, D=150, and ZP=5 are input:
BF=1, 100, 150, 5 INPUT
Meaning of software key
[ESCAPE] . . It is used to return to the menu screen.
[HELP] . . . . . It is displayed when each question regarding the
drawing format, blank figure, blank size, position of
base line is asked.
Press this key when the meaning of each question is
unknown.
Then the following screen appears:
35
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
When it is pressed in the case of drawing format question:
In the case of horizontal drawing:
In the case of vertical drawing:
When it is pressed in the case of question for blank format, blank size, or
position of base line:
In the case of horizontal drawing:
36
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
In the case of vertical drawing:
[MAT.NAME] . . Press this software key to see the name of 18th

material or thereafter while 18 or more blank
materials are registered.
[CURSOR ] . . . The cursor moves in forward direction.
[CURSOR ] . . . The cursor moves in backward direction.
[NEXT PAGE] . . The next screen appears. If the input data contradicts
or there PAGE are undefined data, the following
message is displayed and it is not possible to move to
the next page: KEY IN AGAIN
NOTE
Normally, the next screen is automatically displayed when
all questions are answered on one screen. Press the
NEXT PAGE if it is not required to answer all questions or
data has been input to all questions. Also, it is possible to
allow the screen to keep being displayed for several
seconds after answering all questions or to disable
advancing to the next screen.
When the standard surface roughness or drawing format is
fixed, it is possible to skip these questions. See Chapter
7 section 1.1 for the method of skipping the questions.
Set the system parameter No.19 to determine either of
horizontal or vertical drawing.
37
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
3.2
BLANK AND PART
(PART FIGURE)
WARNING
1 After entering part figure data, check the entered data.
Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding
with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining
occurring, possibly causing damage to the workpiece,
machine, and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
2 For a conversational program for which machining process
data has been prepared, if part figure data is modified, the
cutting area specified in the machining definition may be
changed. Operating the machine based on NC data in
memory, with an incorrect cutting area specified, may result
CAUTION
1 When entering threading data, check the data that is
automatically calculated by pressing the [OUTER
THREAD], [INNER THREAD], or [SQUARE THREAD] soft
key. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot be
machined properly.
2 Check the figure data that is automatically inserted by the
batch input function for chamfering/corner R. If this data is
incorrect, the workpiece cannot be machined properly.
3 Check the figure data that is automatically created by the
pattern figure input function. If this data is incorrect, the
workpiece cannot be machined properly.
4 Check the data that is automatically set by the neck corner
input function. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot
be machined properly.
38
B61804E2/05
3.2.1
Drawing of Program
Coordinate System and
Blank Figure
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
The coordinate axis and blank figure matching the drawing format
previously selected are drawn on the screen.
D The blank is plotted by a dotted line.

D The left end of the blank is plotted by a solid line to indicate the chuck
side.
D The blank is automatically scaled so that it is accommodated with the
screen, irrespective of its dimensions.
The system requests you to input the part figure by the following display
in conversational area on the CRT screen.
ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES =
D If the blank is long laterally, the conversational area is provided on the
lower side of the CRT screen, and if it is long longitudionally, the
conversational area is provided on the right side of the CRT screen.
This decision is automatically done according to the dimensions of
input blanks.
3.2.2
Part Figure Input (Input
Method of with Figure)
The part figure can be input by depressing the figure symbol keys
sequentially along the profile of a part. Ten keys for numerical input and
alphabetic keys indicating the chamfering, rounding, threading,
grooving, and necking are employed as figure symbol keys.
39
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(Example)
Start / End
point point
For a figure illustrated above, input the following keys along the drawing.
The system will ask you necessary dimension, each time these figure
symbol keys are depressed.
(1) Contents of the question and the meaning of symbolic key.
Surface roughness
The system asks you the surface roughness, each time the figure
element symbol like a circle, a straight line, etc. is inputted. The
already designated standard surface roughness is automatically
displayed on the CRT screen at this time. If this value is allowable,
depress INPUT key only.
If you desire to change the surface roughness at that place only, select
the number of symbols 1, 2, 3, or 4.
NOTE
By parameter setting on parameter No.0010, the question
on the surface roughness can be skipped. When this
question is skipped, the standard surface roughness is
employed.
Start point
The system asks you the start point at the first step of figure input only.
SDX . . . . . Diameter value at start point
SZ . . . . . . . Z value at start point
PE . . . . . . . Whether a part exists on the left side or on right side along
a series of a figure profile to be inputted, is selected by
1 or 0.
The questions are made for the first figure element only, when a part
figure is inputted.
40
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
Straight line
(a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . ES =

Input an arrow along the profile figure when the system asks you
the above question.
For example, input
INPUT
(b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . . . . SR =

marks indicating the surface roughness
Input the number of
when the system asks you the surface roughness.
(c) The system will ask you the following items sequentially, starting
with the top item by displaying these items on the CRT screen.
END POINT . . . . . . . . DX
Z
= Diameter value at end point

= Z value at end point
TANGENT LAST . . . . TL
= Whether the profile touches

the last figure or not.
TANGENT NEXT . . . . TN

the next figure or not.
ANGLE FROM Z . . . . A
= Angle from Z axis
You have to input only the dimensions described on the drawing.

Depress
INPUT
key only, if a dimension is not found on the drawing.
The system does not always ask all the above items, depending
upon the input arrow directions, but it ask you necessary numerical
values only, and you have to input only those described on the
drawing.
(d) If data are insufficient, KEY IN AGAIN is displayed.
Circle
(a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES =

Input either
or
key along the progressive direction of
the circle when the system asks you the above question.
(b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . . . . . . SR =
Input the number of
when the system asks you the above question.
(c) END POINT . . . . . . . . DX
Z
= Diameter value at end point

= Z value at end point
TANGENT LAST . . . . TL

the last arrow figure or not.
TANGENT NEXT . . . . TN

the next arrow figure or not.
RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . R
= Radius value of circle
CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . CDX = X value at circle center

(diameter coordinate value)
CZ
41
= Z value at circle center
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
The system asks you the above questions sequentially by

displaying these items on the CRT screen. Input only such
dimensions as are known from the drawing. Depress
INPUT
key
only, if a corresponding dimension is not found on the drawing.

(d) If data are insufficient or if an invalid numerical value was input,
KEY IN AGAIN is displayed.
(e) The system asks you the following question when a profile figure
transfers from a straight line to circular arc or from a circular arc
to a circular arc.
SELECT START POINT or END POINT
(: RIGHT : LEFT : ABOVE : BELOW)
The parts figure input comprises two methods when a profile figure
transfers from a straight line or a circular arc.
When
keys were depressed;
The start point is either left side

or lower side.
When
The start point is either right side

or upper side.
keys were depressed;
The start point is either right

side or lower side.
The start point is either left

side or upper side.
When the system asks you SELECT START POINT to identify the
following two possible methods from each other, you have to select
the right side (), left side (), above () or below () by the
, ,
, or
Chamfering
key.
Chamfering is designated by
C , which indicates the capital of
chamfer.
Answer C when the system asks you the above question.
42
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05

Input the number of
(c) CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C =
Input the chamfering amount for the above question.
(d) The chamfering amount is figured as shown below.
Straight line and straight line
Straight line and circular arc
Circular arc and circular arc
(e) The chamfering is displayed on CRT screen as shown below.
Rounding
Rounding is designated by R , which indicates capital of rounding.

Input R when the system asks you the above question.
Input the number of marks indicating the surface roughness when
the system asks you the above question.
(c) RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R =
Input the radius value for rounding when the system asks you the
above question.
43
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(d) Rounding is done as follows.
(e) Rounding is displayed as a figure on the CRT screen as shown

below.
CAUTION
Keys
,
and
R should be selectively used for
specifying a circular arc as described below.

D (1) A tangential circule being caught by 2 straight lines, (2) a
tangential circule being caught by a straight line and a circular
arc, and (3) a tangential circle being caught by circular arcs can
be specified by
key as a figure element key, if their
radiuses are known, as illustrated above.

D If the coordinate values of a circular arc center, a start point and
an end point are written on a drawing, the rounding can be
specified by using
44
or
key.
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
Threading
Threading is designated by T , which indicates the capital of thread.

Input T
(b) ON WHICH ELEMENT? . . . . EE = On which element is

(0: LAST 1: NEXT)
threading done?
LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT = Length of thread
LEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LD = Lead of thread
MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NT = Number of threads of screw
The system asks you these questions, starting with the top item by
displaying them on CRT screen.
(c) ON NEXT ELEMENT or ON LAST ELEMENT?
T is input before and after arrows, in general.

It indicates whether threading is made on a figure element to be
input or on the last figure element already input.
ON NEXT ELEMENT . . . . . . . Input 1.
ON LAST ELEMENT . . . . . . . Input 0.
Identify ON NEXT ELEMENT and ON LAST ELEMENT
from each other in the following illustration.
In case of the next element
In case of the last element
45
In case of the next element
In case of the last element
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
Reversing screws can be machined by selectively specifying either

on the next element or on the last element. If the rotating direction
of the blank is the same and the cutting direction is reversed in the
previous figure, screws are threaded reversely.
CAUTION
When chamfering was made by C , the length of thread
can be calculated from the intersection of linear element
before chamfering.
(d) Lead length, pitch, and number of thread

The lead is defined as the Zaxis direction length when a screw
returns to the original angle after turning once.
In case of a onethread screw, the pitch coincides with the lead.
In case of a threethread screw, 1/3 of lead corresponds to the pitch.
The lead of a taper screw is also calculated in the Zaxis direction.
(e) Depth of thread

Together with the prompt on the depth of thread DT, the following
soft keys are displayed on the screen:
DT=_
ESCAPE BACK
PAGE
OUTER INNER SQUARE

THREAD THREAD THREAD
CURSOR CURSOR
NEXT
PAGE
If one of the soft keys is pressed, the depth of thread DT is

automatically calculated. The calculation is defined as follows:
Pitch = LD (lead)/NT (number of threads)
OUTER THREAD: Pitch Constant (system parameter
No.174), initial value 0.7578
INNER THREAD: Pitch Constant (system parameter
No.125), initial value 0.6495
SQUARE THREAD: Pitch/(2 NT (number of threads))
If the value obtained by automatic calculation is unsatisfactory,
modify the data manually. For a trapezoidal thread, enter the data
manually. After the depth of thread (DT) has been automatically
calculated and specified, the cursor is repositioned to the first
prompt.
46
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
Grooving
Grooving is designated by G , which indicates the capital of groove.

(a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . ES =
Input G when the system asks you the above question.
(b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . SR =
Input the number of
(c) ON WHICH ELEMENT? . . . . EE = On which element is
grooving made?
DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DN = Grooving direction
WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = Grooving width
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Grooving depth
R/C OF CORNER (ALONG ELEMENT)
1ST . . . . . . . . KC =
CV =
2ND . . . . . . . KC =
CV =
Designation of groove
3RD . . . . . . . KC =
CV =
shape
4TH . . . . . . . KC =
CV =
The system asks you these questions sequentially, starting with the
top question by displaying them on the CRT screen.
Input a numerical value for each question.
(d) ON NEXT ELEMENT or ON LAST ELEMENT?
G is input before and after arrows, in general.

It indicates whether threading is made on a figure element to be
input or on the last figure element already input.
ON NEXT ELEMENT . . . . . . . Input 1.
ON LAST ELEMENT . . . . . . . Input 0.
Identify ON NEXT ELEMENT and ON LAST ELEMENT
from each other in the following illustration.
47
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(e) DIRECTION . . . . . . DN =
(: RIGHT : LEFT : ABOVE : BELOW)
Designate the grooving direction by the arrow such as right (),
left (), above () or below () when the system asks you the above
question.
(f) After inputting the width and depth, the system asks you the figure
at groove corners. Numbers 1 to 4 area allocated to the corners of
each groove in the sequence of figure input.
(Example)
Designate whether the figures of respective corners 1 to 4 are round

(R), chamfered (C) or left unmachined according to the
following questions being displayed on the CRT screen.
R/C OF CORNER (ALONG ELEMENT)
1ST . . . . . KC =
CV = Figure at the 1st corner
2ND . . . . . KC =
CV = Figure at the 2nd corner
3RD . . . . . KC =
CV = Figure at the 3rd corner
4TH . . . . . KC =
CV = Figure at the 4th corner
D For rounding, depress R for KC = question, and input a radius
value for CV = question.
D For chamfering, depress C
for KC = question, and input a
chamfering amount for CV = question.

D If a corner is neither rounded or chamfered, and it is left undone as
it is, depress
INPUT
key only, or depress [NEXT PAGE] key to
proceed to the next CRT screen when the system asks you the
question.
Trapezoid grooving (Automatic process determination function B is
required.)
As with grooving, to select trapezoid grooving, specify G.
(a) ON WHICH ELEMENT . . EE = Element on which a trapezoid
groove is made
(0: Last element, 1: Next element)
48
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(b) DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . DN = Direction of grooving

Press the corresponding element
symbol key ( ).
(c) WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = Distance between the
shoulders of the groove
(d) DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Depth of the groove
CAUTION
If the line along which the width or depth of the groove is
measured is parallel to the Xaxis ( or ), specify the width
or depth with a radius.
(e) R/C OF CORNER
1ST . . . . KC = CV =
2ND . . . . KC = CV =
3RD . . . . KC = CV =
4TH . . . . KC = CV =
Specify the figures of the groove corners in the order in which they
are defined.
49
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
When the above data is specified, a square groove is defined.

To define a trapezoid groove, specify the following data. To define a
conventional square groove, ignore the prompt and press the NEXT
PAGE soft key.
(f) WIDTH OF B. (1) . . . . W1 = Bottom width 1 of the groove
(This need not be specified
bottom angle 1 of the groove
specified.)
(g) WIDTH OF B. (2) . . . . W2 = Bottom width 2 of the groove
bottom angle 2 of the groove
specified.)
(h) ANGLE OF B. (1) . . . . A1 = Bottom angle 1 of the groove
bottom width 1 of the groove
specified.)
(i) ANGLE OF B. (2) . . . . A2 = Bottom angle 2 of the groove
bottom width 2 of the groove
specified.)
if
is
if
is
if
is
if
is
In figure definition, the system does not check the validity of the
specified bottom width (W*) and bottom angle (A*) of the groove.
The operator must carefully observe the figure drawn after the figure
is defined.
The positions of bottom widths 1 and 2 and angles 1 and 2 of the
groove depend on the direction of figure definition in the same way as
they do for R/C OF CORNER.
50
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
[Reference]
1) Trapezoid grooving can be defined in the same way as conventional
grooving. (Automatic process determination is also allowed.)
2) If bottom width 1 (W1), bottom width 2 (W2), bottom angle 1 (A1),
and bottom angle 2 (A2) of a groove are specified, the width data has
priority over the angle data. The system ignores the angle data.
3) To specify a trapezoid groove as shown in Fig. 3.2.2, do not define the
bottom width and bottom angle on the side of the groove having a
perpendicular wall.
Fig. 3.2.2 Defining a special trapezoid groove
Enter the bottom width or angle.

Leave the bottom width and bottom angle of the
perpendicular wall undefined.
51
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
4) It is recommended to specify the bottom widths when defining the

shape of a trapezoid groove. The trapezoid groove can be defined with
bottom angles, however, this definition may cause a small calculation
error.
5) The figure element copy function is convenient for defining two or
more identical trapezoid grooves.
Necking
Necking is designated by N , which indicates the capital of necking.

(a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . ES =
Answer N when the system asks you the above question.
(b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . SR =
Input the number of
(c) WIDTH . . . . . . . WT =
DEPTH . . . . . . . DT =
Necking width
Necking depth
Input the necking width and depth for the above questions. The
necking direction is always 45 with reference to Zaxis.
The necking width and depth are as illustrated below.
(2) End of figure input

Key in the software key END or INPUT only for the following
question after ending the input of all machined figures:
ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . ES =
52
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Machine figure input before is drawn again on the CRT screen and the
message SELECT SOFT KEY is displayed at the lower side of
screen.
Check to see if there is any mistake in the input of figure by comparing
the drawing figure with that drawn on the screen. Press a software key
depending on the status at that time.
Meaning of software keys
[ESCAPE] . . . . . . . . . . It is used to return to the menu screen.
[BACK PAGE] . . . . . . . It is used to return to the previous screen
(drawing and blank screen).
[CORR.&ERASE] . . . . It is used to delete the machined figure
drawn on the screen and ERASE to modify
the machined figure. The modification
method is described below.
[CORRECTION] . . . . . It is used to modify the machined figure
based on the machined figure drawn on the
screen. The modification method is the
same as CORR. & ERASE.
[NEW] . . . . . . . . . . . . . It is used to delete the machined figure on
the screen and to input the figure again. All
elements input previously are deleted.
[LIST MODE] . . . . . . . It is used to display all data previously
input. Modification can be performed
similarly as in CORRECTION.
[DRAWNG RANGE] . . It is used to perform enlargement and
reduction of drawing. See Chapter 3 13
for the details.
[CHAMFER] . . . . . . . . It is used to insert the chamfer figure into all
of angles of machined figure drawn on the
screen. The details are described in the
following.
[CAXIS MENU] . . . . . It is displayed when the C axis FAPT
function option is available.
[YAXIS MENU] . . . . Displayed when the Yaxis FAPT function
is provided.
[NEXT PAGE] . . . . . . . It is used to move to the next page if there
is no part modified.
[CORNERR] . . . . . . . . It is used to insert the corner R figure into
all of corners of machined figure drawn on
the screen.
53
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
When bit 1 of system parameter 19 is set to 1, the figure is displayed

vertically.
(3) Changing the color of a part figure or blank figure when it is modified
When a part figure or blank figure is modified (or created), the
elements before and after the element on which the cursor is placed are
displayed in different colors. As a result, the operator can easily tell
which element is currently being modified on the drawing.
System parameter 552 specifies the color of elements already
determined and system parameter 586 specifies the color of elements
to be determined.
Parameter No.
Value
Color
Description
552
Red
Specifies color of elements already

determined
586
Yellow
Specifies color of elements to be

determined
Color
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Purple
Light
blue
White
Value
NOTE
1 If the GRAPH MODE soft key is pressed after modification
of an original figure has been started by pressing the
CORRECTION soft key, the original figure cannot be
redrawn.
2 If the ELEMENT BACK soft key is pressed in a definition
mode in which the end point of the previous element is
determined by the current element, the element before
these two elements is also drawn in the color of the
elements to be determined.
54
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3.2.3
(1)
Input and Modification

of Part Figure Data
Arithmetic operation and function calculation
The arithmetic operation (addition, subtraction, multiplication,

division) and optional function calculations can also be executed when
inputting dimensions.
Symbol
Arithmetic
contents
Addition
Subtraction
178.5
Multiplication
57.5
Division
128
tangent
Examples
15
T
T
sine
S
S
cosine
T
R
arc sine
arc cosine
arc tangent
square root
square root
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Remarks
27.75 + 4.8
25.25
57.5 * 81.3 * indicates x.
81.3
/ indicates B.
3.5
The unit of angle is degree.

Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable
inside parentheses.
23
23
)
inside parentheses.
15
15
)
inside parentheses.
35
0.25
0.37
0.37
3, 5
177
177
1.5, 4
3, 25
35
)
inside parentheses.
0.25
)
inside parentheses.
Parentheses are required without fail. A T

(numerator and denominator).
Optional arithmetic expressions are employable
inside parentheses, if any.
55
These examples mean 1.54 and 325, respectively.
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
D Parentheses
and
B61804E2/05
are employable quadruply or less.
D Arithmetic symbols are employable whenever a dimension is

asked.
They are employable by an optional number, until one line is fully
filed.
D An arithmetic expression may be used conveniently when a cutting
condition is changed, for example. For setting the feedrate to 75%,
multiply the displayed numerical value by 0.75.
D It is recommended for using Symbolic FAPT to avoid mental
calculation as much as possible, but use this arithmetic function.
(2)
Input of incremental value
If the system asks you a dimension and you want to input an

incremental value from the present position, press
incremental value as shown below.

incremental.
(Example)
With
(3)
key after an
indicates the capital of
50.45 I INPUT
specification, the data in Xaxis direction is radius value.
Change of figure element symbols
Depress soft key when the system asks you the following question.
ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . ES =
ELEMENT FORWRD
. . . . . . . . . . . . Element advances
ELEMENT BACK
. . . . . . . . . . . . Element retreats
ELEMENT DELETE
. . . . . . . . . . . . Element on the cursor is deleted.
The question place can be confirmed by a flickering figure element

symbol at the upper part of the CRT screen.
(Insertion example)
When depressing R with
Flickering
....
When depressing C with
Flickering
....
56
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
(Deletion example)
When depressing
DEL
Depress
DEL
with
key
...
... G
Flickering
When depressing
DEL
with
Flickering
(Exchange)
For exchanging figure symbols, (1) delete old one after inserting new one,
or (2) insert new one after deleting old one.
(4)
Change of numerical value
The system will ask you necessary numerical values after figure
element symbols have been input. If a numerical value was input by
mistake, a correct numerical value can be input again after moving the
question place by depressing [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ] CURSOR
key.
Select an optional question, and input a correct numerical value again.
[CURSOR ] . . . Element advances
[CURSOR ] . . . Element retreats
NOTE
If a figure element of data was corrected, press the software
key END.
3.2.4
Blank Figure Input of
Special Figure Blank
(1) Input of blank figure

If a special figure is selected as the blank figure (BF = 3) and surplus
thicknesses (TX, TZ) are not defined as shown below, the blank figure
input screen is displayed after the data of the machining profile is
entered.
57
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
On the blank figure input screen, the machining profile is initially

drawn as the blank figure.
Select the software key CORRECTION or LIST MODE and

NEW to prepare the blank figure referring to the machined figure
and to prepare it newly, respectively.
Similar to input of parts figure data, use a symbolic key for entry of
blank figure. In this case, however, G, T and N keys cannot be
used for parts figure difinition.
Input a blank figure according to any one of the following three
formats.
(a) Start or end point is on the coordinate axis.
(Example 1)
(Example 2)
(Example 3)
58
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(b) Z axis coordinate values of start and end point are same.
(Example)
(c) Start and end point are same.

(Example)
(2) End of blank figure input

When all of blank figure has been input, key in the software key
END or INPUT if there is a question as shown below:
ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . ES =
The element figure created so far is redrawn and the following message
is displayed: Select software key
Press the NEXT PAGE if there are no areas modified and when
proceeding to the next process.
59
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
3.2.5
The parts figure input system includes the system of entering the
definition data with displaying a defined figure, and the method of
entering the definition data while displaying in the table format. The
former is called Graphic input system (refer to para. 3.2.2 and 3.2.3 II)
and the latter is called Directory input system. The Directory input
system will be described here.
Part Figure Input

(Directory Input
System)
B61804E2/05
(1) In the screen of the graphic input system, press the soft key LIST
MODE.
[LIST MODE] . . . . The figure element input screen of the
directory input system is selected.
In this screen, select the element to be modified, using ELEMENT

FORWARD and ELEMENT BACK soft keys. (when the element is
inserted, it is inserted before the element is selected.)
Next, press INPUT when changing the figure data.
When it is desired to insert the element, key in the element symbol and
press INPUT. When only checking the data without modifying it,
check the objective element data, using ELEMENT FORWARD and
ELEMENT BACK soft keys.
(2) When the element is changed or inserted, the figure data input screen
is selected. The inquiry is displayed under the figure data list display.
60
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
In this screen, all data on the figure data are inquired. Adjust the cursor
to the data to be entered and input the data. Upon completion of
keyingin operation, press NEXT PAGE soft key.
(3) [NEXT PAGE] . . . . Again, the figure element input screen is
selected.
At this time, the modified data is registered on
the list screen.
[END] . . . . If END is pressed when the data input or modification is
completed, the display returns to the screen that the
figure data input is completed.
However, when an error is produced in the parts figure
data, it will not return to that screen 1 but will become
figure element input screen and the Key in Again
message is displayed.
In this case, modify the figure data of this element.
[GRAPH MODE] . . Press GRAPHIC MODE soft key to return to
the graphic input screen from the directory
input screen. At this time the position of the
element shown by the cursor will become the
same position with the elements where the
cursor was blinking in the directory input
system.
Drawing is also carried out up to its position
from the beginning.
3.2.6
Batch Input Functions
for Chamfering and
Corner R
(1) Chamfering
Normally, it is customary practice to chamfer a corner unless
otherwise specified for the machined parts in the drawing. Unlike the
specified chamfer, this chamfering is not described in the drawing, the
chamfering amount is constant and many in most cases.
Consequently, when the machined figure is prepared, it may be
troublesome to enter many chamfering elements. This function inputs
a given amount of chamfer exclusively to all corners to which no
chamfer (element symbol C) is input yet after all machined figures are
completely entered.
After the machined figure for turning is entered, the following screen
is displayed.
61
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
When the rightmost soft key [

] is pressed,
the following soft keys are displayed:
If the CHAMFER soft key is pressed, the yellow cursor blinks at a

corner of the machining profile whose chamfering data has not yet
been specified.
[CHAMFER]
At the same time, the question for the chamfering amount C and
surface roughness SR is displayed.
C = Input the chamfering amount.
SR = Input the number of
marks showing the surface
roughness.
When the control asks, input the chamfering amount and surface
roughness.
After keying in a required numeral, press [EXEC] soft key. Then,
chamfering is applied to the lighting corner, and the initial screen is
selected.
62
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
When no corner is present for the machined figure or chamfering is

applied to all corners or no section to designate chamfering is present,
the chamfering screen is not selected even when the soft key
CHAMFER is depressed. For the machined figure composed of
many elements, even when the soft key CHAMFER is depressed,
the chamfer may not be entered.
(2) Corner R
The batch input function for corner R is similar to the batch input
function for chamfering. The function specifies identical corner R
data for corners whose chamfering data is left unspecified after the
entire machining profile is specified.
The batch input function for corner R cannot be used for 5700 series
of 16T CAP II.
After entering the turning figure, press the rightmost soft key [
].
Then, press the CORNER R key.
The yellow cursor lights at the corner whose chamfering data has not
yet been specified.
After entering the required data, press the EXEC soft key. The corner
R data is specified for the lighted corner. Then, the original screen is
displayed again.
63
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
NOTE
1 As a standard for a corner to be chamfered, set the
maximum angle to system parameter No.756. (Setting
range 0 t Angle x 180) For example, if the angle is
set to 100, the cursor lights up as a chamfering corner with
100 or less angle. No cursor lights up for the portion more
than 100 angle.
Example) when setting system parameter No.756 as 100:
NOTE
2 The initial value of Corner R amount can be set to system
parameter No.755. For example, if 0.2 is set to system
parameter No.755, when the control asks the chamfering
amount, the numeral 0.2 is entered as the initial value.
The inquiry for SURFACE ROUGHNESS can be omitted.
(System parameter No.0010) When omitted, Standard
Surface Roughness is adopted for surface roughness.
Related system parameter

#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
010
Bit 0 All surface roughness

Bit 1 Surface roughness for corner C
Bit 4 Surface roughness for corner R
0 : The inquiry is not omitted.
1 : The inquiry is omitted.
NOTE
3 No neck or groove portion is chamfered.
The corner for which thread cutting is designated is
chamfered.
64
B61804E2/05
3.2.7
Pattern Figure Input
Function
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Example)
. .T. .
. .G. .
Pattern Figure refers to a given shape or specified shape. This is a

convenient input method: a figure consisting of several elements can be
defined promptly by just answering the minimum question required for
its figure.
When the system asks ELEMENTS SYMBOL ES = , press

PATTERN FIGURE: the screen display changes to the soft key layout
showing the pattern figure input.
65
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(1) Input of equal pitch/continuous groove

This input function is used for defining a figure in which a plurality
of grooves are arranged at an equal pitch. Press REPEAT
GROOVE: the display as shown below will appear.
The meaning of each question is as follows.

(a) END POINT . . . . . . . . EDX =
EZ =
Input the end point of a straight line subsequent to a continuous
groove.
When defining the groove arranged in parallel to the Zaxis, it is
not necessary to input the end point value of X.
In contrast to the above, when defining a groove arranged in
parallel to the Xaxis, it is not necessary to input the Z end point
value.
(b) QUANTITY . . . . . . . . N =
Input the number of grooves.
(c) PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT =
Input the space from the groove entrance to the next groove
entrance.
The following question is the same as in element G.
(d) DIRECTION . . . . . . . . DN =
WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . WT =
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . DT =
Input the groove direction, width and depth.
(e) R/C OF CORNER
K1 =
V1 =
K2 =
V2 =
K3 =
V3 =
K4 =
V4 =
Designate each corner figure.
66
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(f) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . SR =

Input the number of
marks indicating the surface roughness.
This surface roughness is applied to all elements forming this
figure. Further, it is also possible to skip this question by system
parameter No.0010 bit 2 (surface roughness to G). When skipped,
Standard Surface Roughness is adopted for the surface
roughness.
Meaning of a software key
[ESCAPE] . . . . . The menu screen returns.
[BACK PAGE] . . The screen, called by the sign ES = , returns. When
this software key is pressed, the input data will
become invalid.
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . The cursor goes up and down.
[EXEC] . . . . . . . . A shape is formed in accordance with the set data.
Example)
Method of defining a figure as shown above.

a) For normal figure input:
1) Definition from the origin direction . . . GGG
2) Definition from the chuck direction . . . GGG
Each element is defined.
b) When the pattern figure input function is used:
1) Definition from the origin direction . . .
2) efinition from the chuck direction . . . . .
After defining the above so far, press REPEAT & GROOVE.
The setting of 1) above is as follows.
End point value of previous element DX = 40, Z = 8
END POINT . . . . . . EDX =
EZ = 36.0
QUANTITY . . . . . . . N = 3
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . PT = 10.0
DIRECTION . . . . . . DN =
WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . WT = 4.0
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . DT = 5.0
67
R/C OF CORNER
K1 = C
V1 = 0.5
K2 =
V2 =
K3 =
V3 =
K4 = C
V4 = 0.5
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
Press EXEC
Thus, based on the preset data, a figure is defined and drawn.

The setting of 2) above is as follows.
End point value of previous element DX = 40, Z = 32
END POINT . . . . . . EDX =
EZ = 0.0
QUANTITY . . . . . . . N = 3
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . PT = 10.0
DIRECTION . . . . . . DN =
WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . WT = 4.0
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . DT = 5.0
R/C OF CORNER
K1 = C
V1 = 0.5
K2 =
V2 =
K3 =
V3 =
K4 = C
V4 = 0.5
Press EXEC
Thus, based on the preset data, a figure is defined and drawn.
68
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
i) The figure defined by REPEAT GROOVE is defined as an

element by the arrow and G element row.
ii) Correct for each element. This is the same for the deletion.
iii) The relation between the pitch and groove is as shown below.
When DN =
When DN =
NOTE
For pattern figure input, the end point value of the previous
element should already be fixed.
(2) Neck corner input

It is possible to define 3 types of DIN Standard neck corners. If
NECK CORNER is pressed, the display changes on the next screen.
NECK CORNER
In response to the question TYPE =, enter the neck figure type

number (13) for the type to be set.
The meaning of soft keys
ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . Returns to the menu screen.
BACK PAGE . . . . . . Returns to the ES = question screen.
69
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
1) Type 1: Neck grinding

a) DEFINE DERECTION . . . DD = (0: PV PH, 1: PH PV)
Specifies the direction that defines the element. If the current point
is PV and the PH direction is to be defined (vertical plane
horizontal plane), input 0. Conversely, if the current point is PH
and the PV direction is to be defined (horizontal plane vertical
plane) input 1.
b) END POINT P* . . . . . . . . . EDX =
EZ =
Inputting the end point value. If the define direction DD is 0, input
the PH point. If the define direction is 1, input the PV point.
c) WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . WT = (automatic setting) input neck width.
d) DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . DT = (automatic setting) input neck depth.
e) CORNER R . . . . . . . R = (automatic setting) input the corner
radius value.
The standard values of width, depth and corner R are set
automatically according to the diameter of the neck (PH point DX
value). To change these to other values, place the cursor on the
question and input the number.
f) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . SR =
Inputting the number of the
mark that displays surface
roughness. This surface roughness is appropriate to all the
elements that shape this figure. The standard setting value (value
of system parameter No.205) is set at the beginning automatically.
It is also possible to change to other values. By setting bit 1 of
system parameter No.10 to 1, it is possible to skip this question.
When it is skipped, the standard surface roughness setting value is
used.
70
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT

ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the menu screen.
BACK PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the neck type
number selection screen.
CURSOR CURSOR . . . . Moves cursor up and down.
EXEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creates the figure based on the
data set.
2) Type 2: Neck grinding (with side depth)

a) SIDE DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . W1 = inputs the depth of side depth.
The meaning of all other questions are the same as for Type 1.
3) Type 3: Neck threading
71
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
The meanings of the inquiries are:

(a) LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT = Thread length
(b) LEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LD = Lead
(c) MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . NT = Number of threads
(d) THREADING DEPTH . . . D1 = Threading depth
For the meanings of the other inquiries, see the description of type 1.
When the threading depth (D1) is entered, the following soft keys are
displayed on the screen:
D1=
METRIC
ESCAPE BACK
PAGE
OUTER INNER SQUARE

THREAD THREAD THREAD
CURSOR CURSOR
EXEC
If the OUTER THREAD, INNER THREAD, or SQUARE THREAD soft

key is pressed, the system automatically specifies the value of D1
(threading depth). The value is calculated using the following expression:
Pitch = LD (LEAD) B NT (MULTIPLE)
OUTER THREAD:
Pitch (P)
Constant
(system parameter 174, initial value 0.7578)
INNER THREAD:
Pitch (P)
Constant
(system parameter 125, initial value 0.6495)
SQUARE THREAD: Pitch (P) B (2
NT (MULTIPLE))
System parameters 125 and 174 specify the constants to be used when the
elements of threading are manually defined.
If the automatically specified value is not suitable, change it manually.
To define a trapezoid thread, manually enter the data.
After the value of D1 is entered, the system automatically specifies the
values of WIDTH (WT), DEPTH (DT), and CORNER R (R). The values
are calculated as shown below:
WIDTH (WT):
WT = 3.5 (constant)
Pitch (P)
DEPTH (DT):
DT = 1.2 (constant)
Threading depth (D1)
CORNER R (R): R = 0.5 (constant)
Pitch (P)
NOTE
1 The threading depth (D1) can be automatically determined
by pressing the OUTER THREAD, INNER THREAD, or
SQUARE THREAD soft key only when the values of LD
(LEAD) and NT (MULTIPLE) are specified.
2 If the value of LD (LEAD) or NT (MULTIPLE) is changed, the
D1 (threading depth) and DT (depth) must be calculated
again. Press the OUTER THREAD, INNER THREAD, or
SQUARE THREAD soft key to have the system
automatically specify suitable values.
72
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
4) Neck diameter (PH point DX value) and width, side depth, depth,
corner R (DIN Standards)
Diameter (X axis)
Under 18 mm
Under 0.7087 inch
Depth
(DT)
Corner R
(R)
Width
(WT)
Side depth
(W1)
.25 mm
.6 mm
2.0 mm
.1 mm
.0098 inch .0236 inch .0787 inch .0039 inch
Above 18 mm below 80 mm .35 mm

.6 mm
2.5 mm
.2 mm
0.7087 to 3.15 inch
Above 80 mm
Above 3.15 inch
.45 mm
1.0 mm
4.0 mm
.3 mm
Example
Method of definition when defining the figure of this illustration.

a) Defining the figure by the existing method without using the
pattern figure input method
(1) Definition from zero point direction . . . RR
(2) Definition from chuck direction . . . . . . . RR
In this way, each element is defined one at a time.
b) Defining the figure using pattern figure input
(1) Definition from zero point direction . . . (End point PH)
(2) Definition from check direction . . . . . . . (End point PV)
Inputting elements in this way, after keying in the end point value (PH or
PV), press neck corner.
Input the following data with regard to each question for (1).
NECK TYPE . . . . . . . . P = 1
Questions and illustrations explaining neck type 1 are displayed here and
therefore the following data should be input.
Define direction . . . . . . . . DD =1 (0: PV PH, 1: PH PV)
End point PV . . . . . . . . . . EDX = 60.
EZ = 20.
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = 2.5 (Automatic setting)
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = 0.35 (Automatic setting)
Corner R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = 0.6 (Automatic setting)
Surface roughness . . . . . . . SR = 2 (Automatic setting)
73
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
When EXEC is pressed the figure based on the data set is drawn.
Input the following data with regard to each question for 2.
NECK TYPE . . . . . . . . . . P = 1
Questions and illustrations explaining neck type 1 are displayed here and
therefore the following data should be input.
Define direction . . . . . . . . DD =0 (0: PV PH, 1: PH PV)
End point PH . . . . . . . . . . EDX = 40.
EZ = 0.
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = 2.5 (Automatic setting)
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = 0.35 (Automatic setting)
Corner R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = 0.6 (Automatic setting)
Surface roughness . . . . . . . SR = 2 (Automatic setting)
When EXEC is pressed the figure based on the data set is drawn.
i) The figure defined at neck corner input is separated and defined
into direction arrow elements and R.
ii) Carry out corrections and deletions one element at a time.
NOTE
1 Definition is possible if the element directly in front of corner
R is an element other than G/N/T, but the end point value
directly in front must be decided. Furthermore, it is not
possible to create it as the first element.
2 The neck is created in the corner of the vertical and
horizontal plane.
It is possible in the taper plane.
3 If define direction DD = 0 is input, the next end point symbol
is displayed as PH. Conversely, if define direction DD = 1
is input, the next end point symbol is displayed as PV.
Furthermore, the neck direction is decided automatically by
the define direction and end point value.
Examples Illustrations type 2 for horizontal figures

a) When define direction is 0 (PV: vertical plane PH: horizontal plane)
End point PH is upper left with regard to PV
End point PH is upper right with regard to PV
End point PH is lower left with regard to PV
End point PH is lower right with regard to PV
74
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
b) When define direction is 1 (PH: horizontal plane PV: vertical plane)

End point PV is upper left with regard to PV
End point PV is upper right with regard to PV
End point PV is lower left with regard to PH
End point PV is lower right with regard to PH
NOTE
4 As for the end point value, input the absolute values only.
It is not possible to input the incremental value.
5 Input positive neck, depth and side depth values.
6 Input values smaller than the difference between the Z
values of PV point and PH point for neck width. An alarm
(END POINT OR NECK WIDTH IS NOT CORRECT) is
displayed if a bigger value is input.
Note that if a bigger depth or side depth value is input, it is
possible that a figure other than a neck figure will be
created.
75
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
3) Figure element copy function

Having specified the start and end points of the figure to be copied,
once the number of copies has been keyed in, it is possible to define
the same figure repeatedly. This is useful when repeatedly inputting
special groove figures and complicated circular figures.
In the case illustrated above, when the soft key PATTRN INPUT is
pressed followed by FIGURE COPY, the following copy area
specification screen appears. Note however that when the PATTRN
INPUT key is pressed, the cursor must be next to the very last element,
as illustrated above.When the cursor has been moved by corrections to
element data etc., press the FIGURE COPY only after having made sure
to move the cursor next to the very last element. If the FIGURE COPY
key is pressed when the cursor is at an element other than the final one,
an error message will be displayed saying CAN NOT USE THIS
FUNCTION and the copy area specification screen will not appear.
76
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
a) The figure to be copied and the number of copies is specified in the

copy area specification screen.
Questions are as follows.
REPEAT NO. . . . . . . . . N = Specifies the number of repeat copies.
When the NUMBER INPUT is keyed in, the data is set for the
number of repeats.
When only INPUT is keyed in, the cursor point alternates between
the copy start and copy end point.
ESCAPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the main menu screen.
STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the ES = question screen.
If this key is pressed, the copy area and
number of copies specified up until then
will be invalidated.
CURSOR BACK. . . . . . The flashing cursor moves in the reverse
direction.
CURSOR FORWARD . The flashing cursor moves in the regular
direction.
EXEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creates the figure based on the specified
copy area and the number of repeats.
b) To specify the copy start point, align the cursor to the copy start point
with the CURSOR FORWRD, CURSOR BACK key and press
the INPUT key.
When the copy start point has been specified, the message SPECIFY
THE COPY END POINT will appear.
c) To specify the copy end point, align the cursor to the copy and point
with the CURSOR FORWRD, CURSOR BACK key and press
the INPUT key.
When the copy end point has been specified, the message SPECIFY
THE COPY START POINT will appear.
d) When the soft key EXEC is pressed, the figure element will be
copied repeatedly within the range specified by the copy start point and
copy end point. Note however that when the number of repeats has not
been defined, the message KEY IN REPEAT NO. will appear and
the EXEC key should be pressed after having entered the number of
repeats.
Example)
Illustration type = 2
Blank figure BF = 1
Blank dimensions
Diameter D = 100
Length L = 105
Position of reference line ZP = 5
77
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
Number 1 element SDX = 0 SZ = 0 PE =1

DX = 20
Number 2 element Z = 10
Number 3 element DX = Undefined Z = Undefined TN = 0
A = 45
Number 4 element Z = 30 Z = 20 TN = 0
Number 5 element DX = 20
Number 7 element DX = 40
Number 9 element
The following explanation is based on an example where the above
mentioned data has been defined and one copy is required from No.3
element to No.8 element.
By pressing the soft key ELEMENT COPY, the copy area specification
screen will be displayed, set the repeat number to 1 and specify the No.3
element at copy start point and No.8 element at the copy end point.
78
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Press the soft key EXEC.
One copy will be made from No.3 element to No.8 element based on the
data set.
When the figure that has been copied is to be corrected, change the data
element by element as with previous corrections.
NOTE
1 The final element of the figure must be a direction arrow and
the end point defined, before pressing the FIGURE COPY
key.
Examples
Figure element number . . . . . . . . . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure configuration element . . . . j
The element here must be an direction

arrow and the end point defined.
a) When the element in front is not a direction arrow, if the soft key
FIGURE COPY is pressed, the error message LAST END
POINT IS ARROW will be displayed and the copy specification
screen will not appear.
b) When the end point of the element is not defined, if the soft key
FIGURE COPY is pressed, the error message LAST END
POINT IS UNDEFINED will be displayed and the copy
specification screen will not appear.
79
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
NOTE
2 Input a positive whole number between 1 and 10 in the
repeat number. If any other data is keyed in the message
KEY IN AGAIN will appear.
3 When there is incremental type data in the copy area, it will
change to absolute type data when copied.
4 When the general element number has been exceeded
during execution of figure copy, as many copies as is
possible will be created. An error message indicating that
the number of element is excessive will appear on the
screen.
3.2.8
Function for Defining
the Center of an Arc
According to a Given
Single Coordinate
In part figure definition, the system can define the center of an arc even
if only one of the coordinates (X or Z) is given. This feature eliminates
the need for manual calculation.
(1) Operation
As an example, consider the figure shown in Fig.1 (the drawing format
is FANUC standard 2), which is defined as described below:
1) Specifying the material
MATERIAL NO.:
MN = 1
STANDARD SURFACE ROUGHNESS: NR = 2
BLANK FIGURE:
BF = 1 (Cylinder)
BLANK SIZE, DIAMETER: D = 100
BLANK SIZE, LENGTH:
L = 105
BASE LINE:
ZP = 5
80
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
2) Defining a figure (entering a part figure)

The four points of the figure are defined in the following order: A
(start point), B, C, and D (end point).
The figure can be defined only by entering the following data in the
command specifying the arc from point A to C.
Figure element 1)
SR = 2
SDX = 20
SZ = 0
PE = 1
DX
Z
TL
TN
=
=
=
=
jjj
jjj
jjj
jjj
R
= 26
CDX = jjj
CZ = 18
After the data is entered, the system can calculate the center of the arc.
The system prompts the operator to select a desired center.
On the screen, calculated centers are automatically scaled and
indicated by graphic cursors.
The system temporarily scales the centers so that the operator can
easily select one of the centers. After the operator specifies the desired
center, the original scale is restored.
Selecting a center . . PC = j (: Right, : Left, : Up, : Down)
The desired center is the intersection of auxiliary circle A (center (20,
0) and radius (R) 26) and the straight line of Z = 18. Since the circle
and line intersect at two points (PC1 and PC2), the operator must
specify either of them. (See the figure below.)
81
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
In response to the PC = j prompt, key in (INPUT). PC2 is selected.

(: Right, : Left, : Up, : Down)
Figure element 2)
DX = jjj R
= 70
Z
= jjj CDX = jjj
TL = jj1
CZ = jjj
TN = jj1
Figure element 3)
DX = 70
R
= 15
Z
= jjj CDX = 80
TN = jjj CZ = 33
As two end points are possible (PE1 and PE2), the operator must specify
either of them. (See Fig.3.2.8.)
On the screen, calculated end points are automatically scaled and
indicated by graphic cursors.
The system temporarily scales the two end points so that the operator can
easily select one of them. After the operator specifies a desired end point,
the original scale is restored.
82
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT

Fig.3.2.8 Selecting an End Point
In response to the PE = j prompt, key in (INPUT). PE1 is selected.

(: Right, : Left, : Up, : Down)
After all the above data is specified, the arc is defined and the part figure
is drawn on the screen.
83
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(2) Notes
NOTE
1 The system can define the center of an arc according to a
given single coordinate when either of the following
conditions is satisfied:
The end point of the previous element is determined.
The next element is known and the arc contacts the
element.
2 The system can define the center of an arc according to a
given single coordinate only when the coordinate (CDX or
CZ) is specified with an absolute value.
84
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.3
MACHINE ZERO
POINT AND TURRET
POSITION
WARNING
After entering machine zero point or turret position data,
check the entered data. Failure to enter correct data may
result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or
When the figure has been defined, the screen asks about the Home
position and Index position.
The meaning of questions is as follows:
HOME POSITION
DXH =
ZH =
Input the coordinate value of home position of NC lathe.
If a data has already been input properly, press the Cursor. Do not
input data and leave it undefined when not starting from the home
position.
INDEX POSITION
DXI =
ZI =
Input the coordinate value of turret revolution center position.
If a data has already been input properly, press the NEXT PAGE.
In the case of 15TTFB, 16TT CAP II, the question for home position
and index position at the No.2 also appears.
WARNING
Input the distance from the programmed coordinate axis for
both home position and index position. Let the sign of Z to
positive whichever direction the Z axis of coordinate axis
programmed faces. The home position is used to indicate
the relationship between the program coordinate system
and machine coordinate system.
When the home position and index position is determined
and it is troublesome to input these data every time, it is
possible to set initial values to the system parameters 206
213. Also, it is possible to skip questions. For details, see
Chapter 8 11. This screen does not appear when skipping
the questions of home position and index position.
85
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
3.4
Following is the configuration which defines the machining process.
MACHINING
DEFINITION
B61804E2/05
Start machining
definition
Yes
New definition?
No
Select a mode
(modify, create, etc.)
Select a process
Is automatic process
determination executed?
Yes
No
Is machining
definition
completed?
Yes
Execute automatic
process determination
End
No
Define a tool, machining start
position, and passing point
Cutting off
Center drilling, bar feed

Outer surface machining, inner surface
machining, grooving, residual machining, threading, C-axis machining Y-axis
machining
Is grooving, residual machining,
C-axis/Y-axis machining executed?
Yes
Is there only one

definition point?
No
Specify the cutting
start position
Specify the cutting area and the

direction or position of cutting
Define cutting
conditions
Define cutting conditions
Is machining of another area

defined with the same tool?
Yes
No
NOTE
The previous screen can be displayed by pressing the [BACK PAGE] key. When a subprocess
is defined, however, the [BACK PAGE] key is disabled.
86
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.4.1
Selection of Kinds of
Machining
WARNING
No check of the validity of a machining sequence is made.
Therefore, even when a machining sequence specified in
the machining definition includes any invalid process steps
(inner surface machining without drilling, or finishing before
roughing, for example), the entire machining sequence is
reflected on the prepared NC data. When defining
machining, check the specified machining sequence.
Failure to specify a valid machining sequence may result in
the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or
forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to
the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
When the machining definition soft key (No.4) is pressed on the

initial screen, the following screen appears. On this screen, the manual
machining definition item and the automatic process determination
function can be selected.
Fig. 3.4.1 (a)
To select a machining type, press the soft key corresponding to a desired

major category. The detailed machining menu is then displayed. From
the menu, select the desired machining type.
On this screen, the following functions can be used:
Automatic process determination function
Function for setting the tool data and tooling data
87
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
Soft keys for selecting major categories of machining types

CENTER HOLE . . . . . . Displays the center drilling menu.
TURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the turning menu.
GROOV. THREAD . . . Displays the grooving and threading menu.
MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the Caxis/Yaxis milling
machining menu.
Other soft keys
ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the execution procedure menu.
PROC. DELETE . . . . . Deletes the process selected by the cursor.
CURSOR , CURSOR . . . . Move the cursor in the process list.
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executes automatic process determination.
AUTO PROC . . . . . . . . Specifies the machining procedure for
automatic process determination.
TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . Displays the screen on which the tool data
can be specified, modified, and deleted.
TOOLING INFOR. . . . Displays the screen on which the tooling
data can be specified, modified, and
deleted.
NEXT PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the next page.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the soft keys on the next page.
88
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
When the CENTER HOLE soft key is pressed
Fig. 3.4.1 (b)
[CENTER DRILL] . . .
[DRILLING] . . . . . . . .
[REAMER] . . . . . . . . .
[TAP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . .
89
Press this key for center drilling

Press this key for drilling
Select to perform reaming
Select to perform tapping
Press this key for sub cycle
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
Fig. 3.4.1 (c)
[ROUGH O.D.] . . . .
[SFIN O.D.] . . . . . .
[FIN O.D.] . . . . . . . .
[ROUGH I.D.] . . . . .
[SFIN I.D.] . . . . . . .
[FIN I.D.] . . . . . . . . .
[BAR FEED] . . . . . .
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . .
Press this key for roughing of outer figure

Press this key for semifinishing of outer figure
Press this key for finishing of outer figure
Press this key for roughing of inner figure
Press this key for semifinishing of inner figure
Press this key for finishing of inner figure
Press this key for bar feed machining.
Fig. 3.4.1 (d)
[GROOV. NECK] . . . . . . . Press this key for grooving (rough grooving

or rough grooving and finishing are carried
out by a single tool) or necking.
[ROUGH. GROOVE] . . . . Press this key for rough grooving
[FIN. GROOVE] . . . . . . . . Press this key for grooving finishing
[CUT OFF] . . . . . . . . . . . . Press this key for corner cutting (When the
system parameter No.140 is 0, this soft key
is not displayed.)
[THREADING] . . . . . . . . . Press this key for thread cutting
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . . . . . Press this key for sub cycle
For example, press Rough O.D. when the soft key in Fig.3.4.1(c) is
displayed; Roughing of outer figure will have been selected in process
No.1.
NOTE
1 The CUT OFF soft key is not displayed if system parameter
140 is set to 0.
2 For the automatic tool determination function, see Section
10. For setting the tool data and tooling data, see Chapter
V.
90
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.4.2
Process Change and
Correction
Fig. 3.4.2 (a)
When Menu No.4 is selected again after completion of machining

definition, the screen shown above will appear.
[CORR.&OUT] . . . . Press this key to correct a selected process and
create the NC data of the corrected process.
[CORRECTION] . . . Press this key to modify or change part of the
process.
[NEW] . . . . . . . . . . . Press this key when reinstructing the process
from the start after all processes are cancelled.
When CORRECTION is depressed, following screen appears.
Fig. 3.4.2 (b)
91
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
Each time Cursor or Cursor is depressed when the above screen

appears, the position of the cursor of the process No. on the process table
moves up and down.
Press Cursor or Cursor to select an arbitrary Process No., and
correct the machining contents.
Also in this screen, the process can be inserted, deleted and replaced.
1) Sample Insertion
PROC 01: DRILLING
PROC 02: ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE
PROC 03: FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE
PROC 04:
To insert roughing of inner figure between processes 02 and 03, follow
this procedure:
1 Press the CURSOR or CURSOR key to select the position of
insertion (in this example, process 03). A specified process will be
inserted immediately before the position selected by the cursor.
2 Press soft keys to select desired machining (for this example, press
the TURN key, then press the ROUGH. I.D. key) and define the
machining.
The results are as follows.
PROC 01: DRILLING
PROC 03: ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE (INSERTION)
PROC 05:
2) Sample Deletion
PROC 01: DRILLING
PROC 04:
1 Press CURSOR or CURSOR to select the process no. to
be deleted (PROC. 02)
2 Press PROC DELETE.
PROC 01: DRILLING
PROC 03:
PROC 04:
3) Replacement
1 Insert a new machining process, then delete the old one.
2 Delete the old one, then insert a new machining process.
3.4.3
Output of Only Single
Process
Only one process can be corrected if required after all processes are
prepared, and only NC data of its process can be output.
Press CORR. & OUT when the screen in Fig.3.4.2(a) appears: the
screen as shown in Fig.3.4.2(b) will appear.
Select the process to be output independently as NC data, using Cursor
* or Cursor *, and press NEXT PAGE. After the process is
corrected, the NC data creation screen appears. This screen shows the NC
data of the corrected process.
92
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.4.4
Tool Data
WARNING
After entering tool data, check the entered data. Failure to
enter correct data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
If the working process is specified on the process chart screen, the screen
changes and the tool information required for working definition is
prompted.
Soft keys
ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the menu screen.
BACK PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the previous page.
TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skips the system inquiry for the tool data
and displays that for the machining start
position.
NEXT TOOL . . . . . . . . Selects the ID of the next tool whose
machining process type (KP) is specified.
(The automatic process determination
function is required.)
TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . Displays the tool data list. The data can be
specified and corrected.
TOOLING INFOR . . . . Displays the tooling information list.
The data can be specified and corrected.
CURSOR , CURSOR . . . . Moves the cursor to a prompt.
CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . Draws the tool figure. (The animated
simulation function is required.)
P.PNT SET . . . . . . . . . . Displays the section in which a passing
point can be specified.
NEXT PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the next page.
The system prompts the operator to specify the following tool data:
1 Tool number data
2 Tool figure data
3 Tool setting data
93
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(1) Tool number data

The system prompt the user to specify the following:
TURRET NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . TL
TOOL SELECT NO. . . . . . . TN
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . TM
TOOL OFFSET NO.2 . . . . . TM2
TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . ID
=J
=JJ
=JJ
=JJ
=JJ
TURRET NO. . . . . . . . . . . TL = Turret number

The system prompts the operator to specify a turret number if the
machine has two or more turrets.
Specify the number of turrets in the following MTF:
Number of turrets (1 or 2)
1: Twoaxis lathe (one turret)
2: fouraxis lathe (one spindle/two turrets)
TOOL SELECT NO. . . . . . . . TN = Tool selection number

To use a tool whose tooling data is registered, enter the corresponding
tool selection number.The other data is then automatically displayed.
To enter a tool selection number greater than 99, modify the following
MTF. An integer of up to 654 can be specified.
No.1104: Number of digits of the Tcode tool selection number (up to 3)
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . . TM = Tool offset number

To enter a tool offset number greater than 99, modify the following
MTF. An integer of up to 654 can be specified.
No.1105: Number of digits of the Tcode tool offset number (up to 3)
A tool offset number can be specified for each cutting area. To perform
individual tool offset for each of the specified cutting areas, specify the
value for switching the offset numbers in the following system parameter:
No.704: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
For each cutting area, the T code specifying tool
offset is:
= 0: Not output.
= 1: output.
If the parameter is set to a value for outputting the T code specifying tool
offset for each cutting area, this prompt is made when the cutting
condition data is entered. (For details, see Section 3.4.8.)
TOOL OFFSET NO.2: TM2 = Specifies the tool offset number for the
minor cutting edge of a grooving tool.
If a grooving tool is used, a tool offset number can be specified for the
minor cutting edge. To specify the tool offset number for the minor
cutting edge, set the following system parameter (Warning):
No.704: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Before cutting with the minor cutting edge is started in
grooving, the T code of the secondary tool offset is:
= 0: Not output.
= 1: output.
94
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
TOOL ID NO. . . . . ID = Tool identification number

When a tool identification number is entered, the registered tool figure
data and tool setting data are displayed.
To use a tool whose tool data is not registered, do not define the tool
identification number.
If the entered tool identification number is not registered, the NOT
FOUND TOOL ID. NO. message is displayed.
If the tool type corresponding to the selected tool identification
number is not suitable for the current process, the TOOL TYPE
DONT FIT THIS PROCESS message is displayed.
WARNING
If TOOL OFFSET NO.2 is specified, the T code of the
secondary tool offset number is output before the minor
cutting edge is moved for grooving.
TOOL SELECT NO. = 01
TOOL OFFSET NO. = 01
TOOL OFFSET NO.2 = 02
95
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(2) Tool figure data

The tool figure data is shown below.
For details of the tool figure data, see Section 2 in Chapter V.
[Turning tools]
Tool for grooving and residual
machining
Center drill, drill

NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . AN =
DRILL DIAMETER . . . . DD =
NOSE RADIUS . . . . . . . . .
CUTTING EDGE . . . . . . . .
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . .
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . . .
RN =
AC =
AN =
XN =
ZN =
Tool for threading
Generalpurpose tool
CUTTING EDGE . . . . . AC =
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . AN =
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. XN =
ZN =
NOSE RADIUS . . . . . . . . .
CUTTING EDGE . . . . . . . .
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . .
PROTECTION ANGLE . . .
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . . .
Reamer
Tap
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . DT =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . LT =
PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . LE =
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . DT =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . LT =
PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LE =
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT =
RN =
AC =
AN =
AP =
XN =
ZN =
Finger
VIRTUAL TOOL POS.
XN =
As the XN value of a finger bit, enter the dimensions shown below:
96
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
NOTE
The system can be set so that it displays the tool figure data
and does not allow modification. To do this, change the
following system parameter:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
= 0:
= 1:
Specifies whether the tool figure data can be

specified in machining definition.
Cannot be specified. (The data is just displayed.)
Can be specified.
(3) Tool setting data

[Setting data of a turning tool]
SETTING ANGLE . . . . . . . AS =JJJJ. JJJ
SETTING POSITION . . . . XS =JJJJ. JJJ
ZS =JJJJ. JJJ
SPINDLE DIRECTION . . . SD =J
HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . HL =JJ
SETTING ANGLE . . . . . . . . AS = Setting angle

Enter the setting angle according to the drawing format. This line is
not displayed when a center drill, drill, or finger bit is selected.
SETTING POSITION . . . . . . XS = Setting position along the Xaxis,
ZS = Setting position along the Zaxis
SPINDLE DIRECTION . . . . SD = Direction of spindle rotation
0: Clockwise
1: Counterclockwise
The following system parameter specifies whether the spindle
direction can be specified for each tool:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Specifies whether the spindle direction can be
specified for each tool.
= 0: Cannot be specified.
= 1: Can be specified.
HOLDER NO. . . . . HL = Holder number for animated simulation

The system prompts the operator to enter the holder number if the
animated simulation function is provided. If the specified holder is not
defined, it is not drawn.
* Warning and Note on tool data
WARNING
After the NC data is created, the tool data is first checked to
see whether the figure is creates causes interference and
then the offset data is calculated. The output NC data is
correct only when the entered tool data is correct.
97
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
NOTE
If the NEXT PAGE soft key is pressed to display the next
screen when a tool with registered tool data is selected, the
set data is registered as the tooling data.
For milling tools, see Chapter VIII.

(4) When the machine has two turrets (TT model)
When the machine has two turrets, a change in the turret number
inverts the drawing of the tool figure.
Example of tool figures displayed when tools having

an identical figure on different turrets are changed
NOTE
1 If the tool holder is not defined, only the tip is displayed.
2 The scale of the tip and holder cannot be changed.
3.4.5
Machining Start
Position
WARNING
After entering machining start point data, check the entered
data. Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool
colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced
machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the
When all tool data is entered, the system prompts the operator to enter the
data of the machining start position.
MACHINING START POSITION:
DXO =
JJJJ.
JJJ
ZO =
JJJJ.
JJJ
DXO = X coordinate of the machining start position

ZO = Z coordinate of the machining start position
The machining start position can be automatically determined according
to the turret turning position and tool setting position.
DXO = DXI (turret turning position) XS (setting position) 2
ZO = ZI (turret turning position) ZS (setting position)
98
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
The following system parameter specifies whether the operator is

prompted to enter the machining start position:
No.009: 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0
Specifies whether the operator is prompted to
enter the machining start position.
= 0: Prompted.
= 1: Not prompted.
3.4.6
Passing Point
WARNING
After entering passing point data, check the entered data.
occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or
(1) This function designates the passing point of a tool when approaching
to the work from the machining start position, and the passing point
of a tool when returning to the next machining start position after
completion of the machining.
When the rightmost soft key [
] is pressed on the tool data screen, the
following soft keys are displayed:
When the P.PNT SET soft key is pressed, the system prompts the operator
to enter the data of the passing point.
Fig. 3.4.6 (a)
99
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
PASSING POINT FOR APPROACH:

1ST POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XA1 =
ZA1 =
2ND POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XA2 =
ZA2 =
Designate the passing point of tool when approaching to the work from
the machining start position at the time of machining start.
PASSING POINT FOR ESCAPE:
1ST POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XE1 =
ZE1 =
2ND POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XE2 =
ZE2 =
Designate the passing point of tool when escaping from the work up to
the next machining start position upon completion of machining.
WARNING
The following system parameter specifies whether the
operator is prompted to enter a passing point for each
machining type:
Nos.105 to 115, 300 to 305: x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Specifies whether the operator is
prompted to enter a passing point for
each machining type.
= 0: Not prompted.
= 1: Prompted.
When no data is defined, the axis in question does not move.

For example, in the absence of input on Zaxis coordinate value after
inputting some data to Xaxis coordinate value, the tool moves to the
specified position only for Xaxis, and Zaxis does not move.
Fig. 3.4.6 (b) Designation pf passing point
100
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Set the number of simultaneous moving axes in a motion from the

machining start position to (XA1, ZA1) and the number of simultaneous
moving axes in a motion from (XE2, ZE2) to the next machining start
position using the following system parameters.
[Turning]
Nos.105 to 115: 0 0 0 x x 0 0 0
Specifies the number of axes along which the
tool approaches simultaneously.
tool retracts simultaneously.
= 0: Two axes
= 1: One axis
[Caxis machining]
Nos.300 to 305: 0 0 x x x 0 0 0
tool approaches simultaneously.
= 00: One axis
= 01: Two axes
= 10 or 11: Three axes
tool retracts simultaneously.
(Zaxis and Xaxis)
= 0: Two axes
= 1: One axis
3.4.7
(1) Outer surface machining and inner surface machining
Specifying the
Direction and Area of
Cutting
The following soft keys are displayed when the operator is prompted to
specify a dividing direction:
101
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
Functions of the soft keys

BACK PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the previous page.
/ / / . . . . . . . . . Enter the cutting direction.
CURSOR BACK/CURSOR FORWRD . . . Move the graphic
cursor indicating the
dividing point.
CURSOR / CURSOR . . . . . . . Move the cursor in the data
setting area.
DRAWING RANGE . . Enlarges or reduces the size of the
drawing.
NEXT PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the next page
(tool definition screen).
1) Specifying the cutting direction
When outer surface machining or inner surface machining is selected,
the operator is prompted to enter a cutting direction.
In response to the prompt, enter a desired direction. The direction can
be entered by pressing a key on the numeric keypad or a soft key.
The following soft keys are displayed when the operator is prompted
to enter the cutting direction:
NOTE
The operator is prompted to enter the cutting direction only
when outer surface machining or inner surface machining
is selected. If cutting off, grooving, threading, Caxis
machining or Yaxis machining is selected, the operator is
prompted to enter different data.
2) Specifying the cutting area
The cutting area can be specified by graphic cursors (J) which are
displayed on the machining profile.
The screen displays the figure of the workpiece to be cut (broken line)
and the machining profile (solid line). The operator is prompted to
enter the dividing direction.
On the screen, specify the machining start point and end point of the
part figure, using the blinking graphic cursors. One cursor indicates
the start point of the cutting area and the other cursor indicates the end
point.
102
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
To select the start or end point, move the cursor along the part figure.
Each time the CURSOR FORWRD or CURSOR BACK key is
pressed, the cursor moves forward or backward along the part figure.
After entering the start and end points, specify a cutting area by
pressing arrow keys corresponding to desired dividing directions in
the blank figure.
Specify the following directions by pressing the corresponding arrow
keys:
DIVIDING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . Dividing direction from the start point
DIVIDING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . Dividing direction from the end point
Any one of the following eight directions can be selected:

[] [] [] [] [] [] [] []
3) Sample divisions
When an arrow key is pressed, an imaginary line is drawn from the
position of the blinking cursor in the direction of the arrow. The
cutting area is an area enclosed with the imaginary lines drawn by the
arrow keys and the lines of blank figure and part figure (shaded area
in figures below).
103
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
The cutting area can be displayed on this screen so that the operator
can check the area specified by entering the dividing directions. Set
the following system parameters so that the cutting area can be
displayed:
No.670:
Color in which the blank figure is filled in on the machining definition

screen
No.671:
Color in which the cutting area is displayed on the machining

definition screen
No.704:
x x 0 0 0 0 0 0
Specifies whether the cutting area is displayed on the
machining definition screen.
Specifies whether the blank figure is filled in on the machining
definition screen.
The figure of the workpiece is still displayed on the screen after the
specified area is cut off. Symbolic FAPT simulates all stages of
machining on the screen. The operator can easily check whether the
area to be cut remains.
The shape of the tool determines the area it can cut. The system
automatically checks the relationship between the tool shape and part
figure and displays the area which the tool cannot cut. Specify another
tool to cut the uncut area.
104
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
4) Specifying cutting of the remaining area
The above figure shows an example of an uncut area that results

because of the relationship between the part figure and tool shape. To
cut the uncut area, specify a tool having an inverted tool tip.
If an attempt is made to specify cutting of the uncut area with a tool

having the wrong tip or wrong figure data, the system may not accept
the area data.
Once the area has been specified, the screen for specifying the cutting
conditions for that area is displayed.
105
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(2) Cutting off
Specify the start point of cutting off by pressing the CURSOR

FORWRD or CURSOR BACK soft key.
The tool path for cutting off is illustrated below.
Fig. 3.4.7 (a)
If the cursor is moved to specify the previous figure element as the start
point, the tool path becomes as shown in Fig. 3.4.7 (b).
106
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Fig. 3.4.7 (b)
System parameter 144 specifies whether the outer corner of the

workpiece is chamfered.
If chamfering of the workpiece is specified, the workpiece is
chamfered after the cut off operation (Fig. 3.4.7 (c)).
Fig. 3.4.7 (c)
107
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(3) Threading
Specify the position of threading. If the blinking cursor indicates the

desired threading position, enter 1. To specify another threading
position, enter 0.
The threading position can also be entered by pressing the CURSOR
FORWRD or CURSOR BACK soft key.
(4) Residual machining
Specify the position of residual machining. If the blinking cursor

indicates the desired position of residual machining, enter 1. To
specify another position of residual machining, enter 0.
The position of residual machining can also be specified by pressing
the CURSOR FORWRD or CURSOR BACK soft key.
108
B61804E2/05
3.4.8
Function for
Automatically Setting
Area Division Points
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(1) Overview
Using the optional automatic process determination function enables
the positions of area division cursors to be automatically set according
to the cutting direction. The area division cursors are used to specify
cutting areas for outer machining, inner machining, and grooving.
This automatic setting function can reduce a considerable number of
operations for moving the area division cursors, thus allowing more
efficient definition of cutting areas.
The automatic setting of the area division cursors is based on the area
division method used by the automatic process determination
function. For details, see Section 4.4, Area Division in Part XI,
AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION.
The area division cursors are graphic cursors that move along a
machining profile to specify a cutting area.
(2) Execution conditions
The area division cursors are automatically set under the following
conditions.
1) When any of the following machining processes is newly defined,
the area division cursors are automatically set on the cutting area
definition screen.
a) Outer roughing
b) Outer semifinish machining
c) Outer finishing
d) Inner roughing
e) Inner semifinish machining
f) Inner finishing
g) Grooving (including roughing and finishing)
For grooving, if no G elements are included in the parts figure, the
area division cursors are initialized to the start and end points.
2) Once the cutting direction (CD) is changed on the cutting area
definition screen, the area division cursors are automatically reset.
(3) Warning and Notes
WARNING
For some machining profiles, the automatic setting function
may not position the area division cursors correctly. If this
occurs, use the [CURSOR FORWARD] or [CURSOR
BACK] soft key to modify the area division cursor positions.
NOTE
1 For outer or inner machining, if an inverse process tool is
set, the area division cursors are not set automatically.
2 The automatic setting of the area division cursors is applied
to the entire machining profile.
3 To use this automatic setting function, the optional
automatic process determination function must be used.
109
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
3.4.9
Cutting Conditions
WARNING
The cutting conditions are automatically set according to the
selected machining type. Check the set conditions. If the
conditions are incorrect, the tool may collide with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may occur,
Input the data of CUTTING CONDITION.
(Example : ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE)
The cutting conditions are automatically set and displayed according to

the kinds of selected materials. Change only the desired items, while
monitoring the CRT screen. To display the next page, press the NEXT
PAGE soft key. To use the tool to cut another area, display the area
definition screen. Unless the tool is used to cut another area, display the
tool list screen.
If you want to change the feedrate to 75% of the displayed value, for
example, multiply the displayed value by 0.75 as follows.
(Example) F1 =
INPUT
* Outputting the T code specifying the tool offset for each cutting area
The T code of the tool offset number, output for each process, can be
output for each of the specified cutting areas.
110
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Specify the value for switching the offset numbers in the following
system parameter:
No.704: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
For each cutting area, the T code specifying tool
offset is:
= 0: Not output.
= 1: Output.
If the parameter is set to a value for outputting the T code specifying the
tool offset for each cutting area, the following prompt is displayed:
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . . TM = Tool offset number for each
cutting area
The cutting conditions and meanings of the system questions are
described below according to machining data.
(1) Center drilling
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset
number for each cutting area)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance quantity (mm)
(Default value is system parameter
No.180)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm)
SPINDLE SPEED . . . . N = Spindle speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F = Feedrate (mm/rev)
111
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(2) Drilling
Cutting conditions for drilling comprise type 1, 2 and 3 according to
the movement of a drill.
CUTTING CONDITIONS 1
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (Tool offset
CLEARANCE. . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch)
No.181)
CUT POINT. . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
(When bit 7 of system parameter
No.702 is 1)
or
DEPTH OF CUT. . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
No.702 is 0)
SPINDLE ROTATION . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch)
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
No.702 is 1)
or
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
No.702 is 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth (mm or inch)
No.121)
RETURN AMOUNT . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch)
112
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Secondary drilling dearance
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
No.702 is 1)
or
No.702 is 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth (mm or inch)
No.121)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D2 = Secondary drilling depth
(mm or inch)
No.122)
RETURN AMOUNT . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F2 = Feed rate for second pass
(mm/rev or inch/rev)
113
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
WARNING
D1 and D2 in Machining method 2 and Machining method
3
As shown in figure 7 and figure 8, D1 and D2 in
machining method 2 and machining method 3 are input as
positive values.
Associated parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
702
Bit 7 Specification of depth of cut

0 : Specifies with an incremental value
1 : Specifies with an absolute value
114
#1
#0
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
(3) Reaming
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Amount of clearance
(mm or inches)
181 [same as drilling])
CUTTING POINT . . . . Z = Cutting endpoint coordinate
(Warning)
SPINDLE SPEED . . . . N = Spindle speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F = Feed rate (mm/rev)
Workpiece face
Where LE value is either 0

or underfined
F2=F1(value contained in system parameter No.196)
Where LE value is significant
(4) Tapping
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Speed of rotation (rpm)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Amount of clearance
(mm or inches)
196)
(Warning)
Workpiece face
Threading part
115
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
WARNING
A value is assigned to Z in accordance with the system of
coordinates on this screen. Where the Z axis is plotted as
shown in the figure on the right the value of Z will always be
negative.
Whatever the drawing format the right hand end of the Z axis
is always positive on the Machining definition screen of
menu No.4.
Specifications of the machining start points and
intermediate points are all made in accordance with this
system of coordinates. The cutting points are also therefore
specified in accordance with the same coordinate system.
(5) Roughing of outer figure

(6) Roughing of inner figure
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM= Tool offset number (Tool offset
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . CX = Clearance quantity in Xaxis
(mm or inch)
(Default value is system
parameter No.183)
CZ = Clearance quantity in Zaxis
(mm or inch)
parameter No.184)
CZ2= Second clearance along the
Zaxis (mm or inch)
(The initial value is set in system
parameter No.194) (Warning)
FINISH ALLOWANCE . . TX = Finish allowance in Xaxis
(mm or inch)
parameter No.117)
TZ = Finish allowance in Zaxis
(mm or inch)
parameter No.172)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Return amount quantity
(mm or inch)
116
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed

(m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
F2 = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
1ST OVERRIDE . . . . . . . % = Displayed in case of outside
diameter roughing.
Refer to the item (11).
* First override in outer surface roughing
In outer surface roughing, the depth and feedrate of the first cut can be
overridden. To specify the override, set bit 7 of system parameter
No.104 to 1
No.104: 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0
Specifies whether the operator is prompted to
enter an override value.
= 0: Not prompted.
= 1: Prompted.
Even if the operator is not prompted to specify the override, the data can
be overridden by the value set in system parameter No.711.
No.711:
Override value for the first cut in outer surface roughing

(10% to 100%)
Not defined: 100%
n: n%
117
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(7) Semifinishing of outer figure

(8) Semifinishing of inner figure
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset
(mm or inch)
parameter No.185)
(mm or inch)
parameter No.186)
Zaxis (mm or inch)
parameter No.194) (Warning)
(mm or inch)
parameter No.118)
(mm or inch)
parameter No.173)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
MAXIMUM RPM . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed
(Warning) (P.NO TAG)
118
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(9) Finishing of outer figure

(10) Finishing of inner figure
(mm or inch)
parameter No.187)
(mm or inch)
parameter No.188)
Zaxis (mm or inch)
parameter No.194)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or
feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate for (mm/rev or inch/rev)
F2 = Feedrate for (mm/rev or inch/rev)
WARNING
The prompt on the second clearance along the Zaxis can
be displayed.
The clearance becomes valid when the tool approaches the
workpiece during a process for inner surface machining. To
display the prompt, set the following system parameter:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The second clearance specified for inner surface
machining becomes:
= 0: Invalid.
= 1: Valid.
119
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05

(11) Grooving/necking machining

[GROOVING/NECKING]
When a grooving tool is selected (TP = 3) (roughing type is 1)
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM = Tool offset number (tool offset
TOOL OFFSET NO.2 . . . TM2=Tool offset number 2 (tool offset
number 2 for each cutting area)
FINISH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP2 =Type of finishing (1 or 2)
PECKING ON/OFF . . . . . PE = Pecking
(0: Not executed, 1: Executed)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of each cut in pecking
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Distance of each retraction in
pecking (mm or inch)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch)
FINISH. ALLOWANCE . TW = Finishing allowance for width
(mm or inch)
TB = Finishing allowance for depth
(mm or inch)
120
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT

(m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate in roughing
F2 = Feedrate in finishing
MAX RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Maximum spindle speed (rpm)
NOTE
If necking is specified, the operator is not prompted to enter
TW, TB, and F2.
When a versatile tool is selected (TP = 11)
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset
ROUGH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP1 =Type of roughing (1, 2, or 3)
FINISH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP2 =Type of finishing (1, 2, or 3)
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
(m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Horizontal feedrate in roughing
F2 = Approach feedrate in roughing
F3 = Feedrate in finishing
[ROUGHING OF GROOVE]
When a grooving tool is selected (roughing type is 1)
PECKING ON/OFF . . . . . PE = Pecking
(0: Not executed, 1: Executed)
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Distance of each retraction in
pecking (mm or inch)
121
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05

(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Approach feedrate in roughing
When a versatile tool is selected
ROUGH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP1 =Type of roughing (1, 2, or 3)
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Horizontal feedrate in roughing
F2 = Approach feedrate in roughing
[FINISHING OF GROOVE]
When a grooving tool is selected
FINISH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP2 =Type of finishing (1 or 2)
feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F2 = Feedrate in finishing
When a versatile tool is selected
FINISH TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP2 =Type of finishing (1, 2, or 3)
122
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT

feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F3 = Feedrate in finishing
The following figure shows the relationship between the clearance and
finishing allowance in grooving.
Roughing can be executed in the following three ways:
Finishing can be executed in the following three ways:
123
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
When pecking is executed in roughing of a groove, the tool is moved as

shown below:
NOTE
The operator is not prompted to enter the data of pecking
if finishing of a groove or necking is selected.
In roughing and finishing, the first cut is made from the virtual tool tip
side of the tool.
The position of the virtual tool tip is determined by AC and AN of the tool
data.
If AC is set to 90 and AN is set to 90 for a tool for outer surface
machining, the virtual tool tip is on the left side of the tool. Therefore,
the first cut is made from the left side.
124
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
If AC is set to 90 and AN is set to 90, the virtual tool tip is on the right
side of the tool.
A specified cutting area must not contain two or more grooves or cuts.
Divide the cutting area so that a single cutting area contains only one
groove or cut.
(12) Threading
CUTTING METHOD . TP = 1 : Singleedge thread cutting with
constant cutting amount
2 : Bothedge zigzag thread cutting
with constant cutting amount
3 : Singleedge thread cutting with
constant cutting depth
4 : Bothedge zigzag thread cutting
with constant cutting depth
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . CT = Clearance quantity (mm or inch)
No.190)
CS = Clearance quantity (mm or inch)
No.191)
CE = Clearance quantity (mm or inch)
No.192)
DL = Final depth of cut (mm or inch)
No.119)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min)
125
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
WARNING
The prompt to ask the maximum spindle speed is selected
by system parameter No.702 bit 0.
0: No prompt.
(The maximum spindle speed is set by system parameter
No.128.)
1: The prompt for the maximum spindle speed is displayed
on each stage of machining process.
(Ignore the value of system parameter No.128.)
However, the prompt is not displayed at the process
where the constant tangential speed control is not used
set in system parameter Nos.107 to 115.
The value set in system parameter No.128 is output at
these processes.
If the same tool is used for more than one process, the
prompt is not displayed.
(13) Cutting off

If system parameter 140 is specified so that cutting off is defined, CUT
OFF is displayed on the screen which defines the type of machining.
On this screen, the cutting off data can be specified.
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C1 = (mm or inch)
Specify the clearance from the
blank figure along the Xaxis.
parameter 193.)
FINISH. ALLOWANCE . TZ = (mm or inch)
Specify the finishing allowance
for the workpiece subjected to
cutting off.
126
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
CUT OFF POS. . . . . . . . . CO = (mm or inch)

Specify the distance between the
cut off point and the inner surface
or center of the workpiece.
parameter 141.)
COND. RESET POS. . . . . CR = (mm or inch)
Specify the distance between the
point at which the cutting
conditions are changed and the
cut off point. (The initial value is
set in system parameter 142.)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . RA = (mm or inch)
Specify the retraction distance
along the Xaxis of the tool from
the point at which the cutting
conditions are changed.
parameter 143.)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V1 = (m/min or feet/min)
V2 = (m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = (mm/rev or inch/rev)
F2 = (mm/rev or inch/rev)
For the example of cutting off shown in Fig. 3.4.9 (a), specify the
cutting speed and feedrate from a to b and b to c with V1 and F1,
respectively. Then specify the cutting speed and feedrate from c to d
with V2 and F2 respectively.
Fig. 3.4.9 (a)
127
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(14) BAR FEED

The bar feed is the distance from the end of the workpiece after cutting
off to the end of the workpiece defined by the blank figure. The system
automatically calculates the bar feed.
Fig. 3.4.9 (b)
On the cutting conditions screen, the operator is first prompted to enter

the machining type.
TYPE . . . . . . BT =
Type 1: Pullout mode 1
Type 2: Pullout mode 2
Type 3: Slidestop mode 1
Type 4: Slidestop mode 2
The subsequent inquiries depend on the machining type specified.
128
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
1) Pullout mode 1
CLEARANCE . . . . CAZ=Approach clearance (mm)
parameter 153.)
GRIP POS. . . . . . . . WG = Workpiece gripping position (mm)
parameter 154.)
ESCAPE VALUE . . CEZ= Distance the tool is retracted (mm)
parameter 155.)
FEED RATE . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (in gripping) (mm/min)
F2 = Feedrate (in pulling and positioning)
(mm/min)
F3 = Feedrate (in retraction) (mm/min)
2) Pullout mode 2
CLEARANCE . . . . CAX=Approach clearance (mm)
parameter 152.)
GRIP POS. . . . . . . . WG = Workpiece gripping position (mm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (in gripping) (mm/min)
F2 = Feedrate (in pulling and positioning)
(mm/min)
F3 = Feedrate (in retraction) (mm/min)
129
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
3) Slidestop mode 1
CLEARANCE . . . . CAZ=Approach clearance (mm or inch)
ESCAPE VALUE . . CEZ= Distance the tool is retracted
(mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . S1 = Spindle speed (rpm)
parameter 156.)
FEED RATE . . . . . . F2 = Feedrate (for sliding) (mm/min)
130
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
4) Slidestop mode 2
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S1 = Spindle speed (rpm)
(15) Cutting another area

To cut another area with the current tool, input a value in response to
the following prompt:
ANOTHER AREA? . . . CN = (1: CUTTING 0: NON)

Enter either of the following:
1 INPUT: Yes (The tool is used to cut another area.)
0 INPUT: No (The tool is not used to cut another area.)
If 1 is entered, the CUTTING AREA screen is displayed to enable
specification of the desired area. If 0 is entered, the process directory
screen displaying prompts relating to the next machining is displayed.
131
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
3.4.10
The tool data and tooling information can be set and all the tooling
information can be deleted on the machining process list (shown in
machining definition) or the tool data setting screen of a process.
Setting the Tool Data

and Tooling
Information
B61804E2/05
[Machining process list]
To set the tool data and tooling information on the machining process list,
press the rightmost soft key [ ]. The following soft keys are then
displayed.
If either of the following soft keys is pressed, the corresponding data list
screen is displayed:
TOOL DATA
: The tool data list is displayed.
TOLING INFOR. : The tooling information list is displayed.
[Tool data setting screen]
If either of the following soft keys is pressed, the corresponding data list
screen is displayed:
TOOL DATA
: The tool data list is displayed.
TOLING INFOR. : The tooling information list is displayed.
132
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
(1) Setting the tool data

Press the TOOL DATA soft key.
TOOL
DATA
TOLING
INFOR.
List screen on which the tool data can be set
When the TOOL DATA soft key is pressed, the tool data list is
displayed. On the list screen, the tool data can be set, modified, or
deleted.
NOTE
When the tool DATA soft key is pressed on the machining
process list screen, the tool list screen shows the data of
turning tools. To set the data of a milling machining tool,
press the MILLING TOOL soft key.
When the TOOL DATA soft key is pressed on the tool data
setting screen of a process, the data of tools of the current
process is displayed.
If the current process is turning, the list of turning tools is
displayed. If the current process is Caxis machining or
Yaxis machining, the list of milling machining tools is
displayed.
133
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(2) Setting the tooling information

Press the TOLING INFOR. soft key.
TOOL
DATA
TOLING
INFOR.
List screen on which the tooling information can be set
When the TOLING INFOR. soft key is pressed, the tooling

information list is displayed. On the list screen, the tooling data can
be set, modified, or deleted.
For the TT model, the data of each turret is displayed.
134
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(3) Initializing the tooling information

To initialize the tooling information, press the rightmost soft key [ ].
Different soft keys are then displayed.
NOTE
The TURRET 1 DEL. and TURRET 2 DEL. soft keys are
displayed only for the TT model.
If the ALL DELETE, TURRET 1 DEL., or TURRET 2 DEL. soft key is
pressed, the operator is prompted to specify whether to delete the data.
To delete the data, enter 1 INPUT. To not delete the data, enter 0 INPUT.
The soft keys have the following functions:
ALL DELETE: Deletes all tooling information cataloged in main
memory.
TURRET 1 DEL.: Deletes all TL1 tooling information cataloged in
main memory. (Only for the TT model)
TURRET 2 DEL.: Deletes all TL2 tooling information cataloged in
main memory. (Only for the TT model)
Displays the next group of soft keys.
[ ]:
135
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
3.4.11
In machining definition, a blank figure can be painted and a cutting area

can be drawn (line drawing) on the screen for setting an area or machining
conditions. Set the following system parameters as shown below:
Drawing a Cutting Area

and Painting a Blank
Figure
B61804E2/05
No.704: x x 0 0 0 0 0 0
0: The blank figure is not painted.
1: The blank figure is painted.
0: The cutting area is not drawn.
1: The cutting area is drawn.
No.670: Color in which the blank figure is filled in (0 to 7)
No.671: Color of the line which draws the cutting area (0 to 7)
NOTE
The system parameters are valid only for turning.
(1) Drawing a cutting area (line drawing)
When bit 7 of system parameter 704 is set to 1, the cutting area is drawn
on the cutting area definition screen and cutting condition setting
screen, as shown below:
1) Drawing the area on the cutting area screen

D Each time the start point, end point, or dividing direction is
changed, the drawing is changed accordingly.
D The area for which the tool angle is not checked is drawn.
2) Drawing the area on the cutting condition screen
D Each time the finishing allowance is changed, the drawing is
changed accordingly.
D The area for which the tool angle is checked is drawn.
136
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(2) Painting the blank figure

When bit 6 of parameter 704 is set to 1, the blank figure is filled in on
the cutting area definition screen and cutting condition setting screen
as shown below:
NOTE
In 16TC CAP II and 16iTA CAP II, a blank figure cannot
be Painted on the cutting area definition screen or cutting
condition screen.
137
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
3.5
NC DATA
PREPARATION
3.5.1
Preparations of NC
Data and Registrations
of Machining Memory
WARNING
Even when the tool path and machining processes
specified in NC data are verified by machining simulation or
tool path check, if the data relating to the actual tool offset
and workpiece shift is incorrect, the tool may collide with the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. Before
starting a production run, perform a dry run to ensure that
the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. For
example, specify a low feedrate, then start the NC program
without mounting a workpiece on the machine.
Select 5
on the menu screen to display the NC data generation screen.
Horizontal lathe
Vertical lathe
138
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
Soft keys are displayed as shown below.

(1) Setting of 1path lathe (MTF1050=1) with the animated simulation
option
ESCAPE PROC.
LIST
REGIS NC
TER
DATA
PROC. SINGLE
STOP STEP
TOOL
PATH
ANIMA DRAWNG START

TION
RANGE
(2) Setting of 2path lathe (MTF1050=2) without the animated

simulation option or Series 16TTA
ESCAPE PROC.
LIST
REGIS NC
TER
DATA
PROC. SINGLE
STOP STEP
DRAWNG START
RANGE
The above soft keys are displayed, and the following message prompts
you to input a program No. and comment.
PROGRAM No. . . . . . . . . Input 0 = program No.
COMMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . Input CM = comment.
Comments are specified in alphanumerics or symbols of 16 characters or
less.
If 17 or more characters are input, only the first 16 will be valid. All keys
other than round brackets, inverted commas and commas (,) can be
used.
Example)
When 0 = 1234, CM = ABCD is input,

0 1 2 3 4 (ABCD);
is registered in the machining memory.
If system parameter No.708 bit 2 is set to 1, the process name comment

will be added automatically and output to the head of each process.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
708
Bit 2 Process name comment during NC format output:

0 : not output
1 : automatically output
Example)
The OD roughing process head NC format when system

parameter No.708 bit 2 =1 is:
(ROUGH. OF. OUT.)
N002 GOTO202;
...
...
139
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
Automatically entered comments are as follows. Each type of machining

has characteristic contents.
Machining type
Output comment
Center drilling
CENTER DRIL.
Drilling
DRIL.
OD roughing
ROUGH. OF OUT.
ID roughing
ROUGH. OF IN.
OD semiroughing
SFIN. OF OUT.
ID semiroughing
SFIN. OF IN.
OD finishing
FIN. OF OUT.
ID finishing
FIN. OF IN.
Grooving/necking
GROV. OR NECK.
Threading
THREAD.
Groove roughing
ROUGH. OF GROOVE
Groove finishing
FIN. OF GROOVE
Reamer
REAMER
Tap
TAP
Machining type
Output comment
C axis center drilling
CCENTER DRILL.
C axis drilling
CDRILLING
C axis tapping
CTAPPING
C axis grooving
CGROOVING
Face milling
CFACE MILLING
Side milling
CSIDE MILLING
Y axis center drilling
YCENTER DRILL.
Y axis drilling
YDRILLING
Y axis tapping
YTAPPING
Y axis pattern
YPATTERN
Y axis contouring
YCONTOUR
Sub cycle
SUB CYCLE
Cut off
CUT OFF
Bar feed
BAR FEED
NOTE
It is not possible to output the process name comment when
NC format is outputted in main/sub format.
140
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
Program
No.
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
INPUT
[ANIMATION] or [ANIMATION]
This key determines whether or not to perform background animated
simulation while NC data are being generated.
Each time this key is touched, the setting alternates between
[ANIMATION] and [ANIMATION].
Blank figures and part figures are drawn in the [ANIMATION] state.
Blank figures are drawn in colored backgrounds. Machining is
simulated during NC data preparation.
Animated simulation performed in this state is called
[BACKGROUND ANIMATION] and is distinguished from animated
simulation specified on Menu No.6.
(Animated simulation Specified on Menu No.6 is called
[FOREGROUND ANIMATION].)
Part figures alone are drawn in the [ANIMATION] state.
Tool paths are displayed during NC data preparation.
[TOOL PATH] or [TOOL PATH]
This key appears only in the [ANIMATION] state.
Each time this key is pressed, the setting alternates between
[TOOL PATH] and [TOOL PATH].
In the [TOOL PATH] state, the path of the virtual tool position is
always displayed in purple.
No path is displayed in the [TOOL PATH] state.
[SINGLE STEP] or [SINGLE STEP]
[SINGLE STEP] and [SINGLE STEP].
NC data is output continuously in the [SINGLE STEP] state. (Refer
to Chapter VIII 1.4 NC Data Output by Single Step.)
[PROC. STOP] or [PROC. STOP]
[PROC. STOP] and [PROC. STOP].
In the [PROC. STOP] state, NC data output is suspended
temporarily at the specified position of each process.
The half position is set by system parameters No.49 to No.57 and
No.310 to No.314. (Refer to Chapter VIII 1.4 Single Step Output.)
[NC DATA] or [NC DATA]
[NC DATA] and [NC DATA].
NC data is displayed in the [NC DATA] state.
No NC data is displayed in the [NC DATA] state.
141
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
[START]
Press this key to check the family program prepared anew.
In the [ANIMATION] state, you can simulate machining while
generating NC data preparation in the sequence of specification on the
process list.
Tool figures appear on the display, and you can visually check how
blank figures are cut.
Simulation by animation is not performed in the [ANIMATION] state.
NC data is generated in the sequence of specification on the process
list, and tool paths are displayed on the screen.
[REGISTER]
Press this key to register NC data in the machining memory while
checking the family program prepared anew.
In the [ANIMATION] state, you can simulate NC data while
generating the data in the sequence of specification on the process list.
Tool figures appear on the display, and you can visually check how
blank figures are cut.
In the [ANIMATION] state, NC data is prepared in the sequence of
specification on the process list, and tool paths are displayed on the
screen.
[DRAWNG RANGE]
Press this key to enlarge or scale down figures.
[PROC. LIST]
Press this key to display a list of machining periods and general
machining periods of each process.
[ESCAPE]
Press this key to return to Main Menu.
3.5.2
Precautions to be
Taken with Background
Animated Simulation
(1) Background animated simulation is supported only by the 1path

lathe, not by the 2path lathe.
(2) Background animation drawing is valid only when the animated
simulation function (option) is provided.
(3) Chucks and tail stocks are not displayed.
(4) Only linear interpolation, arc interpolation, and threading are
simulated.
(5) Background animated simulation is not performed with the vertical
lathe.
(6) Background animated simulation is not performed when single
process output is selected.
(7) Blanks are not cut in the bar feed process, threading process, and
Caxis/Yaxis machining process.
(8) Tool pictures do not appear in the bar feed process.
(9) In the subcycle process, blank cutting, tool pictures, and tool paths
are not drawn on the screen.
142
B61804E2/05
3.5.3
Display of Machining
Time
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
After NC data is automatically created, ***PRESS SOFT KEY*** is

displayed at the screen bottom.
When PROCESS LIST is pressed then, a list indecating the machine
time for each process and the total machining time is displayed.
PROCESS LIST
These machining time are the theoretical values figured out when NC data
was automatically created. The machining time is of course changed if
feed rate override is effected in actual machining.
NOTE
When over 20 processes are defined, a bar graph is not
displayed.
3.5.4
Process Editing
Function (Only with
2path Control)
WARNING
After process editing, check the editing results. If edits are
made incorrectly, the tool may collide with the workpiece
and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece, machine and/or tool
itself, or injury to the user.
(1) Summary
In the initial screen of Menu 5, NC DATA PREPARATION, the
operation sequence defined in Menu 4, MACHINING DEFINITION
is displayed for each turret. Further it is possible to edit the S Code and
operation sequence on this screen.
In editing the S code, a surface speed defined with MACHINING
DEFINITION can be reindicated with an other value.
143
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
In editing the operation sequence, each operation can be arranged by

shifting up or down the operation sequence independently for each turret
and a simultaneous operation by using both turrets is possible. When this
function is used, M code for waiting is output automatically for use in
preparation of the NC program.
In Menu 4, MACHINING DEFINITION suppose we define the
following operation sequence,
Process No.
Kind of Machining
Turret No.
Drilling
Roughing of outer figure
Roughing of inner figure
Finishing of outer figure
Finishing of inner figure
Grooving (External)
Grooving (Internal)
Threading (External)
Threading (Internal)
Namely, suppose we define the cutting operation sequence:

1. Drilling with a tool on the turret 1
2. Roughing of outer figure with a tool on the turret 1
3. Roughing of inner figure with a tool on the turret 2
4. Finishing of outer figure with a tool on the turret 1
5. Finishing of inner figure with a tool on the turret 2
6. Grooving with a tool on the turret 1 (External)
7. Grooving with a tool on the turret 2 (Internal)
8. Threading with a tool on the turret 1 (External)
9. Threading with a tool on the turret 2 (Internal)
in order.
When such cutting definition is executed, the following operation
procedure in displayed on the initial screen of Menu 5, NC DATA
PREPARATION.
144
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Thus, cutting operations for each turret are displayed. For the section on
spindle speed, N means spindle speed, V means cutting speed. For
simultaneous operation; No.2 and 3, ROUGHING OF OUTER
FIGURE and ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE, operation No.8 and
9, THREADING and DOWN (or set the cursor to No.3 and depress
HEAD 2 UP), and then set the cursor to No.8 and depress the soft key,
HEAD 1 DOWN (or set the cursor to No.9 and depress HEAD 2 UP)
continuously. For changing the cutting speed of operation No.6,
GROOVING, 125 m/min for instance, set the cursor to No.6 and input
125 through keys for the question, V (N) =. When performing such
operations, the operation procedure is displayed as follows.
As for S code, an A code is output from either turret 1 or turret 2 when

a simultaneous operation is executed. Which turret is used can be
recognized by the speed indication on the upper screen. Whenever the
soft key, S CODE SELECT is depressed the value of turret 1 and 2 is
alternately displayed.
(2) SOFT KEY
The meaning of soft keys is as follows:
[ESCAPE] . . . . . . . . . . Processing of this screen is discontinued.
[HEAD 1 UP] . . . . . . . . Allow the operation sequence of the turret
1 located with the cursor to go up by one
step.
[HEAD 1 DOWN] . . . . Allow the operation sequence of the turret
1 located with the cursor to go down by one
step.
[HEAD 2 UP] . . . . . . . . Allow the operation sequence of the turret
2 located with the cursor to go up by one
step.
[HEAD 2 DOWN] . . . . Allow the operation sequence of the turret
2 located with the cursor to go down by one
step.
[S CODE SELECT] . . . When under simultaneous operation, select
the turret for which the S Code has priority.
[CURSOR ] . . . . . . . . Move the cursor position backward.
[CURSOR ] . . . . . . . . Move the cursor position forward.
[NEXT PAGE] . . . . . . . Advance to the next screen (screen inquires
details of the program number.)
145
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(3) Edition of the operation sequence

As explained in paragraph Soft key, the operation sequence can be
shifted upward or downward by depressing HEAD 1 UP, HEAD
1 DOWN, HEAD 2 UP and HEAD 2 DOWN, however, to shift
the operation sequence by this handling is possible during only one
step per operation. Shifting for two steps is not possible. The
operation sequence of turret 1 cannot be transferred to turret 2.
CAUTION
1 When G96 mode process and G97 mode process are
simultaneously instructed, G97 mode process has priority.
2 If two G96 modes are simultaneously specified, the control
changes to the G97 mode process.
The spindle is controlled by the turret 1 side, but it is
controlled by the turret 2 side when the S CODE SELECT
soft key is pressed.
(Example)
NO
1
HEAD 1
HEAD 2
ROUGHING OF
OUTER FIGURE.
G96V145M03 (1)
ROUGHING OF
INNER FIGURE.
SPEED
G96V150M03 (2)
FINISHING OF
OUTER FIGURE.
G96V200M03 (1)
GROOVING
G96V100M03 (1)
GROOVING
G96V120M03 (2)
If the process editing is executed for the simultaneous

operation of processes 1 and 2, and 4 and 5 the operation is
performed as follows:
NO
1
HEAD 1
ROUGHING OF
OUTER FIGURE.
HEAD 2
ROUGHING OF
INNER FIGURE.
SPEED
G97V145M03 (1)
2
3
FINISHING OF
OUTER FIGURE.
GROOVING
146
G97V200M03 (1)
GROOVING
G97V120M03 (2)
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(4) Changing of the operation sequence and correction

After compelting to editing of the operation sequence, when
performing correcting operations by selecting Menu 4,
DEFINITION OF MACHINING and 2. CORRECTION due to
addition of new operation sequence or partial correction of data of the
operation sequence which is already defined, the editing results of the
operation sequence performed up to this point are all reset to the state
before editing.
(5) S Code
When both turrets are moved because of the state of simultaneous
operation, select the soft key, S CODE SELECT and indicate
whether which turrets S Code has priority. Concerning the indication
on the display, when drilling or center drilling, the spindle speed, N
is displayed and cutting speed, V is indicated for other cutting. The
spindle speed, N and cutting speed, V can be input up to 5 digits.
(6) M Code for waiting
M code for waiting is output according to the following standard
conditions.
(a) When the current operation and the next operation are done with
the same turret, M Code for waiting is not output.
(b) When the current operation and the next operation are done with
the different turrets, the same M Code for waiting is output at the
end of the current operation sequence and the head part (next to the
T Code command for tool exchange) for the next operation.
(c) In simultaneous operation of both heads, a waiting M code is
output at the head of both processes and at the block immediately
before the T code cancel of one process near the end of a program.
(Example)
N***G50X Z ;
G00 T0303;
T code selection
M105;
Waiting M code
G96 S M03;
X Z ;
Approach
.
.
Cutting
.
G00 X ;
Return relief
X Z ;
M106;
Waiting M code
T0300;
M01;
Whether a waiting M code is output before T code cancellation or
not is switched by system parameter (No.704 bit 0).
(d) Output at the operation ending part for each turret (after returning
to the machine zero position.)
The initial value of M Code for waiting can be set in 730 of a system
parameter.
In the NC program shown in Fig. below, M code for waiting are
output as follows: (When the value of system parameter 730 is
100).
147
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(e) NC data output for a single turret

When outer surface roughing is defined for turret 1 only, for
example, the NC data is output as shown below.
A waiting M code is output immediately before the program end
(MTF function table No. 2001).
In this case, the value of system parameter No. 730 (initial value
of the waiting M code) is output as a waiting M code.
Turret 1 NC data
Turret 2 NC data
OXXXX ;
O**** ;
NC data for outer surface roughing

TXX00 ;
M01 ;
M100 ;
M05 ;
M30 ;
%
Waiting M code output

Program end (MTF2001)
148
M100 ;
M05 ;
M30 ;
%
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3.5.5
(1) Overview
Special Block Output

to both Programs
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
When a model having two turrets is used, the program of turret 1 or

2 contains only the NC data of processes which corresponds to the
turret specified in machining definition. If outer surface roughing is
programmed for turret 1 and inner surface roughing is programmed for
turret 2, for example, the programs are output as shown below:
Turret 1
Turret 2
O0001;
O0002;
NC data of
outer surface
roughing
M100;
M100;
NC data of
inner surface
roughing
M101;
M05;
M30;
%
M101;
M05;
M30;
%
The program for turret 2 does not contain the block corresponding to outer
surface roughing of turret 1.
The program for turret 1 does not contain the block corresponding to inner
surface roughing of turret 2.
A machine may require that the programs of the two turrets share NC data
(such as M01) as shown below.
Turret 1
Turret 2
O0001;
O0002;
NC data of
outer surface
roughing
M01;
M01;
M100;
M100;
NC data of
inner surface
roughing
M01;
M01;
M101;
M05;
M30;
%
M101;
M05;
M30;
%
This can be done by setting a function code to output M01; in MTF2045.

MTF2045 specifies the special block to be output to the programs of both
turrets at the end of each process.
149
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(2) Examples of setting and output

When the following machining is programmed, the programs are
output as shown below:
Turret 1
Process 1
Outer surface
roughing
. . . . . . . . . Turret 1 only
Inner surface
roughing
Process 2
Process 3
Turret 2
Outer surface
finishing
Inner surface
finishing
. . . . . . . . . Turret 2 only
. . . . . . . . . Simultaneous
operation of
turrets 1 and 2
1) Example 1 for setting MTF

MTF2011 (End of roughing process)
MTF2013 (End of finishing process)
0003, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
Txx00 ;
MTF2045 (Special block)
0605, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
M01 ;
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
150
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
NC data output
After the end of each process (MTF2011, MTF2013), the special block
(MTF2045) is output.
O0001 ;
N1 G50 X_ Z_ ;
G0 X_ Z_ ;
(ROUGH OF OUT);
N2 G50 X_ Z_ ;
Txx00 ;
M1 ;
O0002 ;
. . . MTF2011
. . . MTF2045 . . . .
M100 ;
M100 ;
N2 G50 X_ Z_ ;
G0 X_ Z_ ;
(ROUGH OF INNER) ;
N3 G50 X_ Z_ ;
N3 ;
M1 ;
MTF2011 . . .
. . . MTF2045 . . . .
. . . MTF2013 . . .
. . . MTF2013 . . . .
X_ Z_ ;
M102 ;
M5 ;
M30 ;
%
2) Example 2 for setting MTF

MTF2011 (End of roughing process)
MTF2013 (End of finishing process)
0003, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
Txx00 ;
MTF2045 (Special block)
Specify 0000 only.
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
151
Txx00 ;
M1 ;
M101 ;
(FIN OF INNER);
N4 G50 X_ Z_ ;
M101 ;
(FIN OF INNER) ;
N4 G50 X_ Z_ ;
Txx00 ;
M1 ;
M1 ;
Txx00 ;
M1 ;
X_ Z_ ;
M102 ;
M5 ;
M30 ;
%
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
NC data output
Since 0000 is specified in MTF2045, no special block are output.
O0001 ;
N1 G50 X_ Z_ ;
G0 X_ Z_ ;
(ROUGH OF OUT) ;
N2 G50 X_ Z_ ;
Txx00 ;
M100 ;
O0002 ;
. . . MTF2011
M100 ;
N1 G50 X_ Z_ ;
G0 X_ Z_ ;
(ROUGH OF INNER) ;
N3 G50 X_ Z_ ;
MTF2011 . . . . Txx00 ;
M101 ;
(FIN OF INNER) ;
N3 G50 X_ Z_ ;
M101 ;
(FIN OF INNER);
N4 G50 X_ Z_ ;
Txx00 ;
. . . MTF2013 . . . . Txx00 ;
X_ Z_ ;
M102 ;
M5 ;
M30 ;
%
X_ Z_ ;
M102 ;
M5 ;
M30 ;
%
152
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(3) Warning and Notes

WARNING
1 The special code of an auxiliary machining process is not
output to the programs of the two turrets.
The first sequence number of a process is output to the
program of the turret on which the corresponding process
is not executed.
2 In the programs of the two turrets, identical processes may
have different sequence numbers at the beginning.
For example, while the sequence number at the beginning
of process 1 is N2 in the program of turret 1, the
corresponding sequence number may be N1 in the program
of turret 2.
3 If processes are edited on the process edit screen so that
auxiliary
machining
and
other
processes
are
simultaneously executed on the two turrets, the total
number of special codes in the NC data of the two turrets
may differ.
NOTE
The function to output the MTF2045 block is provided only
for a lathe having two turrets. When MTF1050 is set to 1 (a
lathe having only one turret is used), the block is not output.
3.5.6
Outputting the NC Data
of a Multiple Thread
Cutting Cycle
1. Overview
If the NC data for threading are created on a 15TFB or 16T CAP II,
the threading path is generally created with G92. Depending on the
setting of MTF, the NC data for G76 (multiple thread cutting cycle)
can also be created.
Fig. 3.5.6 Cutting condition screen
153
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
If the multiple thread cutting cycle is used, the 16T CAP II displays a prompt relating to the depth of cut (DL). The 15TFB displays no prompts about DL.
Soft keys
[ESCAPE]: Returns to the FAPT menu screen.
[BACK PAGE]: Returns to the previous page.
[CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ]: Moves the cursor up or down through the
prompts.
[DRAWING RANGE]: Enlarges or reduces the drawing.
[NEXT PAGE]: Displays the next page.
Threading methods
Threading method 1: Cutting using one cutting edge and a constant
cutting amount
Threading method 2: Alternate cutting using two cutting edges and
a constant cutting amount
Threading method 3: Cutting using one cutting edge and a constant
depth of cut
Threading method 4: Alternate cutting using two cutting edges and
a constant depth of cut
If the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) is used with the 16T
CAP II, the prompt relating to the threading method is not displayed.
[Conventional NC data]
.
.
(THREAD.)
N002G50X100.Z100.;
G0T0101;
G97S0474M3;
Z2.71;
X64.;
G92X59.45Z22.F2.;
G0Z2.645;
G92X54.222Z22.;
G0Z2.594;
.
.
154
The threading path is repeated.
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
[NC data of the multiple thread cutting cycle]

Sample output by the FANUC Series 15TFB
.
.
(THREAD.)
N002G50X100.Z100.;
G0T0101;
G97S0474M3;
Z2.71;
X64.;
G76X56.968Z22.K1516D0228F2.A60P1;
G0X100.;
.
.
.
*** NC data format ***

G76 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ I (i)
K (k) D ( d)
F_ _ _ A (a)
P_ _ ;
I:
K:
D:
A:
F:
P:
Thread radius (i)

Thread height (k)
Depth of the first cut ( d)
Tool angle (a)
(included angle of thread)
Lead
Specified cut method
Simple NC data can be created.

Sample output by the 16T CAP II
.
.
(THREAD.)
N002G50X100.Z100.;
G0T0101;
G97S0474M3;
Z2.71;
X64.;
G76P010060R0.2;
G76X56.968Z22.P1516Q0228F2.;
G0X100.;
.
.
.
*** NC data format ***

G76 PmmrraaR (d)
G76 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ R (i)
P (k) Q ( d)
F_ _ ;
P:
mm: Number of times final finishing is
repeated
rr: Coefficient of incomplete thread
aa: Tool angle
R: Finishing allowance (d)
R: Thread radius (i)
P: Thread height (k)
Q: Depth of the first cut ( d)
F: Lead
Simple NC data can be created.
155
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
2. Setting
(1) Setting the MTF parameter
The MTF1060 parameter determines whether the conventional
threading cycle (G92) or multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) is
used.
No.
Format
Initial value
1060
0, 1
Specify
(eight bits)
10000000
Description
7
Bit
Bit 0
0:
1:
Bit 1
0:
1:
Bit 2
0:
1:
Bit 6
0:
1:
Bit 7
0:
1:
5
0
4
0
3
0
At the machine zero point, G50 is:

Output.
Not output.
Movement from the machine zero point to the turret turning
position is:
Output.
Not output.
Movement from the turret turning position to the machine zero
point is:
Output.
Not output.
For threading, the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) is:
Not used.
Used.
For tapping by turning, the G code of a canned cycle is:
Not used.
Used.
(2) Setting an MTF parameter with a number ranging from 1000 to

1999 (15TFB)
No.
Format
Initial value
Description
1392
Character
II
Address specifying the difference in the

radius of the thread
1393
Character
KK
Address specifying the thread height
1394
Character
DD
Address specifying the depth of first cut
1395
Character
AA
Address specifying the tool angle
1396
Character
PP
Address specifying the cut method
1397
Character
RR
Address specifying the finishing allowance

(Not specified for the FANUC Series 15)
156
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
(3) Setting an MTF parameter with a number ranging from 1000 to

1999 (16T CAP II)
No.
Format
Initial value
Description
1392
Character
RR
Address specifying the difference in the

radius of the thread
1393
Character
PP
Address specifying the thread height
1394
Character
QQ
Address specifying the depth of first cut
1395
Character
PP
Address specifying
(Pmmrraa)
1396
Character
PP
Address specifying the cut method (Not

specified for the FANUC Series 16)
1397
Character
RR
Address specifying the finishing allowance
the
tool
angle
(4) Setting MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 2000 to 2999
(Function table, 15TFB)
No.
Description
Remarks
2060 Block 1 specifying the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76)

Detail 2060 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
2061= 4B02, 1101,
G76
X
0001, E101, E201, E301, 6601, 0D03, 0F03, 0004

Z
I
K
D
F
A
P
;
Multiple thread
cutting cycle
(5) Setting MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 2000 to 2999
(Function table, 16T CAP II)
No.
Description
Remarks

Detail 2060 = 4B02, 0E03, E401, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
2061= 4B02, 1101,
G76
X
0001, E101, E201, E301, 6601, 0004, 0000, 0000

Z
R
P
Q
F
;
157
Multiple thread
cutting cycle
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(6) Setting function codes

Loworder
Highorder
three digits,
three digits,
general
detail
category
Function
Outputs the address specified in MTF1392.

Thread radius
(15TFB: I code)
Thread radius
(16T CAP II: R code)

Thread height
(15TFB: K code)
Thread height
(16T CAP II: P code)

Depth of the first cut
(15TFB: D code)
Depth of the first cut
(16T CAP II: Q code)

Finishing allowance
(15TFB: Invalid)
Finishing allowance
(16T CAP II: R code)

Tool angle
(15TFB: A code)
Tool angle
(16T CAP II: Invalid)

Tool angle
(15TFB: Invalid)
Tool angle + multiple parameters
(16T CAP II: P code)

(15TFB: P code)
(16T CAP II: Invalid)
(7) Setting system parameters

No.
Format
Initial
value
230
Integer
Number of times final Valid only for the

finishing is repeated (1 to 99) FANUC Series 16
231
Integer
Coefficient of incomplete Valid only for the

thread (00 to 99)
FANUC Series 16
158
Description
Remarks
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(8) Setting other data

This function causes no addition to, or modification of, the setting of
the material data and tooling information.
*** The threading methods that can be used depend on the NC
specifications. ***
15TFB
16T CAP II
(Threading method 1)
Cutting using one cutting edge and a
Alternate cutting using two cutting edges
and a constant cutting amount
and a constant depth of cut
and a constant cutting amount
constant depth of cut
and a constant depth of cut
G92
G32 (Threading method 3)
constant depth of cut
G76
159
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
3. Warning and Notes

WARNING
1 To use the multiple thread cutting cycle with the FANUC
Series 15TFB, create the corresponding NC data after
setting identical values for the final depth of cut for threading
in system parameter No.119 of FAPT and the finishing
allowance in parameter No.6219 of the NC.
2 If the FANUC Series 16T is being used, restrictions are
imposed on the tool angle that can be specified. (If an angle
other than 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, or 80 degrees is specified, P/S
alarm 62 is output.) If the FANUC Series 15TFB is being
used, the tool angle can be specified within a range of 0 to
120 degrees, in 1degree increments.
3 The thread radius, thread height, depth of first cut, and
finishing allowance (in the format for the FANUC Series 16)
are referenced with MTF1021 (Xaxis least input
increment) and MTF1031 (number of decimal places of the
Xaxis least input increment).
The thread height and depth of first cut cannot be output
with decimal places.
NOTE
1 To enable execution of the multiple thread cutting cycle
(G76), the complex turning cycle function of the NC must be
supported.
2 Face threading cannot be executed with the multiple thread
cutting cycle (G76). For face threading, G32 is output as
before, even if the multiple thread cutting cycle is selected.
160
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.6
CHECKING NC DATA
(ANIMATED
SIMULATION
FUNCTION)
WARNING
specified in NC data are verified by the NC data check
function, if the data relating to the actual tool offset and
workpiece shift is incorrect, the tool may collide with the
In 16TC CAP II and 16iTA CAP II, the animated simulation function
has been improved.
When using the above CAP II models, see Part XIII, ANIMATED
SIMULATION FUNCTION II.
The function which allows a practical cutting simulation to take place by
displaying the blank, chuck, tailstock and tool configuration is called an
Animated Simulation Function.
The manner in which a blank is being cut can be monitored by
1) selecting the screen on which animated simulation is done and
2) executing cycle operation under the machine lock condition and each
time a T code is specified, the tool drawing changes.
3.6.1
Operating Instructions
(1) Prepare NC data by using the symbolic FAPT function, and enter it
into the NC memory.
(2) Set the coordinate system so that work coordinates of the tool may
meet when a program is started. Alternatively move the tool manually
or automatically until it is in the correct position.
(3) Select Menu 6, CHECKING OF NC DATA and depress the soft key
CHECK START.
(4) Execute the NC program in Machine Lock Mode. The tool drawing
moves according to the given commands and the manner in which the
blank is cut can be monitored.
161
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
3.6.2
Flow of Animation
Screen
Main menu screen
6 INPUT
Animation screen
Setting of parameter
Setting of parameter
for
animated simulation
CHUCK
Standard chuck data
setting screen
Number input
Special chuck data

setting screen
TAILSTOCK
Standard tailstock
data setting screen
TOOL HOLDER
Tool holder
number list
Number input
Special tailstock
data setting screen
DATA SET
Tool holder data

setting screen
D Press the software key END on each screen to return to the previous
screen.
D Press the Menu screen software key to return to the main menu
screen from any screen.
3.6.3
Starting an Animated
Simulation
Select Menu 6 on the main menu screen.

Blank figure is displayed.
The blank drawing is automatically proportionally scaled to a size that

may be contained within the screen.
162
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
NOTE
When the value of system parameter 750 is 1, the blank
drawing will be scaled to a magnification so that it will cover
nearly all of the display. If this scale needs to be changed,
it can be changed to various sizes of the drawing.
For data of the blank drawing, use data of L and D input with the key of
Menu 1, BLANK & PART (DRAWING & BLANK).
The following procedure is used for the animated simulation:
(1) Prepare conditions on the machine side
1) Set the coordinate system so that the work coordinates of the tool
may meet its current coordinates at the start of the program or move
the tool to the starting point of a program.
2) Execute the heading of the NC program.
3) Set to Machine Lock Mode.
(2) Press the CHECK START key among the soft keys. START will
then be indicated in the lower right section of the screen.
(3) Put the machine in NC operation
When a T Code is given, the tool drawing is represented and the
situation of the blank being cut can be visually observed.
In the case of clash between tool and chuck, or tool and tailstock the
interference check functions as an alarm, and then the situation is
displayed on the screen. For 2path lathe the interference alarm is
generated in the case of clash between tool and tool.
163
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
NOTE
The interference check is performed only within the screen.
Meaning of SOFT KEY
[CHECK START] . . . . . Depress with the start of the animated
drawing function.
[ORIGINAL] . . . . . . . . Exit to a blank drawing before cutting.
[ACA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To use the function for automatically
avoiding collisions (option supported only
by 15TTFB), press the [ACA] soft key to
highlight it. Once the [CHECK START]
soft key is pressed. the [ACA] soft key is
disabled.
[TOOL PATH] . . . . . . . When TOOL PATH is displayed in reverse
video, the tool path is displayed.
[PARAMETER] . . . . . . Depress when setting parameters on
animated drawings.
[DRAWNG RANGE] . . Depress to enlarge or reduce shape.
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exit to a Main Menu screen.
When bit 0 or 1 of system parameter 19 is set on, the operation of a vertical
lathe is simulated on the screen.
164
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
When the vertical lathe is selected, turret 1 is shown to the right of the
workpiece.
3.6.4
Press [PARAMETER]
Setting of Parameters
for Animated
Simulation
(1) CHUCK NO.

Up to 21 chuck figures can be registered (No.116 is the standard
figure, No.2125 is the special figure). This item select which chuck
of them is drawn.
(2) DEPTH OF CHUCKING, XPOSITION OF CHUCK
This data is for fixing the chuck drawing position. When the chuck
is an outer or inner claw one, and the blank figure is a round rod or
hollow round rod, the chuck drawing position is determined only by
DEPTH OF CHUCKING. In other cases (When the chuck is a
special one or the blank figure is special), the chuck drawing position
is determined by both DEPTH OF CHUCKING and
XPOSITION OF CHUCK.
165
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
Example 1) For outer claw check and round rod
Example 2) For special chuck
(3) TAILSTOCK NO.

Up to 7 types of tailstocks can be registered (1 and 2 indicate the
standard figures, while 11 to 15 indicate special figures). This is used
to indicate which tailstock is drawn.
(4) POSITION OF TAILSTOCK
This data is used to set the drawing position of tailstock. Input the
distance from the work zero point.
a) In the case of standard tailstock:
b) In the case of special tailstock:

The figure is specified by point data. Drawing is made so that the
distance between the point data 0 and work zero point is equal
to ZT.
NOTE
Be careful since simulation of the machining state may not
be conducted accurately if an excessively wide scale is
adoped.
166
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
[MENU SCREEN] . . . .
[CHUCK] . . . . . . . . . . .
[TAILSTOCK] . . . . . . .
[TOOL HOLDER] . . . .
Return to the main menu screen.

Screen for setting chuck figure appears.
Screen for setting tailstock figure appears.
Screen for setting tool holder figure
appears.
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . Press this to select the question
items.
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to the previous screen (animation
drawing screen here).
3.6.5
[CHUCK]
Setting of Chuck
Figure
There are two types of chuck figures, namely standard figure and special
figure.
Up to 16 standard figures and up to 5 special figures can be registered.
The numbers 116 and 2125 are assigned to the standard figure and
special figure, respectively.
(1) Setting of standard figure
Set the data L, W, L1, and W1 by referring to the illustration diagram
on the screen.
When the cursor is at the TYPE position, either OUT or IN is
displayed.
Press either software key to select type.
[MENU SCREEN] . . . . Return to the main menu screen.
[UNDEFINE] . . . . . . . . Let the data where a cursor exists to an
undefined one.
[NO. ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor moves to the start of next line.
167
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(2) Setting of special figure

When either value of 2125 is input while the cursor is at the NO
position, the screen for setting the chuck data of special figure appears.
Designate the special chuck figure with 16 points. With P1 as the starting
point, connect the values set to P2, P3 in sequence, using a line for
drawing. When the control asks End Point P =, input the final point of
the figure data. The point data after the end point number is not regarded
as the figure forming data.
[CHECK] . . . Draws a pattern, based on the input figure data.
[ERASE] . . . . Erases the drawn pattern.
3.6.6
Setting of Tailstock
Figure
At the parameter setting screen for animated simulation

[TAILSTOCK]
There are two types of tailstocks as in chuck, namely standard and special
figures. Up to 2 special figures and up to 5 special figures can be
registered.
The numbers 12 and 1115 are assigned to the standard figure and
special figure, respectively.
168
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
1) Setting of standard figure

Set the data D, D1, D2, D3, L, L1, and L2 by referring to the
illustration diagram on the screen.
[UNDEFINE] . . . . . . . . Let the data where a cursor exists to an
undefined one.
[NO. ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor moves to the start of next line.
2) Setting of special figure
When either value of 1115 is input while the cursor is at the NO
position, the screen for setting the tailstock figure of special figure
appears.
As with special chuck profile designation, the profile is determined by
the point indication to within 16 points. Set P1 as the starting point
and set points P2, P3, ... in order and the profile is connected by lines
to these points.
Concerning the question, END POINT P = input the final point of
the profile data. Point data described in the following numbers are not
regarded as profile data.
[CHECK] . . . A figure is drawn based on the input profile data.
[ERASE] . . . . A drawn figure is erased.
3.6.7
Setting of Tool Holder
Figure
In the parameter setting screen for animated simulation

[TOOL HOLDER]
The tool holder number directry screen appears. Up to 32 tool holders can
be set.
[SET DATA] . . . . . . . . . This is a software key for setting figure data.
Move the cursor to the number to be set and
then press this key.
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . Press this key to select the number to
be set.
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to the previous screen (parameter
screen for animated simulation).
169
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
[SET DATA]
The tool profile is divided into the tip section and holder section. Input
the holder profile data onto this screen. The setting procedure is
performed with the point indication the same as for chuck and tailstock.
Up to a maximum points of 16 points and used.
(Example) Data in order to draw the holder profile as shown in the
following figure is:
P1
X=0
Z=0
P2
P3
P4
P5
X = 10.
Z = 5.
X = 200.
Z = 5.
X = 200.
Z = 200.
X = 30.
Z = 200.
P6
P7
X = 30
Z = 30
X = 10.
Z = 50.
END POINT P = 7
Press [CHECK]
170
P8 to P16
No relation
B61804E2/05
3.6.8
Enlargement and
Reduction in the
Animated Screen
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
The enlargement and the reduction of the screen can be specified in the
animated screen of the sixth menu (Check of NC data) by the cursor.
(1) Operation
1) When the sixth menu is selected, it becomes the animated screen.
Push the soft key DRAWING RANGE in this screen.
2) In the screen, the cursor appears and the following questions is
asked.
The drawing range is specified
MAX (100/100)
MAXX =
MIN (100/100)
3) Move the cursor by pressing the soft key [CURSOR ] or
[CURSOR ] and press
value directly and press
INPUT
INPUT
key in this question, or set coordinate

key.
4) Next, answer the question of MAXZ = like 3).

5) Next, answer MINX =, MINZ = similarly.
6) When the setting is ended, push the soft key EXEC.
The screen which was enlarged or reduced after this operation, is
displayed,
7) To display the original size screen, press
DEL
and
INPUT
keys in
the question screen.

(2) Notes on enlargement and reduction
1) Leave the center line of the material profile in the screen if the
material is cylinder. If the center line is extended beyond the screen
for enlargement, the material profile can not be painted out.
2) If the material is hollow cylinder, leave the upper half of the
material profile in the screen.
If extended beyond the screen for enlargement, the material profile
can not be painted out.
3) Leave a part of outline of the material profile in the screen after
enlargement. If the outline of the material profile is beyond the
screen, the material profile can not be painted out.
4) Designate the drawing range before soft key CHECK START is
pushed. After the software key CHECK START is pushed, the
screen can not be enlarged or reduced.
5) On Caxis FAPT animation screen, the screen can not be enlarged
or reduced by the software key DRAWING RANGE.
171
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
3.6.9
Related System
Parameters
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
701
Bit 2 In case of 1, continue drawing even if an interference alarm occurs.

Bit 3 In case of 1, animated drawing cutting simulation will operate even in
Manual Mode.
Bit 4 In case of 1, a center line is not drawn.
Bit 5 In case of 1, the interference check is not executed.
Bit 6 In case of 1, blank figure is redrawn when M30 is executed.
Bit 7 In case of 1, setting the parameter for animation drawing is prohibited.
750
Drawing scale factor

When the value is 1, the blank drawing is enlarged so that it will
almost completely cover the CRT display.
Numbers, 751 through 754 are the parameters which indicate the size of
the tool tip when drawn on. (L: parameter value)
751 Parameter for Drill Tools
In case of the tip angle is 180

752 Parameter for Grooving and Side Tools
753
Parameter for Threadcutting Tools
172
B61804E2/05
754
3.6.10
Input/Output of
Graphic Data
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
Parameter for General Purpose Tools
This section covers the input/output procedure of graphic data (chuck

data, tail stock data, and tool holder data) for animation drawing function.
These data can be input to or output from a PPR and a bubble cassette in
the same way as in other data.
(1) Operation
1 Press DATA SET on the initial screen.
2 For the system asks you NO =, keyin 1 INPUT.
3 A menu of input/output for system data and setting is displayed.
For outputting graphic data, select No.15. For inputting graphic
data, select No.16. For collating graphic data, select No.17.
(Example 1) For outputting graphic data to PPR, key in
NO. = 15, P
(Example 2)
INPUT
For inputting graphic data from a bubble cassette, key in

NO. = 16, B
(Example 3)
INPUT
For collation between the graphic data and paper tape,

key in NO. = 17, P
INPUT
(2) Tape format

(a) Standard chuck
N6001 L1*** P L ; P W ; P L1 ; P W1 ;
No.
1: Outer claw
2: Inner claw
(b) Standard stock
N6001 L21**
P
P
No. P
P
P
P
P
173
D
D1
D2
D3
L
L1
L2
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(c) Special chuck, special tool stock, special holder

N6001 L*0** E
; P X1 ; P Z1 ; .............
No.
End point
1:
2: Tailstock
3: Holder
(3) Error message
(a) I/O NOT READY
This message is displayed when an input or output device is not
ready for operation.
(b) TV ERROR INCLUDING
When a block, in which the number of characters is an add, is used,
this message is displayed.
(c) ILLEGAL FORMAT DATA DETECTED
When a block other than a format described in (2), is used or when
a block other than that to be expected is used, this message is
displayed.
NOTE
1 When the chuck data is input, data is notreplaced. But,
chuck data now being registered is initialized and input data
is newly registered.
2 Data are not output at points larger than end data in the I/O
of special chuck, special tail stock and holder data.
Even if a block number exceeding the maximum point data
is entered, the data is neglected without processing it as an
alarm.
174
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
4. SUB CYCLE FUNCTION
SUB CYCLE FUNCTION
In the MACHINE DEFINITION screen of menu 4, by selecting SUB

CYCLE, it is possible to create an NC message to call the macro body
which haspreviously been created on the NC side.
175
4.1
SETTING OF SUB
CYCLE
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
To prepare the sub cycle process in the definition of the machining, it

is necessary to previously set the sub cycle pattern. In the definition of
the machining, it is selected from among the sub cycle patterns set here.
Sub cycle patterns are called sub cycle file. The flowchart below outlines
the method of file preparation.
Initial
screen
Depress [FAMILY PROGRAM]
Family program
screen
INPUT
Sub cycle name

setting screen
Sub cycle
name input
Sub cycle detail

setting screen
Data input
Depress [END]
176
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
(1) Family program screen

3. SUB CYCLE SETTING, 4. SUB CYCLE OUTPUT, and 5.
SUB CYCLE INPUT are displayed on the family program screen
menu.
The display shifts to the SUB CYCLE SETTING screen when the
following is input.
No. = 5
INPUT
(2) Sub cycle setting

5
INPUT
The sub cycle name is set on this screen.

The sub cycle name is set when the following is input, and the display
shifts to the sub cycle detail setting screen
Sub cycle name
INPUT
The sub cycle name is to be set in up to 10 characters.

A new sub cycle is inserted if the sub cycle name is input by bringing
the cursor to an already set menu number.
To delete a certain sub cycle pattern, bring the cursor to that menu
number, and keyin as follows:
DEL
INPUT
177
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(Soft keys)
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . These keys are used to select the
menu number.
[END] . . . . This key is depressed when the sub cycle file has been
created. The display returns to the family program
screen.
(3) Sub cycle detail setting pattern
The display shifts to the following screen when the sub cycle name is
set.
Set the calling G code, the program number, the address and the
comment of the required argument on this screen.
The G code must always be set. KEYIN AGAIN is displayed if it
is tried to return to the menu screen without defining G code.
The program number should be left undefined if the correspondence
between the calling G code and the called program number is set by
a parameter on the NC side.
Up to 10 arguments are settable. Also the comment is settable in up
to 6 characters. The arguments can be programmed by any addresses
excluding G, L, N, O, and P. For I, J, and K only, they must be
programmed in alphabetical order.
(Soft keys)
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . These keys are used to select the
question to be set. Such a method of
feeding as to leave the address
undefined and to define the comment
only is impossible.
[END] . . . . This key is depressed when all the settings are over. The
display returns to the preceding sub cycle menu screen.
178
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
4.2
(1) Submemory/PPR/Memory cassette

Input/output with the submemory/PPR/Memory cassette is possible
by treating several sub cycle patterns that have been created as one file.
The method of operation is totally the same as the input/output of the
family program.
(a) Input/output with submemory
INPUT/OUTPUT OF
SUB CYCLE FILE
Family program screen

Registering
to sub-memory
Calling from
to sub-memory
INPUT
6, C
or
6
INPUT
7, C
or
7
INPUT
1, @File name
INPUT
1, @File name
INPUT
INPUT
or
1, R, @File name
INPUT
(b) Input/output with PPR

Output
6, P
Input
7, P
INPUT
179
INPUT
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(c) Input/output with Floppy cassette, Handy File

Output
Input
6, B
7, B
INPUT
or
6
1, I
1
INPUT
or
7
INPUT
1, I
INPUT
INPUT
1, A
INPUT
1, @n
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
1, @n
INPUT
1, N
INPUT
The input/output with the BC is the same as that of the family

program.
Refer to chapter V.
(2) Automatic loading of sub cycle file
If a sub cycle file exists in the submemory, it is possible to
automatically load the sub cycle file into the main memory at power
on by previously setting that file name in system parameter NO.770.
180
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
4.3
DEFINITION OF SUB
CYCLE PROCESS IN
DEFINITION OF
MACHINING
WARNING
the machining definition includes any invalid process steps,
the entire machining sequence is reflected on the prepared
NC data. When defining machining, check the specified
machining sequence. Failure to specify a valid machining
sequence may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece
and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly
causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury
to the user.
Sub cycle is displayed in soft key on the menu 4 MACHINING

DEFINITION (kind of machining) screen when the following
conditions are satisfied:
D The sub cycle option is selected.
D MTF NO.1080 is not in the main and sub format.
The method of operation is as follows.
Kind of machining
screen
Bring the cursor to the

process number, and depress
the soft key sub cycle
Sub cycle menu select

screen
Menu number
INPUT
Sub cycle data

pattern
Key-in at
each question
Depress [NEXT PAGE]
181
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(1) MACHINING DEFINITION (kind of machining) screen
If any of CENTER HOLE, TURN, GROOVE. THREAD, or

MILLING in the machining definition is depressed, the soft key
SUB CYCLE will be displayed.
The sub cycle process will be selected by depressing SUB CYCLE.
(2) Sub cycle menu select pattern
The list of the sub cycle names that have been set is displayed.
The display shifts to the sub cycle data screen if the following is
input in response to the question NO. = _ :
Menu number
INPUT
To correct the sub cycle process that has already been defined,
depress the soft key NEXT PAGE, since the menu number is
displayed in the NO. = column, and the display will shift to the sub
cycle data pattern.
(Soft keys)
[PAGE EJECT] . . . . This key is depressed to see the menu which could
not be displayed in one screen.
[NEXT PAGE] . . . . . This key is depressed to go to the sub cycle data
screen while the menu number has already been
set.
[ESCAPE] . . . . . . . . This key is depressed to return to the first menu
screen.
182
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
(3) Sub cycle data screen
The repetition count and the other questions are asked on this screen.
The inputtable values are within the ranges of 0 to 9999 for the
repetition count, of 9999. to 9999. for the arguments and of 1 to 2 for
Turret No.
If the data is left undefined here, the NC data of that address is not
output.
(Soft keys)
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . These keys are depressed to select the
question to be set.
[NEXT PAGE] . . This key is depressed when the data setting is all
over. The display returns to the MACHINING
DEFINITION (kind of machining) screen.
[ESCAPE] . . . . . The display returns to the first menu pattern.
183
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
4.4
PROCESS EDITING
OF SUB CYCLE
(2PATH LATHE)
WARNING
After process editing, check the editing results. If edits are
made incorrectly, the tool may collide with the workpiece
and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly
to the user.
The auxiliary machining process is also edited as well as other machining
process. However, when an auxiliary machining is selected by S CODE
SELECT, no data is displayed under spindle speed column.
Actually control of the S code depends on the auxiliary machining macro
prepared by MTB.
184
B61804E2/05
4.5
OUTPUT OF NC DATA
PROGRAMMING AND
If the sub cycle process is defined in menu 4 Definition of machining,

NC data in the following format is output to turret side in menu 5 NC
DATA PREPARATION:
G (Calling G code) P (Program number)
L (Repetition count) [Argument assignment];
This is explained below by examples. Suppose the following three
patterns are set in the sub cycle file:
1 ROUGHCYCLE G=65 0=1000 A=LENGTH B=DIA. C=WIDTH
2 G66ROUGH
G=66 0=1000 A=LENGTH B=WIDTH
3 G67
G=67
(Example 1)
The sub cycle only is defined in the definition of the cycle. If pattern
number 1 (ROUGHCYCLE) is selected and it is set that TL=1, L=2
A=25.65 B=12.5 C=8.23, the NC data is output to turret 1 side as
follows.
%
O0001;
N0001 G65 P1000 L2 A25.65 B12.5 C8.23;
M05;
M30;
%
(Example 2)
If the same sub cycle as in Example 1 is defined in the following order
of processes:
Process 01
Process 02
Roughing of outer figure (TL=1)

Sub cycle
(TL=1)
the NC data is output as follows:

%
O0001;
N0001 G50 X200. Z380.;
G00 X0. Z180.;
.
.
.
T0100;
M01;
G65 P1000 L2 A25.65 B12.5 C8.23;
M05;
M30;
%
185
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(Example 3)
If the same sub cycle as in Example 1 is defined in the following order
of processes:
Process 01
Sub cycle
Process 02
the following NC data is output:
%
O0001;
N0003 G65 P1000 L2 A25.65 B12.5 C8.23;
N0002 G50 X0. Z180. S2000;
G00 T0101;
.
.
.
T0100;
M01;
X200. Z380.;
M05;
M30;
%
(Example 4)
The modal call should be made in the following order:
1) Define the sub cycle in the definition of machining, and select
pattern number 2 (G66ROUGH).
2) Then define the sub cycle in the next process, and select pattern
number 3 (G67). The repetition count is asked in the sub cycle data
screen. Depress the soft key NEXT PAGE by leaving the asked
repetition count undefined.
3) Insert movement statements by outputting menu 5 NC DATA
PREPARATION in a single step.
%
O0001;
N0001 G66 P2000 A__ B__ ;
Z100.;
X100.;
.
Insert movement statements
.
.
Z200.;
G67;
M05;
M03;
%
186
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
4.6
CAUTIONS AND
NOTES
CAUTION
1 This function involves the creation of a macro call message.
It is a precondition, therefore, that the macro body has
previously been created on the NC side.
2 If the sub cycle process is to be corrected in the definition
of machining, a sub cycle file which is completely identical
to that during new creation must be existing in the main
memory.
3 The family program does not include the sub cycle file which
has been set. To correct the sub cycle process by inputting
a family program including the sub cycle into the process,
therefore, a sub cycle file which is completely identical to
that during new creation must also be input.
NOTE
1 The tool locus is not drawn during the NC data preparation.
2 M01 is not output when the sub cycle ends even if 1 is set
to MTF NO.1136 (to output M01 when the process ends).
3 The sub cycle does not stop in the single step of the
process.
4 It is impossible to create NC data for the 4axis lathe or NC
data in the main and sub format if the process includes a sub
cycle.
187
5. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION

PROGRAMMING AND
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
B61804E2/05
BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION (2PATH LATHE ONLY)
WARNING
the machining definition includes any invalid process steps,
the entire machining sequence is reflected on the prepared
NC data. When defining machining, check the specified
machining sequence. Failure to specify a valid machining
sequence may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece
and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly
to the user.
Machining conducted in one process by the tools of both head 1 and head
2 is called balance cut. The balance cut FAPT function automatically
generates NC data for balance cut. There are the following two types of
balancecut machining.
Type A: This type aims at machining thin and long works with a high
precision. The two tools move in perfect synchronization with
each other.
Type B: This type aims at machining works more efficiently. After the
tool on head 1 cuts the work, the tool on head 2 cuts it deeper,
following the movement of the tool on head 1.
188
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
189

PROGRAMMING AND
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
B61804E2/05
5.1
Balance cut can be used in the following processes.
BALANCE CUTTING
PROCESS
Type A: (1) Roughing of outer diameter (not edges)

(2) Semifinishing of outer diameter (not edges)
(3) Finishing of outer diameter (not edges)
Type B: (1) Roughing of outer diameter
Type A and Type B are distinguished by the value that is set for DELAY
AMOUNT on the data screen. The delay amount determines how much
the head 2 tool lags behind the head 1 tool during machining. Type A is
selected by setting.
DELAY AMOUNT to 0 (no delay), and type B by setting it to a positive
value.
When type B is selected, the tool of turret 2 follows the tool of turret 1
while maintaining the delay specified in revolving speed. (The S code is
output to the program of turret 1.)
System parameter No.707 specifies which process should be a balance
cutting process and whether the machining type should initially be type
A or type B.
System parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
707
Bit 0 Roughing of outer diameter

Bit 1 Semifinishing of outer diameter
Bit 2 Finishing of outer diameter
0 : Not a balance cutting process
1 : Can be a balance cutting process when conditions are met
Bit 7 Roughing of outer diameter by balance cutting
0 : Sets the value of system parameter No.757 as the initial value of the
DELAY AMOUNT prompt on the tool data screen. This selects type
B.
1 : Sets 0 as the initial value of the DELAY AMOUNT prompt on the tool
data screen. This selects type A.
System parameter
757
Initial value of DELAY AMOUNT on the tool data screen

[Unit] rev
190
B61804E2/05
5.2
SPECIFICATION
METHOD
PROGRAMMING AND
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
(1) If system parameter 707 is set to 1 for a process, the BC = prompt

appears on the corresponding TOOL DATA setting screen displayed
by selecting 4 or machining definition from the menu.
If 1 is entered in response to the BC = prompt, the screen on which a tool

of the second turret can be set for balance cutting appears.
If 0 is entered in response to the BC = prompt, or if the tool of the second

turret is left undefined, balance cutting is not executed for the process.
191

PROGRAMMING AND
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
1 Set the same tool tip radius (RN) for both tools. The system
does not check the data other than the radius of the tool tip.
It is recommended to use tools having an identical tip figure.
If tools having different tip figures are used, the workpiece
may vibrated during actual machining and the tool tip may
interfere with the workpiece.
2 A negative value cannot be specified as the delay (DA). The
operator is prompted to specify the delay only when outer
surface roughing is selected. The system accepts 0 or a
positive integer. If 0 is specified, type A is selected. If a
positive integer is specified, type B is selected.
3 The turret numbers (TL) of the two tools must be different.
Specify turret 1 (TL = 1) for the first tool and turret 2 (TL =
2) for the second tool.
4 Select tools having an identical direction of spindle rotation
(SD).
Unless the above instructions are observed, the system gives a warning
and prohibits display of the next screen.
(2) On the machining process list screen which is the first screen of Menu
No.4 (MACHINING DEFINITION), the balance cutting process is
represented by (B) following the T code.
PROC. 01 ROUGH. OF CUT. T0909 (B) X200. Z200.
When the process is not a balance cutting process, (1) or (2) is
displayed after the T code. (1) means cutting by head 1 while (2)
means cutting by head 2.
(3) In the balance cutting process, points whose X coordinate value is 0
must not be specified as the start or end point of the cutting area.
192
B61804E2/05
5.3
USING THE
AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
DETERMINATION
FUNCTION
5.4
PROCESS EDITING
SCREEN
PROGRAMMING AND
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
(1) In a process where system parameter No.707 is set to 1 (balance cutting

is possible), the system tries to select appropriate tools from both
heads.
Only when tools suited to this process are found in both heads, the
system designates the process as a balance cutting process. When two
or more tools are available, the system does not try to select the
optimum one. It searches the tooling file from the top and uses the one
it finds first.
(2) The cursor always stops at the DELAY AMOUNT prompt, so you can
change it to any desired value.
(3) When an appropriate tool is found only in either head, the concerned
process becomes a normal process, not a balance cutting process.
(4) When the X coordinate value of the start or end point of the cutting area
is 0, the concerned process cannot be a balance cutting process.
Suppose the following process is defined.

NO.
1
2
3
4
KIND OF MACHINING
ROUGH. OF CUT.
FIN. OF CUT.
GROOVING
THREADING
HEAD NO.
1, 2 (BALANCE CUT TYPE B)
1, 2 (BALANCE CUT TYPE A)
1
2
At this time, the following data appears on the process editing screen.
NO.
1
2
3
4
(HEAD 1)
(HEAD 2)
SPINDLE SPEED
ROUGH. OF CUT. BALANCE CUT G97 V120 M03 (1)
FIN. OF CUT.
BALANCE CUT G96 V115 M03 (1)
GROOVING
G96 V90 M03 (1)
THREADING
G96 V130 M03 (2)
The soft keys for moving up and down the process (HEAD 1 UP, etc.)
are not valid in the balance cutting process.
193

PROGRAMMING AND
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
5.5
NC DATA
The following NC command data is output.
194
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
NOTE
1 When type B is selected, the M code set at MTF1040
(override cancel ON) is output.
2 When type B is selected, the M code set at MTF1041
(override cancel OFF) is output.
3 When type B is selected, the initial value of a waiting M code
is set using system parameter No. 735.
4 The delay time of the tool on head 2 is calculated based
upon the delay amount (DA) and the surface speed.
5 Balance cut (type A) start G code.
6 Balance cut (type A) end G code.
195

PROGRAMMING AND
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
5.6
RELATED
PARAMETERS
5.7
CONSTANT
SURFACE SPEED
CONTROL FOR
BALANCE CUT B
B61804E2/05
(1) System parameter

No.707, 735, and No.757 are related. Refer to the concerned sections
for the meaning of these parameters.
(2) MTF
(1) No.1140: M code for turning on override cancel (for type B)
This code is not output when 1 is set.
(2) No.1141: M code for turning off override cancel (for type B)
This code is not output when 1 is set.
Whether to exercise constant surface speed control for the balance cut B
function depends on the setting made for system parameter No. 707.
When constant surface speed control is exercised, a waiting M code is
output at the cut point; in addition, a turret waiting M code is output at the
position to which the tool is retracted, by the return escape amount, from
the end point of the cutting path.
196
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
5.8
Be careful of the following when using type B balance cut.
CAUTION AND
NOTES
CAUTION
When the delay amount (DA) is too large, machining of the
second tool may not complete while the first tool is moving
to the next machining position (indicated by the dotted line
in the figure below). In this case, a new S code is output for
the next machining of the first tool.
This may affect the machining of the second tool.
New S code output
Path of the first tool
Path of the second tool
NOTE
1 When there are two or more pocket areas, balance cutting
is not performed from the second pocket.
Balance cutting is performed by head 1 and 2 tools in the
first pocket.
In the second pocket and after, only the tool on head 1 is
used for machining.
Balance cut of type B is
not performed.
Balance cut of type B is

performed.
2 During pocket machining, the second tool may follow the

path of the first tool.
Path of the first tool

Path of the second tool
197
6. AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE

FUNCTION (15TTFB ONLY)
PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION (15TTFB ONLY)
The auto collision avoidance function makes use of the interference check
according to animated simulation function.
The auto collision avoidance function is a function to automatically alter
the program which can evade that interference if the turrets interfere each
other in the simulation according to the animation drawing.
Basically, this function automatically edits the NC program which is
programmed at FAPT side to evade the interference of the turrets. Refer
to the next explanation at the time of the use actually because it happens
that it is not possible to edit correctly in some case.
198
B61804E2/05
6.1
EXPLANATION OF
FUNCTIONS
PROGRAMMING AND
6.AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE

(1) General
This function can edit the program to prevent the interference around
the same position by inserting the waiting M code automatically to the
executing program when the two turrets interfere with each other.
Algorithms of the insertion of the waiting M code is as follows.
(a) The operator decides which of the turret is prior when the
interference occurs. (A turret of either one side can be always made
to take priority according to the setting of the system parameter.)
(b) The program which the turret has priority inserts the waiting M
code next to the executing block (which executes when the
interference occurs). The program which the turret has no priority
inserts the waiting M code before the executing block.
(c) When the executing block is the waiting M code at the side of the
posterior program, it is invalid to insert the waiting M code before
the executing block as two waiting M codes continue.
(d) Two waiting M codes continue as a result of the insertion of the
waiting M code, the first waiting M code is deleted to simplify the
program. After deletion, the waiting M code of the same number
is searched and deleted in another turret program.
However, the actual machining does not have quite the effect if the
waiting M code is not deleted and continue.
(2) Example
The following programs are thought.
Program for the turret 1
.
.
.
.
N100 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N200 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
.
.
.
.
Fig. 6.1 (a)
199

PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05

Fig. 6.1 (b)
(a) When the turret 1 executes the N102 block, the turret 2 executes the
N202 block, suppose that the interference occurs. At this time, the
animation drawing screen becomes as Fig.6.1(b). When the turret
1 is prior to the turret2 (the priority is specified at FAPT side
screen), the waiting M code is automatically inserted next to the
N102 block and before the N202 block. The program is edited as
follows. In the following example, the initial value of the waiting
M code is set to M500.
.
.
.
.
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 500 ; Insertion
M 500 ; Insertion
N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
.
.
(b) Opposite to (a), when the turret 2 is prior to 1, the waiting M code
is automatically inserted before the N102 block and next to the
N202 block.
.
.
.
.
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 500 ; Insertion
N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 500 ; Insertion
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
.
.
The interference occurs at once as this, M code is automatically
inserted. However, NC operation cannot be continued. At the time
of when M code is inserted, the program is rewound automatically
and executes from the lead again.
200
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND

(c) After inserting M500 to (a), as a result of execution from the

beginning of the program again, suppose that the interference
occurred while executing N103 and N202 blocks.
When the turret 1 is prior to 2, the waiting M code M501 is inserted
next to the N103 block at the side of the turret 1. M501 is inserted
before the N202 block at the side of the turret 2. However, M500
is deleted because M500 and M501 continue. M500 is deleted
from the program for the turret 1 if M500 is deleted in the program
for the turret 2 and becomes in the following.
.
.
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 500 ; Deletion
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 501 ; Insertion
.

.
.
N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 500 ; Deletion
M 501 ; Insertion
N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
.
(d) After inserting M500 to (a), as a result of executing from the

beginning of the program again, suppose that the interference
occurred because the turret 1 is moved by M102 block to the turret
2 which stops according to the waiting M code M500. When the
turret 1 is prior to the 2, the waiting M code (M501) is inserted next
to the N102 block at the side of the turret 1.
M501 is inserted before N201 block at the side of turret 2 according
to algorithms of item (1) (c). Consequently, M500 is deleted
because M500 is deleted from program for the turret 2 if M500 is
deleted in program for the turret 1 and becomes in the following.
.
.
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 501 ; Insertion
M 500 ; Deletion
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
.

.
.
M 501 ; Insertion
N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 500 ; Deletion
N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
.

Fig. 6.1 (c)
(3) Completion condition of the auto collision avoidance function

201

PROGRAMMING AND
B61804E2/05
(a) Normal end

(i) When the execution of M02 or M30 of both programs is ended,
judge the interference does not occur and end the program
normally.
(ii)In the case of the setting that the use of this function is only once,
end normally at the time of the occurrence of the interference in
the tools each other.
(b) Abnormal end
(i) The end by the alarm
There is possibility that the alarm occurs by the reason
described as follows while executing this function. The
processing of this function is interrupted at the time of the alarm
occurrence.
1) In the case that the error in the editing occurs.
When the waiting M code continues, an old waiting M code
is deleted and the corresponding M code does not exist in the
program of other turret side.
2) In the case that the interference occurs while executing
subprogram or custom macro statement.
3) In the case that after the program of one side executing M02
or M30, the interference occurred.
The alarm display PS000: SEARCHED DATA NOT
FOUND is done in the above cases.
(ii)The end except the alarm
During the execution of this function, the process is interrupted
by the next operations.
1) In the case of switching from the memory mode to other
mode.
2) When the cycle is started, one side of turret select signal
(IHEAD 1 and IHEAD 2) is not HIGH.
(Make both turret selected signal HIGH when the auto
collision avoidance function is used.)
3) In the case of the resetting state.
202
B61804E2/05
6.2
OPERATION
PROGRAMMING AND

(1) Confirm the setting of the parameter of the auto collision avoidance
function correctly.
(2) Make or read the program to be checked.
(3) Set the memory mode.
(This function is not used by the manual mode, by the automatic mode
except the memory mode. Set the memory mode without fail.)
(4) Suit the operating condition to the real processing as possible.
However, make machine lock signal turning.
(5) Display the screen of animated simulation press the software key
(ACA ON/OFF) and make the state of Turning of ACA.
(6) Press the soft key CHECK START.
(7) Simulation of the real processing is started by turn on/turn off of the
cycle start signal.
(8) If the interference of the tools occurs, it works by the setting of the
system parameter in the following.
1 When No.710 is 0, the question of the priority turret is displayed
in the screen. Input 1 or 2.
2 When the No.710 is 1 or 2, the turret which is set is treated as the
priority turret.
(9) The waiting M code is inserted automatically to a desired position if
the priority turret is decided.
(10) In the case that the system parameter No.704#2 is 0, the beginning of
the program is executed again.
In the case that the system parameter No.704#2 is 1, the program is
rewound and performed.
203

PROGRAMMING AND
6.3
A parameter, necessary for the auto collision avoidance function is as

follows. Both of these are set on FAPT screen.
SYSTEM
PARAMETER
B61804E2/05
(1) Specification of the priority turret

System parameter No.710 (An initial value 0)
0: At the time of the occurrence of the interference, the operator sets.
1: The turret 1 takes priority.
2: The turret 2 takes priority.
(2) An initial value of the waiting M code which is inserted automatically
System parameter No.731 (An initial value 200)
Setting range: 100 999
(3) Setting whether the auto collision avoidance function is used
repeatedly until the interference does not occur.
System parameter No.704#2 (An initial value 0)
0: Repeatedly the auto collision avoidance function is used.
If the interference occurs, the waiting M code is inserted, and
executed from the beginning of the program again.
1: the auto collision avoidance function is used only once.
Once the interference occurs, the waiting M code is inserted, the
program is rewound and ended.
204
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND

6.4
NOTES
NOTE
1 During executing undermentioned NC program, this
function does not work correctly.
(1)Continuous thread cutting
(2)Multiple repetitive cannot cycle
(3)Balanced cutting
(4)Highspeed machining
(5)Macro statement
(6)Subprogram
If the interference occurs when (1) (4) is being executed,
the waiting M code is inserted near of that block
unconditionally.
If it occurs when (5), (6) is being executed, it becomes the
error as described at item 6.1 (3) (b).
2 At the time of the occurrence of the interference, the
resetting signal is output from NC side.
3 After CHECK START of the soft key is pressed, the soft
key of ACA ON/OFF is invalid. Press the software key of
ACA ON/OFF after ORIGINAL if alter the state from
ACA ON to ACA OFF after CHECK START is pressed
or are oppsite state of that.
4 If any interference already occurs at the time of the press of
CHECK START of the soft key, this function is invalid.
5 If animation drawing was discontinued by pressing
ORIGINAL of the soft key etc. in FAPT screen after the
cycle start, this function is ended at atheat time. However,
the memory operation is continued.
6 If the interference except tool 1 and tool 2 occurs, this
function is ended at that time. However, the memory
operation is continued.
7 When the operator specifies the priority turret, specify the
same side turret in the program which the interference
occurs around the same place. If not, there is the possibility
that the program is not edited correctly.
8 The program of the same program number can not be
executed by both turrets. The interference of the tools with
each other occurs if executed, but the waiting M code is not
inserted.
205
IV. VARIOUS FILE AND DATA
B61804E2/05
VARIOUS FILE AND DATA
MEMORY COMPOSITION
209
1. MEMORY COMPOSITION
B61804E2/05
1.1
MAIN MEMORY AND
SUBMEMORY
The external input/output device means the Handy File, for instance.
The term input/output (registering, calling) of files is used with
reference to the main memory. Namely, input of *** (registering)
means the input from submemories or external I/O device to the main
memory. Output of *** (calling) means the output from the main
memory to the submemory or the external I/O device.
Data cannot be directly be transferred among an submemory or an
external I/O Device. For example, to enter data of the external I/O device
to the submemory, data must pass through the main memory. Work of this
type can be done as follows:
(1) Input (call data of the external I/O device to the system memory.
(2) Output (Register) the data from the system memory to the file area.
1.1.1
The submemory is divided into the following:
Submemory
1) System area
2) File area
In the system area, system parameters, machine tool files (MTF) setting
data, tool data and animation drawing data resident. The file area can be
used freely by the user to store some files, such as family program,
material file, tooling file, and sub cycle file.
Since the contents of the submemory are retained even when the power
is off, they can be input (called) to the main memory immediately after
the power is turned on.
210
B61804E2/05
1.1.2
Main Memory
Multiple family programs, material files, and sub cycle files can be
written and stored in the file area.
If specific file names are set in the following system parameters, they are
loaded from the file area to main memory automatically when the power
is turned on:
System parameter No.16: Material data file name
System parameter No.17: Tooling information file name
System parameter No.770: Sub cycle file name
211
1.2
B61804E2/05
The family program, material data, and tooling information and sub cycle
file can be stored with file names in the submemory. The name of the file
stored can be displayed on the CRT or a file can be deleted by the operation
described below.
DISPLAY OF
SUBMEMORY FILE
NAME AND FILE
DELETION
Initial screen
Press [FAMILY
PROGRAM] key.
Press [DATA SET] key.
** FAMILY PROGRAM **
Menu screen
** PARAMETER&DATASET **
Menu screen
Press [FILE NAME]

key.
File name list stored

in submemory
File to be deleted?
Not only the file names of the family

programs, but also the file names of
material datas, tooling informations
and sub cycle files are displayed.
NO
YES
Search number
by [CURSOR ]
or [CURSOR ]
DEL
several times.
INPUT
YES (delete)
Delete that file really?
Press [END] key.
NO (do not delete)
INPUT
212
INPUT
B61804E2/05
1.3
ADDITIONAL
PARAMETER OF
SUBMEMORY
1.4
NO. OF FILES
REGISTERABLE IN
SUBMEMORY
File area capacity is 64 k bytes (standard).

If additional submemory option is provided, the capacity is extended up
to 128 k bytes.
If option parameter was changed, turn off the power once, turn on power
again, and initialize the submemory. To initialize the submemory, select
[AUXILIARY] in the initial screen, input CFINT INPUT
to the question, REQUEST = .
For details, see CHAPTER VII AUXILIARY JOB.
The standard values for the number of files able to be registered in

submemory are:
When there are no additional submemory: 30
When there are additional submemory: 40
However, it is possible to change these values when initializing
submemory, after pressing the CFINT to initialize submemory.
After pressing the CFINT to initialize submemory, the following
message will appear on the screen:
KEY IN OK OR NO
EXECUTION = OK <,NUMBER OF
MEMBER >
EXECUTION =
Usually 1 only is typed, however by using the EXECUTION = 1,
numeral , it is possible to register up to 99 files in submemory, as long
as the space remaining in the submemory is sufficient. The amount of
space in the submemory can be determined by displaying a list of stored
file names.
213
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF DATA
CAUTION
Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the
entered commands on the screen. Operating the machine
using an invalid command may result in a loss of data.
214
B61804E2/05
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
2.1
INPUT/OUTPUT WITH
SUBMEMORY
2.1.1
System Parameter,
MTF, Setting Data
The above data are output (registered) to the submemory by displaying

the setting screen of each data and pressing the [SAVE END] soft key.
Input from the submemory is done without any operation, because it is
automatically load to the main memory when power is turned on.
NOTE
How to display the setting screen of each data is explained
later.
2.1.2
Family Program,
Material Data, Tooling
Information Sub Cycle
File
In the screen displaying xxx INPUT (calling) or xxx OUTPUT,

registering key in,
No. = Numeral, C
INPUT
to the question NO. =.

(The , C can be omitted. See (Note 1).)
EF = will be questioned for input or output to/from the prescribed file,
so specify the file name, and perform the input/output. When inputting,
take out file from the specified submemory, and input (call) in to the main
memory. When outputting, add the specified file name, and output
(register) it to the submemory.
215
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
For example, when inputting (calling), family program from the

submemory, input as following.
2, C
INPUT
or 4, C
(Photo A)
INPUT
When outputting (registering) material file to the submemory, input as

following.
4, C
INPUT
. (Photo B)
(1) Output to the submemory (registering)

The following question will be displayed.
EF = OK < , REP > , @ File name
EF = _
(1 : OK, 0 : NO, R : REP)
Input as following for this message.
1, @ File name
INPUT
. . . . . . . Write in the file next to the last file of

the submemory.
1, R, @ File name
INPUT
. . . . If the file specified here is already in
the submemory, delete the file, and

write it newly. If the file name is not
in the memory, simply add the file.
(2) Input from the submemory (calling)
The following question will be displayed.
EF = PK < , File name or NXT >
EF = _
(1 : OK, 0 : NO, N : NXT)
Input as following for this message.
1
INPUT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read the head file of the submemory.
1, @ File name
216
INPUT
. . . . Read the file with specified file name.
B61804E2/05
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
NOTE
1 Submemory or memory cassettes are used for storage of
the family program, material file and tooling file, sub cycle
file. Use of the submemory or the memory cassette can be
designated with system parameter No.0015.
System parametre
0015
7
0
6
0
5
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
Output device
0: External I/O device
1: File area
Input device
0: External
I/O device
1: File area
In both input and output devices, the initial value is 1 (sub

memory).
In general, the input/output device is selected by changing
the setting of parameter No.0015. However, it is also
possible to use the other device without changing the
parameter.
Instead of keying in 1 INPUT, key in 1, B INPUT to set
input/output with respect to the memory cassette, or key in
1, C INPUT to set input/output to the submemory. (When
, B or , C is omitted, the device set at parameter No.15
is applied.)
2 Each file name must be put when entering family program,
material data, tooling information or sub cycle file to
submemory.
The file name may be either numeric or alphanumeric, but
must be within 15character long.
3 You may have family program, material data, tooling
information and sub cycle file entered in a file area at the
same time.
If this case, however, it is impossible to mistake, for example
tooling file for family program. The same is true to the
procedure of memory cassette.
(3) Replacing files

1) Key in the following when replacing the file registered on the sub
memory by the data on the main memory as described in (1):
1, R, @ file name INPUT
2) Then, the following question appears, meaning Is replacing
actually performed ?:
REPLACE OK searched file name (1: OK 0: NO)
REP =
3) Key in 1
INPUT
and 0
INPUT
when performing replacement
with the searched file name or when not performing it for this
question, respectively.
217
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
It is possible to specify a file name in abbreviated from on

replacement.
Even if it is specified in abbreviated form, the actually replaced file
name becomes that searched.
Example 1)
Suppose there are two files within the sub memory, namely ABC
and XYZ. At this time, it is possible to specify either 1, R, @A or
1, R, @AB INPUT when performing replacement with the ABC
file.
If there are plural number of file names corresponding to the file name
(character string) keyed in on replacement, a message for Perform
keying in again is output and no replacement processing is carried out.
Example 2)
Suppose there are three files within the sub memory, namely ABC,
A2, and XYZ.
At this time, if the 1, R, @A INPUT is specified, the perform
keying in again message is displayed and no replacement processing
is performed since there are two file names corresponding to A
(character string) and it is not possible to distinguish which was
specified.
Specify 1, R, @A2 INPUT in full name when performing
replacement of file, namely A2.
(4) Recording and reading family data automatically
With this function, family data can be retained when the power is
turned off while the user is programming. As a result, the user can
continue programming after turning on the power again.
Family data is a collection of data that makes up a family program.
The following data is recorded automatically as it is input during
programming:
Blank figure data Cutting condition data Material data
Part figure data
Machining data
Tooling information
Caxis figure data Yaxis figure data
Process editing data etc.
When the power is turned on, the recorded family data is arranged in
order and restored. Note that, however, the family data is not read
when the power is turned on while one of the following keys is being
pressed:
1) When the power is turned on while the SP key is being pressed
2) When the power is turned on while the I key is being pressed
(In this case, all family data is cleared.)
3) When family data is not recorded correctly
218
B61804E2/05
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
NOTE
1 When a figure is defined, the warning message WARNING
CHECK INPUT DATA may be displayed. If this message
appears turn off the power, then turn on the power again
while holding down the I key.
This warning message is generated when approximately 50
elements are entered successively in incremental mode.
2 When a software edition has been upgraded, turn on the
power while holding down the I key.
3 When the power is turned on, the system reads family data,
then loads specific files automatically.
This means that the automatically loaded data takes
precedence over the other data.
4 When the power is turned on, the system reads family data,
then system parameters.
If the program contents differ from the system parameter
settings, care must be taken. For example, if the initial
values for the drawing format and part direction specified in
the program are different from the values of the
corresponding system parameter Nos.200 and 240,
respectively, the original system parameter values are used
immediately after the power is turned on.
5 Immediately after the power is turned on, the priority of the
common data varies depending on bit 0 of system
parameter No.708.
2.1.3
File Protection
When a file is registered in submemory, the file can be protected so it is

not deleted by mistake. (Provide protection for those files that should not
be deleted, such as files to be loaded automatically.)
1. A password is used for protection. Before protection can be provided,
a password must be set in system parameter No.739.
System parameter No.739 = DDD
Example : System parameter 739 = 123
(Set the file protection password, using a 3digit number.)
2. Creating a file
Select 1. FAMILY PROGRAM OUTPUT on the family program
input/output screen.
Then, the following prompt is appears on the screen. (No guidance
message about protection appears on the screen.)
EF WRITING. KEY IN OK OR NO
EF = OK <, REP>, @FILE NAME
EF =
(1: OK 0: NO R: REP)
219
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
In response to this message, enter one of the following:

1, @file name . . . . . . . . . . Writes the file immediately after the last
file in submemory.
1, R, @file name . . . . . . . . If the specified file name is already
present in submemory, the existing file
is erased, and the new file is written
without protection. If the specified file
name is not present in submemory, the
file is just added to submemory.
1, P, @file name . . . . . . . . Provides protection for the specified
file, and writes the file immediately after
the last file in submemory.
1, R, P, @file name . . . . . . If the specified file name is already
or

1, P, R, @file name . . . .
present in submemory, the existing file
is erased,and the new file is written with
protection.
If the specified file name is not present
in submemory, the file is just added to
submemory.
3. When a file is registered with protection, a list of submemory
capacities appears as follows:
*** REGISTERED FILE NAME *** (MAX 128KB)
NO.
FILE NAME
USED MEMORY
1
P
AUTOMAT
1.25 %
2
ASAHIKOGYO
5.32 %
3
P
TOOLINGDATA
3.14%
4
FUJIYAMAKIKAI
8.08 %
5
WORKDATA
1.02 %
.
.
.
The files marked with P are being protected.
.
.
.
4. Deleting a protected file
(1) On the submemory file directory screen, move the cursor to the
number of the file you want to delete, then enter DEL (INPUT).
(2) The following message is displayed for confirmation:
FILE NO. (1: OK 0: NO)
DEL = _
Enter 1 (INPUT). The specified file is then deleted.
(3) If the file to be deleted is protected, the following message appears:
THIS FILE IS PROTECTED
IF YOU WANT TO DELETE THIS FILE, KEY IN PASSWORD
PLEASE
PW = _
Enter the threedigit number set in system parameter No.739 (123
in example 1.).
220
B61804E2/05
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
To cancel the deletion of the file, just enter (INPUT). Then, the
previous submemory file directory screen is redisplayed.
If an incorrect password is entered, the deletion is canceled, and the
previous submemory file directory screen is redisplayed.
If the correct password is entered, the file is deleted.
5. Replacing a protected file
(1) When replacement is specified, the following message apperas:
REPLACE OK? [file name searched for] (1: OK 0: NO)
REP = _
Enter 1 (INPUT). Then, the file is replaced with the data in main
memory.
(2) If the file to be replaced is protected, the following message
appears:
THIS FILE IS PROTECTED
IF YOU WANT TO REPLACE THIS FILE, KEY IN PASSWORD
PLEASE
PW = _
Enter the threedigit number set in system parameter No.739 (123
in the example 1.).
To cancel the replacement, just enter (INPUT). Then, the previous
submemory input/output screen is redisplayed.
If an incorrect password is entered, the replacement is canceled,
and the previous submemory input/output screen is redisplayed.
If the correct password is entered, the file is replaced.
NOTE
1 If the auxiliary operation, SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION,
is executed, all files including protected files are deleted.
2 If no password is defined (system parameter No.739) or if
the password does not consist of three digits, protected files
cannot be deleted.
221
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
2.1.4
Function For
Automatically
Registering
Parameters and Data in
Submemory
B61804E2/05
System parameters, MTF data, and setting data read from an external
storage device can be registered in submemory, without having to press
the [REGST.] soft key on each setting screen.
For example, in case that calling a system parameter from the FANUC
Floppy Cassette adapter.
(1) 3, B, S
(INPUT)
Submemory registration command

(2) 1, @5 (INPUT)
By entering the above text, the fifth file on the Floppy Cassette is
called as a system parameter and stored into main memory, then
automatically registered in submemory.
222
B61804E2/05
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
2.2
COLLATION AND
INPUT/OUTPUT WITH
FLOPPY CASSETTE
2.2.1
System Parameter,
MTF, Tool Data, Setting
Data, Drawing Data
In the screen displayed with *** INPUT (calling), *** OUTPUT

(registering), or *** COLLATING, key in,
No. = Numeral, B
INPUT
to the question NO. =.
For example, when inputting (calling) system parameter from the floppy
cassette or the Handy File, key in,
No. = 3, B
INPUT
When outputting MTF to the floppy cassette or the handy file, key in,
No. = 6, B
INPUT
A question, BC = will be given to perform data input/output or

collation, so answer must be given.
(1) Output to the floppy cassette, the handy file
The following question will be given.
Set BC, and key in OK or NO.
BC = OK < , INT OR ADD OR @ FILE NO. >
BC = _
(1 : OK 0 : NO A : ADD)
For the above message, specify where data is to be stored in the floppy
cassette from the keyboard.
223
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
1, I
INPUT
B61804E2/05
. . . . . . . . . . . Writes data to the cassette from the head

of the volume.
INPUT
or 1, A
INPUT
. . Writes data to the cassette from the end

of the last file.
1, @ n
INPUT
. . . . . . . . Writes data to the cassette from file n.

Thus, file n and subsequent files are
replaced by the new file.
(n is positive integer such as 1, 2, ...)
(a) 1, I
(b) 1
INPUT
INPUT
or 1, A
INPUT
New file (No. 4)
(c) 1, @ n
INPUT
INPUT
The yellow LED of floppy cassette adapter lights alternately during

writing data.
(2) Input (call) from the floppy cassette, the handy file and collation
The following question will be given.
Set BC, and key in OK or NO.
BC = OK < , @ FILE NO. OR NXT >
BC = _
(1 : OK 0 : NO N : NXT)
For the above message, specify which file is to be read from the floppy
cassette.
224
B61804E2/05
. . . . . . Reads the first file on the volume.
NL
1, @ n
1, N
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
. . Reads file n. (n is positive integer such as 1, 2, ...)
NL
NL
. . . . Reads the file next to the one previously read.
The green LED of adapter lights alternately during reading data.

(3) Note
NOTE
When the handy file is used, it must be controlled by
following the operations explained in (1) and (2) above.
Do not operate the handy file directly.
2.2.2
Family Program,
Material Data, Tooling
Information, Sub Cycle
File
2.2.3
Handling of Floppy
Cassette and Adapter
In the screen displaying *** INPUT (calling) or *** OUTPUT

(registering), key in,
No. = Numeral, B
INPUT
to the question, NO. =. (, B can be omitted. See (Note 1) of item 2.1.2.)

Operations hereafter will be done in the same method as shown in the
previous section.
The files cannot be collated.
(1) Contents and status of floppy cassette

A unit of input/output data for a floppy cassette is called a file.
More than one file can be stored on one cassette volume, and a single
file can extend over more than one cassette, as shown in the above
figure.
225
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
(a) File number

Files stored on a floppy cassette are numbered sequentially starting
from file number 1. Thus, files are numbered in sequence of
storage in the cassette. That is, file 3 is the third file stored if the
beginning of a cassette is the beginning of a file like the cassette 1
case. When file number k+1 is specified for the volume 1, file
numbers are extended to volume 2 in which the file k+1 is searched,
judging that file k+1 is not on volume 1 or the remaining data in
the last file on the volume 1 is continued to on volume 2.
In this case, the system notifies to the operator to replace volume
1 with volume 2 by flickering the red and green light emitting
diodes (LEDs) alternately. However, if volume 2 where the
beginning of a cassette is not the beginning of a file is mounted
first, the first file on the volume (in this case, the remaining data
for file k on volume 2) is ignored if a file is searched. If file number
1 is specified, for example, file k+1 on volume 2 is searched. If
volume 1 is replaced by volume 2 during the file search and a new
file number i is specified, the ith file from the file positioned next
to the remaining data file is searched.
(b) Status of floppy cassette
When a floppy cassette is ready for operation, the operator is
notified by the display LEDs on the floppy cassette adaptor.
(2) Notes for family program input
Each file is initialized when data are read from the floppy cassette after
specifying the family program input. Accordingly, if the floppy
cassette is disconnected during read or if a data other than family
program is read (No data is read as a result.), the file contents in the
15TF main memory are broken. Particularly be careful with the
selection of input/output, accordingly.
(3) When floppy cassette was fully loaded
If the floppy cassette was fully occupied with data during data loading,
the red and green lamps alternately flicker in the memory cassette
adapter. Set a new memory cassette.
(4) Mixing of files
The family programs, material files, tooling files, and sub cycle files
can be mixedly loaded into the same floppy cassette. In this case, a
tooling file cannot be read being regarded as family program, for
example.
(5) Document
For operation of the floppy cassette/adapter, refer to the operators
manual for FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE (B66040E).
226
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
2.3
Three reader/puncher interfaces can be used at symbolic FAPT side,

which interface is used is determined by the value of setting data No.900.
Baud rate and stop bit values can be changed by setting data No.901 and
902.
FAPT I/O INTERFACE
No.900 The reader/puncher interface number (1 3)

No.901 Setting of baud rate
Setting value
10
11
Baud rate
50
100
110
150
200
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
No.902 Setting of stop bit

=1: Stop bit 1 (FANUC unit) . . . . . . . . . . . .
=2: Stop bit 2 (FANUC unit) . . . . . . . . . . . .
=5: Stop bit 1 (Other than FANUC Unit) . .
=6: Stop bit 2 (Other than FANUC Unit) . .
DC code is used.
DC code is used.
No DC code is used.
No DC code is used.
NOTE
1 In FANUC units, DC code is always used. In other than
FANUC units, DC code cannot be used.
2 When inputting and outputting various data, using I/O
devices other than a FANUC unit, key in , P INPUT.
Example:
When outputting a family program:
When the system asks No. = 0 on the family program I/O screen, key
in as follows:
NO. = 1. P
INPUT
When the baud rate and stop bit setting are not adequate, the baud rate,
stop bit value and the use of DC code are set automatically to the
following values. The preset value on the CRT display screen remains
unchanged.
Baud rate= 4800 bauds
Stop bit = 2 bits
DC code = Used
NOTE
1 The NC control side is also provided with an Interface No.
and a parameter for setting the baud rate and stop bit, but
since NC control and FAPT control are of independent
processing, it is not necessary to set these values to the
same level in particular. However, when using the same
interface number part for both NC data I/O and FAPT data
I/O, using the same equipment, set the same value for baud
rate and stop bit.
2 NC data I/O and FAPT data I/O cannot be executed at the
same time.
227
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
2.4
REGISTRATION OF
FILE NAME ONTO
FLOPPY CASSETTE,
HANDY FILE
(OPTION)
B61804E2/05
(1) Method
1) When outputting data onto a floppy cassette it is normal to respond
to the question NO = by inputting a numeral followed by B.
When naming a file, however, F should be entered in place of
B.
(Example)
In order to output a system parameter with a file name key in:
NO = 2, F
2) Responses to the following questions remain unchanged:
SET BC, AND KEY IN OK OR NO.
BC = OK <, INT OR ADD OR @ FILE NO.>
BC = (1:OK, 0:NO, I:INT, A:ADD)
3) Now specify file name
STANDARD FILE NAME: FAPTSYS.PARAM.
KEY IN THE FILE NAME.
PRESS INPUT KEY ONLY, IF YOU ACCEPT STANDARD
FILE NAME
FILE NAME = _
The following files names will first be displayed automatically
depending on the data to be output:
a) System parameter . . . . . FAPTSYS.PARAM.
b) MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FAPTMTF
c) Setting data . . . . . . . . . . FAPTSETTING
d) Tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . FAPTTOOL
e) Graphic data . . . . . . . . . FAPTGRAPHIC
f) Family program . . . . . . FAPTFAMILY
g) Material data . . . . . . . . FAPTMATERIAL
h) Sub cycle file . . . . . . . . FAPTSUB.CYCLE
i) Tooling information . . . FAPTTOOLING
If the standard file name is acceptable then press the INPUT key.
If you wish to register an alternative file name then specify your
preferred name up to a maximum of 17 characters. @ cannot be
used in a file name.
(2) Method of displaying file names
Refer to OPERATORS MANUAL for CNC 15T or 16T.
(3) File input
When reading in a file which has been output in this way the correct
response to the question BC = is to key in a numeral and then B
as before.
(4) Limitations
1) Two files with the same name cannot be registered on the same
cassette.
2) When specifying a file name:
a) If 18 or more characters are keyed in, only the first 17 characters
of the name specified will be registered as the file name.
b) If @ is used for part or all of a file name then the error message
key in again will be displayed on the monitor screen.
Since File name = has not yet disappeared from the screen it
is still possible to specify and register a correct file name.
228
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
2.5
Tooling information and material data can be punched out from the
external equipment in a specific format using ISO/EIA code. In addition,
data which is created on the computer beforehand can be read.
This function cannot be used for 5700 series of 16T CAPII.
FILE DATA
INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION
NOTE
With the 16T CAP II, EIA code cannot be input/output.
2.5.1
(1) The file data input/output function is enabled only when bit 4 of
system parameter No.708 is on.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
708
Bit 4 0 : Tooling information and material data are input/output in binary form
(conventional specification).
1: Tooling information and material data are input/output using the ISO
or EIA code (new specification).
(2) Whether the ISO code or EIA code is used depends on the setting in
system parameter No.1.
NOTE
In the 16T CAP II, the ISO code is always set for
input/output.
2.5.2
Screen
The conventional screen display for input/outout has not been changed.
If bit 4 of system parameter No.708 is 1, however, a comment is added
as follows:
Initial screen
DATA
SET
=*= PARAMETER & DATA SET =*=

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT

SETTING DATA CORRECTION
MATERIAL DATA CORRECTION
MATERIAL DATA OUTPUT
MATERIAL DATA INPUT
TOOLING INFORMATION CORRECTION
TOOLING INFORMATION OUTPUT
TOOLING INFORMATION INPUT
For example, to punch material data on the external equipment, enter the
following in response to NO =:
NO = 4, B (For the floppy cassette or handy file), or
NO = 4, P (for PPR or input/output equipment manufactured by
someone other than FANUC)
229
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
2.5.3
Input/Output Data
Format
B61804E2/05
(1) Material data

M01S45C;
T1;
N11VvFf1;
N12VvFf1;
N13VvFf1;
N14Vv;
N21VvFf1Af2Bf3Dd;
N22VvFf1Af2Bf3Dd;
N23VvFf1Af2Bf3Dd;
N31VvFf1;
N32VvFf1;
N33VvFf1;
N41VvFf1Af2Bf3Cf4;
N42VvFf1Af2Bf3Cf4;
N43VvFf1Af2Bf3Cf4;
N51VvFf1Af2;
N52VvFf1Af2;
N53VvFf1Af2;
N54VvFf1Af2;
N55VvFf1Af2Bf3Cd;
N56VvFf1Af2Bf3Cd;
N57VvFf1Af2Bf3Cd;
N61VvDd;
N62VvDd;
N63VvDd;
N71UvVv2Ff1Af2;
C1;
N1VvTft;
N2VvTft;
N3Vv;
N4VvRfrTft;
C2;
N1VvTft;
N2VvTft;
N3Vv;
N4VvRfrTft;
M02SCM;
T1;
.
.
Name of the first material

CCD for the turn process
(Center drilling)
(Drilling)
(Reaming)
(Tapping)
(Face rough cutting)
(Outer rough cutting)
(Inner rough cutting)
(Face semi finishing)
(Outer semi finishing)
(Inner semi finishing)
(Face finishing)
(Outer finishing)
(Inner finishing)
(Face grooving)
(Outer grooving)
(Inner grooving)
(Necking)
(Face grooving 2)
(Outer grooving 2)
(Inner grooving 2)
(Face threading)
(Outer threading)
(Inner threading)
(Cutting off)
CCD for the Caxis Process, Yaxis
Process (High Speed Tool)
(Center drilling)
(Drilling)
(Tapping)
(End milling)
CCD for the Caxis Process, Yaxis
Process (Carbide Tool)
(Center drilling)
(Drilling)
(Tapping)
(End milling)
Name of the second material
CCD for the turn process
(same as above)
230
B61804E2/05
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
(2) Tooling information

Tooling information has the same format as tool data.
(3) Notes
NOTE
1 When undefined data is to be punched out, only its address
is output, and no data is output.
2 When data is read, all data on memory is replaced by the
new data.
3 If an invalid address is read during the data read operation,
no error occurs, and the address is ignored.
4 If the same address appears twice consecutively in the
same block when data is read, the second data is regarded
as valid.
2.5.4
File Name Registration
in the Floppy Cassette
or Handy File
If bit 4 of system parameter No.708 is on, the following standard file

names are used when file names are registered in the floppy cassette:
Material data . . . . . . . . . . . MATERIAL
Tooling information . . . . . TOOLING
231
V. SETTING AND DISPLAY OF

DATA
B61804E2/05
SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA
1. MATERIAL DATA
MATERIAL DATA
WARNING
Material data, described below, varies with the machine.
For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool
builder. If material data values are not set appropriately for
the actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be
prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may cause
damage to the tool and/or machine, or injury to the user may
result.
235
1. MATERIAL DATA
1.1
When the power supply was input, 17 kinds of materials and machining
conditions, which are being preset in the system, are loaded together, so
that the machining conditions are automatically determined by specifying
materials.
However, it may be desiredto store additional machining conditions
according to the circumstances of works, machines, and machining
methods.
In such a case, the entire data on all 17 kinds of materials and machining
conditions can be named collectively and registered into an external file.
This file is called material file.
Since this material file can store many files, various machining conditions
data can be called simply by specifying the name of required material file.
Preparation of material files results in the accumulation of know how
data.
MATERIAL DATA
AND MATERIAL FILE
236
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
1.2
1) Cutting condition for turning
SETTING AND DATA

WHICH CAN
DISPLAYED
1. MATERIAL DATA
Cutting
speed
Feed rate
Cutting
depth
F1 F2 F3 F4
CENTER DRILLING
DRILLING
REAMING
TAPPING
ROUGH FACING
ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE
ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE
SEMIFINISHING FACING
SEMIFINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE
SEMIFINISHING OF INNER FIGURE
FINISHING FACING
FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE
FINISHING OF INNER FIGURE
GROOVING FACING
GROOVING OF OUTER FIGURE
GROOVING OF INNER FIGURE
THREADING FACING
THREADING OF OUTER FIGURE
THREADING OF INNER FIGURE
D
D
(2 kinds)
Division
CUT OFF
2) Cutting condition with high speed tool in milling machining
Division
Cutting
speed
Feed amount (*)
FR (Diameter
direction)
FT (Axis
direction)
Center drill
Drill
Tap
End mill (*)
(*) Set the feed amount per one blade in case of end mill.
3) Cutting condition with the carbide tool in milling machining.
It is the same as (2).
CAUTION
The increment system of the cutting speed is m/min or
feet/min.
The increment system of the feed rate is mm/rev or inch/rev.
The increment system of the infeed amount is mm or inch.
237
1. MATERIAL DATA
B61804E2/05
1.3
OPERATION
METHOD
1.3.1
Method of Registration
Initial screen
DATA
SET
=0= PARAMETER & DATA SET =0=
Menu screen
3 INPUT
*** PARAMETER & DATA SET *** MATERIAL

NO.
1
2
3
4
5
SAMPLE OF MATERIAL
S45C
SCM
FC
AL
SUS
Register the number by CURSOR
Directory of registered
material name
or CURSOR
Material name to be registered INPUT (Note 1)
End
(1) Cutting condition page for turning (No. 1)

Set various conditions on questions.
BACK PAGE
NEXT PAGE
(2) Cutting condition page for turning (No. 2)

End
BACK PAGE
End
(3) Cutting condition page with high speed tool for Caxis
machining
BACK PAGE
End
NEXT PAGE
NEXT PAGE
(4) Cutting condition page with carbide tool for Caxis

machining
NOTE
Material name shall be within 10 characters. If a material name is already registered at the
position shown by the cursor, the material name newly input is inserted to the cursor position.
Then the material name at the cursor position or subsequent shifts lower one by one.
238
B61804E2/05
1.3.2
Modification method of the material data is almost the same as the method
of the registration. It is possible to do by the next procedure.
Method of Modification
1. MATERIAL DATA
The page can be selected from (1), (2), (3), (4) to (1) of the next material
when NEXT PAGE is pushed. The page can be selected for (4), (3), (2),
(1) to (4) of the pressed, the same page of the next material can be selected.
When the LAST MATERIAL is pressed, the same page of the previous
material is selected.
239
1. MATERIAL DATA
1.3.3
The deletion method of the material data is almost the same as registration
and modification. Only input DEL INPUT in place of entering new
name or pressing DATA SET.
Method of Deletion
240
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
1. MATERIAL DATA
1.4
INPUT/OUTPUT OF
MATERIAL DATA
For details on operation, see CHAPTER IV.
1.5
NOTES ON
MATERIAL FILES
(1) When the power is turned off after data is modified, the data is erased.
So before turning off the power, be sure to register the data in
submemory.
(2) To perform automatic loading of a material file, set the name of the file
in system parameter No.16.
241
2. TOOL DATA AND TOOLING

INFORMATION
TOOL DATA AND TOOLING INFORMATION
242
B61804E2/05

INFORMATION
B61804E2/05
2.1
Tool data corresponds to the tool ledger. All the information about tools
is registered in it. Only 1 tool data is held in the submemory (involatile
memory).
As the tool data, it is possible to store tool configuration data and setting
data for copying to the tooling information and each tool is assigned the
tool management number (ID). Up to 200 turning tools and up to 100
milling tools are registerable.
Tooling information specifies at which position of the turret and in
which manner to set the tool according to the working process to be
executed. Registration of the tool from tool data to tooling information
is called tooling. The tooling information is held as part of the family
program.
At the beginning of the tooling information is the tool selection number
(TN) implying the turret position. And the tool management number
(ID), setting data, etc. are stored. It is possible to register tools of the same
tool management number (ID) at the positions of more than 1 tool
selection numbers (TN).
In the Symbolic FAPT execution, the working program is created based
on the setting data registered in the tooling information.
TOOL DATA,
TOOLING
INFORMATION
TOOLING INFORMATION and TOOL DATA
(1) Tool Data Creation

Correction and new setting are performed on the tool data setting
screen. The new tool data created here is written directly in the
submemory, so the data is held even if the power is switched off and
then on.
Also it is possible to register tool data in the external memory by an
input/output device such as the FANUC cassette, etc. and to call it any
time.
(2) Tooling Information Creation
Normally tooling information is automatically created as Item 4
Working Definition is followed in the FAPT execution. Creation
and correction are also possible on the tooling information setting
screen. AS tooling information is part of the family program, the
tooling information is also replaced as the family program is called to
the main memory.
243

INFORMATION
B61804E2/05
2.2
TOOL DATA DISPLAY
AND SETTING
WARNING
The tool data, described below, varies with the machine.
For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool
builder. If tool data values are not set appropriately for the
actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be
prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in
the tool colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining
occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or
1) Press the DATA SET soft key on the initial screen. The parameter
and data setting menu screen will be displayed.
2) NO = will be prompted, so key in 1, INPUT, and the system data
setting menu screen will be displayed.
3) NO = will be prompted, so key in 9, INPUT, and the tool data
list screen will be displayed.
On the tool data list screen, the tool management number and the tool type
are shown per list number.
Meaning of Soft Keys
MILLING TOOL . . . . . . The milling tool list screen is displayed.
SEARCH NO . . . . . . . . . Used to search for a list number.
In response to the prompt NO = in the
lower part of the screen, input the value of
the list number of the tool to be searched for
and then press SEARCH NO, and the
cursor will move to that number.
DATA SET . . . . . . . . . . . The tool data detail setting screen is
displayed.
CURSOR . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor indicating the list number
CURSOR
moves up/down.
END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press to end the setting. The system data
setting screen is returned to.
Press the SET DATA soft key. Then, the tool data detail setting screen
appears.
244
B61804E2/05

INFORMATION
On the tool data detail setting screen, tool configuration data and setting
data prompts are displayed.
Also an automatic process decision function data (KP) prompt is
displayed.
The tool figure is not displayed for 5700 series of 16T CAP II.
(1) Turning tools
245

INFORMATION
B61804E2/05
Tool management number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID =

Tool type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TP =
Process type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KP =
Tool tip radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RN =
Cutter angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC =
Tool tip angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AN =
Tool tip width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WN/DD =

Virtual tool tip position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XN =
ZN =
Cutter protective angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP =
Setting angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS =
Setting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
Xmirror image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XM =
1: center drill; 2: drill;

3: grooving/necking;
4: thread; 5: general;
8: finger; 9: reamer; 10: tap
Automatic process decision
function prompt
Pitch it tap
Tool tip width if grooving tool
Drill diameter drill
Tool diameter if reamer, tap
Cutter length if reamer, tap
Biting length if reamer, tap
Setting prompts below
Tool rest type

XM = 0 ordinary lathe
XM = 1 Xaxis reversible
lathe (chasing tool rest, etc.)
Spindle rotating direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SD =

Holder number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HL =
Animationdrawing function
prompt
CAUTION
The setting angle (AS) follows the system parameter No.200
drawing format.
(2) In case of the milling tool

See the chapter about the Caxis FAPT function in Part VIII.
(Functions of the soft keys)
[COPY ID.No.] . Used when copying contents of tool data already
set.
First set the tool identification number of the data
to be copied. Check that the tool identification
number is correctly set, and press this soft key.
[UNDEFINE] . . . Used to delete all tool data already set.
When data must be partially undefined, key in
DEL
INPUT
If this soft key was pressed by mistake, set the

former tool identification number only, and press
the COPY (ID. NO.) soft key.
[LAST TOOL] [NEXT TOOL] . . The screen changes to the data
setting screen of the tool
preceding the current tool ID
number or of the tool following
the current tool ID number.
246
B61804E2/05

INFORMATION
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . . . . Used to select question of the

setting tool data.
[CHECK] . . . . . . Displayed when the animated simulation function
option is provided. A tool picture is displayed
based on the currently displayed data.
[END] . . . . . . . . . Used when all setting has ended.
When pressed, it returnes to the list of tool data
screen.
247

INFORMATION
2.3
INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF TOOL
DATA
B61804E2/05
As mentioned in the previous section, the tool data can be set and
corrected via the MDI & CRT keys. They can also be input/output or
collated with the floppy cassette or FA card.
(Operation)
Initial screen
DATA
SET
... PARAMETER & DATA SET
Menu screen
INPUT
*** SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT ***

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING

SYSTEM PARAMETER OUTPUT
SYSTEM PARAMETER INPUT
SYSTEM PARAMETER COLLATING
MTF SETTING
MTF OUTPUT
MTF INPUT
MTF COLLATING
TQOL DATA SETTING
TQOL DATA OUTPUT
TQOL DATA INPUT
TQOL DATA COLLATING
Output
10, B
INPUT
13.
14.
15.
16.
SETTING DATA OUTPUT

SETTING DATA INPUT
GRAPHIC DATA OUTPUT
GRAPHIC DATA INPUT
0.
END
Input
11, B
INPUT
or
10, F
INPUT
For details of operation, see CHAPTER IV.
248
Collation
12, B
INPUT
B61804E2/05

INFORMATION
2.3.1
Tool Data Input/Output
Format
(Turning tools)
NDDDP__ ; tool management number
NDDDP__ ; tool type
NDDDP__ ; tool tip radius/pitch
NDDDP__ ; cutter angle
NDDDP__ ; tool tip angle
NDDDP__ ; tool tip width or drill diameter/tool diameter
NDDDP__ ; virtual tool tip position (Zaxis)/biting length
NDDDP__ ; virtual tool tip position (Xaxis)/cutter length
NDDDP__ ; setting angle
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Zaxis)
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Xaxis)
NDDDP__ ; cutter protective angle
NDDDP ;
NDDDP ;
NDDDP__ ; working process type 1
NDDDP__ ; tool information
NDDDP__ ; holder number
(ID)
(TP)
(RN/PT)
(AC)
(AN)
(WN/DD/DT)
(ZN/LE)
(XN/LT)
(AS)
(ZS)
(XS)
(AP)
(KP1)
(KP2)
(KP3)
(FLAG)
(HL)
Meaning of Tool Information (FLAG)

#7
#6
#5
#4
Bit 0 Tool rest type

0 : ordinaly lathe
1 : Xaxis reversible lathe
Bit 3 Spindle rotating direction
0 : forward
1 : reverse
249
#3
#2
#1
#0

INFORMATION
B61804E2/05
(Turning tools)
NDDDP__ ; tool management number
NDDDP__ ; tool type
NDDDP__ ; cutting diameter
NDDDP__ ; cutter length
NDDDP__ ; tool tip angle
NDDDP__ ; tool diameter
NDDDP__ ; biting length
NDDDP__ ; pitch
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Yaxis)
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Zaxis)
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Xaxis)
NDDDP__ ; number of tools
NDDDP__ ; tool material
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ; holder number
NDDDP__ ; tool information 2
(ID)
(TP)
(DS)
(LT)
(AT)
(DT)
(LE)
(PT)
(YS)
(ZS)
(XS)
(NT)
(MT)
(HL)
(FLAG2)
Meaning of Tool Information (FLAG2)

#7
#6
#5
#4
Bit 0 Rotating direction (TR)

0 : forward
1 : reverse
Bit 3 Spindle direction (CP)
0 : side working
1 : end working
250
#3
#2
#1
#0
B61804E2/05

INFORMATION
2.4
TOOLING
INFORMATION
DISPLAY AND
SETTING
WARNING
After setting tooling information, check the data relating to
the actual tool number, tool offset number, and tool figure.
Failure to set correct tooling information may result in the
tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced
1) Press the DATA SET soft key on the initial screen. The parameter
and data setting menu screen will be displayed.
2) NO = will be prompted, so key in 6, INPUT, and the tooling
information list screen will be displayed.
On the tooling information list screen, such typical setting data as the tool
management number (ID), the tool type (TP), the setting angle (AS) (the
setting direction (CP) if the milling tool), the setting position (XS, ZS),
the tool rotating direction (SD/TR), the holder number (HL), etc. is
displayed per tool selection number (TN) and it is possible to change data.
If the tool management number (ID) is input in response to ID =, the tool
registered in the tool data is tooled. Setting data is copied from the tool
data. As the tool offset number (TM), the same number as the tool
selection number (TN) is automatically set.
If the input tool management number (ID) is not registered in the tool data,
n message This ID is not registered in tool data. is displayed.
It is also possible to set/correct other data by moving the cursor.
DATA SET . . . . . . . . . . . Used to display the detailed data setting
screen for the tool indicated by the cursor.
DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to delete the tool management number
(ID) indicated by the cursor from the
tooling information.
PAGE PAGE . . . . . Displays the next page or previous page.
TN NUMBER X . . . . . . The cursor moves the tool management
TN NUMBER Y
number (ID) up/down.
251

INFORMATION
B61804E2/05
CURSOR . . . . . . . . . . The cursor moves the setting data to the

CURSOR
right/left.
NEXT TURRET . . . . . . Displayed if there are more than 1 tool rests.
Displays the tooling information of the next
tool rests.
END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press to end the setting. The parameter and
data setting screen is returned to.
When the SET DATA soft key is pressed, the tooling information detail
setting screen appears.
As the tool configuration data, the data in the tool data is displayed from
the input tool management number (ID).
Also the content of the displayed data differs according to the tool type.
Tool offset number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM =
Tool management number . . . . . . . . ID = (Note)
NOTE
The tool management number (ID) to be input must have
been registered in the tool data. If a number not registered
in the tool data is input, a message This ID is not registered
in tool data. is displayed. Also the registered ID is deleted
from the tooling information if DEL, INPUT are keyed in.
Input TM within 2 digits and ID within 3 digits.
If the tool management number (ID) is input, the tool registered in the tool
data is tooled and tool configuration data and setting data are set.
The tool figure as shown below is not displayed for 5700 series of 16T
CAP II.
(1) Turning Tools
(Center drill)
Tool type
Tool tip angle
Drill diameter
252
TP; center drill

AN;
DD;
B61804E2/05
(Drill)
Tool type
Tool tip angle
Drill diameter
(Reamer)
Tool type
Tool diameter
Cutter length
Biting length
(Tap)
Tool type
Tool diameter
Cutter length
Biting length
Pitch
(Groove/Neck)
Tool type
Tool tip radius
Cutter angle
Tool tip angle
Tool tip width
Virtual tool tip position
(Thread)
Tool type
Cutter angle
Tool tip angle
(General)
Tool type
Tool tip radius
Cutter angle
Tool tip angle
Cutter protective angle
(Finger)
Tool type
253

INFORMATION
TP; drill
AN;
DD;
TP; reamer
DT;
LT;
LE;
TP; tap
DT;
LT;
LE;
PT;
TP; grooving/necking
RN;
AC;
AN;
WN;
XN;
ZN;
TP; thread
AC;
AN;
XN;
ZN;
TP; general
RN;
AC;
AN;
AP;
XN;
ZN;
TP; finger
XN;

INFORMATION
B61804E2/05
Setting Data Prompts (Common to all tool types)

Setting angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS = (Caution)
Setting position . . . . . . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
Xmirror image . . . . . . . . . . . XM= Tool resEt type
XM=0 ordinary lathe
=1 Xaxis reversible lathe
(chasing tool rest, etc.)
Spindle rotating direction . . . . SD =
Holder number . . . . . . . . . . . . HL = (Note)
CAUTION
The setting angle (AS) follows the system parameter
No.200 drawing format. Not displayed if the center drill, drill,
finger tool.
NOTE
The holder number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
animationdrawing function is available.
Tool figure of reamer tool, tap tool
(2) Milling tools

See the chapter about the Caxis FAPT function in Part VIII.
LAST TOOL . . . . Used to display the data setting screen of the last
NEXT TOOL
tool management number (TN) or the next tool
management number to the current display.
CURSOR . . . . . . Used to move the prompt cursor up/down.
CURSOR
END . . . . . . . . . . . Press to end the setting. The tool data list screen
is returned to.
254

INFORMATION
B61804E2/05
2.5
Tooling information can be initialized on the tooling information list

screen.
INITIALIZATION OF
TOOLING
INFORMATION
When the [
] soft key at the right on the tooling information list screen
is pressed, the following soft keys are displayed:
When the ALL DELETE soft key is pressed, the system prompts the
user to confirm whether the data is to be deleted.
When 1 is entered, all the tooling information in main memory is deleted.

Meanings of the soft keys
ALL DELETE . . . . . . . . Deletes all the tooling information
registered in main memory.
TURRET 1 DEL. . . . . . . Deletes all the TL1 tooling information
registered in main memory (only for the TT
specifications).
TURRET 2 DEL. . . . . . . Deletes all the TL2 tooling information
registered in main memory (only for the TT
specifications).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The displayed soft key menu changes
cyclically.
255

INFORMATION
B61804E2/05
2.6
TOOL FIGURE DATA
AND SETTING
METHOD
2.6.1
General Lathe Setting
Method
(1) When the turret is set at the rear side.

In this case, select or as the drawing format in order to clearly
identify positive and negative value of tool data.
(a) Tool figure

Input the dimensions, referring to the following tool figures,
irrespective of whether the outer diameter cutting or inner diameter
cutting is done. Assume that a tool was placed on paper with its
setting face to an NC lathe turned upward, regardless of the front
face or rear face of the cutting tool.
The AC plus direction is counterclockwise around the major
cutting edge as the center, while the AN plus direction is
clockwise around the major cutting edge as the center. (The bold
line in the figure shows the major cutting edge.)
256
B61804E2/05
257

INFORMATION

INFORMATION
258
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
259

INFORMATION

INFORMATION
260
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05

INFORMATION
CAUTION
For the button tool, as shown in the example below, specify
a sufficiently smaller nose angle.
CAUTION
The display is made up to the second place past the decimal
point.
261

INFORMATION
B61804E2/05
(b) Setting method

AS, ZS and XS indicate the setting direction and setting
position of the cutting tool defined by the previous method.
Determine the AS value and sign by turning the cutting tool
figure in an optional direction as it is.
The AS angle is minus in the clockwise direction.
(2) When the turret is set at the front side.

In this case, select or as the drawing format in order to clearly
identify positive and negative value of tool data.
(a) Tool figure

Input dimensions, referring to the following figures, irrespective of
whether the outer diameter cutting or inner diameter cutting is
done. Assume that a tool was placed on paper with its mounting
face to an NC lathe turned upward, regardless of the front face or
rear face of the cutting tool.
262
B61804E2/05


INFORMATION

263

INFORMATION
264
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
AN: for threading along center of thread.

INFORMATION
AN: for threading along center of thread.
265

INFORMATION
266
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05

INFORMATION
CAUTION
For the figure of a button tool, specify its tool nose angle,
sufficiently small as shown in the following examples.
CAUTION
Display is done down to two places of decimals.
267

INFORMATION
B61804E2/05
(b) Setting method

figure in an arbitrary direction as it is. The AS angle is minus in
the clockwise direction.
268
B61804E2/05
2.6.2
(1) When drawing format is 1 or 2.

INFORMATION
Vertical Lathe Setting

Method
(a) Tool figure

Input the dimensions, referring to the following tool figures,
irrespective of whether the outer diameter cutting or inner diameter
cutting is done. Assume that a tool was placed on paper with its
setting face to an NC lathe turned upward, regardless of the front
face or rear face of the cutting tool.
269

INFORMATION
270
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
271

INFORMATION

INFORMATION
272
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
AN: for threading along center of groove.

INFORMATION
AN: for threading along center of groove.
273

INFORMATION
274
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05

INFORMATION
CAUTION
For the figure of a button tool, specify its tool nose angle,
sufficiently small as shown in the following examples.
275

INFORMATION
CAUTION
276
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05

INFORMATION
(b) Setting method

Determine the AS value and sign by turning the cutting tool in
an optional direction as it is. AS angle is minus in the clockwise
direction.
(2) When drawing format is 3 or 4.
277

INFORMATION
B61804E2/05
(a) Tool figure

Input dimensions, referring to the following figures, irrespective of
whether the outer diameter cutting or inner diameter cutting is
done. Assume that a tool was placed on paper with its mounting
face to an NC lathe turned upward, regardless of the front face or
rear face of the cutting tool.
278
B61804E2/05
Facing
Facing
279

INFORMATION

INFORMATION
OD button tool cutting
OD button tool cutting
OD threading
OD threading (reverse)
280
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
ID cutting
ID grooving
ID button tool cutting
ID button tool cutting
281

INFORMATION

INFORMATION
ID threading
ID threading (reverse)
282
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
ID facing (reverse)
Grooving
283

INFORMATION

INFORMATION
Threading
B61804E2/05
Threading (reverse)
CAUTION
For the figure of a button tool, specify its tool nose angle
sufficiently small as show in the following examples.
CAUTION
284
B61804E2/05

INFORMATION
(b) Setting method

figure in an optional direction as it is.
The AS angle is minus in the clockwise direction.
285
3. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
B61804E2/05
SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
WARNING
System parameters, setting data, and the MTF data,
described below, vary with the machine. For details, refer
to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these
data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine
being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared.
Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool
colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining occurring,
286
3. SETTING DATA,
B61804E2/05
3.1
(1) Press the DATA SET soft key on the initial screen. The screen of
parameter and data setting will appear.
(2) To the question, NO. = , key in,
DISPLAY AND
SETTING
NO. = 2
INPUT
and the setting data list screen will appear.

For system parameter and MTF, key in,
NO. = 1
INPUT
in this screen.
(3) The screen will change, and another NO. = will be questioned, so
key in,
NO. = 1
INPUT
(System parameter)
NO. = 5
INPUT
(MTF)
or
and the screen with a list of system parameter or MTF will appear.
(Function of the soft keys)
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . The cursor proceeds or retreats.
[SEARCH NO.] . . . . Used to select the setting number.
Key in the searching number and press this soft
key without pressing INPUT, to the question, and
the cursor moves to the number of the input
number.
If INPUT is pressed then, the data will be replaced.
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . Pressed when all setting has ended.
[SAVE END] . . . . . . Press SAVE END to save the data in the
submemory.
287
3. SETTING DATA,
3.2
OUTPUT/INPUT AND
COLLATION
For details of operation, see CHAPTER IV.
288
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
3. SETTING DATA,
3.3
FORMAT OF
PARAMETER TAPE
(1) Punch %, LF for the ISO code or ER, CR for the EIA code at the
beginning of the tape.
(2) After the End of Block code (LF for ISO code, CR for EIA code),
designate address N followed by a data number within 4 digits.
(3) Punch the data to be set following address P. The data must, of course,
correspond to the parameter number punched with address N.
When many pieces of data are set for machine tool file parameter,
divide the data by ,.
Example: N2000 P0300, 0104, ...
(4) Punch the End of Block code.
Repeat (b), (c) and (d) as required. The head of one block must be the
data number following address N.
(5) Finally, punch LF, % for the ISO code or CR, ER, for the EIA code.
When this code is read, data input from the tape is finished.
Parameters undesignated on the tape do not change even when the
parameter setting tape is read.
289
3. SETTING DATA,
3.4
ERROR DISPLAY
MESSAGE
B61804E2/05
(1) Data format error

The data format error is displayed when a parameter tape with an
erroneous format is read.
(2) Collate error

When an error occurs in parameter collation, the data in the main
memory and the input data are displayed.
NOTE
When a data format error or the collate error occurs, the
system stops as shown above. Press the software key
END to interrupt processing, and the software key
CONTINUE to continue processing.
When a data format error occurs, the corresponding block
is ignored.
(3) TV error
After reading a tape completely, the following error is displayed if
there is TV error on that tape.
TV ERROR INCLUDING
290
VI. AUXILIARY JOBS
B61804E2/05
AUXILIARY JOBS
Press the AUXILIARY soft key in the initial screen, and the following
special process is performed.
(1) Submemory initialization
(2) Conversion of unit systems
(3) Changing the number of registered tools
113
1. SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION
AUXILIARY JOBS
B61804E2/05
SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION
To the question, REQUEST =, key in:

REQUEST = CFINT INPUT
To the question;
EXECUTION = OK <, NO OF REGISTERABLE FILES>
EXECUTION =
Key in,
EXECUTION = 1 INPUT
and the submemory can be initialized.
(1) The system parameters, MTF, and setting data on main memory are
registered in the system area.
(2) The FANUC standard data is registered in the system area.
(3) Drawing data and initial screen data are cleared.
(4) The file area is cleared.
When the power is turned on while the SP key is held down, the following
processing is performed to initialize submemory:
(1) The FANUC standard system parameters, MTF, tool data, and setting
data are registered in the system area.
(2) Drawing data and initial screen data are cleared.
(3) The file area is cleared.
Submemory must be initialized when:
(1) Submemory has been replaced
(2) Submemory has been added
(3) The submemory backup battery is replaced while the NCs power is
off.
114
B61804E2/05
AUXILIARY JOBS
2. CONVERSION OF INPUT UNIT

(MM/INCH)
CONVERSION OF INPUT UNIT (MM/INCH)
WARNING
When the system of units is changed, the system
parameters and MTF data may also be changed. If these
In Symbolic FAPT, the input data unit is coincide with the output NC tape
unit. If a blank dimension or a parts figure was input in the mm unit, for
example, all other data should be input in the mm unit. Also, an NC tape
is output in the mm unit.
However, if a drawing is written in the inch unit and employed in a mm
system machine tool, you can prepare an inch unit NC tape by the
Symbolic FAPT function and operate the machine tool by the inch/metric
conversion function of the NC machine tool.
When the metric system is converted to the inch system or the opposite
conversion is done, answer to request of REQUEST = as follows.
REQUEST = UNIT _T _M INPUT
The command in can be omitted.
1) REQUEST = UNIT INPUT
When entering like the abovementioned, the unit system of
system parameter and MTF changes.
(As the present
specification).
For details, see (e) in (2) Notes on conversion of unit.
2) REQUEST = UNIT_T INPUT
When entering like the abovementioned, as the system supposes
that the unit system of the current tooling information is different
from the current unit system, it is converted to the current unit
system.
3) REQUEST = UNIT_M INPUT
When entering like the abovementioned, as the system supposes
that the unit system of the current material data is different from the
current unit system, it is converted to the current unit system.
4) REQUEST = UNIT_T_M INPUT
When entering like the abovementioned, tooling information and
material data are converted.
115

(MM/INCH)
AUXILIARY JOBS
B61804E2/05
(1) Data to be converted

The object of the conversion is data on the main memory. Transfer the
data stored in submemory to main memory, convert and restore in
submemory.
(a) System parameters
Description data separated miri specification from inch
specification in System parameter list.
(b) MTF
Description data separated miri specification from inch
specification in Machine file list.
(c) Tooling information
List of converted data
Drilling tool
1.
2.
Drill diameter
Fixing position
DD
XS
ZS
(mm) (inch)
(mm) (inch)
(mm) (inch)
RN
XN
ZN
WN
XS
ZS
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
DT
DS
LT
LE
PT
XS
ZS
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
General purpose tool

1.
2.
Nose radius
Imaginary tool nose position
3.
4.
Tool nose width

Fixing position
In the case of milling tool

1.
Tool diameter
2.
Cutting diameter
3.
Cutter length
4.
Bite length
5.
Pitch
6.
Installation position
(d) Material data
List of converted data
In the case of turning condition
1.
Center drill
Cutting speed (m/min) (feet/min)

Feed amount 1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev)
2.
Drill

3.
Rough machining Cutting speed

Feed amount 1
Feed amount 2
Feed amount 3
Cutting depth
4.
Semifinish
116
(m/min) (feet/min)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm)
(inch)

B61804E2/05
AUXILIARY JOBS

(MM/INCH)
(m/min) (feet/min)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
5.
Finish
Cutting speed
Feed amount 1
Feed amount 2
Feed amount 3
Feed amount 4
6.
Grooving

7.
Threading

Cutting depth (mm)
(inch)
In the case of conditions for milling machining

1.
Center drill
Cutting speed
Feed amount FT
(m/min) (feet/min)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
2.
Drill
Cutting speed
Feed amount FT
(m/min) (feet/min)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
3.
4.
Tap
End mill
Cutting speed
Cutting speed
Feed amount FR
Feed amount FT
(m/min) (feet/min)
(m/min) (feet/min)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(2) Cautions regarding to system changing

(a) Whenever a family program is input, the system unit system must
be set to the unit system at the output time without fail before
executing the program input.
(b) If the NC machine tool does not provide the inch/metric conversion
function, enter dimensional values by utilizing the arithmetic
function of Symbolic FAPT.
For processing a drawing in the inch unit by using a metric system
output NC tape, for example, enter data as follows.
d * 25.4 INPUT (d: Dimension described in drawing)
(c) For the surface speed in the inch system, give data in the feet/min
unit.
(d) There is no method to know in which unit system the data in the
main memory was prepared. Therefore, operator must manage the
unit system responsibly. For instance, when the tooling
information and the material data made in the metric system are
converted to the inch system, do as follows after setting system
parameter and MTF to the inch system.
Furthermore, be careful when instructing repeatedly as follows
because the data changed in inch unit is converted to the data in inch
unit repeatedly.
Moreover, display, confirm and modify correctly the data after
conversion because the error accumulates if the data converted
repeatedly.
Besides, output to the submemory or external devices the data of
which the unit system converted. When the power supply is cut,
the data on the main memory disappears.
117

(MM/INCH)
AUXILIARY JOBS
B61804E2/05
(e) To convert the input units of the system parameters and MTF
parameters, select the special data for metric input or inch input in
submemory.
The details of the data conversion depend on the operation, as

described below:
(1) Normal poweron
118
B61804E2/05
AUXILIARY JOBS
(2) Registration (SAVE)
(3) UNIT command
119

(MM/INCH)

(MM/INCH)
AUXILIARY JOBS
B61804E2/05
(4) Poweron by pressing the BS key
(5) Specifying CFINT
If metric input is currently selected, the operation indicated by the

unbroken lines is executed.
If inch input is currently selected, the operation indicated by the dotted
lines is executed.
120
B61804E2/05
AUXILIARY JOBS
3. CHANGING THE NUMBER OF

REISTERED TOOLS
CHANGING THE NUMBER OF REGISTERED TOOLS
When the Caxis option or Yaxis option is provided, the ratio of the
registered number of turning tools to milling tools can be changed.
(1) Changing the number of tools
In response to REQUEST =, enter TFING INPUT.
Then, enter the ratio of turning tools to Caxis tools. The current ratio
is displayed. To leave it unchanged, enter 0. In response to
EXECUTION =, enter a value from 0 to 4. (If only INPUT is
entered, the system does not accept it.)
INITIALIZE TOOL DATA
CURRENT TOOL MAP: 1 (200100)
EXECUTION = (1:200100 2:150150 3:100200 4:50250 0:NO)
If 0 is entered, the current setting is left unchanged.
If 1 is entered, 200 turning tools and 100 milling tools are registered (2:1).
The number of turning tools and the number of milling tools in both
main memory and submemory are initialized to the standard data of
the new ratio.
In each case above the total number of registered tools is 300.
(2) Tool data compatibility
Tool data tape punched out before the tool ratio is changed can be read
after the tool ratio is changed. In this case, however, the data for the
turning tools and milling tools is read starting at the beginning of the
respective data. So, note that some data in ignored.
Example :
When tool data is output, data for any tool is not ignored, as usual.
121
VII. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND

PRECAUTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND

PRECAUTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT
19
Symbolic FAPT

1.1
When the same data like standard surface roughness, for example, is input
in the FAPT execution process, you can preset these data and execute
FAPT, while skipping these preset pages during practical execution stage
of FAPT.
SKIP FUNCTION OF
PAGE AND
QUESTION
Vacant
(Caution 1)
B61804E2/05
You can skip the following questions.

(a) Question of standard surface roughness
(b) Question in drawing format
(c) Question of home position
(d) Question of index position
(e) Question of machining start position
(f) Question of surface roughness
These pages can be set by system parameter. (To act (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) use
parameter No.9, for (f) use parameter No.10).
For skipping the page, observe the following procedure.
(1) Data setting of system parameter
Set the data for the pictures to be skipped to system parameters No.200
and Nos.205 to 213.
No.200:
Drawing format
No.205:
Standard surface roughness
Nos.206 to 209: Home position
Nos.210 to 213: Index position
(2) Designation of skip page (System parameter No.0009)
Respective bits of system parameter No.0009 correspond to the pages
to be skipped as follows.
If you want to skip a certain page, set 1 to the corresponding bit. Set
0 to the corresponding bit, if you dont want to skip the page.
Be sure to set 0 to the bits which dont correspond to pages to be
skipped. Details of system parameter No.9.
0
Question of the index position
Vacant
Question of the home position

Question of the machining start position
(Caution 2) (Caution 3)
Prompt relating to the Yaxis turret turning
position and machine zero point (Note)
Question of the drawing format
Question of the standard surface roughness
1: Corresponding page is skipped.

0: Corresponding page is not skipped.
20

B61804E2/05
Symbolic FAPT
CAUTION
1 This bit corresponds to the question for selecting materials,
but you cannot select the material in advance.
By setting 1 to this bit, you can skip this page while keeping
the material undefined.
2 When skipping the question of machining start position,
skipping is performed at every specified page of machining
start position.
Since the machining start point is determined by the turret
turning position and the tool mounting position, all data
about the turning position of turret and tool mounting
position must be set for skipping the page.
3 If the value of MTF parameter No.1055 (setting of turret
type) is set to 1 (Xaxis reversible lathe), the page of the
machining start point is not skipped, because the system
asks you whether you want to reverse the Xaxis sign on the
page of the machining start point in addition to the
machining start point, and you have to answer the question.
NOTE
This bit is effective if the Yaxis function is supported.
(3) Designation of skip (system parameter number 10)
It is required to input Surface roughness every time the figure
element symbol ( etc.) is input in inputting the machining figure.
This question can be skipped partly or entirely.
Description of system parameter number 10
0
0
Entire surface roughness
Vacant
Surface roughness for C
Vacant
Vacant
Surface roughness for G

Surface roughness for N
Surface roughness for R
1: Skip the corresponding question

0: Do not skip the corresponding question
When the Entire surface roughness is set to 1, the setting of skip of

other surface roughness does not have any meaning. The standard
setting value is 00011110. The question of surface roughness for
C/G/N/R is skipped.
21
Symbolic FAPT

1.2
The incremental designation becomes effective for part figure data input
such as the end point of a figure element and the center of a circular arc.
The start point of the figure element must be defined in any case.
(1) Straight line
When the end point of a straight line having a definite start point is
input by the incremental value, you have only to input an increment
without any need of taking its sign into consideration, since the system
judges the arrow direction.
INCREMENTAL
DESIGNATION
B61804E2/05
(Example)
End point DX = 10I

Z = 30I
or
End point DX = 30
Z = 30I
Assume that a lower rightward arrow was inserted at point A in the above
figure.
End point B is located in the minus () direction with reference to the start
point in both X and Z directions. Also, the radius value is input to X.
NOTE
It is rather troublesome to input an X value by the
incremental value in a case as shown in the above figure.
In such a case, the Z value only can be input by the
incremental value.
(2) Circular arc
The incremental value can be specified for inputting the end point and
center of the circular arc.
Unlike in a straight line, the end point direction as viewed from the
start point changes according to the length of circular arc, and its
direction cannot be determined automatically.
Accordingly, a signed numerical value must be input.
The sign is taken into consideration in the defined coordinate system.
(Example)
(Example)
End point DX = 10I or 100

Z = 10I
Center
22
CDX
CZ
= 13I
= 17I
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
A signed numerical value must be input, unlike in the incremental

designation to a straight line.
(3) Incremental designation in continuous groove input
It is possible to perform incremental designation for both X and Z
directions. However, since the direction marked by an arrow is not
determined, it is necessary to consider the symbol.
(Example)
23
Symbolic FAPT

1.3
The input parts figure or tool path can be expanded or contracted in

display.
EXPANSION AND
CONTRACTION OF
GRAPHIC DISPLAY
1.3.1
Designation Method
B61804E2/05
The expansion or contraction question appears on CRT when the

[DRAWNG RANGE] softkey is depressed.
For expanding or contracting a graphic display, specify two diagonal
corners of a desired display area by shifting the flickering cursor. It is also
possible to directly specify the area by coordinate value. This method will
be illustrated below.
The shadowed area in the left figure specified by the cursor is displayed
to meet the graphic display area (frame bounded by an dotted line in the
right figure specified on the CRT).
To restore original size, press the soft key [ORIGINAL] at the request for
expansion or contraction.
(1) Operation method
The operating method will be described, referring to the input of parts
figure (menu No.2).
(a) Depress [DRAWNG RANGE] key in the following graphic display
appearing when the entry of parts figure was completed.
24
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
(b) The question appearing at the lower part of CRT is replaced with
the following expansion/contraction question.
DESIGNATE THE DRAWING RANGE
MAXX =
MAX (123.45/67.89)
MIN (0.0/0.0)
The cursor flickers at the coordinate position indicated by MAX on
the CRT concurrently with the above question.
By depressing the [CURSOR FORWRD] or [CURSOR BACK]
key, this cursor shifts in the Xaxis direction.
[CURSOR FORWRD] . . . Upward
[CURSOR BACK] . . . . . . Downward
Depress
INPUT
key when the cursor has reached the specified
position on the Xaxis.

(c) The question at the lower part of the CRT is replaced with MAXZ
=, and the cursor shifts in the Zaxis direction.
[CURSOR FORWRD] . . . Rightward
[CURSOR BACK] . . . . . . Leftward
The Zaxis position is determined by depressing the
INPUT
key.
(d) The question at the lower part of the CRT is replaced with MINX
=, and the cursor flickers at the coordinate position indicated by
MIN. (The cursor corresponding to MAX disappears.) Determine
the Xaxis position by shifting the cursor in the same manner as in
step (b).
(e) The question is replaced with MINZ =. Determine the Zaxis
position by the same operation as in (c).
(f) The question is reset to MAXX = in (b), and the cursor flickers
at the coordinate position indicated by MAX. Shift the cursor, if
correction of the cursor position is necessary.
(g) When the [EXEC] key is depressed, the question returns to the
original NO =, and an expanded or contracted graphic display
appears in the graphic display area specified by the cursor
positions. The [EXEC] key is effective for all questions in (b) to
(e).
25
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
(2) Cautions on operation

(a) Calculate the magnification for expansion or contraction so that the
area specified by the cursor is limited within the following range.
When the figure of blank

is long in the lateral direction;
When the figure of blank

is long in the longitudinal
direction.
A tool path exceeding the above frame is not erased in case of

expansion. Accordingly, the question may overlap a figure as the
case may be.
(b) If the cursor overshoots one end of the CRT when it is shifted, it
appears again from the opposite side.
(c) The coordinate values can be directly specified when the system
asks a question. The cursor shifts to the position corresponding to
the input coordinate values.
(The X coordinate value indicates a diameter value, while the Z
coordinate value is always positive in the right direction.)
(d) If you want to return an expanded or contracted graphic display to
its original size, depress ORIGINAL key.
(e) Since the tool path outside the graphic display area of CRT is also
processed in the expansion mode, it takes a long display time, if a
narrow areas is specified aimlessly. When KILL is depressed,
display operation is stopped.
(f) The cursor shifts 6.4 mm (standard), each time the cursor key is
depressed once. This move amount is changeable by using system
parameter No.0014.
The assignable is a multiplier of 1.6 mm inclusive.
26
B61804E2/05
1.4
NC DATA OUTPUT BY
SINGLE STEP

Symbolic FAPT
By this function, the calculation of NC data can be stopped each block or

each process and the output data can be confirmed or an optional NC data
can be inserted from the keyboard.
WARNING
Before starting machining based on the prepared NC data,
thoroughly check the contents of the NC data. Machining
with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring,
1.4.1
Single Step of Block
If the [SINGLE ON] is displayed when producing NC data, processing

is stopped before outputting one block of NC data.
The contents of the block to be output are displayed in the second line as
viewed from the bottom of CRT screen.
The [SINGLE OFF] is displayed by depressing [SINGLE ON].
Also, the tool path is displayed when the block concerns the movement.
The following CRT screen shows the stopping state in the single step.
In this case, the following operation can be done.

(1) If the
INPUT
key only is depressed, data being displayed in the second
line as viewed from the bottom of CRT screen is output, and the
Symbolic FAPT returns to the execution to be ready for the next block.
(2) NC data can be output from the keyboard by optional blocks under this
condition. When the INPUT key only is depressed finally, the display
data in the second line as viewed from the bottom of CRT screen is
output.
(3) When
DEL
and
INPUT
keys are input, displayed data output can be
deleted.
(4) Input
SP
SP,
INPUT
keys for outputting EOB code only.
AS a result, a space and EOB are output.

27
Symbolic FAPT

1.4.2
When [PROC. ON] is displayed during the preparation of NC data, the

NC data output can be stopped every machining process.
Single Step of Process
B61804E2/05
An optional data can be entered from the keyboard in the same manner
as in the single step of block. The [PROC. ON] and [SINGLE ON] are
different from each other as specified below.
[PROC. ON] . . . Single step in each process.
System parameter setting is required.
[SINGLE ON] . . Single step in each NC data block.
This key is always effective.
The operation after stop is identical in respective cases.
Parameter setting method
Set the stop position in each process to system parameter No.0049 to
No.0057, No.0310 to No.0314, and No.0410 to No.0414.
0
Process start
Just before approach
Just before return relief
When the value is 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC data output is not stopped.

When the value is 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC data output is stopped.
The stop position corresponds to the above setting as follows.
Start of process . . . . . . . . . NC data output is stopped after displaying

the first data (coordinate system setting G50
block usually) in the process.
Just before approach . . . . . NC data output is stopped after displaying
the first movement from the turret turning
position to the workpiece. A tool number
(T code) and spindle rotation command are
normally output before this block.
Just before return relief . . . NC data output is stopped just before the
tool returns to the turret turning position
after machining ends in the process.
28
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
Parameter numbers in each process are as specified below.

Parameter No.
Process
0049
Bar feed process
0050
Center drill process
0051
Drill process
0052
Rough cutting process
0053
Semifinish cutting process
0054
Finish cutting process
0055
Grooving process
0056
Threading process
0057
Cut off process
310
Caxis center drilling process
311
Caxis drilling process
312
Caxis tapping process
313
Caxis grooving process
314
Caxis cut off machining process
410
Yaxis center drilling process
411
Yaxis drilling process
412
Yaxis tapping process
413
Yaxis pattern process
414
Yaxis contouring process
29
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
1.5
REOUTPUT OF NC
DATA BY EACH
PROCESS
WARNING
This function is provided to correct one process only (if required) and
output to NC data of the process only after preparing all processes.
(1) Specification method
(a) Selection of functions
Select menu No.4 MACHINING DEFINITION and the
following message will be displayed on the soft key.
NEW
CORRECTION
CORRECTION & OUTPUT
This function is selected by pressing correction and output.
(b) Selection of process
All processes already defined are displayed in the page next to the
specification of [correction and output]. Select a desired process
by cursor key, and depress [NEXT PAGE] or [INPUT] key.
(2) Processing
The system sequentially asks questions about the specified process
preparation processing by the above specification. The process
preparation is completed after corresponding correction as required.
After this process preparation, processing automatically proceeds to
prepare NC data normally.
30
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
(3) Warnings
WARNING
1 If NC requires a program number (by MTF setting,
No.1080), the program number in the output process is
displayed by the program number + corresponding process
number value. If a change of this number is desired, specify
a new number.
However, this number is not stored. It is, therefore,
necessary for correcting and outputting the same process
again to input a new number each time. If this function is
employed when NC data have not been prepared at all in
all processes, the program number always remains
undefined. Specify program No. each time in such a case.
2 Data in the preparation process being with the turret turning
position, and returns to the turning position.
3 If the subprogram format is used together, the subprogram
part only is output.
4 When using this function, must define the machining start
point.
31
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
1.6
OUTPUT IN MAIN
PROGRAM AND
SUBPROGRAM
FORMAT
WARNING
Output data from Symbolic FAPT can be output in main program and
subprogram formats by setting 2 to MTF No.1080.
(1) Output format
A main program is output first, and then, a subprogram called by the
main program is output. Subprograms are formed every input process,
and the main program sequentially calls these subprograms. Program
numbers with address 0 at the start of subprograms are sequentially
output one by one from main program number (operator input).
(Examples)
%
O0123
N0001M98P0124
M98P0125
M98P0126
M30
Main program
O0124
N0002G50X200000Z200000S20000
.
.
.
.
M01
M05
/M99
M30
First process subprogram
O0125
N0003G50X200000Z200000S2000
.
.
.
.
M30
Second process subprogram
O0126
N0004G50X200000Z200000S2000
.
.
.
.
T0100
M01
M05
/M99
M30
%
32
Third process subprogram

B61804E2/05
Symbolic FAPT
(2) No.2000s parameters referred

2100: Referred at the start of main program
2101: Referred at the end of main program
2102: Referred at the start of subprogram
FEED, 0_, etc.
2103: Referred at the end of subprogram
M99, M30, FEED, etc.
2104: Subprogram call block
M98P_
Initialization of above parameters.
2100: 0603
program
number
2101: 0703
Final
T code ;
output
2102: 0100
1x20:
feed
2103: 0205
Spindle
stop
M50
2104: 0705
Sub
program
call
0004
;
0004
0505
0004
Program
end M30 ;
0603
0004
Program ;
number
0004
0805
Sub
;
program
return
M code
0803
P code
0204
0505 0004 0100
Block
M30
1*20:
end
;
feed
with/
(optional
skip)
0004
;
(3) No.2000s parameters to be changed resultantly

Parameter
No.
Difference between new setting and standard setting

0300
0104
0004
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
2000
Program number is not output (Program start).
0104
0004
0000
0000
0000
2001
M05, final T code, M30, and feed output are discontinued, and %* only is output (at the end of program).
2002
to
2008
2009
to
2015
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
Feed output is discontinued (at the start of process).

0003
0004
0000
0000
0000
0000
M01 output is discontinued (at the end of process).
In the case of 4axis lathe specification, NC data of main

program/subprogram format can not be created.
33
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
1.7
S CODE OUTPUT
WARNING
When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter
value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining
(1) Setting of parameters
It is required to set the following parameters for outputting the S code.
1) MTF
Parameter
number
1085
Description
Processing method for constant surface speed control
1 or 0: NC unit without constant surface speed control function
1 or 3: NC unit with constant surface speed control function
See the following System parameters for the difference between
1 and 3.
1102
Number of S code digits
1110
to
1113
Range selection M code

Set it as needed.
1114
to
1121
Spindle maximum/minimum speed Set it as needed. However,

always set it if data is set to 1110 1113.
1122
Change rate of S code output

Change rate = (S code output this time S code output last
time)/S code output last time
If the change rate calculated within the system exceeds the value
of parameter number 1122, the obtained S code is output.
2) System parameters
Parameter
number
Description
Bit 0 = 0: Constant surface speed control function is not used
1: Constant surface speed control function is used
0107
to
0115
Relationship with the MTF 1085:

(1) When bit 0 is equal to 0:
The G97 is output if the parameter number 1085 is equal to 1
or 3.
(2) When bit 0 is equal to 1:
The G96 is output if the parameter number 1085 is equal to 1.
The G97 is output if the parameter number 1085 is equal to 3.
This parameter is valid only when the MTF 1085 is equal to 1
or 3.
Spindle maximum speed
0128
If the S code value calculated by the system exceeds the value of

parameter number 128, it is clamped by this value.
34
B61804E2/05
Symbolic FAPT

(2) Calculation of S code

The speed calculated by the system is set as follows:
S =[Smin + Smax]/2
=
= KV
= 2Xmax
= KV
= 2Xmin
In the case of mm system: K = 1000

In the case of inch system: K = 12
V: cutting speed
X max, X min: radius value
35
/2
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
1.8
SIMULTANEOUS 1
AXIS MOVEMENT IN
APPROACH AND
RETURN RELIEF
WARNING
The tool can be moved simultaneously 1 axis in approach and return relief
by parameter setting for machine tool file (MTF). (In general, it is
simultaneous 2 axis movement.) And, the moving sequence can be set
when the simultaneous 1 axis movement in approach and return relief is
specified.
1.8.1
Setting of Parameters
(1) Specification of simultaneous 1 axis movement

Set 1 to the parameter No.0107 to 0115 corresponding to each
process.
(2) Specification of moving sequence
If the simultaneous 1 axis movement is specified in the parameter
No.0107 to 0115, the MTF No.1084 is referred. The moving sequence
can be set to the MTF No.1084.
Parameter
No.
1084
Description
Moving sequence of simultaneous one axis
(Effective when the simultaneous one axis is specified by system
parameters No.0107 to 0115.)
0: Xaxis always moves first during approach.
Zaxis always moves first during return relief
1: Inner diameter, and face
Approach . . . . . . . . Zaxis Xaxis
Return relief . . . . . . Xaxis Zaxis
Outer diameter
Approach . . . . . . . . Xaxis Zaxis
Return relief . . . . . . Zaxis Xaxis
2: Reverse sequence as compared with set value 1
(standard setting)
3: Zaxis always moves first during approach.
36
B61804E2/05
1.8.2
NC Data Format

Symbolic FAPT
For the NC data format in simultaneous 1 axis movement such as M code,

the parameters with parameter No.2000s are referred.
Approach
First motion (Motion to X or Z axis) . . . . . . . . . . . 2031
Second motion (Motion to Z or X axis) . . . . . . . . . 2032
Return relief
First motion (Motion to X or Z axis) . . . . . . . . . . . 2033
Second motion (Motion to Z or X axis) . . . . . . . . . 2034
WARNING
1 Parameter 2018 (approach) or 2019 (return relief) is
referred to when 2 axes at a time control is specified.
2 Initialize parameter for 2031 and 2032 is equal to the
parameter for 2018.
Initialize parameter for 2033 and 2034 is equal to the
parameter for 2019.
3 An axis, to which data are output, is determined by MTF
1084 parameter.
The following figure shows the reference timing of each parameter.
Approach
Relief
As the result of decomposing the moving of approach or return relief, if

there is no movement X or Z axis (that is, tool changing point and one axis
coordinate value of approach point is corresponding), the NC data output
to the axis movement depends on parameter No.1002.
Parameter
No.
1002
Meaning
0: MTF 2000s numbers are not referred
to when no movement is made for
approach or return relief.
1: MTF 2000s numbers are referred to
even if no movement is done.
37
Standard
value
0
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
Example:
If the axes are decomposed in the order of X axis and Z axis in one axis
at a time control when the X axis only moves for return relief, the X
axis does not move in the 2nd motion, but it moves in the 1st motion
only.
When MTF 1002 = 0
Tool
changing
point
If MTF 2033 and 2034 are set as shown

in example below:
G28.00; is output
MTF 2033
When MTF 1002 = 1
Tool
changing
point
MTF 2034
MTF 2033
MTF
parameter
No.
Setting value
4102
DD01
CC01
0004
G28
U0
W0
EOB
4102
DD01
CC01
0004
G28
U0
W0
EOB
2033
2034
When the axes were decomposed in the order of X axis and Z axis in one
axis at a time, the G code and setting values are output as follows.
G28 U0;
G28 W0;
When the axes are decomposed in the order of Z axis and X axis in one
axis at a time, the G code and setting values are output as follows.
G28 W0;
G28 U0;
38
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
1.9
UTILIZATION OF
DIRECT INPUT OF
TOOL OFFSET
VALUE
WARNING
The NC data, which are fitted for operation utilizing the direct input of
tool offset value, can be output.
In this case, the coordinates of home position must be set. If this is not
set, the block for positioning to the index position will not be output.
(1) NC Tape format
The following NC data for direct input of tool offset value is available,
if 00000101 is set to MTF 1060 and settings of MTF 2000s is changed.
However, if reference point return is not required, the data correction for
MTF 2000 and 2001 is not necessary.
O1234
G28U0
}Reference point return
G28W0
G50S2000
Coordinate system setting is not output.
G00T0100
}Turret
G00X200Z200T010M08
}Approach, Tool offset start, Coolant on
.
.
.
.
G00X200Z200T0100M09 }Return, relief, Tool offset cancel,
Coolant off
G28U0W0
}Reference point return
M30
39
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
(2) Setting of parameters (example)

Setting of MTF No.2000, 2001, 2016, 2018 and 2019 is changed as
follows.
Number
Set value
2000
0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 4102, 1107, 0004, 4107, 0107, 0004
(EOR EOB O EOB G28 U0 EOB G28 W0 EOB is output at
reader part of NC data.)
2001
0205, 0004, 4102, 1107, 0107, 0004, 0505, 0004, 0104, 0004
(M05 EOB G28 U0 W0 EOB M30 EOB EOR EOB is output at the
trailer part of NC data.)
2016
4402, 0303, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000

(G50 s EOB G00 T EOB is output at the start of process. In
standard setting, G50X Z is output. In this setting, the
independent G50 block is output at the start of a process which
does not employ any constant surface speed control.
2018
5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0103, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
(G90 G00 X Z T0101 M08 EOB is output at the time of
Approach.)
2019
5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0003, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
(G90 G00 X Z T0100 M09 EOB is output at return relief.)
(3) Warnings
WARNING
1 For MTF No.2000 and 2001, maximum 10 parameters only
can be set, respectively. In case of a setting sample in (2),
neither feed at the start and end of a program not T code
(MTF No.1106) at the end of the program is output, although
these feed and code are output in standard setting.
2 If the setting is changed as the following example, the
approach and return relief should be specified
simultaneous two axes. And the system parameter
No.0107 to 0115 should be set so as to output tool offset
cancel.
System parameter
#7
#6
#5
0107 to 0115
#4
0
#3
0
#2
1
#1
#0
Bit 2 Tool offset cancel is output.

Bit 3, 4 Approach and return relief should be specified simultaneous 2 axes.
40
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
1.10
APPLICATION FOR
NC CHASER LATHE
WARNING
The functions for preparing NC tape for chaser lathe are provided. The
major functions are as follows.
1) It is no longer necessary to define the tool by reversing it, if the tool
is at the rear side.
2) The tool can be replaced by drawing the Z axis only to the specified
position. The above functions will be detailed below.
(1) Setting of parameters
Set the following MTF parameters
No.1051 (Turret position) . . . . . . . Set whether the standard tool is
positioned on this side or on the
counter side.
No.1055 (Turret type) = 1
No.1084 (Moving sequence of simultaneous one axis)
. . . . . . . Set the moving sequence of return
relief and approach.
No.1105 (Number of digits of T code and offset number)
. . . . . . . Set 0 if T code is not divided into
tool number and offset number.
Others, the MTF and system parameter is set according to the needs.
(2) Specifications of index position
The X value is not specified, but the Z axis only is specified at the index
position. The tool can be retracted only in Z axis at tool change, by
this specification.
(3) Setting of tool data
The specification method of data differs according to whether 1 or 2
is specified or 3 or 4 is specified as the drawing format. This concept
is the same as in ordinary turret lathes.
(i) When 1 or 2 is specified;
The drawing format is the same as in the case that the opposite side
is specified as +X. This will be explained, referring to the outer
diameter cutting, as an example.
41
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
Assuming that cutting edge angle (AC), tool nose angle (AN), mounting
angle (AS), and reference point are determined out of tool data as shown
in the above figure, the mounting position (XS, ZS) is as shown in the
following table.
(Example)
AC
AN
AS
XS
ZS
T01
85
80
180
T02
85
80
180
(ii)When 3 or 4 is specified;
42
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
The following table shows the same example.

AC
AN
AS
XS
ZS
T01
85
80
180
T02
85
80
180
(4) Question about cutting start position

The cutting start position is automatically calculated from the index
position, XS and ZS values are displayed. Since the X value at the
index position is undefined, the X value at the cutting start position
also remains undefined. Specify the cutting start position X in the first
process without fail. The cutting start position X in the second and
higher processes are kept undefined. Thus, the tool is replaced by
pulling the Z axis only to the index position without returning the tool
to the index position.
(5) Inversion of X coordinate signs
The system asks whether the X coordinate signs are inverted or not in
the same way as in setting the cutting start position. Input 1 for the tool
which cuts on the X side. In the example shown in the above figure,
T02 corresponds to drawing format 1 or 2, while T01 corresponds to
drawing format 3 or 4.
(6) Explanation by definite example
The execution method will be described definitely, referring to an
example.
43
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
(a) Define the parts figure on the Xaxis plus side.

(b) Set the turret position to (ZI) when T01 is the reference tool.
(Undefined for value of X axis).
(c) Define the rough cutting process of outer diameter (Tool: T01)
Input
INPUT
only when the system asks you the following question
after setting the machining start position in X and Z axis direction.

INVERT X COORDINATE?
INVX =_ (1: YES 0: NO)
Define the machining area of outer diameter.
(d) Roughly cut the inner diameter on the Xaxis minus side by using
T02 tool. Dont set the value to the question for Xaxis machining
start position.
Input 1
INPUT
to indicate that the workpiece is cut on the Xaxis
minus side during this process to the question as same as (c).

Define the machining area of inner diameter.
(e) Prepare NC data.
(7) Warnings and Notes
WARNING
1 Be careful with the setting of the spindle rotating directions
of system parameters No.0107 to 0115.
7
not used
4
0/1
3
0/1
2
0/1
1
0/1
0
0/1
Spindle rotating direction when cutting is done

on Xaxis plus side
Spindle rotating direction when cutting is made
on Xaxis minus side
Set values mean as follows.
0 : M code No.MTF1130 (standard M03)
1 : M code No.MTF1131 (standard M04)
2 The results of answering the system question about the

Xaxis inversion are as specified below according to the
setting of MTF No.1051 (turret position).
MTF No.1051 should be interpreted whether the reference
tool is positioned on the Xaxis plus side or on the Xaxis
minus side.
MTF No.1051
setting
Answer to question of Xaxis inversion

0: No
1: Yes
Output on Xaxis plus

(+) side
Output on Xaxis minus

() side
Output on Xaxis minus

() side
Output on Xaxis plus

(+) side
44
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
NOTE
1 If, on the tool data setting screen for machining definition,
the answer to the prompt asking whether to invert the
Xaxis is set to 1 (yes), a machining area is not
automatically set, even when the automatic process
determination option is enabled. The cutting direction and
dividing direction should be defined manually.
2 The automatic process determination function cannot be
used to define a process in which the Xaxis is to be
inverted. (Using the automatic process determination
function generates those processes in which the Xaxis is
not to be inverted.)
3 On menu 5, the [ANIMATION] soft key does not appear.
When an NC data is prepared, only those machining
operations indicated by line drawing are shown.
4 In 16TC CAP II and 16iTA CAP II, gradation display is
disabled for animated simulation on menu 6.
5 In the following cases, the prompt asking whether to invert
the Xaxis does not appear on the tool data setting screen
for machining definition.
(1)When C or Yaxis machining is specified
(2)When the back machining function is set
(3)When the workpiece inversion function is set
45
Symbolic FAPT

1.11
The interference check between tool shape and machining shape or

between tool path and machining shape is strengthened in Symbolic
FAPT TURN.
INTERFERENCE
CHECK
B61804E2/05
1.11.1
Interference Check by
Tool Shape and
Machining Shape
A pocket may be produced, depending upon parts figure and tool figure
as illustrated above. In such a case, designate the area to cut such a pocket
only by using a reversible tool.
NOTE
For actual operations, refer to item 3.4.7 of chapter III.
1.11.2
Interference Check in
Approach and Return
relief
A function of checking the interference of tool and blank in approach and

return relief movement during cutting process of workpieces is provided.
The interference is basically examined according to whether the straight
line connecting from the present position to the next position intersects
the blank or not during the approach or return relief movement.
For cutting the area (B) in the above figure, convexed part (A) must be
avoided, otherwise the interference occurs. Accordingly, the return relief
movement is done to the position were a clearance margin is added to the
blank as illustrated.
46
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
If the tool moves outside the blank like in the return motion to the turret
position, the system examines the interference up to the position of the
maximum blank size before moving the tool. Then, the movement of the
turret position is output.

If the tool directly moves to the turret position from point (A), the tool
interferes with the convexed part.
In such a case, the tool moves to the turret position after it has retreated
up to point (B) at the blank end.
Whether the return relief movement is done on the simultaneous two
axes or one axis only is determined by system parameters No.0107 to
0115.
It should be carefully noted that the tool referred to here is defined as nose
R (nose circle) only, and it does not include any other tools.
In other words, the system checks the tool nose angle, but it does not check
such an interference as the blank touches a shank or other part other than
specified above in the following figure, for example.
Such a conditions as
illustrated here is not
checked.
(The nose angle
and nose R are set
to a correct cutting
position.)
WARNING
In case of threading tool the system checks the interference
by the nose R specified by the virtual tool position.
If an undesirable tool path is output, specify the opposite
nose R by the virtual tool position.
47
Symbolic FAPT

1.11.3
(1) Definition of grooving tool

The grooving tool is checked to see if twice the tool nose radius R is
not more than the tool width. If RN x 2 WN, it is treated as an error.
Grooving when the

Tool Width and Groove
Width are the Same
B61804E2/05
(2) Interference check during approach

If a wall of a groove is extended when tool width = groove width, the
specification of cutting area is the same in the following examples
(part (A) and (B)).
48
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
(3) Dimensional check of the tool width and groove width at groove inlet
The tool width and groove width are checked at the groove inlet to see
if groove inlet width > tool width. If this relation is not satisfied, an
alarm is issued as an error. This dimensional check does not apply to
the innermost of the groove.
The dimensional check as illustrated here is not done.

Be careful since the opposite side of the cutting edge
causes interference.
1.11.4
Approach and Relief to
Inner Diameter
If an inner diameter contains a convexed part halfway, it cannot be

machined because of the interference with the convexed part during
approach and return relief.
It is possible to solve the interference by the simultaneous 1 axis
movement. (For details, refer to Sec. 1.8.)
49
Symbolic FAPT

1.12
The userspecific figures and characters can be displayed on the initial

screen. In addition, the region within a closed curve can be filled in.
This function is enabled when bit 3 of system parameter No.708 is 1.
INITIAL SCREEN
DISPLAY FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
System parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
708
Bit 3 0 : This function is not used.

1 : This function is used.
1.12.1
Screen Flow
50
#3
#2
#1
#0
B61804E2/05
1.12.2
Setting Initial Screen
Display Data

Symbolic FAPT
Enter 18 INPUT on the SYSTEM DATA SETTING &

OUTPUT/INPUT screen. Then, the screen for setting initial screen
display data appears. On this screen, set screen display data using
appropriate G codes.
Up to 432 lines can be set. If an attempt is made to set data beyond 432
lines, an alarm is issued.
(1) Coordinates
Coordinates are represented in two ways: Dotbased representation,
and characterbased representation.
D Dotbased
Characterbased
When characters are displayed, they are input at coordinates

corresponding to the character positions on the 14inch CRT (screen)
(27 lines by 74 columns) (figure above). Characters can be
displayed anywhere within the screen area (24 lines by 64 columns)
except in the right NC display area and soft key display area at the
bottom. Thus, characters can be displayed at the following
coordinates:
First line:
Character addresses 0 to 63
Second line: Character addresses 74 to 137
Third line:
Fourth line:
Fifth line:
Sixth line:
Seventh line: Character addresses 444 to 507
Eighth line:
Ninth line:
10th line:
11th line:
12th line:
13th line:
14th line:
15th line:
16th line:
17th line:
18th line:
19th line:
20th line:
21st line:
51
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
22nd line:
23rd line:
24th line:
(2) G codes for displaying figures
G code
Function
Argument
G code type
G01
Draws a straight line.
X, Y
Continuousstate
G02
Draws an arc clockwise.
X, Y, I, J
Continuousstate
G03
Draws an arc
counterclockwise.
X, Y, I, J
Continuousstate
G204
Displays a rectangular frame. X, Y
Singleshot
G206
Fill command.
X, Y
Singleshot
G240
Specifies a color.
Singleshot
G242
Sets a drawing start point.
X, Y
Singleshot
G243
Displays a character string.
P, Character string Singleshot
G244
Specifies a line type.
G245
Character
mode.
G246
Cancels the character string

display mode.
string
Singleshot
display P, Character string Continuousstate

Singleshot
When these G codes and arguments are specified, no space must be

inserted.
1) G01 Draws a straight line.
G01X_Y_;
(Specify X and Y in incremental mode.)
X: 512 to 512, dotbased
Y: 384 to 384, dotbased
NOTE
An argument can be omitted. If an argument is omitted, it
is assumed to be 0. Note that, however, the X and Y
arguments cannot be omitted at the same time.
2) G02 Draws an arc clockwise.
G03 Draws an arc counterclockwise
G02/G03X_Y_I_J_;
(Specify X, Y, I, and J in incremental mode.)
X, I: 512 to 512, dotbased
Y, J: 384 to 384, dotbased
NOTE
An argument can be omitted. If an argument is omitted, it
is assumed to be 0. Note that, however, the X and Y
arguments cannot be omitted at the same time.
52
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
3) G204 Displays a rectangular frame.

G204X_Y_;
Specify a rectangular frame with
incremental values relative to the
current position.
NOTE
The current position remains unchanged after a rectangular
frame is drawn.
4) G206 Fill command
G206X_Y_;
With this command, the area enclosed in a closed curve, including
(X, Y), can be filled in. (X, Y) must be located inside the curve.
If (X, Y) lies on the curve, the area cannot be filled in.
Example :
G01X__ Y__ ;
.
.
.
G02X__ Y__ ;
G206X__ Y__ ;
Draws a closed curve.

Fills in the area enclosed in the closed curve.
The same color must be used

for the boundary and the inside.
53
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
NOTE
1 If X or Y is not specified, the current coordinates are
assumed.
2 After the area is filled in, the coordinates immediately before
the specification of G206 are displayed again.
3 The area is filled in with the last color specified.
5) G240 Specifies a color.
G240P_;
Specifies the color of line segments and character strings. If a
negative value is specified for P, characters are displayed in reverse
video.
P = 1: Red, = 2: Green,
= 3: Yellow, = 4: Blue,
= 5: Purple, = 6: Light blue, = 7: White
6) G242 Specifies a drawing start point.
G242X_Y_;
Specify a drawing start point with absolute values in the dot
coordinate system.
The next drawing starts at the specified point.
7) G243 Displays a character string.
G243P_,
;
Character string (alphanumerics, , .)
P: Addresses 0 to 1997 at which the character string is to be
displayed
8) G244 Specifies a line type.
G244P_;
Specifies the line type of the straight line or arc to be drawn.
P= 0: Solid line
1: Dotted line
2: Dotanddash line
3: Doubledotanddash line
9) G245 Enters the character string display mode.
G246 Cancels the character string display mode.
G245 is the continuousstate form of the character string display
command (G243).
G245P_ , Character string ;
Character string display mode
P_ , Character string ;
P_ , Character string ;
G246 ;
54
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
NOTE
1 Be sure to specify G246 in a separate block.
2 G codes other than G240 must not be placed between the
G245 and G246 blocks.
G245P_ , ;
G01X_Y_,_ ;
This specification is illegal.
G246 ;
3 G240 (color specification) can be specified between the
G245 and G246 blocks.
G245P_ , ABC ;
G240P_ ;
Changes the color of characters
P_ , XYZ ;
(XYZ).
G246 ;
4 The following specification is permitted:
G245P_ , ABC;
P_ ;
A character string (ABC) is displayed repeatedly.
(3) Soft keys
The meanings of the soft keys displayed on the screen are as follows:
CHECK . . . . . Checks set data. If no error is found, the drawing
screen is displayed for drawing operation.
NEW . . . . . . . Pressed when new data is created. If this soft key is
pressed, and the END soft key is pressed with no
data entered, the previous data is maintained.
DELETE . . . . Deletes the line indicated by the cursor. To erase all
the data, use this soft key, and delete data line by line.
INSERT . . . . . Inserts entered data to just above the line indicated by
the cursor. If the keyin buffer line contains no data,
nothing occurs when this soft key is pressed.
PAGE . . . . . Displays the previous page.
PAGE . . . . . Displays the next page. There are a maximum of 12
pages.
CURSOR . . . Moves the cursor backward.
CURSOR . . . Moves the cursor foreward.
END . . . . . . . . Redisplays the SYSTEM DATA SETTING &
OUTPUT/INPUT screen.
1.12.3
Check Screen
When the CHECK soft key is pressed on the data setting screen, the
drawing screen appears unless any error is found. On this screen, the user
can check the drawing to see if the desired picture is obtained.
The meaning of the soft key displayed on this screen is as follows:
EDIT SCREEN Returns the display to the previous edit screen. This
soft key is pressed when the display contents need to be corrected.
55
Symbolic FAPT

1.12.4
If entered data is erroneous, one of the following error massages appears:

(1) G CODE IS ILLEGAL
Example 1: A G code that cannot be used is specified.
G00X100Y200;
Example 2: A space is placed before a G code.
G01X200;
Space
(2) ILLEGAL DATA FORMAT
Example 1: G code contains a space.
G242X 100Y200;
G242 X100Y200;
Example 2: Decimal point is set in G code.
G242X100.Y200;
Example 3: G code contains more than one sign.
G242X+100;
Example 4: Arguments are specified in reverse order.
G242Y200X100;
Example 5: An argument is omitted.
G245;
Example 6: An argument that cannot be used is specified.
G204X100Y200P5;
Example 7: An argument value exceeds the maximum.
G204X1234;
;
G243P2038,
When the INPUT key is pressed, error checking is performed.
(3) DRAWING IMPOSSIBLE
Example 1: A G code other than G240 is specified between G245 and
G246.
G245;
G01X100; Illegal
G246;
Example 2: G246 is specified alone, without G245.
When the CHECK soft key is pressed, these errors are detected.
If an error occurs, the cursor blinks on the illegal line.
(4) NO DATA
If there is no drawing data, this error message appears when the
CHECK soft key is pressed.
(5) DATA AREA OVERFLOW
Up to 432 lines of data can be set on the initial screen display data
setting screen. If an attempt is made to insert data beyond 432 lines,
this message appears.
(6) TOO MANY GRAPHIC SPECIFICATIONS
If the work area provided for graphic display overflows, this message
appears.
(7) TOO MANY CHARACTERS
If the work area provided for character display overflows, this message
appears.
Error Messages
56
B61804E2/05
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05

1.12.5
The following system parameters are provided for this function:
System Parameters
(1) System parameter No.670

Explanation: Specifies the color in which input data is to be
displayed on the data setting screen.
1: Red,
2: Green, 3: Yellow, 4: Blue, 5: Purple,
6: Light blue, 7: White
(2) System parameter No.708
Explanation: To use this function, set bit 3 to 1.
57
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
1.13
OUTPUTTING NC
DATA IN THE
FS15T/16T FORMAT
WARNING
The initial values in the MTF (machine tool file) listed below
are different from those used for a production run. Actual
setting values vary with the machine. For details, refer to the
manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these data
values are not set appropriately for the actual machine
For NC data with different formats between the 15T and the 16T, the
values in the following MTF machine file and function tables are
modified before output as NC data.
Only FS16T format NC data can be output for 5700 series of 16T CAP
II.
1.13.1
(1) Machine file (MTF Nos. in the range 1000 to 1999)
MTF Setting
Parameter
No
Format
16T/TT
initial value
15TFB/TTFB
setting
1262
Integer
G code to return to the initial point (*1)
1350
Integer
Miscellaneous function M code (*2) for rigid tapping

preparation
29
1360
Real
number
Drilling cycle dwell off, front
83.
81.
1361
Real
number
Drilling cycle dwell off, side
87.
81.
1362
Real
number
Drilling cycle dwell on, front
83.
82.
1363
Real
number
Drilling cycle dwell on, side
87.
82.
1364
Real
number
Peck drilling cycle (machining type: 3), front
83.
83.
1365
Real
number
Real number Peck drilling cycle (machining type: 3),

side
87.
83.
Description
58

B61804E2/05
Parameter
No
Format
Symbolic FAPT
Description
peck
drilling
16T/TT
initial value
15TFB/TTFB
setting
1366
Real
number
Real number Highspeed

(machining type: 2), front
cycle
83.
83.1
1367
Real
number
Highspeed peck drilling cycle (machining type: 2), side
87.
83.1
1368
Real
number
Tapping cycle, front
84.
84.
1369
Real
number
Tapping cycle, side
88.
84.
1370
Real
number
Reverse tapping cycle, front
84.
84.1
1371
Real
number
Reverse tapping cycle, side
88.
84.1
1372
Real
number
Rigid tapping cycle, front
84.
84.2
1373
Real
number
Rigid tapping cycle, side
88.
84.2
1374
Real
number
Rigid reverse tapping cycle, front
84.
84.3
1375
Real
number
Rigid reverse tapping cycle, side
88.
84.3
1380
Real
number
Start/cancellation of cylindrical interpolation
107.
7.1
1381
Real
number
Start of polar coordinate interpolation
112.
12.1
1382
Real
number
Cancellation of polar coordinate interpolation
113.
13.1
1390
Integer
Output format of canned cycle R code (*3)
1391
Single
character
Canned cycle repetitive code
*1 If MTF No.1260 is 94, the conventional system outputs G98,

assuming G code system B or C. In the new system, MTF No.1262
is newly provided so that an arbitrary value can be output as the initial
point return G code for G code system B/C. Normally, set 98 in MTF
No.1262.
*2 MTF No.1350 is referred at the time of rigid tapping cycle output.
However, it is not required when output is performed in the 15T
format. So, be sure to set MTF No.1321 to 1.
Note that MTF No.1321 is referred for 5700 series of 16T CAP II.
*3 As the canned cycle reference position (R code), an absolute value is
output if parameter No.1390 is set to 0; an incremental value is output
if the parameter is set to 1.
59
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
(2) Function tables (MTF Nos. in the range 2000 to 2999)

******** 16TA/TTA format initial values ********
<Existing table>
2059 =5802, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G98 G84 X
Z
R
F
;
G99 G88
2203 =5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503, 0B03
G98 G98 G83 X
Z
C
R
P
F
K
G99
G87
Tapping cycle command

block (turning)
Drilling cycle
command block
2204 =0004, 0000, 0000, 0000

;
2205 =5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503, 0B03
G98 G98 G83 X
Z
C
R
Q
F
K
G99
G87
Peck drilling cycle, or

highspeed peck drilling
cycle command block
2206 =0004, 0000, 0000, 0000

;
2207 =5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 1505, 0203, 0005
G98 G98 G84 X
Z
C
R
M?? S
M03
G99
G88
Tapping cycle, or rigid

tapping cycle command
block (Caxis)
2208 =0503, 0B03, 0004, 0000

F
K
;
2209 =0102, 5702, 0107, 8107, 0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000
G1
G18 W0
H0
;
G107 C
;
G19
Cylindrical interpolation
start block
2210 =6402, AA01, 0004, 0000

G107 C
;
cancel block
* The underlined function codes have been changed for the new function. (See (2) of Section 2.2.)
<New table
2214 =6502, 0004, 0000, 0000
G112 ;
Polar coordinate interpolation start block
2215 =6602, 0004, 0000, 0000

G113 ;
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel block
60
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
*** 15TFB/TTFB format settings ***

<Existing table>
2059 =5702, 5802, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000
G17 G98 G84 X
Z
R
F
;
G19
2203 =5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X
Z
C
R
P
F
G19
Tapping cycle, or reverse

tapping cycle command
block (turning)
Drilling cycle command

block
2204 =0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000

L
;
2205 =5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X
Z
C
R
Q
F
G18 G99
G83.1
G19
Peck drilling cycle, or

highspeed peck drilling
cycle command block
2206 =0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000

L
;
2207 =5702, 5802, 6002,
G17 G98 G98
G18 G99
G19
6302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503

G84 X
Z
C
R
Q
F
G84.1
G84.2
G84.3
Tapping cycle, reverse tapping cycle, rigid tapping

cycle, or rigid reverse tapping cycle command block
(Caxis)
2208 =0B03, 0004, 0000

L ;
2209 =0102, 5702, 0107, 8107, 0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000
G1
G18 W0
H0
;
G7.1 C
;
G19
start block
cancel block
2210 =6402, AA01, 0004, 0000

G7.1 C
;
<New table
2214 =6502, 0004, 0000, 0000
G12.1 ;
2215 =6602, 0004, 0000, 0000

G13.1 ;
61
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
(3) Function codes

Three highorder
digits, detailed
classification
One loworder
digit, major
classification
Function
Outputs G code set in MTF No.1262.

(15TF/TTF, old 16T/TT CAP II: outputs G98 only when MTF No.1260 = 94.)
Outputs G code set in MTF Nos.1360 to 1363.

(15TF/TTF: Outputs G81 or G82. Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs G83 or G87.)

(15TF/TTF: Outputs G83 or G83.1. Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs G84 or
G88.)

(15TF/TTF: Outputs G84 or G84.1. Old 16T/TT CAP II: DDDD (newly
provided))
Outputs G code set in MTF No.1380.

(15TF/TTF: Outputs G7.1. Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs G107.)
Outputs G code set in MTF No.1381 (newly provided).
Outputs G code set in MTF No.1382 (newly provided).
Outputs R code in format set in MTF No.1390.

(15TF/TTF, old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs a canned cycle R code)
Outputs address set in MTF No.1391. (15TF/TTF: Outputs canned cycle L

code. Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs a canned cycle K code)
Outputs M code set in MTF No.1321. (15TF/TTF: DDDDD (newly provided)

Old 16T/TT CAP II: Outputs M code set in MTF No.1321.)
1.13.2
Supplementary
(1) When MTF data in the old system is read into the new system via the
floppy cassette or another external storage device, only the MTF data
having the conventional MTF Nos. is rewritten. In this case, change
the settings in the function tables whose contents have been changed
for this new function, by referencing the initial values in the function
tables given previously.
(2) Among the optional processes for machining definition in menu 4, the
following six processes are subject to format conversion:
Tapping
Caxis center drilling
Caxis drilling
Caxis tapping
Face milling
Side milling
62
B61804E2/05
1.14
FUNCTION FOR
PREPARING THE
NEXT TOOL

Symbolic FAPT
This function is used to define the tool change method in NC data so that
the corresponding tool to be used in the next process will be called. This
function is applied to all machining processes except sub cycles.
This function is an optional function.
(1) Programming
Programming is performed in the same way as for normal
programming.
Parameter
No.
Format
706
Specificatio
n of 0 or 1
Initial
value
Description
00000000 Bit 5 = 0: The next tool is not called

for turret 1.
1: The next tool is called for
turret 1.
Bit 6 = 0: The next tool is not called
for turret 2.
1: The next tool is called for
turret 2.
(3) MTF
1) MTF1xxx
The following parameters have been added:
No.
Format
1355
Integer
1400
Twocharac
ters
Initial
value
6
BB
Description
Tool calling M code value
Next tool calling command address
(the same two characters are
specified)
2) MTF function table

The following function table has been added:
2066 (setting the next tool calling block)
1203, 0004, 0A05, 0004, 0103, 0004, 1303, 0004, 0000, 0000
B
;
M06
;
T
;
B
;
3) Function code
The following function codes have been added:
Higher three
digits
Detailed
classification
Lowest digit
Major
classification
Function
Outputs the address specified with MTF1400.

(Tool number used in the first block)
Outputs the address specified with MTF1400.

(Tool number used in the next process)
Outputs the M code (M06) specified with

MTF1355.
(Tool calling)
63
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
NOTE
The value of MTF1104 (the number of tool number digits)
should be used as the number of digits of the B code for
specifying the next tool.
(4) Example of output NC data block
The following NC data are prepared (when the NC data are prepared
for three processes).
0_ ;
G50X_ Z_ ;
G0X_ Z_ ;
(First process start)
B01 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number to be used in the first process
M06 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
T0101 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation
B02 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number to be used in the next (second) process
G50X_ Z_ ;
.
.
T0100 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation cancel
(First process end)
(Second process start)
M06 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
B03 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number to be used in the next (third) process
G05X_ Z_ ;
.
(Second process end)
(Third process start)
M06 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
G05X_ Z_ ;
.
.
(Third process end)
CAUTION
1 For the first process, the tool number to be used in the
process is output before M06 (tool change).
2 For the last process, no next tool number is output.
64
B61804E2/05
1.15
OUTPUT FUNCTION
FOR
INTERPOLATION
RIGID TAPPING

Symbolic FAPT
In programming for C or Xaxis machining, this function is used to

output those NC data for calling a macro that performs interpolation rigid
tapping. A set of NC data for calling a macro that performs interpolation
rigid tapping is referred to as an interpolation rigid tapping cycle.
Those macros that perform interpolation rigid tapping must have already
been registered in the NC.
Example output
G28H0. ;
G50X150. Z150. C0.;
G0T0101;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C45. ;
G384Z80. F1. 5R0. S2000T2M68 ;
G380. ;
G0Z150. ;
X150. ;
T0100 ;
M1 ;
(1) Programming
Programming for outputting an interpolation rigid tapping cycle is
performed in the same way as that for outputting a normal rigid
tapping cycle.
1) Machining type
On the machining definition screen, select CAXIS TAP. or
YAXIS TAP. as the machining type.
2) Tool data
Use the tapping tool for milling.
3) Cutting conditions
On the definition screen, shown below, enter each data item.
TOOL TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP=2
The rigid tapping type is specified(*1).
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . C1 = The initial value is set to the value of
system parameter No.363 for the Caxis, or the value of system parameter No. 435 for the Yaxis.
C2 = The initial value is set to the value of
system parameter No.364 for the Caxis, or the value of system parameter No. 436 for the Yaxis.
CUTTING SPEED . . . . N = V*1000/DT*PAI(*2)
(V = cutting speed value set in the
material data, DT = tool diameter value set in the tool data)
*1 When machining type 1 is selected, a general tapping cycle is

output.
When machining type 2 is selected, a normal rigid tapping cycle or
an interpolation rigid tapping cycle is output, depending on the
system parameter setting (see (2) below).
*2 The value for millingrelated tapping set in the material data
should be used as the initial speed value.
65
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
4) Automatic process determination

The automatic process determination function selects 1 for the
machining type, not 2 (rigid tapping).
5) Animated simulation during NC data preparation
Animated simulation during NC data preparation is performed in
the same way as that for outputting a normal rigid tapping cycle.
To enable this function, set bit 7 of system parameter No. 706 to on.
Bit 7 of system parameter No. 706
0: Outputs a normal rigid tapping cycle.
1: Outputs an interpolation rigid tapping cycle.
(3) MTF
1) MTF1xxx
The following parameters have been added:
No.
Format
Initial
value
Description
1351 Integer
68
Caxis clamping M code
1352 Integer
69
Caxis unclamping M code
1353 Integer
Xaxis cutting direction for an interpolation rigid

tapping cycle
1354 Integer
Zaxis cutting direction for an interpolation rigid

tapping cycle
1383 Integer
384
G code for an interpolation rigid tapping cycle
1384 Integer
380
G code for canceling an interpolation rigid tapping

cycle
1398 Two
characters
FF
Pitch command address for an interpolation rigid

tapping cycle
1399 Two
characters
TT
Cutting direction command address for an

interpolation rigid tapping cycle
66
B61804E2/05

Symbolic FAPT
2) MTF function table

The following function tables have been added:
2240 (Caxis interpolation tapping cycle block 1)
8002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 1003, 0903, 0203, 1103, 1605, 0004
G384 X
Z
C
F
R
S
T
M68 ;
2241 (Caxis interpolation tapping cycle block 2)
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2242 (Block for canceling a Caxis interpolation tapping cycle)
8002, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G380 ;
2243 (Yaxis interpolation tapping cycle block 1)
1605, 0004, 8002, 1101, 0001, 2201, 1003, 0903, 0203, 1103
M68 ;
G384 X
Z
Y
F
R
S
T
2244 (Yaxis interpolation tapping cycle block 2)
0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
2245 (Block for canceling a Yaxis interpolation tapping cycle)
8102, 0004, 1705, 0004, 0000, 0000
G380 ;
M69 ;
3) Function code
The following function codes have been added:
Higher three
digits
Detailed
classification
Lowest digit
Major
classification
Function
Outputs the G code (G384) specified with

MTF1383.
Outputs the G code (G380) specified with

MTF1384.
Outputs the address specifies with MTF1398.

(For the pitch when an interpolation rigid tapping cycle is specified)(*1)
Outputs the address specifies with MTF1399.

(For the cutting direction when an interpolation rigid tapping cycle is specified) (*2)

MTF1351.

MTF1352.
*1 The value set in the tool data prepared during machining definition is
output as the pitch value.
*2 TI (value of MTF1353) for the Xaxis cutting direction, or T2 (value
of MTF1354) for the Zaxis cutting direction, is output.
67
Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
(4) Example of output NC data block

1) Caxis end tapping
90
78
90
40
180
270
.
.
G28H0. ;
G50X150. Z150. C0. ;
G0T0101 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C0. ;
G384Z80. F1.5R0. S2000T2M68 ;
G384C90. ;
G384C180. ;
G384C270 ;
G380. ;
G0Z150. ;
X150. ;
T0100 ;
M1 ;
.
.
G384 . . . . . . Rigid tapping cycle

F . . . . . . . . . Pitch
T . . . . . . . . . Cutting direction
(T1: Xaxis direction/T2: Zaxis direction)
S . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed
M68 . . . . . . . Caxis clamping M code
Rigid tapping cancel
68

B61804E2/05
Symbolic FAPT
2) Yaxis end tapping

90
78
90
40
180
270
G50X200. Z200. Y0. C0. ;
G0T0101 ;
G17C90. ;
X40. ;
Y0. ;
Z92. ;
M68 ;
G384Z80. F1. 5R0. S2000T2 ;
G384X0. Y20. ;
G384X40. Y0. ;
G384X0. Y20. ;
G380. ;
M69 ;
G0Z150. ;
X150. ;
Y0.
T0100 ;
M1 ;
.

G384 . . . . . . Rigid tapping cycle
F . . . . . . . . . Pitch
S . . . . . . . . . Spindle speed
T . . . . . . . . . Cutting direction
(T1: Xaxis direction/T2: Zaxis direction)
Rigid tapping cancel
69
2. CAUTIONS FOR USING

Symbolic FAPT

CAUTIONS FOR USING Symbolic FAPT
70
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
2.1
TOOL FIGURE AND
SETTING METHOD


Symbolic FAPT
If you know by what processing the tool figure and setting method are
defined when tool data were input to the Symbolic FAPT system, you will
be able to program these tool more securely.
Data employed by the system for checking the cutting direction, cutting
edge angle, and other tool figures are angles indicating the tool nose
directions in the NC data coordinate system.
In the NC data coordinate system, the counterclockwise angle as viewed

from the plus (+) Z direction shows a positive (+) angle, while the
clockwise angle shows a negative () angle.
For example, 135 and 225 or 180

and 180 have the same meanings,
respectively.
Two cutting edges are present normally. They are called major cutting
edge and minor cutting edge. These cutting edge directions are called
major cutting edge direction angle and minor cutting edge direction angle.
In the above figure, the major cutting edge direction angle is 240 or
120 , while the minor cutting edge direction angle is 165 or 195.
Now, the process or determining the tool figure and setting methods in the
Symbolic FAPT will be described in regular sequence, referring to the
above description.
71

Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
1st step: Positive direction and negative direction of input data

(1) The turret is mounted on the front side or on the rear side, depending
upon the types of NC lathes. If the turret is mounted on the rear side,
imagine a cutter located at a symmetric position on the front side,
obtained by turning the cutter around the Z axis as the rotation center
by a half turn.
(2) If the cutter is mounted inside out, grip a tool while erecting its shank
so that the cutting edge faces downward, and cutting edge faces
upward in other cases.
Assume a straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces just
downward. The following figure shows examples typical figures of
cutters and the straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces
just downward based on the presumption.
72
B61804E2/05


Symbolic FAPT
(3) The major cutting edge angle AC is defined as the angle formed by the
major cutting edge angle and the straight line which passes the tool
nose edge and faces just downward.
Cutting edge angle AN is also defined as the angle formed by the major
cutting edge and minor cutting edge.
The counterclockwise angle is specified as the positive direction angle
as shown in the following figure.
(4) If the straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces just
downward is presumed as a straight line which passes the virtual tool
position, you will be able to understand the meanings of the following
question asked on the CRT screen by the system.
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . . . . . XN =
ZN =
Input the distance from the virtual tool position to the center of cutting
edge as XN and ZN.
(5) Setting angle AS indicates the setting direction of a tool. Input the
setting angle to the selected drawing format, irrespective of whether
the turret is located on the front side or on the rear side, and presume
that the tool is set on the upper side of the CRT screen if menu number
1 or 2 was selected, or on the lower side of the CRT screen if menu
number 3 or 4 was selected, for drawing format.
The upward direction of the straight line passing the tool nose edge
employed in (2) (direction from the base of the tool to the tool nose)
is employed for indicating the tool direction.
Input the clockwise direction as a negative () angle from the right side
of the abscissa of the CRT screen and also input the counterclockwise
direction as a positive (+) angle.
73

Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
2nd step: Calculation of the direction angles of major cutting edge and
minor cutting edge
There are certain items to be input by an operator according to
questions from the CRT screen. The following three factors are used
to determine the cutting edge direction angles.
CUTTING EDGE . . . . . . . AC = (Cutting edge angle)
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . AN = (Tool nose angle)
SETTING ANGLE . . . . . . AS = (Setting angle)
The following procedure shows the process of calculating the cutting
edge direction angles inside the system based on the above three pieces
of information.
(1) Assume AC be the major cutting edge angle and AN be the tool nose
angle.
(2) Calculate the minor cutting edge angle by AC = AC + AN.

(Example) AC = 30 + 45 = 75
(3) Convert setting angle AS according to the selected drawing format.
This is because that the system uses the value which is converted in
the first quadrant, irrespective of the specification of drawing format.
If the selected drawing format is 1 or 2, AS is kept unchanged.
If the selected drawing type is 3 or 4, AS is converted into AS (AS
= AS).
(4) Calculate the major cutting edge and minor cutting edge direction
angles, respectively.
A = AS AC (major cutting edge)
A = AS AC (minor cutting edge)
74
B61804E2/05


Symbolic FAPT
Lets confirm, referring to the following examples, that the major

cutting edge direction angle and minor cutting edge direction angle are
obtained as desired, irrespective of the drawing format.
(Example 1)
When drawing format is 1 or 2;

Input data; AC = 30, AN = 45, AS = 90
Internal processing;
Result;
75
A = ASAC = 120 ...

. . . . . . Major cutting edge direction angle
A = ASAC = AS(AC+AN) = 165
. . . . . . Minor cutting edge direction angle

Symbolic FAPT

(Example 2)
B61804E2/05
When drawing format is 3 or 4;

Input data; AC = 30, AN = 45, AS = 90
Internal processing;
Result;
76
AS = AS = 90
A = ASAC = 120
. . . . . . Major cutting edge direction angle
A = ASAC = AS(AC+AN) = 165
. . . . . . Minor cutting edge direction angle
B61804E2/05
2.2
CUTTING DIRECTION
AND CUTTING EDGE
ANGLE


Symbolic FAPT
For the cutting direction vector (A) as viewed from the tool tip, and the

cutting edge angle vector of major cutting edge (B) and the cutting edge

angle vector of minor cutting edge (C) as viewed from the tool tip by
taking the cutting edge protective angle (standard value: 3) into
consideration,
an error is produced, if the rotating direction from A to B does not meet

the rotating direction from B to C, and also

an error is produced if A meets B.
Example when the cutting direction is ;
When cutting is made at the minor cutting edge, consider the above

explanation by exchanging vectors B and C.
77

Symbolic FAPT

2.3
Rough cutting is made by linear cutting (parallel to X axis or parallel to

Z axis). Specify the medium finish cutting several times repeatedly, if an
output of a profiling mold is desired.
For number of pockets in rough cutting area, ten or less pockets are
present in one machining area.
ROUGH CUTTING
DIRECTION
78
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
2.4
JUDGEMENT OF
POCKETS

Symbolic FAPT

The pockets to be judged by the Symbolic FAPT are defined as concaved

parts as viewed from the cutting direction out of them.
The same profile may be judged as a pocket or not judged as a pocket,
depending upon the cutting directions as shown in the following example.
The concaved portion (indicated by the slanting lines) in the left figure is
judged as a pocket when the cutting direction is and it is not judged
as a pocket when the cutting direction is
.
The concaved portion which was not judged as a pocket is not cut in the
corresponding process.
When the above portion is cut in the direction;
When the above portion is cut in the
direction;
If a pocket is shallower than the next cutting position in rough cutting

process, it is cut by the rough cutting.
79

Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
If system parameter No.0101 is 0 (no pocket is cut), the pocket is kept

uncut, irrespective of the above condition.
80
B61804E2/05
2.5
DIVISION OF
MACHINING AREA


Symbolic FAPT
The arrows indicating the division direction are input for specifying the
area based on the following principle.
Outer diameter side
Inner diameter side
Edge face side
, (selective use)
Refer to the following cautions when specifying the dividing directions

of the machining area.
(1) Dividing direction of area
Specify the dividing direction of the machining area toward the blank
profile.
(2) Dividing direction and part figure

Dont overlap the dividing direction of the machining area and the part
figure each other.
81

Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
(3) Machining start point and end point coincide

No machining is possible, if the start point of part figure coincides with
the end point and these points are located on a blank profile (blank
figure).
Z axis judges it as the profile figure of a blank.
In case of the above figure, machining becomes possible, if a dummy

figure element of about 0.01 mm in length is inserted.
82
B61804E2/05


Symbolic FAPT
(4) Difference of tool paths according to dividing direction of area

When the end face or outer diameter is continuously machined in the
medium finish cutting or finish cutting process, the cutting method
differs according to the specification of the dividing directions of the
cutting area. (Refer to the following finish cutting as an example.)
NOTE
Fi: Feedrate by the specification of surface roughness
Fj: Feedrate by the specification of standard surface
roughness
(5) Concept of area in semifinish and finish cutting
In the semifinish and finish, cutting is made along the part figure
only, while neglecting the blank figure. The profile in the arrow
direction specified when dividing the machining area is regarded as a
part of the part profile.
83

Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
2.6
SURPLUS
THICKNESS
2.6.1
Finish Allowance and
Surplus Thickness
Dont give any finish allowance (in rough cutting and medium finish
cutting) larger than or equivalent to the surplus thickness, otherwise the
blank figure may be deformed to unfavorably affect the subsequent
machining.
(Example)
If the surplus thickness is as illustrated in the left figure, for

example, the following finish allowance cannot be given.
Finish allowance in X direction 5 mm
Finish allowance in Z direction 5 mm
2.6.2
Surplus Thickness and
Blank
Dont give such a surplus thickness as may exceed a blank dimension in

a special blank. It is recommended to give a relatively large blank
dimension so that the surplus thickness does not exceed the blank figure,
even if it is added to the machining figure.
84
B61804E2/05
2.6.3


Symbolic FAPT
Closed Part
If a special blank with a constant surplus thickness is used, a closed part

figure can also be defined.
The constant surplus thickness cannot be defined for 5700 series and
version 1 of 5710 series of 16T CAP II.
2.6.4
If there is problem as shown in item 2.6.2, define the blank figure as

mentioned in item 3.2.4 (CHAPTER IV).
Definition of Optional
Blank Figure
85

Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
2.7
GROOVING
2.7.1
Grooving is made by the following three steps.
Tool Path
Apply the tool to the center of the groove.

Drive the tool in such a manner as the groove is cut by the reference
side cutting edge of the tool.
Drive the tool in the opposite direction.
If the groove width is equal to the tool width, the tool is applied to the
groove center once.
86
B61804E2/05

2.7.2
Refer to item 1.11.3.

Symbolic FAPT
Interference Check
2.7.3
Blank Figure in
Grooving Area
If the blank figure at the entrance of the groove is not parallel to the X axis
or Z axis in case of grooving, give care to the following note.
WARNING
In the case of grooving tool, interruption is checked at virtual
tool position by the designated nose R.
If a bad tool path is output by this process, designate the
other side of nose R at virtual tool position.
2.7.4
The groove bottom must be flat.
Groove Bottom Figure
The flat portion must be equal to or larger than the flat portion of the tool
nose.
87

Symbolic FAPT

2.7.5
If a groove contains two or more concaved portions, it cannot be machined

by one process only. However, it can be machined by dividing it into two
or more portions.
Concaved Parts in
Groove
Cannot be grooved.
B61804E2/05
Grooving is possible when the groove is divided into A

and B portions.
(Special example)
AS a special case, grooving becomes impossible when two or more
concaved parts exist in a groove, depending upon the dividing
directions of the groove, even if the groove figure is normal.
If
and are specified as the dividing
If
is specified as the dividing direction,
only one concaved part exists, and grooving

is possible without any trouble.
directions as illustrated in the above figure,

threeconcavedparts (1), (2), (3) are produced
in the grooving area, causing the grooving to
be impossible.
88
B61804E2/05
2.8
DEPTH OF CUT (D) IN
DRILLING


Symbolic FAPT
The depth of cut is determined in the way that the drill shoulder is
positioned at the place where the drill is driven by depth D from the
intersection of the blank figure profile at that time (Blank figure changes
as machining advances) and the tool diameter employed.
No intrusion to part is checked. Judge it, while monitoring the CRT

screen.
89

Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
2.9
THREADING
2.9.1
Threading Direction
A tool is driven along an angle to which the minor cutting edge faces in
threading.
If you desire to determine the threading direction, irrespective of the tool

figures, you have only to define it to allow the minor cutting edge to face
the threading direction when defining the tool.
When defining the virtual tool figure, dont define it in such a way as the
minor cutting edge bites into the major cutting edge side.
The allowable threading is limited up to the direction parallel to the X
axis.

90
B61804E2/05
2.9.2
Threading Depth

D1:
Di:
Dk:
D:

Symbolic FAPT
First threading depth (Absolute quantity: Material file)

ith threading depth (Absolute quantity)
Threading depth once before the last
Last threading depth (Incremental quantity: system parameter)
Since Dk is not calculated by the above equation, it is possible that Dk

becomes an increment smaller than D.
2.9.3
Depth of Screw Thread
When the prompt of the depth of screw is displayed, press the softkey
OVER THREAD or INNER THREAD, then the depth of screw is
calculated automatically.
When asking of screw thread depth, automatically calculated contents
which is displayed on CRT can be changed.
(Example)
M20, P: Pitch
Minor diameter of internal
thread is calculated by the
following equation.
Inner dia. = 20 (P x 0.6495)
CAUTION
Even in the case when the depth of screw thread is input
from keys (not automatically calculated value), recalculation
is executed by inputting multiplier or pitch. In this case, the
required depth of screw thread must be input from keys.
75

Symbolic FAPT

2.10
The overhung section can be cut as follows, using system parameter

No.0101.
CUTTING
OVERHUNG
PORTION
System parameter No.0101 =
B61804E2/05
0: No pocketing is carried out.

1: Pocketing is carried out.
2: The bottom of overhung portion is
machined.
For system parameter No.0101 = 0 or 1
For system parameter No.0101 = 2
However, when system parameter No.0101 = 2, if the following

machining is defined, using a tool with a larger tool nose radius than the
surplus thickness, the portion remaining uncut occurs.
First cut the outer diameter portion. . . . . . . . . (1)
76
B61804E2/05


Symbolic FAPT
Cut the wall portion, using the same tool. . . . . . . . (2)
The tool path is as follows, and the portion remaining uncut occurs.
77

Symbolic FAPT

2.11
When the machining is defined (Menu No.4) or NC data is prepared

(Menu No.5), the following error message may be displayed: I
CANNOT RUN ANY FARTHER. CHECK THE DEFINED TOOL OR
CUTTING AREA. In the following cases, this error may be produced.
ERROR WHEN NC
DATA IS PREPARED
B61804E2/05
(1) When roughing, semifinishing and finishing:

1) When the designation of dividing direction is not correct in the
designation of machining area:
Example)
2) When the dividing direction such that the area to be cut is not
present as a result in the designation of machining area is
designated:
Example 1)
When the dividing direction was designated, the start and end
points were set to the same position and the same direction was
designated.
Example 2)
The already finished place was designated as a cutting area.
78
B61804E2/05


Symbolic FAPT
Example)
When roughing or semifinishing, a larger machining allowance
than the surplus thickness was designated.
(2) When thread cutting

1) When the designated threaded position cannot be cut, using the
specified tool.
When an attempt is made to machine the threaded portion as

illustrated, using tool 2, an error is produced.
2) When THREADING was designated in defining the machining
although T is not specified in the parts figure.
(3) When necking
1) When the specified tool nose is not parallel to the groove bottom:
Example)
2) When NECKING was designated in defining the machining

although N was not designated in the parts figure:
(4) Grooving
1) When the groove bottom is not flat.
2) When the tool width is larger than the groove width.
(5) When bar feeding
1) When there is inconsistency in setting the system parameter for bar
feed.
79

Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
(6) When cutting off

1) When the nose of tool used is not parallel to X axis.
(7) Others
1) When the right and left positions are confused for the inquiry
(PE=_) of parts position when the figure is defined.
2) When an attempt is made to prepare NC data when the machining
definition is not completed.
Example)
The tool data and machining condition data have undefined data.
Or no machining start position is fixed.
80

Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
2.12
OTHER
PRECAUTIONS
2.12.1
In the Symbolic FAPT, the left side of a blank is chucked as a

precondition.
Chucking Position
However, if you set Z axis to execute the counter rotational output by

machine tool file parameters No.1001, NC data output only can be
executed with Z axis (minus).
2.12.2
Cutting Start Position
and Others
WARNING
(1) Function to skip XS and ZS questions when the turret turning position
is fixed (inputtable), the cutting start position is inputtable, and also
tool lengths XS, ZS are unknown.
System parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
0104
Bit 0 0 : Non skip

1 : Skip
NC data to return to the start point at return relief is prepared by
designating 1. When 1 is specified;
1) The start point cannot be kept undefined.
2) The turret turning position is determined XS, ZS, and start point, if it
is undefined. If both XS and ZS are also undefined, the turret turning
position is obtained, assuming that XS and ZS are zero.
81

Symbolic FAPT

B61804E2/05
(2) Operation required when parameter No.0104 is 0.

(a) If the turret turning position was changed, the cutting start position
of the entire process is recalculated from the previous turret turning
position and tool length (XS, ZS). When process definition or
NC data preparation is selected, recalculation is executed
actually.
(b) Return either Z axis or X axis only to the turret turning position.
(Example)
When Z axis only is returned to the turret turning position
Keep the X axis undefined at the turret turning position.
Keep the X axis undefined at the cutting start position in the second
and higher process. (Define the X axis in the first process.)
Return the Z axis only to the turret turning position.
If you desire to return the X axis only, read Z as X, while read X as Z in
the above example.
WARNING
If the machine home position is specified when the X axis
start position in the first process is undefined, the machine
home position value is used as the first cutting start X axis
value; provided that the undefinition of the machine home
position causes an error.
NOTE
The start point cannot be undefined, if the software key
CORRECTION & OUTPUT of menu No.4 PROCESS
DEFINITION is selected.
2.12.3
Method of Stopping the
Tool on Z Axis
If the division direction (direction which intersects the Z axis) at the

bottom end of the end face is specified downward when the parts figure
is perforated, the tool path is presently prepared up to the position
exceeding the Z axis by a clearance (CX).
82
B61804E2/05
2.12.4
Tool Path in Finish
Cutting and
Semifinish Cutting


Symbolic FAPT
The tool path has been modified to be output to finish all specified range
including already finished parts in finish cutting and semifinish cutting,
if there is no interference with tool path. But can not specify the range that
all of them already finished.
83
VIII. CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2)
125
1. PART FIGURE DEFINITION

(MENU 2)

(MENU 2)
1.1
KIND OF MACHINING
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
NC tape for the following machinings can be prepared by Caxis FAPT

function.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
End face drilling

Side drilling
End face grooving (Caxis rotation direction)
End surface grooving (X direction)
Side grooving (Circumference direction)
Side grooving (Longitudinal direction)
Face milling
Cylindrical groove
Three kinds of drilling can be processed.

(a) Center drilling, (b) drilling, (c) tapping
126
B61804E2/05
1.2
SPECIFICATION OF
CAXIS MACHINING
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
After data of the turning section of a part figure input is completed, the
turning figure input up to now reappears on the CRT screen, and displays
the message press the soft key.
When you press the soft key CAXIS MENU on this screen, a screen for
Caxis machining appears if the system is equipped with the Caxis
FAPT option.
When you press soft key NEXT PAGE, a screen for menu 3 (HOME
POSITION & INDEX POSITION) appears.
127

(MENU 2)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
1.3
DESIGNATION OF
CAXIS FIGURE
DATA
Menu screen for Caxis Machining
Input Type No. (1 to 8) of the machined figure when Figure Type = is

questioned. Input the number: the graphic data input screen is selected.
NOTE
For the spindle position method (MTF 1306 = 1), the 2.
FACE GROOVE 1, 6. SIDE GROOVE 2, 7. FACE
MILLING and 8. SIDE MILLING help diagram is not
displayed.
ESCAPE:
Returns the mode to the program menu screen.
PART FIGURE: Displays the part figure definition screen for turning.
ALL DELETE: Deletes all data related to C axis figure already defined.
NEW:
Press this key when cancelling the data as to C axis figure
already defined and defining C axis figure newly.
CHECK ALL: Draws the figure in accordance with the defined data.
CURSOR : Moves the cursor forward and backward.
CURSOR
NEXT PAGE: Selects the data setting screen as the place which the
cursor points to. Adjust the cursor to the place of the
undefined number and press this soft key. The display
will return to the program menu screen.
1.3.1
Inserting or Deleting
Caxis Figure Data
(1) When inserting:

No. FIGURE TYPE
01
FACE HOLE
02
SIDE HOLE
03
SIDE GROOVE 1
04
Normally, a new figure type is registered in No.04.
1) Press CURSOR or CURSOR to select the point to be
modified.
128
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
2) Input the figure to be inserted, using Menu No. (1 to 8).

(For example, adjust the cursor to 03 and key in 2 INPUT.)
As a result, the figure type is inserted as follows.
No. FIGURE TYPE
01
FACE HOLE
02
SIDE HOLE
03
FACE GROOVE Inserted
04
SIDE GROOVE 1
05
(2) When deleting
1) Press CURSOR or CURSOR and select the figure to be
deleted.
2) Press DEL INPUT.
1.3.2
Details of Caxis
Figure Data
WARNING
CAUTION
machined properly.
129

(MENU 2)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
The graphic data input screen is as shown below except Face Milling and
Side Milling.
ESCAPE:
Returns the display to the program menu screen.
BACK PAGE: Returns the display to C axis machining menu screen.
When this key is depressed in the cursor of data setting,
the already input data becomes invalid.
CHECK ALL: Draws the figure according to the input data. (All C axis
figure are drawn.)
CHECK:
Draws the figure according to the input data. (Only
patterns defined here are drawn.)
CURSOR : Moves the cursor forward and backward.
CURSOR :
NEXT PAGE: C axis machining menu screen proceeds.
(1) Insert screen for end face hole machining
POSITION (XAXIS) .
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOLE DIAMETER . . .
CENTER DRILL . . . . .
DX = Hole position (X coordinate value)

DT = Depth of a hole
WT = Diameter of a hole
CG = 1 to perform the center drilling; 0 not
to perform the center drilling.
THROUGH HOLE . . . . TH = 1 for through hole; 0 for hole with
bottom
130
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT = Tapping pitch

Left undefined if tapping is not done.
INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . AB = When plural holes are drilled, set
interval of hole positions to be fixed
or variable. (0:FIXED 1:VARIABLE)
QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . AC = Number of holes (in case of fixed
interval, up to 100 holes can be
specified.)
For 5700 series of 16T CAP II, up
to 16 holes can be specified along
fixed interval.
INITIAL ANGLE . . . . . A1 = Position of hole (Angle. Angle of the
first hole in case of plural holes)
ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . A2 = Position of the 2nd hole (in case of
variable interval)
A3 = Position of the 3rd hole (in case of
variable interval)
A4 = Position of the 4th hole (in case of
variable interval)
A5 = Position of the 5th hole (in case of
variable interval)
FINAL ANGLE . . . . . . AE = Angle of the last hole when plural
holes are drilled.
NOTE
Specify the angle with an absolute value. Incremental value
cannot be specified.
Example)
In case of A1 = 30, AE = 210, AB = 0 (fixed interval) and AC = 4, 4
holes are specified at 30 degrees, 90 degrees, 150 degrees and 210
degrees.
131

(MENU 2)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(2) End surface grooving (Caxis rotation direction) input screen
POSITION (XAXIS) . DX = Groove position (X coordinate

value)
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Depth of a groove
GROOVING WIDTH . WT = Diameter of a groove
GROOVING ANGLE . AG = Angle of a groove
INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . AB = When plural grooves are drilled, set
interval of groove position to be
fixed or variable. (0: FIXED 1:
VARIABLE)
QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . AC = Number of grooves
(in case of fixed interval, up to 100
holes can be specified.)
Fro 5700 series of 16T CAP II, up
to 16 holes can be specified along
fixed interval.
INITIAL ANGLE . . . . . A1 = Position of groove (Cutting start
angle. Angle of the first groove in
case of plural grooves)
ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . A2 = Cutting start angle of the 2nd groove
(in case of variable interval)
A3 = Cutting start angle of the 3rd groove
A4 = Cutting start angle of the 4th groove
A5 = Cutting start angle of the 5th groove
FINAL ANGLE . . . . . . AE = Cutting start angle of the last groove
when plural grooves are drilled.
132
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
(3) End surface grooving (X direction) input screen
GROOVING LENGTH . . . XG = length of the groove

The other items are the same as those for end surface grooving (Caxis
rotation direction).
(4) Insert screen for side hole machining
POSITION (ZAXIS) . . . LZ = Hole position

(Z coordinate value)
Other questions are the same as for the end face hole.
133

(MENU 2)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(5) Insert screen for the side face grooving
POSITION (ZAXIS) . . . LZ = Position of groove (Z coordinate

value)
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = Depth of a groove
GROOVING WIDTH . . . WT = Diameter of a groove
GROOVING LENGTH . . ZG = Length of a groove
INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . AB = When plural grooves are drilled,
set interval of grooves to be fixed
or variable.
(0: FIXED 1: VARIABLE)
QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . . . AC = Number of grooves
(in case of fixed interval, up to
100 holes can be specified.)
For 5700 series of 16T CAP II,
up to 16 holes can be specified
along fixed interval.
INITIAL ANGLE . . . . . . . A1 = Position of groove (Angle. Angle
of the first groove in case of plural
grooves)
ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2 = Angle of the 2nd groove
A3 = Angle of the 3rd groove
A4 = Angle of the 4th groove
A5 = Angle of the 5th groove
FINAL ANGLE . . . . . . . . AE = Angle of the last groove when
plural grooves are drilled.
134
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
(6) Insert screen for the side face grooving
POSITION (ZAXIS) . . . LZ = Position of groove

(Z coordinate value)
Other question are the same as for the end face grooving.
(7) Face Milling
XC face view is drawn, and the element symbol request screen is
selected. As in the conventional figure input, here, define a figure,
using a symbolic keys.
The element symbols which can be entered include:
, , , , , , , , , , R, C
For the value of C in XC face view, input it in length (radius
designation), not in angle.
Input X value in diameter designation.
Example)
For the face milling figure in Fig.1, input as follows. Assume that
point A is the starting point:
135

(MENU 2)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
CP request is displayed only for the 1st element. The PE request asks
which side should be cut for the element moving direction.
For 0, the right side is cut, and for 1, the left side is cut, and for 2, the part
on the line is cut.
(a) Defining figures

1) When defining notching figures, after the first figure has been
defined (definition of a single stroke figure), the following prompt
will be displayed:
ES =
In response, select either INPUT or the NEXT PAGE software key.
The following question will appear on the screen:
DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE? (1: YES 0: NO)
When there is only one figure defined as a single stoke figure, press
the 0 (no) key; the C axis menu will reappear on the screen. For
two or more single stroke figures, press the 1 (yes) key; the
prompt for the starting point of the next figure will be displayed.
Normally, the prompt for the starting point is displayed after the
element symbol has been entered, but in this case the starting point
is displayed beforehand.
However, when the end point for the last element has not been
confirmed, even if
INPUT
key or the [NEXT PAGE] software key is
selected in response ES = , an error will result; the THE LAST

FIGURE ELEMENT HAS NOT END POINT error message will
appear and the next screen will not be displayed.
2) Starting points for figures should be designated as absolute values.
Starting points for the second and subsequent figures cannot be
designated as incremental values that follow the final coordinate of
the previous figure.
3) When defining multiple figures, a period (.) will be displayed
between figures.
136
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
4) Deleting and inserting figure elements:

(i) Deleting elements
Move the cursor to the element to be deleted and select the
ELEMENT DELETE software key. However, it is not
possible to delete the periods between figures. Any attempt to
do this will result in a THIS IS A NULL AND VOID KEY
NOW message.
(ii)Inserting elements
Inserting single elements is the same as the normal operation to
define part figures. When inserting another figure between
multiple figures that have already been defined, the procedure
is as follows:
1 Move the cursor to the period between the figures.
2 Select the [INSERT FIGURE] software key.
3 The prompt for the starting point of the next figure will be
displayed; enter the proper data.
Subsequent operation are the same.
(b) Display of element symbols
1) Element symbols
The group of elements that can drawn as a single stroke figure will
be displayed as a single figure, with periods marking the
boundaries between the figures. It is not possible to enter or delete
these periods directly from the keyboard.
2) The starting point of the first element for the first figure will be the
starting point for machining during the NC text creation, so this
should be taken into account when defining part figures.
Workpieces will be machined in the order in which the figures were
defined.
3) When defining the second and subsequent figures, first set the data
for the starting point and then press the key for the element symbol.
This is the only process that is different from defining the first
figure (when defining the first figure, the element symbol is entered
first and then the prompt for the starting point data will appear).
137

(MENU 2)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
4) List mode displays
(c) Notes
NOTE
When defining multiple single stroke figure, the following
limitations are applicable:
(i)
It is not possible to change element directions (CP) for
single figures.
(ii) Figures with level differences cannot be defined.
(per one definition)
(iii) It is not possible to program front and rear
simultaneously.
Due to the above, from among the prompts for the starting
point element for the second and subsequent figures, the
following prompts are not mode:
(i)
Element direction (CP)
(ii) Z axis value for starting point
(d) Creating NC text
1) NC text is created for machining figures (defined in menu 2) in the
order in which they were defined.
2) When machining of one figure has been completed, the tool will
move away before heading toward the starting point for the next
figure (at fast feed speed). The direction of this initial movement
is as follows:
(i) When cutting elements to the left or right, the tool moves in the
X axis direction.
(ii)When cutting elements, the tool moves in the Z axis direction.
138
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
(8) Side milling

The expansion diagram of the part face is drawn and the element
symbol question screen appears. Define the figure using the symbolic
key in the same way as milling figure input.
The element symbols that can be input are as follows:
, , , , , , , , , , R, C
The circular expansion diagram horizontal axis is the length of the part
figure at Z. The vertical axis is the length of the circle in the cylindrical
diametervalue at C. The value of C is input in degrees (deg). The
expansion diagram vertical horizontal ratio depends on the cylindrical
diameter value. In the case of a new definition the expansion diagram
vertical horizontal ratio initialvalue is 1 to 1 until the numerical value
is set in the cylindrical diameter question. In correction mode, if the
cylindrical diameter is changed the message EXECUTING flashes
briefly while the ratio of the expansion diagram is being changed.
An example of a cylindrical figure
Fig. 1.3.2 (a)
139

(MENU 2)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Expansion diagram)
Fig. 1.3.2 (b)
The Figure 2 cylindrical figure is input as follows.

If point A is made the start point:
Number 1 element
start point CO = 0. Z = 15.
Cylindrical diameter DX = 30.
(Groove bottom diameter value that
executes inter polation)
End point C = 120.
Number 2 element R
Radius R = 10.
Number 3 element End point Z = 50. C = 240.
Number 4 element R
Radius R = 10.
Number 5 element
End point C = 480. (120 + 360)
Number 6 element R
Radius R = 10.
Number 7 element End point Z = 15. C = 600. (240 + 360
Number 8 element R
Radius R = 10.
Number 9 element
End point C = 720. (360 + 360)
140
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Program the center of the groove.

programmed the element.

(MENU 2)
When machining, cut having
NOTE
1 Cylindrical expansion diagram type differs according to the
round cutting figure drawing format.
a) When the drawing format is 1 or 3.
Expansion diagram
141

(MENU 2)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
b) When the drawing format is 2 or 4.
Expansion diagram
NOTE
2 Only one cylindrical groove figure, which is drawn as a
single stroke figure, can be defined; two or more cylindrical
groove figures cannot be defined. However, specifying a C
value of 360 or more (degrees) enables a figure with one or
more turns to be defined.
3 The following are not permitted for cylindrical groove figure
definition:
(1)Incremental input of the C value
(2)Specification of TL (tangent to the last figure) or TN
(tangent to the next figure)
(3)Specification of the radius value for a circular element
(4)Definition in list mode
142
B61804E2/05
1.4
MILLING IN
MULTIPLE PLANES
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
Milling operations performed in different machining planes can be

programmed. In the following figure, milling is performed in different
machining planes.
(1) Part figure definition

1) Up to 10 different milling figures can be defined.
2) The Z plane (place in which milling is performed) can be set for
each milling figure.
(2) Machining definition
1) For a milling process, a screen for specifying a desired figure to be
milled is provided (cutting area screen).
2) On the cutting area screen, a figure to be milled is selected using
the cursor.
3) In a milling process, multiple figures can be milled successively
with the same tool.
143

(MENU 2)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
1.5
B61804E2/05
As shown in Fig. 1.5 (a), a program which used Caxis machining to

machine (cut, drill, etc.) the same area of the workpiece twice can be
created.
CAXIS MACHINING
WITH A MACHINING
PLANE SPECIFIED
Fig. 1.5 (a)

To execute this function, the system references the following
parameter:
System parameter
309
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
0: Does not set any machining plane value.

1: Sets a machining plane value.
0: Performs feed operation in the safety
mode (mode 1).
1: Performs feed operation in the efficiency
mode (mode 2).
(2) Part figure definition

1) When a Caxis machining figure is entered, the system prompts the
operator to input the Z or X plane to be machined. In the example
shown in Fig. 1.5 (a), plane Z = a is entered as the machining plane.
2) If no data is input in response to the prompt (Z = undefined), as with
the conventional system, a turning part figure is assumed as the
machining plane, and the Caxis machining figure is created. In
Fig. 1.5 (a), the machining plane is Z = b.
3) The prompt for the machining plane can be skipped by parameter
setting. If it is skipped, the turning part figure is used as the
machining plane.
144
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
Figure definition screen (example: holes in Caxis end surface)
(3) Machining definition

1) As with the conventional system, a figure to be machined is
specified using the cursor on the cutting area screen.
2) When determining the process sequence, care must be taken. In the
example shown in Fig. 1.5 (a), milling must be performed before
drilling. Suppose that the feed operation is performed in mode 2
(see (4) below). In this case, if drilling is specified before milling,
the resultant NC data causes the tool to move in rapid traverse and
strike against the workpiece.
(4) NC data creation
One of the following two feed modes can be selected by parameter
setting:
1) In mode 1, cutting feed is performed from the blank and surface.
2) In mode 2, the tool moves in rapid traverse until it reaches the
machining plane specified in part figure definition, then cutting
feed is performed.
Mode 2 is valid in the following processes:
a) Caxis center drilling
b) Caxis drilling
c) Caxis tapping
d) Caxis grooving
Mode 1 (safety mode)
Mode 2 (efficiency mode)
145

(MENU 2)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(5) Warnings
WARNING
1 Be careful not to make the setting shown in Fig.1.5(b),
where a Caxis machining figure is on a plane which is not
machined. The system does not regard such setting as
being illegal.
If feed mode 2 is selected, the tool may strike against the
workpiece when holes b, c, and d are cut.
Area cut by milling
a
Fig. 1.5 (b)
2 If the part figure definitions contain a Caxis part figure for

which a machining plane is entered, the process sequence
of machining definition must be determined carefully. In
Fig. 1.5 (a), for example, drilling must be specified after
milling. Even if drilling is programmed before milling, the
system does not regard this sequence as being illegal.
3 Whenever a machining method (2, 3) including pecking is
selected, and feed mode 1 is used for a Caxis drilling
process, pecking starts from the approach point, regardless
of the value set for the machining plane.
146
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4)
147
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
(MENU 4)
2.1
SPECIFICATION OF
CAXIS MACHINING
DEFINITION
2.1.1
Kind of Caxis
Machining
Specification
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
In menu 4 Machining Definition, press soft key MILLING

MACHINING.
When MILLING MACHINING button is pressed, the soft key for

selecting the kind of Caxis machining is displayed.
NOTE
For the spindle positioning method (MTF 1306 = 1), the
FACE MILLING and CYLINDRICAL GROOVING software
keys are not displayed.
CAXIS C.DRIL . . .
drilling.
CAXIS DRILL . . . .
CAXIS TAP. . . . . . .
CAXIS GROOV. . .
CAXIS F.MILL . . .
CAXIS S.MILL . . .
SUB CYCLE . . . . . .
Press this key to perform Caxis center

Press this key to perform Caxis drilling.
Press this key to perform Caxis tapping.
Press this key to perform Caxis grooving.
Press this key to perform face milling.
Press this key to perform side milling.
Press this key to perform a sub cycle.
2.1.2
Tool Data for Caxis
Machining
WARNING
After entering tool data, check the entered data. Failure to
enter correct data may result in the tool colliding with the
After setting the type of machining, the setting screen of tools to be used
is displayed.
148
B61804E2/05
(MENU 4)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
TURRET NO. . . . . . . .
TOOL SELECT NO. . .
TOOL OFFSET NO. . .
TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . .
TL =
TN =
TM =
ID =
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
NOTE
1 The turret number prompt is displayed if there are more than
1 tool rests. The number of tool rests is to be set in No. MTF
1050.
2 The tool ID number (ID) to be input must have been
registered in tool data (see VI2.1). If a tool ID number (ID)
not registered in tool data is input, a message This ID is not
registered in tool data. is displayed. Also if a tool ID number
having a tool type not compatible with the present process
is input, a message The tool type of this ID is not compatible
with the present process. is displayed. The registered tool
ID number is deleted from the tooling information if keyed
in as DEL INPUT.
When using a tool which has already been registered in the tooling
information, the other data is automatically displayed if the tool selection
number (TN) is input.
In new registration, the data of the tool configuration and that of setting
which have been registered in the tool data are displayed if the tool ID
number (ID) is input.
Display of tool figure data (The tool type (TP) and tool material (MT) are
displayed only; they cannot be changed.
(Center Drill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . .
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
TP; Center drill (M)

MT;
DT =
DS =
LT =
AT =
(MENU 4)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(Drill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . . . . .
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . .
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . .
TP; Drill (M)

MT;
DT =
LT =
AT =
(Tap)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . .
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . .
PECK LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . .
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TP; Tap (M)

MT;
DT =
LT =
LE =
PT =
(End mill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . .
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TP; End mill (M)

MT;
DT =
DS =
LT =
NT =
Note that the message of tool type (TP) are displayed for 5700 series of
16T CAP II as follows:
Center drill (M)
Drill (M)
Tap (M)
End mill (M)
(5700 series)
Caxis center drill
Caxis drill
Caxis tap
Caxis end mill
NOTE
3 The setting of tool figure data can be disabled, and the data
can be displayed only. To do this, change the following
parameter setting:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Specifies whether tool figure data can be set in m
chining definition.
= 0: Tool figure data cannot be set. (Only the display is enabled.)
= 1: Tool figure data can be set.
Prompts on data of setting (Common to all tool types)

SETTING DIRECTION . . . . . CP = (0: Side machining, 1: End
machining)
SETTING POSITION . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
ROTATE DIRECTION . . . . . TR = (0: Forwards, 1: Backwards)
HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HL =
(Note 4)
150
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
NOTE
4 The holer number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
animation drawing function is available.
5 When a tool registered in the tool data is used, the set data
is registered as tooling information when the user proceeds
to the next screen by pressing the NEXT PAGE soft key.
WARNING
When NC data are created, the interference check or offset
calculation is performed for the tool data according to the
tool figure. If tool data is not input correctly, correct NC data
cannot be output.
2.1.3
When all tool data are input, the screen asks the machining start position.
Machining Start
Position
MACHINING START POSITION

X coordinate values . . . . . DXO =
Z coordinate values . . . . . ZO =
151
(MENU 4)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
2.1.4
Cutting Conditions
WARNING
(1) Center drilling
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . .
CLEARANCE . . . . . . .
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . .
D=
C1 =
N=
FT =
Depth of cut (mm or inch)

Clearance (mm or inch)
Tool rotation speed (rpm)
Feed amount per tool rotation
(mm/rev)
(2) Drilling
TYPE 1
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm or inch)
DWELL ON/OFF . . . . DW =Specifies whether to perform
dwell at the bottom of the hole.
(0:Does not performs dwell, 1:
Performs dwell)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool rotation
(mm/rev)
152
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
TYPE 2
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 =
C2 =
RETURN AMOUNT . U =
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 =
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N =
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT =
TYPE 3
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 =
C2 =
C3 =
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 =
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N =
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT =
153
(MENU 4)
Clearance 1 (mm or inch)

Return amount (mm or inch)
(mm/rev)

(mm/rev)
(MENU 4)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
TYPE 4 (G85/G89 boring cycle)

CLEARANCE . . . . . C1 = The initial value is set to the
value of system parameter No.
332 (clearance 1 in drilling 1).
C2 =
The initial value is set to the

value of system parameter No.
333 (clearance 2 in drilling 2).
DWELL ON/OFF . . DW = When dwell is set to on, the

dwell time set in system
parameter No. 320 is output
during NC data preparation.
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . N =
V*1000/DT*PAI
(V = cutting speed value set in
the material data, DT = tool
diameter value set in the tool
data)
FEED RATE . . . . . . FT = The initial value is set to the

value of feed amount/FT in the
material data.
C1
C2
In 16/18TC and 16i/18iTA, the return speed in is twice the cutting

speed in D. In 15TFB and 15TTFB, the return speed in is the
same as the cutting speed in D. Reverse spindle rotation is not performed at the bottom of the hole.
Note) The machining time is calculated, assuming that the return speed
in is twice the cutting speed in D.
154
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
(3) Tapping
TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP = Type of tapping
(1: Tapping cycle, 2: Rigid tapping cycle)
CLEARANCE . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm)
155
(MENU 4)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(4) Grooving
CLEARANCE . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . FR = Feed amount per machining pass in the tool
radial direction (mm/rev)
FT = Feed amount per machining pass in the tool
axial direction (mm/rev)
D Side (in the Z direction)
Side (in the C direction)
Caxis rotation
End surface
Caxis rotation
NOTE
For machining or , FR is subjected to unit conversion
to deg/min, then output to the NC data.
156
B61804E2/05
(MENU 4)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(5) Face milling

Two types of face milling can be performed: face milling with infeed
machining and face milling without infeed machining.
When CAXIS F. MILL is selected on the machining type screen, the
cutting condition screen appears with the prompt DRIVE...DR = (1:
on 0: off) displayed. To perform infeed machining, set 1 for DR.
For details of infeed machining, see Chapter 7, INFEED
MACHINING BY CAXIS NOTCHING.
TYPE 1: ROUGH
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch)
FINISH. ALLOWANCE . TS = Finish allowance at roughing
(mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N =
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . FR = Feed amount per blade in the tool

diameter direction (mm/rev)
FT = Feed amount per blade in the tool
axis direction (mm/rev)
APPROACH TYPE . . . . . SM = Approach type (1 or 4) (Note 1)
ESCAPE TYPE . . . . . . . . EM = Escape type (1 or 4) (Note 1)
TYPE 2: FINISH
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N =

TYPE 3: ROUGH D > FINISH
FINISH. ALLOWANCE . TS = Finish allowance at roughing
(mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N =

For face milling types 1 and 3, roughing is performed around a defined
part figure with a clearance for the finish allowance.
157
(MENU 4)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
Whether to perform contour milling on an outer or inner
surface depends on the specified cutting position (CP) as
viewed in the direction in which the definitions of elements
for the part figure advance.
Outer surface contour milling:
Lefthand side as viewed in the direction in which the
definitions of elements advance
Inner surface contour millimg:
Righthand side as viewed in the direction in which the
definitions of elements advance
When cutting is performed on the element line,
differentiating between outer surface contour milling and
inner surface contour milling is unnecessary.
NOTE
Approach/escape type
The approach type and escape type for milling can be
selected from the following four patterns:
1) Direct approach (escape)
2) Tangent approach (escape)
3) Normal approach (escape)
4) Circular approach (escape)
When cutting is performed on an element, the system does
not prompt the user to enter the approach and escape
types.
Selection of approach/escape type is not valid for 5700
series of 16T CAP II.
158
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
1) Direct approach (escape) SM = 1 (EM = 1)

Cutting is started by moving the tool from the approach point directly
to the machining start position.
2) Tangent approach (escape) SM = 2 (EM = 2)
The following prompt is returned:
LENGTH . . . . . . DT = Distance along the tangent line
(mm or inch)
Offset in FAPT/lefthand side as viewed in the direction in which the

tool moves (CP = 0)
3) Normal approach (escape) SM = 3 (EM = 3)
LENGTH . . . . . . DN = Distance along the normal line
(mm or inch)
Offset in FAPT/righthand side viewed in the direction in which the

tool moves (CP = 0)
4) Circular approach (escape) SM = 4 (EM = 4)
LENGTH . . . . . . DT = Distance along the tangent line
(mm or inch)
DN = Distance along the normal line
(mm or inch)
159
(MENU 4)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Offset in FAPT/lefthand side as viewed in the direction in which the

tool moves (CP = 1)
[Additional information]
1) An undefined input for the approach method or retraction method is
not accepted. An undefined input of the DT or DN value is not
accepted, either.
2) If this function is added, approach for notching is always made from
the end face (Z plane). The approach point is obtained by adding a
clearance to the notching start point.
3) If finishing is executed after roughing, the tool is retracted by an
amount equal to the clearance along the Zaxis once roughing has been
completed. Then, finishing is started.
4) If cutter compensation is performed by the NC (bit 0 of MTF 1305 is
set to 1) and if approach or retraction along a tangent line or circle is
specified, linear movement along the tangent is inserted when cutter
compensation is started (G41/G42 is output) and ended (G40 is
output). The extension amount set in system parameter 371 is
referenced when the movement is inserted.
New system parameter
No.
371
Format
Initial value
Description
1.0
Extension for approach or retraction

along a tangent line or circle during
Caxis notching or Yaxis contouring
Unit: mm or inch
Real number
0.1
*) The parameter affects the Family Program. Always specify a

positive value for this parameter.
The cutter compensation performed by the NC instigates the following
operation, depending on the approach/retraction method:
Direct approach/retraction
The NC does not perform cutter compensation. If an attempt is
made to define 1 (direct) as the approach method (SM) or retraction
method (EM) after bit 0 of MTF 1305 has been set to 1, the
CORRECT KEYIN error message is displayed. The attempted
input is not accepted.
If bit 0 of MTF 1305 is set to 1 after direct approach/retraction has
been defined, an error occurs when an attempt is made to create the
NC data. The NC data cannot be created.
160
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
Tangent approach/retraction
For approach or retraction, a linear movement equal to the
extension is inserted. The following operation is performed. (The
illustration shows the compensation on the right side of the blank
outline.)
SPA : Cut start point

SPA : Cut start point for starting the compensation
SP : Cutting start point
EP : Cutting end point
EPE : Retraction end point
EPE : Retraction end point for ending the compensation
Continuous line: Programmed tool path
Dotted line: Actual tool path
Normal approach/retraction
extension amount is not inserted. The operation is shown below:
161
(MENU 4)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Approach/retraction along a tangent circle

extension is inserted. The following operation is carried out. (The
outline.)
162
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
5) If cutter compensation is performed by the FAPT (bit 0 of MTF 1305

is set to 0) and if cutting is executed along the contour of a closed blank
outline, the NC data are created so that the cutting end point (EP) meets
the cutting start point (SP) on the actual tool path.
Example: Cutting with normal approach/retraction on the right side of
a blank outline
2.1.5
Specifying the Cutting
Position for Caxis
Machining
After the cutting condition screen, the screen to specify the cutting
position appears.
POS = (1: YES 0: NO)

Specify the figure to be cut using the cursor. For a figure that can be cut,
the cursor blinks. The cursor is moved by pressing CURSOR
FORWRD or CURSOR BACK or by entering 0. After selecting a
desired figure with the cursor, press NEXT PAGE, or enter 1.
When a figure to be cut has been specified, the system prompts the user
to specify whether to cut another area with the same tool.
ANOTHER AREA ? . . . . . . . CN = (1: CUTTING 0: NON)
If 1 is entered, the cutting condition screen is displayed again.
If 0 is entered, the machining type selection screen is displayed again.
163
(MENU 4)
2.2
BLIND HOLE AND
THROUGH HOLE
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(1) The blind hole and through hole settings

The blind hole and through hole settings in the C axis component
shape definition are only used in tapping machining. All other hole
machining is restricted to through holes.
(2) Details of blind hole and through hole settings
The effects of blind hole and through hole settings are shown below
for different hole machining processes.
Indicates the position of the tip of the tool.
Center sink machining
Drilling
Blind hole tapping
Through hole tapping
The tool stops with a clearance of C2

before the depth of the hole.
164
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
3. ANIMATED SIMULATION
FUNCTION (MENU 6)
ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION (MENU 6)
For the 16TC CAP II and 16iTA CAP II, the animated simulation
function has been improved.
When using the above CAP II models, see Part XIII, ANIMATED
SIMULATION FUNCTION II.
165
FUNCTION (MENU 6)
3.1
OUTLINE
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Simulation of turning and Caxis machining can be done by selecting

menu No.6 CHECKING OF NC DATA.
An XZ side view is located at the left of the screen and an XC front view
is located at the right. The manner of machining can be checked to see
the tool movement and the workpiece being cut on the screen.
166
B61804E2/05
FUNCTION (MENU 6)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
3.2
SPECIFICATION
3.2.1
Caxis FAPT Animated
Screen
When the following two conditions are filled, it is possible to display

Caxis FAPT screen in place of conventional animated screen.
The screen where an XZ side view and an XC front view are located
at the left and the right respectively is called the Caxis FAPT animation
screen.
1. The option of Caxis FAPT is provided.
2. The part figure data for Caxis machining is defined in Part figure
definition screen of the menu 2.
When the Caxis FAPT option is not provided or when no Caxis part
figure is defined even if the option is provided, the animation drawing of
only XZ side view appears.
Even when the Caxis FAPT animation drawing conditions are satisfied,
conventional animation screen can be selected by the setting on the
animation parameter screen.
(1) Screen
1) XZ side view
The workpiece is painted out for drawing as usual.
The machined contour part by the Caxis is not drawn.
2) XC front view
The final contour including Caxis machining part is drawn,
similarly on the part figure definition screen in the menu 2.
The workpiece is also painted out.
Fig. 3.2.1 (a)
(2) Animated simulation

a) Turning process
1) XZ side view
As usual, the tool and the tool path are drawn and the manner
how to the tool cut the painted out workpiece is displayed.
2) XC front view
Simulation of turning process is not done in the XC front view.
167
FUNCTION (MENU 6)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
b) Caxis machining
1) XZ side view
The tool and the tool path are drawn in the same way as the
turning process. However, the machined part is not cut.
2) XC front view
The Caxis machining is drawn by the tool moving on the
workpiece contour. The outline of the tool is left over in the
machined part.
(Paint drawing is not done for the workpiece. A front view is
not rotated.)
The simulation of the machining of part A in Fig. 3.2.1 (a) is
shown in the Fig. 3.2.1 (c).
Fig. 3.2.1 (b)
Fig. 3.2.1 (c)
168
B61804E2/05
FUNCTION (MENU 6)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
For vertical lathes, the screens shown in Figs. 3.2.1 (d) and (e) are
displayed.
Fig. 3.2.1 (d)
Fig. 3.2.1 (e)
169
FUNCTION (MENU 6)
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(3) Tool figure for milling machining

The following four patterns are prepared as the shape pattern of the
rotation tool for milling machining.
1) Drawing of a tool holder is done only in XZ side view.

2) The center drill and the drill tool are drawn by pattern 2 and pattern
4.
Tap and end mill tool are drawn by pattern 1 and pattern 3.
3) The painted out length of the tool tip on the XZ side view is LT
value set to the tooling data. (In case of tapping tool, the length is
LT + LE.)
3.2.2
Parameter Screen for
Animated Simulation
The next screen is displayed when the soft key PARAMETER is pushed
in Caxis FAPT animated screen.
The question Drawing type C = is displayed, when the condition in

Caxis FAPT animated screen explained in 3.2.1 is filled.
C = 1: Caxis FAPT animated screen
C = 0: Animated screen only by XZ side view
170
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
MATERIAL AND TOOL DATA
171
4. MATERIAL AND TOOL DATA
4.1
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(1) Cutting condition with high speed tool in milling machining
MATERIAL DATA
Feed amount (*)

C tting speed
Cutting
Division
V
FR
(Diameter
direction)
FT
(Axis
direction)
Center drill
Drill
Tap
End mill
(*) Set the feed amount per one blade in case of end mill.
(2) Cutting condition with the carbide tool in milling machining.
It is the same as (1).
NOTE
The increment system of the cutting speed is m/min or
feet/min.
The increment system of the feed rate is mm/rev or inch/rev.
The increment system of the infeed amount is mm or inch.
Refer to material data in chapter VI 1. for methods to set and
display the data.
172
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
4.2
TOOL DATA
4.2.1
Tool Data
The questions of milling machining tool data are as follows.

TOOL ID. NO. . . . . . . . . . NO =
TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . MT = 1: HIGH SPEED 2: CARBIDE 3:
SPECIAL
TOOL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . TP = 1: CENTER DRILL 2: DRILL
3: TAP 4: END MILL
HEAD NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HD = (Not used in 16TA)
HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . HL = Holder No. for animated
simulation
ROTATE DIRECTION . . TR = 0: NORMAL 1: REVERSE
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . DT =
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . DS =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT =
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . AT =
CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . NT = No. of blades of end mill tool
PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . . . LE = Peck depth of tapping tool
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT = Pitch of tapping tool
SETTING DIRECTION . . CP = 0: SIDE 1: FACE
SETTING POSITION . . . XS =
ZS =
HEAD NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HD = (15TTF/16TTA only)
173
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
4.2.2
B61804E2/05
It is possible to input and output the tool data and collate it in the
conventional way. The input and output format of the tool data for milling
machining is as follows.
Input and Output of the

Tool Data and Collation
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Tool ID number
Tool type
Cutting diameter
Tool length
Tool tip angle
Tool diameter
Peck length
Pitch
Setting position (Yaxis)
Setting position (Xaxis)
Setting position (Zaxis)
No. of blades
Tool material
(ID)
(TP)
(DS)
(LT)
(AT)
(DT)
(LE)
(PT)
(YS)
(XS)
(ZS)
(NT)
(MT)
;
;
Holder No.
Tool information 2
(HL)
(FLAG 2)
Meaning of tool information 2 (FLAG 2)

#7
#6
#5
#4
Bit 0 Rotation direction (TR)

0 : Normal rotation
1 : Reverse rotation
Bit 1 Installation direction (CP)
0 : For side machining
1 : For end face machining
174
#3
#2
#1
#0
B61804E2/05
4.2.3
Displaying and Setting
of Tooling Informations
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
The display method of the tooling information list screens is as usual. The
screen moves to the tooling information setting screen when the soft key
DATA SETTING is pushed on this screen. The screens of four kinds
are prepared by the tool type.
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . . TM =
TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . ID = (Note 1)
NOTE
The tool ID number (ID) to be input must have been
registered in tool data. If a number not registered in tool
data is input, a message This ID is not registered in tool
data. is displayed. The registered ID is deleted from the
tooling information if keyed in as DEL INPUT.
When the tool ID number (ID) is input, the tool registered in tool data is
tooled and the data of the tool configuration and that of setting are set.
Display of tool figure data (The tool type (TP) and tool material (MT) are
displayed only; they cannot be changed.)
Note that the messages of the tool type (TP) for 5700 series of 16T CAP
II are displayed as follows:
Center drill (M)
Drill (M)
Tap (M)
End mill (M)
(5700 series)
Caxis center drill
Caxis drill
Caxis tap
Caxis end mill
(Center Drill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . .
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . .
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . .
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . .
175
TP; Center drill (M)

MT;
DT =
DS =
LT =
AT =
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(Drill)
TOOL TYPE
TP; Drill (M)
TOOL MATERIAL
MT;
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . DT =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT =
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . AT =
(Tap)
TOOL TYPE
TP; Tap (M)
TOOL MATERIAL
MT;
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT =
PECK LENGTH . . . . . . . . LE =
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT =
(End mill)
TOOL TYPE
TP; End mill (M)
TOOL MATERIAL
MT;
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . DS =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT =
CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . NT =
Prompts on data setting (Common to all tool types)
SETTING DIRECTION . . . . . CP = (0: Side machining,
1: End machining)
SETTING POSITION . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
ROTATION DIRECTION . . . . TR = (0: Forwards,
1: Backwards)
HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . HL =
(Note)
NOTE
The holer number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
176
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Tool figure of milling tool
177
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
MTF
WARNING
178
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
5.1
MTF SETTING WHEN
CAXIS FAPT
FUNCTION IS USED
5. MTF
(1) FANUC standard preset value for MTF 2200 (The servo motor control
system is standard)
MTF
2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004, 4102, 8107, 0004, 0000
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
G28 H0
;
2201 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ;
M01 ;
2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G50 X
Z
C
;
G00 TXXX;
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X
Z
C
R
P
F
G18 G99
G82
G19
2204 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L
;
2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X
Z
C
R
Q
F
G18 G99 G83.1
G19
2206 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L
;
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G17 G98 G98 G84 X
Z
C
R
F
L
G18 G99 G84.1
G19
2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
2209 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
(Not used)
2210 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 (Not used)
2211 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
179
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(2) Setting precautions

In preparing NC data for Caxis machining, the MTF setting differs,
depending on the Caxis control system.
The modification shown on the following for standard data is required.
(a) Servo control system
MTF 2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2003 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2004 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2005 = 0100, 0004,
FEED ;
2006 = 0100, 0004,
FEED ;
2007 = 0100, 0004,
FEED ;
1105,
M05
1105,
M05
1105,
M05
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
1005,
MXX
1005,
MXX
1005,
MXX
0004
;
0004
;
0004
;
2008 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004

FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01,0503, 0004, 0000
G90 G00 X
Z
C
F
;
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, AA01,0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X
Z
C
M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2031 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, AA01,0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X
Z
C
M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2032 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, AA01,0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X
Z
C
M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
180
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
(b) Spindle positioning system (Semifixed angle indexing)

MTF 2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2003 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2004 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2005 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2006 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2007 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2008 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0503, 0004, 0000
G90 G00 X
Z
F
;
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X
Z
M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2031 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X
Z
M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2032 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X
Z
M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G50 X
Z
;
G00 TXXXX ;
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X
Z
R
P
F
G18 G99
G82
G19
2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03,0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X
Z
R
Q
F
G18 G99
G83.1
G19
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G17 G98 G98 G84 X
Z
R
F
L
G18 G99
G84.1
G19
2211 = 1305, 0004, 0000, 0000
MXX ;
181
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(c) Spindle positioning system (Arbitrary angle indexing)

MTF 2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2003 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2004 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2005 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2006 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2007 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2008 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1405, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0503, 0004, 0000
G90 G00 X
Z
F
;
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X
Z
M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2031 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X
Z
M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2032 = 5202, 5002, 5802, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000
G90 G00 G98 X
Z
M08 ;
G91 G01 G99
2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, AA01,0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G50 X
Z
C
;
G00 TXXXX ;
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X
Z
R
P
F
G99
G82
G18
G19
2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03,0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X
Z
R
Q
F
G18 G99
G83.1
G19
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G17 G98 G98 G84 X
Z
R
F
L
G18 G99
G84.1
G19
2211 = AA01,0004, 0000, 0000
C
;
182
B61804E2/05
5.2
NC DATA OUTPUT
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(1) Servo motor control system

Specific Example:
Assume that the MTF has been set as follows.
1300 = CH
1313 = 13
1314 = 14
1315 = 18
1316 = 17
2002 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
M17 ;
2035 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
M17 ;
2036 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004
FEED ;
M05 ;
M17 ;
2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0503,
G90 G00 X
Z
C
F
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305,
G90 G00 X
Z
C
M08
G91 G01
2031 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305,
G90 G00 X
Z
C
M08
G91 G01
2032 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305,
G90 G00 X
Z
C
M08
G91 G01
2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004,
FEED ;
M05 ;
M18 ;
2201 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ;
M01 ;
2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0004, 0002,
G50 X
Z
C
;
G00
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001,
G17 G98 G98 G81 X
Z
G18 G99
G82
G19
2204 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L
;
2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001,
G17 G98 G98 G83 X
Z
G18 G99
G83.1
G19
2206 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L
;
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001,
G17 G98 G98 G84 X
Z
G18 G99
G84.1
G19
2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
0004, 0000
;
0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
4102, 8107, 0004, 0000
G28 H0
;
0103, 0004, 0000, 0000

TXXXX ;
AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
C
R
P
F
AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503

C
R
Q
F
AA01, 0903, 0503, 0B03

C
R
F
L
2003 2008 are set to the same as 2002.

The others are standard setting.
System parameter standard setting (Refer to the another sheet)
183
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Machining definition
Process 1: Outside diameter roughing
Process 2: Outside diameter finishing
Process 3: Caxis machining (Drilling end face: Center drilling) A
Process 4: Caxis machining (Drilling end face: Drilling) A
Process 5: Caxis machining (Drilling end face: Tapping) A
Process 6: Caxis machining (Grooving end face) B
Process 7: Caxis machining (Drilling side: Drilling) C
Process 8: Caxis machining (Grooving side face) D
Machining shape
184
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
The outputted NC data becomes as follows.

NOTE
NC data of the process 1 2 is omitted.
%;
O01:
G50X400.Z400.;
M05;
M18;
G28H0;
G50X300.Z300.C0;
G00T0101;
G97S2000M13;
X40.;
Z92.;
G17G98G81Z85.R92.F350.;
C90.;
C180.;
C270.;
G00Z300.;
X300.;
T0100;
M01;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
G00T0202 ;
G97S1393M13 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C0 ;
G82Z75.R92.P80.F139. ;
C90. ;
C180. ;
C270. ;
G00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0200 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
G00T0303 ;
G97S159M13 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C0 ;
G84Z76.R92.F318. ;
C90. ;
C180. ;
C270. ;
G00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0300 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
G00T0404
G97S2000M13 ;
X87. ;
Z92. ;
C60 ;
Z42. ;
G01Z35F26. ;
C120.F65. ;
G00Z42. ;
Z92. ;
C240. ;
Z42. ;
G01Z35.F26. ;
C300.F65. ;
G00Z42. ;
Z92. ;
Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0400 ;
M01;
G50X300.Z300.C300.;
G00T0505;
G97S1393M13;
Z25.;
X104.;
C0;
G19G82X83.R104.P0.08F139.;
C180.;
G00X300.;
Z300.;
T0500;
M01;
G50X300.Z300.C180.;
G00T0606;
G97S2000M13;
Z50.;
X104.;
C90;
X79.;
G01X70.F26.;
Z66.F65.;
G00X79.;
X104.;
Z50.C210.;
X79.;
G01X70.F26.;
Z66.F65.;
G00X79.;

185
X104.;
Z50.C330.;
X79.;
G01X70.F26
.;
Z66.F65.;
G00X79.;
X104.;
X300.;
Z300.;
T0600;
M01;
X400.Z400.;
M01;
M05;
M30;
%
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
2) Spindle positioning method

a) Halffixed angle indexing
Definite example
Assume MTF are set as follows:
1300 =
1306 =
1308 =
1313 =
1314 =
1317 =
1318 =
1319 =
1320 =
2002 =
2035 =
2036 =
2017 =
2018 =
2031 =
2032 =
2200 =
2201 =
2202 =
2203 =
2204 =
2205 =
2206 =
CH
1
0
13
14
50
60
20
45
0100, 0004,
FEED ;
0100, 0004,
FEED ;
0100, 0004,
FEED ;
5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
0100, 0004,
FEED ;
0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
4402, 1101,
G50 X
5702, 5802,
G17 G98
G18 G99
G19
0B03, 0004,
L
;
5702, 5802,
G17 G98
G18 G99
G19
0B03, 0004,
L
;
1105,
M05
1105,
M05
1105,
M05
1101,
X
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0001,
Z
1405,
M60
1405,
M60
1405,
M60
0000,
0004
;
0004
;
0004
;
0503, 0004, 0000
F
;
1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000

X
Z
M08 ;
1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
X
Z
M08 ;
1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
X
Z
M08 ;
1105,
M05
0605,
M01
0001,
Z
6002,
G98
0004,
;
0004,
;
0000,
1305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000

M50 ;
0000, 0000
0004,
;
6102, 1101,
G81 X
G82
0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000

G00 TXXXX ;
0001, 0000, 0903, 0C03, 0503
Z
R
P
F
0000, 0000
6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G98 G83 X
Z
R
Q
F
G83.1
0000, 0000
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G17 G98 G98 G84 X
Z
R
F
L
G18 G99
G84.1
G19
2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
2211 = 1205, 0004, 0000, 0000
M2X ;

The system parameters are standard setting.
186
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
Process 1: Outside diameter roughing
Process 2: Outside diameter finishing
Process 3: Caxis machining A (Drilling end face: Center drilling)
Process 4: Caxis machining A (Drilling end face: Drilling)
Process 5: Caxis machining A (Drilling end face: Tapping)
Process 6: Caxis machining B (Drilling side face: Drilling)
Process 7: Caxis machining C (Grooving side face)
Machining shape
187
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05

NOTE
%;
O10:
G50X400.Z400.;
M05;
M50;
G50X300.Z300.;
G00T0101;
G97S2000M13;
X40.;
Z92.;
G17G98G81Z85.R92.F350.;
M21;
M21;
M21;
G00Z300.;
X300.;
T0100;
M01;
G50X300.Z300.;
G00T0202 ;
G97S1393M13 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
M21 ;
G82Z75.R92.P80.F139. ;
M21 ;
M21 ;
M21 ;
G00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0200 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300. ;
G00T0303 ;
G97S1593M13 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
M21 ;
G84Z76.R92.F318. ;
M21 ;
M21 ;
M21 ;
C00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0300 ;
M01 ;
188
G50X300.Z300. ;
G00T0404 ;
G97S1393M13 ;
Z25. ;
X104. ;
M22 ;
G19G82X83.R104.P0.08F139
M23 ;
G00X300. ;
Z300. ;
T0400 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300. ;
G00T0505 ;
G97S2587M13 ;
Z50. ;
X104. ;
M24 ;
X79. ;
G01X70.F26. ;
Z66.F65. ;
G00X79.;
X104.;
Z50.;
M24.;
X79.;
G01X70.F26.;
Z66.F65.;
G00X79.;
X104.;
X300.;
Z300.;
T0500;
M01;
X400.Z400.;
M01;
M05;
M30;
%
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
3) Arbitrary angle indexing

Definite example
Assume that MTFs are set as follows:
1300 =
1306 =
1308 =
1313 =
1314 =
1317 =
1318 =
CH
1
1
13
14
50
60
2002 = 0100, 0004,

FEED ;
2035 = 0100, 0004,
FEED ;
2036 = 0100, 0004,
FEED ;
2017 = 5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
2031 = 5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
2032 = 5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
2200 = 0100, 0004,
FEED ;
2201 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2202 = 4402, 1101,
G50 X
2203 = 5702, 5802,
G17 G98
G18 G99
G19
2204 = 0B03, 0004,
L
;
2205 = 5702, 5802,
G17 G98
G18 G99
G19
2206 = 0B03, 0004,
L
;
2207 = 5702, 5802,
G17 G98
G18 G99
G19
1105,
M05
1105,
M05
1105,
M05
1101,
X
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0001,
Z
1405,
M60
1405,
M60
1405,
M60
0000,
0004
;
0004
;
0004
;
0503, 0004, 0000
F
;
1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000

X
Z
M08 ;
1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
X
Z
M08 ;
1101, 0001, 0000, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
X
Z
M08 ;
1105,
M05
0605,
M01
0001,
Z
6002,
G98
0004, 1305,
;
M50
0004, 0000,
;
AA01, 0004,
C
;
6102, 1101,
G81 X
G82
0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000

;
0000
0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G00 TXXXX ;
0001, 0000, 0903, 0C03, 0503
Z
R
P
F
0000, 0000
6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G98 G83 X
Z
R
Q
F
G83.1
0000, 0000
6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G98 G84 X
Z
R
F
L
G84.1
2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000

;
2211 = AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000
C
;

The system parameters are standard setting.
The machining definition is identical with (2).
189
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05

NOTE
%;
O10:
G50X400.Z400.;
M05;
M50;
G50X300.Z300.C0;
G00T0101;
G97S2000M13;
X40.;
Z92.;
G17G98G81Z85.R92.F350.;
C90.;
C180.;
C270.;
G00Z300.;
X300. ;
T0100 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
G00T0202 ;
G97S1393M13 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C0 ;
G87Z75.R92.P80.F139. ;
C90. ;
C180. ;
C270. ;
G00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0200 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
G00T0303 ;
G97S159M13 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C0 ;
G84Z76.R92.F318. ;
C90. ;
C180. ;
C270. ;
G00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0300 ;
M01 ;
190
G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
G00T0404 ;
G97S1393M13 ;
Z25. ;
X104. ;
C60 ;
C45 ;
G19G82X83.R104.P0.08F139.
C225 ;
G00X300. ;
Z300. ;
T0400 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300.C225. ;
G00T0505 ;
G97S2000M13 ;
Z50. ;
X104.;
C90.;
X79.;
G01X70.F26.;
Z66.F65.;
G00X79.;
X104.;
Z50.;
C315.;
X79.;
G01X70.F26.;
Z66.F65.;
G00X79.;
X104.;
X300.;
Z300.;
T0500;
M01;
X400.Z400.;
M01;
M05;
M30;
%
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Caxis Machining MTF Setting Example

The setting of MTF is described below when creating the NC program for
Caxis machining shown as in the following.
(Example)
%
O100;
:
:
:
:
:
:
M05;
M;
G28H0. ;
G50X_ Z_ C_ ;
G00T0101;
G97S2000M??;
:
:
:
T0100;
M01;
:
:
:
G50X_ Z_ C_ ;
G00T0303;
:
:
:
T0300;
M01;
:
:
:
G50X_ Z_ C_ ;
G00T0505;
:
:
:
T0500;
M
;
M01;
Lathe turning
machining process
Caxis clutch on
First Caxis machining
process
Approach, machining,
and escape
The ith Caxis

machining process
Final Caxis
machining process
Caxis clutch off
M05;
M30;
%
191
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Set the MTF parameters as shown below:

Number
Meaning
Setting Value
1313
Tool positive rotation M

code value
Set the corresponding M code value.
1314
Tool negative rotation M

code value
Set the corresponding M code value.
2024
Spindle speed command

block or tool speed
command block
0002, 0105, 0004, 0006, 0004, 1002, 0203, 0005, 0004, 0000
G00 M05 ;
M?? ;
G97 S
M03 ;
M04
M??
M??
2200
Caxis machining starting

part
0000, 0000 or less
2201
Caxis machining ending

part
0003, 0004, 0705, 504F, 1F41, 0004

T??00 ;
M98 P
8001 ;
2202
Caxis machining
coordinate system setting
Tool selection T code
command
0705, 504F, 1F40, 0004, 0103, 0004, 4402, 1101, 0001, 0004
M98 P
8000 ;
T??? ;
G50 X
Z
;
Actually output NC program is as shown below:

%
O100;
:
:
:
:
:
:
M98P8000;
T0101;
G50X_ Z_ ;
G0;
G97S2000M??;
:
:
:
T0100;
M98P8001;
:
:
:
Lathe turning
machining process
First Caxis
machining process
Approach, machining,
and escape
192
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
M98P8000;
T0303;
G50X_ Z_ ;
:
:
:
Y0300;
M98P8001;
:
:
:
The ith Caxis

machining process
M98P8000;
T0505;
G50X_ Z_ ;
:
:
:
T0500;
M98P8001;
First Caxis
machining process
M05;
M30;
%
NOTE
No NC programs with program numbers 8000 and 8001 can
be output in the FAPT.
Thus, manually create them beforehand.
O8000;
M05;
M;
G28H0. ;
G50C0. ;
M99;
O8001;
M
;
M01;
M99;
Caxis clutch on
Caxis clutch off
193
5. MTF
5.3
RIGID TAPPING NC
DATA INPUT
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
For both general tapping and rigid tapping processes, select the Caxis
tapping process. Whether general tapping or rigid tapping is to be
performed is set in the cutting conditions.
(1) Cutting conditions
In response to the prompt TYPE, set either 1 (general tapping) or 2
(rigid tapping).
(2) Examples of NC data output

TYPE 1: General tapping
G50X150.Z150.CO.
G00T0101
G97S0159M13
X50.
(Warning 1)
Z2.
G98G84(G88)Z13.R0.F239
C90.
C180
TYPE 2: Rigid tapping
G50X150.Z150.CO.
G00T0101
X50.
Z2.
G98G84(G88)Z13.R0.M29S0159M13F239.
C90.
(Warning 2) (Warning 1)
C180
WARNING
1 An M code is output only for forward spindle rotation. So,
the value set in MTF No.1313 is output. In the above
example, MTF No.1313 is set to 13.
2 M code specifying the rigid mode. In the above example,
the value set in MTF No.1350 (MTF No.1321 for 5700 series
of 16T CAP II) is output.
194
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(3) MTF Setting

1) Define the value of the M code for specifying the rigid tapping
mode in MTF No.1350 (MTF No.1321 for 5700 series of 16T
CAP II).
2) MTF function tables 2207 and 2208 are used for both general
tapping and rigid tapping.
FANUC standard MTF
1350=29 ... (For 5700 series of 16T CAP II, 1321 = 29)
2207=5802,6602,6302,1101, 0001,AA01, 0903,1505, 0203,0005
G98 G98 G84 X
Z
C
R
MXX S
Mxx
G99
G88
2208=0503,0B03, 0004, 0000
F
K
;
CAUTION
When rigid tapping is to be performed, set an F code after
the S code setting in MTF function table Nos.2207 and
2208. If the F code is specified before the S code, the F
code and its value are not output.
New function code

Three high-order
digits
195
One low-order
digit
Function
Preparation
Outputs M code M code set in MTF

that specifies rigid No.1350
tapping.
(MTF No.1321 for
5700 series of
16T CAP II)
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
5.4
FACE MILLING
Fig. 5.4 (a)
Data for face milling shape in Fig. 5.4 (a) are as follows:
(1) ELEMENT SYMBOL
POSITION
START POINT
CUTTING POS.
EBD POINT
ANGLE FROM C
Z = 70
X0 = 80
C0 = 0
PE = 0
DX = 40
A = 30
(2) ELEMENT SYMBOL

END POINT
DX = 40
(3) ELEMENT SYMBOL

END POINT
DX = 80
C=0
(4) ELEMENT SYMBOL

END POINT
ANGLE FROM C
DX = 40
A = 30
(5) Figure element

END POINT
DX = 40
(6) Figure element

END POINT
196
DX = 80
C=0
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Set the cutting condition data and tool data as follows:

(1) CUTTING CONDITIONS
RPM
N = 689.7
FEED RATE
FR = 0.025
FT = 0.035
CLEARANCE
C1 = 2
(2) TOOL DATA
TOOL DIAMETER
DT = 30
CUT WIDTH
DS = 30
CUT LENGTH
LT = 30
CUT COUNT
NT = 10
SETTING DIRECTION
CP = 1
Output NC data becomes as follows:
OXX;
.
.
.
G50X_ Z_ C_ ;
G00T___ ;
G97S0690;
N100 X154.Z70.;
C98.056;
G12.1;
N101 G01 X107.037 F172.;
N102 X70.668C45.135;
N103 X42.842C53.168;
N104 X113.51C8.033;
N105 X70.668C45.135;
N106 X42.842C53.168;
N107 X113.51C8.033;
N108 X107.037C0.;
G13.1;
.
.
.
197
5. MTF
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Fig. 5.4 (b) Tool path by output NC data
198
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
First cutting point and approach point

The cutting point always starts from a point where the tool is offset normal
to the starting element when the right and left of an element is cut.
Fig. 5.4 (c)
Bit 0 of MTF 1305 is used to switch between NC data created with

consideration for cutter compensation at the FAPT side, and NC data
created using the cutter compensation function at the NC side.
MTF1305
7
Cutter compensation:
0 : Performed by FAPT (G40/41/42 not output)
1 : Performed by NC (G40/41/42 output)
1) MTF 1305 bit 0 = 0:

NC data with cutter compensation at the FAPT is output when cutting
on the left side of the defined figure as well as when cutting on the right
side. Cutter is not considered when cutting on the element.
199
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Example 1:
Cutting on the right of the element
N1 X134. :
N2 Z5. ;
N3 C52.063 ;
N4 G12.1 ;
N5 G1 X115.015 F78. ;
N6 X28.07 C55.769 ;
N7 X32.703 C64.974 ;
N8 G13.1 ;
N9 G0 Z150. ;
N10 X150. ;
2) MTF 1305 bit 0 = 1:

NC data is created using the cutter compensation start block MTF
2212, but cancel block MTF 2213 is also accessed. With standard
settings, NC data such as the following is created.
Example 2:
When cutting on the right of a defined shape, output the G code (G42)
set in cutter compensation start block MTF 1232 and the G code (G40)
set in cutter compensation cancel block.
N1 X134. :
N2 Z5. ;
N3 C45. ;
N4 G12.1 ;
N5 G1 G42 X100. F78. ;
N6 X0. C50. ;
N7 G40 C67. ;
N8 G13.1 ;
N9 G0Z150. ;
N10 X150. ;
200
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5. MTF
3) When cutting on the element, the result is as shown below, regardless

of the value of MTF 1305 bit 0.
Example 3:
When cutting on the element
N1 X100. :
N2 Z2. ;
N3 C45. ;
N4 G12.1 ;
N5 G1 Z5. F31. ;
N6 X0. C50. F78. ;
N7 Z2. ;
N8 G13.1 ;
N9 G0 Z150. ;
N10 X150. ;
201
5. MTF
5.5
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Example of cylindrical figure
SIDE MILLING
Expansion diagram
Programming of the above cylindrical figure is the following below.

1) Figure element
Start point CO = 0 Z = 40
Cylinder diameter DX = 90
End point C = 40
2) Figure element
End point Z = 80 C = 140
3) Figure element
End point C = 220
4) Figure element
End point Z = 40 C = 320
5) Figure element
End point C = 360
202
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Tool data and cutting condition data are set as given below.
(Tool data)
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . .
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING DIRECTION . . . . .
DT = 10
DS = 10
LT = 30
NT = 4
CP = 0 (face use)
(Cutting condition)
SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = 4138
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FR = 0.025
FT = 0.01
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 = 2
Sample MTF setting
No.1305 = 00000000
No.1340 = 0
No.1341 = 0
No.2209 = 0102, 5702, 0170, 8107, 0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000
G1
G18 W0 H0
;
G7.1 C
;
G19
G107
No.2210 = 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000
G7.1 C
;
G107
The following NC data are output:

G0 T0808;
G97 S2000 M13;
Z40.;
X104. ;
C0;
G1 G18 W0 H0 ;
G7.1 C45000 ;
X90. F80. ;
N1 C40. F200.;
N2 X80. C140. ;
N3 G3 C220. R50.862;
N4 G1 Z40. C320.;
N5 C360. ;
G7.1 C0;
G0 X104.;
203
Start of cylindrical interpolation
End of cylindrical interpolation
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Parameters for side milling

1) System parameter
(1) Side milling machining process parameter
Bit
305
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
Bit 0 Unused
Bit 1 Coolant
0 : not used
1 : used
Bit 2 Tool compensation cancel
0 : not output
1 : output
Bit 3, 4 Approach (X, Z, C axis)
00: simultaneous 1 axis
01: simultaneous 2 axis
11, 10 : simultaneous 3 axis
Bit 5 Return relief (X, Z axis)
0 : simultaneous 2 axis
1 : simultaneous 1 axis
Bit 7 Transit point setting screen
0 : not displayed
1 : displayed
(2) Side milling machining process single step
Bit
315
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
Bit 0 Process start

Bit 1 Prior to approach
Bit 2 Prior to return relief
(3) Side milling machining process track color
No .585
2
Initial value (green)
204
#0
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
2) MTF
Initial
value
No.
Format
Description
1305
BIT
1340
Integer
0: The Caxis is parallel to the Xaxis.

1: The Caxis is parallel to the Yaxis.
1341
Integer
0: Match the number of fractional digits of

the Xaxis least input increment in MTF
No.1030.
1: Match the number of fractional digits of
the Zaxis least input increment in MTF
No.1031.
00000000 Bit 1: Specifies whether to output the radius

for cylindrical interpolation with or
without a decimal point.
0: Without a decimal point.
1: With a decimal point.
2209
Function table
2210
Function table
Function code
Three high-order
digits
One low-order
digit
Function
Outputs a G code FS15: G7.1
for cylindrical
FS16: G107
interpolation.
CAUTION
1 If MTF No.1344 is 0 (the Caxis is parallel to the Xaxis),
G18 is output as the plane selection command at the start
of circular interpolation. In this case, a lefthanded
coordinate system is used. If 1344 is 1 (the Caxis is
parallel to the Yaxis), the plane selection command is G19,
and righthanded coordinate system is used.
2 For the G1 move command at the start of cylindrical
interpolation, dummy values W0 and H0 are a output. This
means that approach takes place before the start of
cylindrical interpolation.
3 The cylinder radius specified in the cylindrical interpolation
command is output in the least input increment for the axis
specified in MTF No.1341.
4 If bit 1 of MTF No.1305 is set to 0, the cylinder radius
specified in the cylindrical interpolation command is output
without a decimal point. If bit 1 of MTF No.1305 is set to 1,
the radius is output with a decimal point. (MTF No.1305 is
also referenced for the C0 value output at the end of
cylindrical interpolation.)
205
5. MTF
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
5.6
G85/G89 BORING
CYCLE
B61804E2/05
To generate a G85/G89 boring cycle for Caxis machining, select

CAXIS DRILL for the machining type on the machining definition
screen.
Once TYPE 4 is selected on the cutting condition screen, then the cutting
conditions are set, a G85/G89 boring cycle is output during NC data
preparation.
(1) Machine tool file (1xxx)
Parameter
No.
Initial value for Initial value for

16/18 CAP II
15TFB/15TTFB
Format
Description
1376
Real
number
Boring cycle:
front face
85
89
1377
Real
number
Boring cycle:
side face
89
89
(2) Function table (2xxx)

The following blocks are referenced during NC data preparation.
1) For 16/18TC and 16i/18iTA
2216 =5802, 6002, 6702, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503, 0B03
P
F
K
G98 G98 G85 X
Z
C
R
2217 =0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
;
Repeat count
Feedrate (feed per revolution)
Dwell time at the bottom of the hole
Distance between the initial point and the reference point
2) For 15TFB/15TTFB
2216 =5702, 5802, 6002, 6702, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G89 X
Z
C
R
P
F
G18 G99
G19
Feedrate (feed per revolution)
Dwell time at the bottom of the hole
2217 =0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000

;
L
Distance between the initial point and the

reference point
Repeat count
NOTE
A new function code, 6702, has been provided to enable
output of a boring cycle G code.
206
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
CAUTIONS ON CAXIS FAPT
207
6. CAUTIONS ON CAXIS FAPT
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
6.1
SIMULTANEOUS
AXIS MOVE
CONTROL OF
APPROACH AND
RETURN RELIEF
6.1.1
Setting of Parameter
The setting of the number of simultaneous moving axes in the approach

and the return relief can be specified by 0300 0304 system parameters.
The simultaneous 1 axis, 2 axes or 3 axes can be specified at the approach.
The simultaneous 1 axis or 2 axes can be specified for X and Z at the return
relief.
6.1.2
Specification of Move
Order at the Time of
the Approach
6.1.3
Type of NC Data
1) Simultaneous 1 axis specification

The move order of Caxis always becomes last.
The order of Xaxis and Zaxis is set by MTF 1084.
2) Simultaneous 2 axes specifications
i) When MTF 1307 is set to 1, the axes move according to the setting
of MTF 1084. For instance, when MTF 1084 is set to 1, the order
becomes as follows:
Approach in end face: ZCaxis to Xaxis
Approach in outside diameter: XCaxis to Zaxis
ii) In case MTF 1307 is 0, the Caxis moves after the move of
XZaxis.
The meaning of undermentioned MTF changes because Caxis

machining is added.
The 2018th: Simultaneous 3 axes approach
The 2031st: First motion in simultaneous 1 axis approach
First motion in simultaneous 2 axes approach
The 2032nd:2nd motion in simultaneous 1 axis approach
3rd motion in simultaneous 1 axis approach
2nd motion in simultaneous 2 axes approach
208
B61804E2/05
6.2
SPINDLE
POSITIONING
METHOD
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
The approach in Caxis machining should be done in order of

simultaneous one axis and simultaneous 2 axes of XZ to C axis.
The rotating direction at the halffixed indexing is determined by + or
setting the indexing angle.
If the spindle cannot move by the indexing angle during the halffixed
indexing, an error is generated.
When the halffixed indexing is used, set the machine zero point
coordinate value of the Caxis to 0.
209
7. INFEED MACHINING IN CAXIS

FACE MILLING PROCESS
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
INFEED MACHINING IN CAXIS FACE MILLING

PROCESS
Infeed machining can be performed toward a face milling with the

cutting width defined in the X axis direction.
In addition, infeed machining can be performed toward an interpolated
plane with the cutting depth defined in the Z axis direction.
210
B61804E2/05
7.1
FIGURE DEFINITION
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

A figure can be defined in the same way as a face milling defined in (7)
of Section 1.3.2 of this part, except for the following restrictions:
(1) If multiple face millings are defined in a single definition, this function
is not supported.
(2) If cutting on an entity is defined, this function is not supported.
211

7.2
MACHINING
DEFINITION
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Machining type
Select CAXIS F. MILL process from the machining definition
screen.
Tool data
Use an end mill tool for milling.
Cutting conditions
The DRIVE ...DR= prompt is displayed on the cutting condition
screen before the prompt for the machining method. To perform
infeed machining, define 1. Otherwise, define 0.
When a cutting condition is newly defined, initial values are defined.
When a family program that has been created using an earlier version
is loaded, 0 is defined.
Select and define one of the following three types of infeed
machining methods.
DRIVE...DR = (1: on 0: off)
Infeed machining methods ... TP =
Select one of the following machining types. (initial value: 2)
1: Roughing
2: Finishing
3: Roughing finishing
If infeed machining is defined, the following prompts are displayed.

Define a value for each prompt.
Cutting allowance ...
RX = Cutting allowance in the X axis direction

(initial value: undefined)
RZ = Cutting allowance in the Z axis direction
Cutting width ........... W1 = Depth of a single cut in the X axis direction
(initial value: tool diameter DT * value in
system parameter No. 372)
Cutting depth ........... D1 = Depth of a single cut in the Z axis direction
Finishing allowance ... TX = Finishing allowance in the X axis direction
(initial value: value in system parameter
No. 368)
TZ = Finishing allowance in the Z axis direction
(initial value: value in system parameter
No. 373)
Note the following when defining data for cutting conditions:

(1) If multiple face millings are defined upon figure definition, or if
cutting on the entity of a face milling is defined, infeed machining
cannot be defined.
If an attempt is made to make such definitions, an error occurs
(correct key input is required) and another input is not accepted.
(2) When infeed machining is performed with the method specified
by machining type 2 (finishing), the prompts for cutting allowance
(RZ) and cutting depth (D1) are not displayed.
(3) If an attempt is made to input a negative value in any of the prompts
for the cutting width (W1), number of cuts (N1), cutting depth
(D1), and finishing allowance (TX/TZ), an error occurs (correct
input is required) and another input is not accepted.
When defining data other than the above, there is no difference
from the conventional definition.
212
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

However, note the following points when defining data because they
are not checked upon the creation of an NC format.
CAUTION
1 When cutting a face milling from the outside diameter,
setting too great a cutting allowance results in an excess air
cut.
2 When cutting a pocketed face milling from the inner surface,
setting too great a cutting allowance may result in excessive
cutting of a parts figure.
Automatic process determination
When a face milling is defined using the automatic process
determination function, method 2 without infeed machining is set.
Therefore, to use this function, modification is required on the cutting
condition screen.
213

7.3
SYSTEM
PARAMETERS
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
The following system parameters have been added.

No.
Format
Initial value
Description
372
Real number
0.2
Rate of cutting along the X

axis upon Caxis notching
(rate to the tool diameter)
373
Real number
0.5 (mm specification) Finishing allowance along the

0.02 (inch specification) Z axis upon Caxis notching
7.4
No MTF parameter is added to this function.
MTF
Use conventional MTF parameters.

(Bit 0 of MTF parameter No. 1305 can be used as usual to specify whether
to create NC data with the conversational program by considering cutter
compensation or to create NC data by using the NC cutter compensation
function.)
214
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
7.5

(1) Roughing
(a) Tool path viewed from an end face
TOOL PATH
DRAWING
Operation is as follows:

D

Face milling parts

figure
TX+DT/2
(Finishing allowance along the X axis
direction + tool diameter/2)
W1
(Cutting width)
1) Performs the operation that is set using approach. . . . . . D

(The above figure shows an example of normal direction
approach.)
2) Performs the first cutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At this time, if the tool path is drawn outside a blank, air cut
results.
3) Cuts the figure by the specified cutting width (W1). . . . .
4) Cuts the figure with the finishing allowance (TX) left uncut.
..............
5) Performs the escape operation set using the escape method.
..............
(The above figure shows an example of normal direction
escape.)
215

CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(b) Cutting order viewed from a side face
TZ (Finishing allowance)
RZ (Cutting allowance)
X
D1 (Cutting depth)
D
W1 (Cutting width)
RX
(Cutting allowance)
DT/2 (Cutter radius)

TX (Finishing allowance)
Z
Side view of a face milling
The following operations are performed.

1) Portions D and to be cut off are subject to the machining
explained in Tool path viewed from an end face.
At this time, machining cannot be performed in reverse order.
Cutting must always be executed sequentially, in the direction
toward the face milling.
2) When cutting along the Z axis is performed, the approach and
escape methods are the same.
The approach and escape points along the Z axis are determined
by subtracting the Zaxis clearance (C1) from the position of
the blank where the end face has a maximum size before the
figure is cut off by roughing.
3) When a figure is cut along the Z axis, after the final cutting in
the previous stage ends and the tool retracts in the Z axis
direction, polar coordinate interpolation is canceled. Then, the
first approach point is positioned in the next stage by means of
rapid traverse with the Zaxis coordinate unchanged, and polar
coordinate interpolation is restarted.
4) For portions and , then and , machining is performed
in the same way as shown in the tool path for portions D and
.
5) The number of cuts along the X axis is calculated as follows:
Cutting allowance (RX)
Cutting width along the X axis (W1)
The remainder obtained from the above calculation is assumed
as the amount of the final cut along the X axis.
216
B61804E2/05
CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

6) The number of cuts along the Z axis is calculated as follows:

Cutting allowance (RZ)
Cutting depth along the Z axis (D1)
The remainder obtained from the above calculation is assumed
as the amount of the final cut along the Z axis.
(2) Finishing
Cutting order viewed from a side face
TZ (Finishing allowance)
D

TX
(Finishing
allowance)
Z
Side view of a face milling
The following operations are performed.

1) The finishing allowance along the Z axis (TZ) is cut off in the
order of portions D then .
When the machining defined with machining type 3 is
performed, the cutting width and number of cuts along the X
axis is the same as for roughing.
2) Finally, the finishing allowance along the X axis (TX),
indicated by , is cut off.
3) The approach and escape points along the Z axis are determined
by subtracting the Zaxis clearance (C1) from the position of
the blank where its end face has a maximum size before the
figure is cut off by roughing.
When machining defined with machining type 3 is performed,
the approach and escape methods are the same as for roughing.
217
IX. YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
1. OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
The Yaxis FAPT function is provided as an option. The following

Yaxis machining can be programmed by using this function.
221
1. OVERVIEW
1.1
DRILLING
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Center drilling (CENTER DRILL), drilling (THROUGH HOLE), and

tapping (TAP) on a side face and end face can be programmed.
Both on a side face and end face, hole figures can be specified on a
circumference (CIRCLE HOLE), line (LINE HOLE), or at a desired
position (RANDOM HOLE).
222
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
1. OVERVIEW
1.2
The following machining can be programmed:
MILLING
1) Machining a pattern
On a side face and end face, a rectangle with rounded corners, like that
shown below, can be programmed as a pattern.
This pattern can be used to perform the following machining:
223
1. OVERVIEW
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
2) Machining a desired figure

A desired figure can be input by using the arrow keys. The tool path
can be specified on the right side, left side, or center of the input figure.
The following machining can be programmed:
224
B61804E2/05
1.3
ROTATING THE
MACHINING PLANE
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
1. OVERVIEW
If the Caxis angles (phase) of the desired machining planes are specified,
as well as the figure to be machined, the figure can be machined on the
specified planes.
The following figure shows holes of identical figures machined on plane
A (0), plane B (90), plane C (180), and plane D (270). Only a single
hole figure is programmed for this machining.
225

(MENU 2)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
PART FIGURE DEFINITION (MENU 2)
226
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
2.1
SPECIFYING A
YAXIS MACHINING
PROFILE
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
After the figure of a part to be turned is input using menu 2, the following
soft keys are displayed on the screen.
Press the [YAXIS MENU] soft key. The menu screen for programming
a Yaxis machining profile is displayed.
Upon the display of the FIGURE TYPE = prompt, input the number of
the desired machining profile (1 to 10). The detailed data input screen is
displayed.
NOTE
Up to 10 profiles can be input.
227

(MENU 2)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Soft keys
ESCAPE:
PART FIGURE:
ALL DELETE:
NEW:
CHECK ALL:
CURSOR
CURSOR:
NEXT PAGE:

Displays the figure definition screen for turning.
Deletes all defined data for a Yaxis figure.
Cancels the defined data for a Yaxis figure. Press
this key to define a new Yaxis figure.
Draws a figure according to the defined data.
Moves the cursor forward and backward.
Displays the data setting screen selected by the cursor.
If this soft key is pressed after the cursor has been
positioned to an undefined number, the program
menu screen is displayed.
228
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
2.2
SPECIFYING THE
YAXIS FIGURE
DATA
WARNING
CAUTION
machined properly.
229

(MENU 2)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
The data input screen, featuring a figure for Yaxis machining (excluding
the machining of a figure on a side face or end face) is configured as shown
below:
Soft keys
ESCAPE:
BACK PAGE: Returns the display to Y axis machining menu screen.
When this key is depressed in the course of data setting,
the already input data becomes invalid.
CHECK:
Draws the figure according to the input data.
(Only patterns defined here are drawn.)
CURSOR
CURSOR:
Moves the cursor forward and backward.
NEXT PAGE: Y axis machining menu screen proceeds.
(1) Screen for specifying holes on a circumference on the end face
Specify the following values:

PLANE (ZAXIS):
PZ = Position of the drilling plane
DEPTH:
DT = Hole depth
THREADING DIA:
WT = Hole diameter
THROUGH HOLE:
TH = 1 for through hole, 0 for blind hole
CENTER DRILL:
CG = 1 for center drilling, 0 for other
machining
230
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
TAPPING:
PITCH:
C.CENTER (XAXIS):
(YAXIS):
CIRCLE RADIUS:
INTERVAL:
HOLE QUANTITY:
ANGLE:
POS.QUANTITY:
POSITION ANGLE:
231

(MENU 2)
TA = 1 for tapping, 0 for other machining

PT = Pitch of tapping
CDX = Center of the circumference (diameter)
CY = Center of the circumference (radius)
RD = Radius of the circumference
AB = Whether multiple holes are drilled at
regular intervals (0 for regular intervals,
1 for irregular intervals)
AC = Number of holes (Up to 100 for drilling
at regular intervals, up to 6 for drilling at
irregular intervals)
A1 = Hole position (Angle, the angle of the
first hole if multiple holes are to be
drilled)
A2 = Position of the second hole (for drilling
at irregular intervals)
A3 = Position of the third hole (for drilling at
A4 = Position of the fourth hole (for drilling at
A5 = Position of the fifth hole (for drilling at
AE = Angle of the last hole if multiple holes
are drilled
NG = Number of phases (up to 6)
G1 = Position of the first phase (angle)
G2 = Position of the second phase (angle)
G3 = Position of the third phase (angle)
G4 = Position of the fourth phase (angle)
G5 = Position of the fifth phase (angle)
G6 = Position of the sixth phase (angle)

(MENU 2)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(2) Screen for specifying holes on a line on the end face

PLANE (ZAXIS):
DEPTH:
DT = Hole depth
THREADING DIA:
WT = Hole diameter
THROUGH HOLE:
TH = 1 for through hole, 0 for blind hole
CENTER DRILL:
machining
TAPPING:
PITCH:
POSITION (YAXIS): LY = Position of the line (radius)
INTERVAL:
HOLE PITCH:
PH = Interval between holes when drilled at
regular intervals (radius)
HOLE QUANTITY:
HOLE POSITION:
DX1=Hole position (X coordinate, the
position of the first hole when multiple
holes are drilled)
DX2=Position of the second hole (diameter,
for drilling at irregular intervals)
DX3=Position of the third hole (diameter, for
drilling at irregular intervals)
DX4=Position of the fourth hole (diameter, for
DX5=Position of the fifth hole (diameter, for
DX6=Position of the last hole if multiple holes
are drilled (diameter)
SHIFT COUNT:
NS = Number of rows of holes to be drilled
SHIFT VALUE:
SH= Interval between rows if multiple rows
of holes are drilled (radius)
232
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
POS.QUANTITY:
POSITION ANGLE:
NG =
G1 =
G2 =
G3 =
G4 =
G5 =
G6 =

(MENU 2)
Number of phases (up to 6)

Position of the first phase (angle)
Position of the second phase (angle)
Position of the third phase (angle)
Position of the fourth phase (angle)
Position of the fifth phase (angle)
Position of the sixth phase (angle)
(3) Screen for specifying holes at desired positions on the end face

PLANE (ZAXIS):
DEPTH:
DT = Hole depth
THREADING DIA:
WT = Hole diameter
THROUGH HOLE:
TH = 1 for a through hole, 0 for a blind hole
CENTER DRILL:
machining
TAPPING:
PITCH:
HOLE QUANTITY:
AC = Number of holes (Up to 6)
233

(MENU 2)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
HOLE POSITION:
POS.QUANTITY:
POSITION ANGLE:
234
B61804E2/05
DX1=Position of the first hole

(X coordinate, diameter)
Y1 = Position of the first hole
(Y coordinate, radius)
DX2=Position of the second hole
Y2 = Position of the second hole
DX3=Position of the third hole
Y3 = Position of the third hole
DX4=Position of the fourth hole
Y4 = Position of the fourth hole
DX5=Position of the fifth hole
Y5 = Position of the fifth hole
DX6=Position of the sixth hole
Y6 = Position of the sixth hole
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
(4) Screen for specifying holes on a circumference on the side face

PLANE (XAXIS):
DEPTH:
THREADING DIA:
THROUGH HOLE:
CENTER DRILL:
PDX=Position of the drilling plane (radius)

DT = Hole depth
WT = Hole diameter
machining
TAPPING:
PITCH:
C.CENTER (ZAXIS): CZ = Center of the circumference
(YAXIS):
CY = Center of the circumference (radius)
CIRCLE RADIUS:
RD = Radius of the circumference
INTERVAL:
HOLE QUANTITY:
ANGLE:
A1 = Hole position (Angle, the angle of the
first hole when multiple holes are
drilled)
A2 = Position of the second hole (for drilling
A3 = Position of the third hole (for drilling at
A4 = Position of the fourth hole (for drilling at
A5 = Position of the fifth hole (for drilling at
AE = Angle of the last hole if multiple holes
are drilled
POS.QUANTITY:
235

(MENU 2)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
POSITION ANGLE:
G1 =
G2 =
G3 =
G4 =
G5 =
G6 =
B61804E2/05

(5) Screen for specifying holes on a line on the side face

PLANE (XAXIS):
PDX=Position of the drilling plane (diameter)
DEPTH:
DT = Hole depth
THREADING DIA:
WT = Hole diameter
THROUGH HOLE:
CENTER DRILL:
machining
TAPPING:
PITCH:
POSITION (YAXIS): LY = Position of the line (radius)
INTERVAL:
236
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
HOLE PITCH:
PH = Interval between holes if they are drilled

at regular intervals
HOLE QUANTITY:

Z1 = Hole position (Zcoordinate, the
position of the first hole if multiple holes
are drilled)
Z2 = Position of the second hole (for drilling
Z3 = Position of the third hole (for drilling at
Z4 = Position of the fourth hole (for drilling at
HOLE POSITION:
Z5 = Position of the fifth hole (for drilling at

Z6 = Position of the last hole if multiple holes
are drilled
SHIFT COUNT:
NS = Number of rows of holes
SHIFT VALUE:
SH = Interval between rows if multiple rows

of holes are drilled
POS.QUANTITY:
POSITION ANGLE:

237

(MENU 2)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(6) Screen for specifying the positions of holes on a side face

PLANE (XAXIS):
PDX=Position of the drilling plane (diameter)
DEPTH:
DT = Hole depth
THREADING DIA:
WT = Hole diameter
THROUGH HOLE:
CENTER DRILL:

machining
TAPPING:
PITCH:
HOLE QUANTITY:
AC = Number of holes (Up to 6)
HOLE POSITION:
Z1 = Position of the first hole (Z coordinate)

Y1 = Position of the first hole
Z2 = Position of the second hole
(Z coordinate)
Y2 = Position of the second hole
Z3 = Position of the third hole (Z coordinate)
Y3 = Position of the third hole
Z4 = Position of the fourth hole (Z coordinate)
Y4 = Position of the fourth hole
Z5 = Position of the fifth hole (Z coordinate)
Y5 = Position of the fifth hole
Z6 = Position of the sixth hole (Z coordinate)
Y6 = Position of the sixth hole
POS.QUANTITY:
238
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
POSITION ANGLE:
239
G1 =
G2 =
G3 =
G4 =
G5 =
G6 =

(MENU 2)


(MENU 2)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(7) Screen for specifying a pattern on the end face

PLANE (ZAXIS):
DEPTH:
T.CENTER (XAXIS):
(YAXIS):
TRACK WIDTH:
TRACK LENGTH:
ROUNDNESS:
POS.QUANTITY:
POSITION ANGLE:
240
PZ = Position of the cutting plane

DT = Cutting depth
SDX=Center of the rectangle (diameter)
SY = Center of the rectangle (radius)
U = Width of the rectangle (radius)
V = Length of the rectangle (radius)
R = Radius if the corners are rounded
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
(8) Screen for specifying a pattern on a side face

PLANE (XAXIS):
PDX=Position of the cutting plane (diameter)
DEPTH:
DT = Cutting depth
T.CENTER (ZAXIS): SZ = Center of the rectangle
(YAXIS):
SY = Center of the rectangle (radius)
TRACK WIDTH:
W = Width of the rectangle
TRACK LENGTH:
V = Length of the rectangle (radius)
ROUNDNESS:
R = Radius of rounding if the corners are
rounded
POS.QUANTITY:
POSITION ANGLE:
241

(MENU 2)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(9) Screen for checking a figure
When the [CHECK] soft key is pressed on the detailed figure data setting
screen, the figure is drawn according to the data set as shown above. If
a figure has been programmed with symbolic keys, the figure is drawn
simultaneously. The screen used for programming a figure does not have
the [CHECK] soft key. (See (12) and (13) below.)
The figure above shows the hole figures on the side face. The side view
on the left shows the hole positions in the YZ plane. The front view, on
the right, shows the position of the drilling plane with a dotted line.
If hole figures on the end face are displayed, the front view, on the right,
indicates the hole positions in the XY plane with circles (D). The side
view, on the left, uses a dotted line to indicate the drilling plane.
(10) Screen for checking an entire figure
When the [CHECK ALL] soft key is pressed on the Yaxis figure
definition menu screen, the figure selected with the cursor is drawn as
shown above.
To draw another programmed figure, press the [LAST FIGURE] or
[NEXT FIGURE] soft key.
242
B61804E2/05

(MENU 2)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(11) Screen for specifying a figure on an end face
The XY plane is drawn and the prompts relating to the figure elements and
coordinates are displayed. Input a desired figure, using symbolic keys.
The following figure elements can be specified:
RC
Program a diameter as an X coordinate and a radius as a Y coordinate.

When the first element is specified, the CP = prompt is displayed. In
response to the prompt, specify the side to be cut, viewed from the start
point of the element.
CP = 0: On the right side, 1: On the left side, 2: On the element
Two or more singlestroke figures can be input. After a single figure
(singlestroke figure) has been defined, the ES = prompt is displayed.
In response to this prompt, press the INPUT key or the [NEXT PAGE] soft
key. The DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE? prompt is displayed. In
response to this prompt, enter 1, INPUT. Then, repeat the procedure
used to define the first figure. To abandon the definition of a second
figure, enter 0, INPUT. Up to ten singlestroke figures can be
programmed. (See additional information 1.)
NOTE
Figures cannot be defined in directory mode.
243

(MENU 2)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(12) Screen for specifying a figure on a side face
The YZ plane is drawn and prompts relating to figure elements and

coordinates are displayed. Input a figure, using the symbolic keys.
The following figure elements can be specified:
RC
Program a radius as both a Y coordinate and Z coordinate.

The rest of the procedure is the same as that for specifying a figure on an
end face.
When the first element is specified, the prompt CP = is displayed. In
response to this prompt, specify the side to be cut, as viewed from the start
point of the element.
CP = 0: On the right side, 1: On the left side, 2: On the element
Two or more singlestroke figures can be input. After a single figure
(singlestroke figure) has been defined, the prompt ES = is displayed.
In response to this prompt, press the INPUT key or the [NEXT PAGE] soft
key. The DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE? prompt is displayed. In
response to this prompt, enter 1, INPUT. Then, repeat the procedure
used to define the first figure. To abandon the definition of the second
figure, enter 0, INPUT. Up to ten singlestroke figures can be
programmed. (See additional information 1.)
244
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

(MENU 2)
NOTE
A figure cannot be defined in directory mode.
[Additional information 1]
(a) Defining a figure
1) Once a desired figure (singlestroke figure) has been defined, the
following prompt is displayed:
ES =
In response to the prompt, press the INPUT key or the [NEXT
PAGE] soft key. Then, the following prompt is displayed:
DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE? (1: YES, 0: NO)
To define only one singlestroke figures, enter 0 (NO). The Yaxis
menu screen is displayed.
To define tow or more singlestroke figures, enter 1 (YES). The
prompt relating to the start point of the next figure is displayed.
(Usually, the prompt relating to the start point is displayed after the
first figure element has been entered. In this case, however, the
prompt is displayed before any figure elements have been entered.)
If the INPUT key or the [NEXT PAGE] soft key is pressed in
response to the ES = prompt, before the end point of the last
element has been determined, the NO END POINT OF THE
LAST FIGURE error message is displayed. The subsequent
screen is not displayed.
2) Specify the start point of each figure with an absolute value. The
start point of the second or subsequent figure cannot be specified
with an incremental value relative to the coordinates of the end
point of the previous figure.
3) If multiple figures are defined, a dividing point between figures is
represented by a period (.).
4) Deleting and inserting a figure element
(i) Position the cursor to the element to be deleted and press the
[ELEMENT DELETE] soft key.
A period (.), which is used as the element to divide figures,
cannot be deleted. If an attempt is made to delete a period, the
THE KEY IS INVALID message is displayed.
(ii)To insert a figure element, simply follow the procedure for
defining a part figure.
To insert a figure between
alreadydefined figures, follow the steps described below:
(1) Position the cursor to the period (.) dividing the existing
figures.
(2) Press the [FIGURE INSERT] soft key.
(3) A prompt relating to the start point of the next figure is
displayed. In response to this prompt, enter the necessary
data. Then, follow the procedure for defining a part figure.
245

(MENU 2)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(b) Displaying figure elements

1) Displaying figure elements
A group of figure elements that can be drawn by a single keystroke is

displayed as a single figure and separated by a period.
The period cannot be directly entered nor deleted by using the operation
keys.
2) The start point of the first element of the first figure becomes the
machining start point when the NC data are created. Bearing this
in mind, define the part figure. The figures are machined in the
order in which they are defined.
3) To define a second or subsequent figure, specify the data of the start
point, then key in the figure element. This step differs from the
corresponding step for defining the first figure. (To define the first
figure, enter the figure element. Then, the prompt relating to the
start point is displayed.)
(c) Notes
The following restrictions are imposed on the definition of multiple
singlestroke figures:
NOTE
1 The side to be cut (CP) cannot be changed for each
individual figure.
2 A stepped figure cannot be defined. (For each definition)
246
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
3. SPECIFYING HOME AND INDEX

POSITIONS (MENU 3)
SPECIFYING HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS (MENU 3)
On the HOME & INDEX POSITION screen of menu 3, the following

prompts are displayed. Program a diameter as the X coordinate and a
radius as the Y and Z coordinates.
Home position
DXH =
ZH =
YH =
Index position
DXI =
ZI =
YI =
The initial values can be specified in system parameters 0207 to 0229.

These prompts can be skipped if bit 3 of system parameter 0009 is
specified accordingly.
247
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
DEFINING MACHINING (MENU 4)
248
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
4.1
MACHINING
DEFINITION MENU
To select Yaxis machining on menu 4 MACHINING DEFINITION,

press the [MILLING] soft key.
The soft keys of (a), below, are displayed. Select the desired type of
Yaxis machining. If the rightmost soft key [
] is pressed, the
subsequent sets of soft keys are displayed in the following order:
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
(a) Yaxis machining
(b) Caxis machining
(c) Center drilling/drilling
249
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(d) Turning
(e) Grooving/threading
NOTE
1 Pattern machining on an end face or side face is defined.
2 Machining of a figure on an end face or side face is defined.
250
B61804E2/05
4.2
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
1) Tool data
TOOL DATA
A rotary tool is always used for Yaxis machining.

a. Yaxis center drilling: Use a center drill (M)(Note 1).
b. Yaxis drilling: Use a drill (M).
c. Yaxis tapping: Use a tap (M).
d. Yaxis pattern machining: Use an end mill (M).
e. Yaxis contouring: Use an end mill (M).
NOTE
1 (M) represents a rotary tool for milling
2 Use the same tool data and material data as that used for
Caxis machining. For details, see the chapter on the
Caxis FAPT function.
Enter the following tool figure data:

Center drill
TOOL DIAMETER:
DRILL SIZE:
CUT LENGTH:
NOSE ANGLE:
DT =
DS =
LT =
AT =
Drill
TOOL DIAMETER:
CUT LENGTH:
NOSE ANGLE:
DT =
LT =
AT =
Tap
TOOL DIAMETER:
CUT LENGTH:
TECH LENGH:
PITCH:
DT =
LT =
LE =
PT =
End mill
TOOL DIAMETER:
CUT WIDTH:
TOOTH LENGTH:
NUMBER OF TEETH:
DT =
DS =
LT =
NT =
251
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Enter the tool setting position, as follows:

SETTING POSITION
XS = (radius)
ZS = (radius)
YS = (radius)
2) Machining start position
Enter the following data:
X coordinate DX0 = (diameter)
Z coordinate Z0 = (radius)
Y coordinate Y0 = (radius)
3) Passing points
Enter the following data. Program a diameter as an X coordinate and
a radius as a Y and Z coordinate.
Passing points to start machining
First point
XA1 =
ZA1 =
YA1 =
Second point
XA 2 =
ZA2 =
YA2 =
Passing points to end machining
First point
XE1 =
ZE1 =
YE1 =
Second point
XE2 =
ZE2 =
YE2 =
252
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
4.3
CUTTING AREA
When two or more figures are machined in a single process, the cutting
area definition screen is displayed. On this screen, the target figures are
drawn as shown above. Press the [LAST FIGURE] or [NEXT FIGURE]
soft key to select the desired figure.
253
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
4.4
CUTTING
CONDITIONS
WARNING
1) Cutting conditions
Enter the following cutting conditions for the machining:
a. Yaxis center drilling
DEPTH OF CUT: D1 = Depth of cut (mm)
CLEARANCE:
C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
RPM:
N=
FEEDRATE:
FT = Feed amount per revolution of the tool

(mm/rev)
Tool rotational speed (rpm)
b. Yaxis drilling
b1. Drilling method 1
CLEARANCE:
DWELL ON/OFF: DW =1 for dwell at the bottom of the

hole, 0 for no dwell
RPM:
N=
FEEDRATE:
FT = Feed amount per revolution of the

tool (mm/rev)

CLEARANCE:
RETRACTION:
U=
Retraction distance (mm)

RPM:
N=
FEEDRATE:

tool (mm/rev)

CLEARANCE:

RPM:
N=
FEEDRATE:

tool (mm/rev)
254
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
c. Yaxis tapping
c1. Tapping method 1
CLEARANCE: C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
RPM:
N = Tool rotational speed (rpm)
c2. Tapping method 2 (rigid tapping)
RPM:
c3. Tapping method 3 (rigid tapping with pecking):
FANUC Series 15TFB/TTFB only
RPM:
d. Yaxis pattern machining (grooving/pocketing)
d1. Machining method 1 (See 2) Cutting patterns.)
CUTTING DIRECTION: CD = Cutting direction
(See (*) Cf1 below.)
DIRECTION OF CUT: DR = Direction of cut
CLEARANCE:
FINISHING ALLOWANCE: TS = Finishing allowance
(mm)
DEPTH OF CUT:
D1 = Depth of cut (mm)
ROTATION SPEED:
FEEDRATE:
FT = Feed amount for each tooth
in the transverse direction
of the tool (mm/rev)
FR = Feed amount for each tooth
in
the
longitudinal
direction of the tool
(mm/rev)
d2. Machining method 2 (See 2) Cutting patterns.)
CUTTING DIRECTION: CD = Cutting direction (See (*)
Cf1 below.)
DIRECTION OF CUT: DR = Direction of cut
CLEARANCE:
FINISHING ALLOWANCE: TS = Finishing allowance
(mm)
DEPTH OF CUT:
D1 = Depth of cut (mm)
255
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
ROTATION SPEED:
N=
FEEDRATE:

in the longitudinal direction
e. Yaxis contouring (machining a desired figure)

MACHINING TYPE:
TP = Machining type 1, 2, or 3
CLEARANCE:
(FINISHING ALLOWANCE: TS = Finishing allowance

(mm).
This prompt is
displayed
when
machining type 2 is
selected.)
ROTATION SPEED:
N=
FEEDRATE:

in
the
longitudinal
direction of the tool
(mm/rev)
APPROACH METHOD: SM = Approach type

DT = Length in the tangent
direction (mm)
DN = Length in the
direction (mm)
ESCAPE METHOD:
normal
EM = Escape type
DT = Length in the tangent
direction (mm)
DN = Length in the
direction (mm)
normal
(*) Cf1. CD =, DR =: Set the direction, using an arrow key (, , or ).

(*) Cf2. TS = 0 or an undefined value: Finishing is not performed.
(*) Cf3. TP = 1: Only roughing is performed.
TP = 2: Only finishing is performed.
TP = 3: Finishing is performed after roughing has been
completed.
(*) Cf4. SE/EM = 1: Direct approach/escape
SE/EM = 2: Tangent approach/escape
SE/EM = 3: Normal approach/escape
SE/EM = 4: Approach/escape along a tangent circle
256
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
2) Cutting patterns
a. Yaxis center drilling
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
b. Yaxis drilling
257
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
c. Yaxis tapping
c1, c2. Tapping methods 1 and 2
c3. Tapping method 3 (15TFB/TTFB only)
258
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
d. Yaxis pattern machining (grooving/pocketing)

d1. Machining methods
Machining method 1
Cutting is made in a single direction as shown below. Upon
the completion of this cutting, finishing is performed along
the contour except when the finishing allowance is set to 0
or is not defined. (See d3 below.)
Machining method 2
Cutting is performed in both directions, as shown below.
Upon the completion of this cutting, finishing is performed
along the contour except if the finishing allowance is set to
0 or is not defined. (See d3 below.)
259
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
d2. Clearance
For machining method 1 or 2, specify the following
clearances:
(1) In safety first mode (when bit 1 of system parameter 309 is
set to 0)
Blank figure
When safety first mode is selected, the tool is moved to a

position determined from the maximum dimension of the
blank outline, plus clearance C1, in rapid traverse mode
during approach/beginning of cutting. From this position,
the tool is moved in cutting feed mode to start cutting.
At the end of cutting/escape, the tool is returned to the
position determined from the maximum dimension of the
blank outline, plus clearance C1, in rapid traverse mode.
260
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
(2) In efficiency first mode (when bit 1 of system parameter 309

is set to 1)
Blank figure
When efficiency first mode is selected, the tool is moved

through a position determined from the maximum dimension of
the blank outline, plus clearance C1, to a position determined
by the dimension of the cutting plane, plus clearance C1, in
rapid traverse mode at approach/beginning of cutting. From
that position, the tool is moved in the cutting feed mode to start
cutting.
At the end of cutting/escape, the tool is moved back through the
position determined from the dimension of the cutting plane,
plus clearance C1, to the position determined from the
maximum dimension of the blank outline, plus clearance C1, in
rapid traverse mode.
261
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Top view
(Machining method 1)
SP: Position of approach/beginning of cutting

EP: Position of end of cutting/escape
TS: Finishing allowance
D1: Depth of cut
C2: Clearance
262
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
(Machining method 2)
SP: Position of approach/beginning of cutting

EP: Position of end of cutting/escape
TS: Finishing allowance
D1: Depth of cut
263
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
d3. Direction of cutting in finishing

Finishing is started from the position at which roughing
(machining method 1 or 2) ended. The tool is manipulated
to cut off the finishing allowance.
The direction of finish cutting is determined from the

shortest of the direction of cut and the direction of cutting.
Direction
of feed
Direction
of feed
264
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
d4. Corner rounding

The position of approach depends on whether the corners are
rounded. (Escape is the reverse of an approach operation.)
e. Yaxis contouring (machining a figure)

Cutting on side face
Cutting on end face
265
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
e1. Roughing/finishing
Roughing for contouring of type 1 or 3 is executed to leave
a finishing allowance around the defined part figure.
Position of the tool used

for roughing
Tool path : Left side viewed from

the start point of figure definition
Tool path : Right side viewed from

the start point of figure definition
Contour produced by roughing
WARNING
The cutting position (CP), viewed from the point at which the
definition of a part figure element is started, represents the
difference between outer surface contouring and inner
surface contouring.
Outer surface contouring:
The cutting position is on the left, viewed from the start
point of figure definition (CP = 1).
Inner surface contouring:
The cutting position is on the right, viewed from the
start point of figure definition (CP = 0).
If cutting is performed for the contour of a defined figure

element, outer surface contouring cannot be differentiated
from inner surface contouring.
e2. Approach/escape method
The following four approach/escape patterns are supported
for contouring:
(1) Direct approach (escape)
(2) Tangent approach (escape)
(3) Normal approach (escape)
(4) Approach (escape) along a tangent circle
266
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
The prompt relating to the approach/escape method is not

displayed if cutting is performed for the contour of the defined
figure.
(1) Direct approach (escape): SM = 1 (EM = 1)
A cut is directly made from the approach point to the
machining start position.
(2) Tangent approach (escape): SM = 1 (EM = 1)
The following prompt is added:
LENGTH: DT = Length in the direction of the tangent (mm or inch)
Cutting start point
Machining start point
When the tool offset is executed by FAPT: Left side viewed

from the start point (CP = 1)
(3) Normal approach (escape): SM = 3 (EM = 3)
LENGTH: DM = Length in the normal direction (mm or inch)
Part figure
When the tool offset is executed by FAPT: Right side viewed

267
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(4) Approach (escape) along a tangent circle: SM = 4 (EM = 4)

LENGTH: DT = Length in the direction of the tangent (mm or inch)
DM = Length in the normal direction (mm or inch)
When the tool offset is executed by FAPT: Left side viewed

[Additional information]
1) An undefined input for the approach or escape method is not accepted.
An undefined input of the DT or DN value is not accepted, either.
2) If finishing is performed after roughing in end facing, the tool is
returned by an amount equal to the distance of the clearance along the
Zaxis at the end of roughing. (In side facing, the tool is returned by
an amount equal to the distance of the clearance along the Xaxis.)
Then, finishing is started.
3) If cutter compensation is performed by the NC (bit 0 of MTF1305 is
set to 1) and if approach or escape along a tangent line or circle is
specified, linear movement along the tangent is inserted when cutter
compensation is started (G41/G42 is output) and ended (G40 is
output). The extension amount set in system parameter 371 is
referenced when the movement is inserted.
System parameter
No.
371
Format
Initial value
Description
1.0
Extension for approach or escape

along a tangent line or circle during
Caxis notching or Yaxis contouring
Unit: mm or inch
Real number
0.1
*) The parameter affects the Family Program. Always specify a positive

value for this parameter.
The cutter compensation performed by the NC instigates the following
operation, depending on the approach/retraction method:
268
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
31) Direct approach/retraction

The NC does not perform cutter compensation. If an attempt is
made to define 1 (direct) as the approach method (SM) or escape
method (EM) after bit 0 of MTF1305 has been set to 1, the
CORRECT KEYIN error message is displayed. The attempted
input is not accepted.
If bit 0 of MTF1305 is set to 1 after direct approach/escape has been
defined, an error occurs when an attempt is made to create the NC
data.
The NC data cannot be created.
32) Tangent approach/escape
For approach or escape, a linear movement equal to the extension
is inserted. The following operation is performed. (The illustration
shows the compensation on the right side of the blank outline.)
SPA: Cut start point

SPA: Cut start point for starting the compensation
SP: Cutting start point
EP: Cutting end point
EPE: Escape end point
EPE: Escape end point for ending the compensation
Continuous line: Programmed tool path
Dotted line:
Actual tool path
269
(MENU 4)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
33) Normal approach/retraction

amount is not inserted. The operation is shown below:
34) Approach/escape along a tangent circle

is inserted. The following operation is carried out. (The
outline.)
270
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
(MENU 4)
4) If cutter compensation is performed by the FAPT (bit 0 of MTF1305

is set to 0) and if cutting is executed along the contour of a closed blank
outline, the NC data are created so that the cutting end point (EP) meets
the cutting start point (SP) on the actual tool path.
Example: Cutting with normal approach/escape on the right side of a
blank outline
271
(MENU 6)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
ANIMATED SIMULATION (MENU 6)
In 16TC CAP II and 16iTA CAP II, the animated simulation function
has been improved.
When using CAP II of the above models, see Part XIII, Animated
Simulation Function II.
Yaxis machining is simulated for the YZ and XY planes.
1) The following planes are displayed as the side view and front view for
turning, Caxis machining, and Yaxis machining:
2)
3)
4)
5)
side view
Front view
Turning and Caxis machining
XZ plane
XC plane
Yaxis machining
YZ plane
XY plane
* The names of the current coordinate systems are displayed on the

screen. (See Figs. 5 (a), (b), and (c).)
The blank outline is painted out, in green, in the drawings of the side
face and end face.
The tool for Yaxis machining on the end face is drawn as shown in
Fig. 5 (b).
The tool for Yaxis machining on the side face is drawn as shown in
Fig. 5 (c).
During machining simulation, the picture of the blank figure can be
refreshed. The following two methods are supported:
a. [REFRESH] soft key
If this soft key is pressed during simulation, the displayed blank
figure, tool path, and machining path are refreshed.
b. Automatic refresh
At the end of each Yaxis machining process, the blank figure, tool
path, and machining path are refreshed. In Yaxis side facing, the
data is refreshed each time the phase angle is changed.
To simulate Yaxis machining, set related system parameters. See f,
Parameters related to animated simulation in 6, system
Parameters.
272
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Fig. 5 (a)
Fig. 5 (b) (Yaxis end facing)
273
(MENU 6)
(MENU 6)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Fig. 5 (c) (Yaxis side facing)
274
B61804E2/05
6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
WARNING
a. Parameters to enable the skipping of prompts
Parameter No.
Format
Initial value
0009
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00010000
Description
Remarks
Specify to skip a particular question.

Bit
7
0
5
0
3
0
Bit 0
Designation of index position
Bit 1
Designation of home position
Bit 2
Designation of machining start point
Bit 3
Designation of Yaxis index position and home

position
Bit 4
Selection of drawing format
Bit 6
Selection of standard surface roughness

0: Non skip
0: Skip
275
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
b. Common parameters for Caxis machining and Yaxis machining

Parameter No.
Format
Initial value
0320
Real number
Dwell time in a Caxis or Yaxis drilling process

(unit: seconds)
0321
Integer
80
Cutting speed override for applications using a tool

made of special material (percentage of the cutting
speed for a carbide tool)
0322
Integer
80
Feed amount override for applications using a tool

made of special material (percentage of the feed
amount for a carbide tool)
0370
Real number
2000
Maximum spindle speed for Caxis or Yaxis

machining tool (unit: rpm)
1.0
0371
Real number
0.1
Description
Remarks
Extension amount for approach/escape along a

tangent line or circle in Caxis notching or Yaxis
contouring
Unit: mm or inches
c. Y coordinates of home and inde to positions

Parameter No.
Format
0222
Real number
0223
0224
0225
0226
0227
0228
0229
Initial value
Description
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
276
Ycoordinate value of the home position (for head

4axis
1 with the 4
axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
Ycoordinate value of the home position (for head
4axis
2 with the 4
axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
Ycoordinate value of the index position (for head
4axis
1 with the 4
axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
Ycoordinate value of the index position (for head
4axis
2 with the 4
axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
Ycoordinate value of the home position on back
4axis
side machining (for head 1 with the 4
axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
Ycoordinate value of the home position on back
4axis
axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
Ycoordinate value of the index position on back
4axis
axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
Ycoordinate value of the index position on back
4axis
axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
d. System parameters related to a process (for Yaxis machining)

Parameter No.
Format
Initial value
0400
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00100100
Description
Remarks
Yaxis center drilling process parameter

Bit
Bit 1
0
0
For Yaxis
machining
Coolant
0: Not used
1: Used
Bit 2
Cancellation of tool compensation

0: Not output
1: Output
Bit 3, 4
Approach
00: Simultaneous 1 axis
Bit 5, 6
Return relief
11, 10: Simultaneous 3 axis
Bit 7 The prompt relating to the passing point is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
0401
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00100100
Yaxis drilling process parameter (refer to the

parameter No.400)
0402
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00100100
Yaxis tapping process parameter (refer to the

parameter No.400)
0403
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00100100
Yaxis pattern machining process parameter (refer to

the parameter No.400)
0404
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00100100
Yaxis contouring process parameter (refer to the For Yaxis

machining
parameter No.400)
0405 to 0409
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
Cant use.
(Dont change the data.)
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
0410
0411
Single step of Yaxis center drilling process

Bit
00000000
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
Process start
Just before escape
0: Not stopped
1: Stopped
Single step of Yaxis drilling process (refer to the

parameter No.410)
277
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Parameter No.
Format
Initial value
Description
0412
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
Single step of Yaxis tapping process (refer to the

parameter No.410)
0413
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
Single step of Yaxis pattern machining process (refer

to the parameter No.410)
0414
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
Single step of Yaxis contouring process (refer to the

parameter No.410)
0415 to 0419
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
Cant use.
0420
Real number
0421
Real number
0422
Real number
0423
Real number
0425
Real number
0427
0428
0.08
inch specification
Undefined
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
Undefined
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
Real number
0430
Real number
Undefined
Clearance amount (C1) of Yaxis

drilling (machining method 1)
Unit: mm or inch
Unit: mm or inch
Cant use.
Real number
Real number

center drilling
Unit: mm or inch
Cant use.
Real number
0429
0431
mm specification
Real number
0424
0426
2.

Unit: mm or inch
Unit: mm or inch
Cutting depth (D1) of Yaxis
Unit: mm or inch
Return relief amount (U) of
Caxis
drilling
(machining
method 2)
Unit: mm or inch
Cant use.
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
Real number
278

Unit: mm or inch
Unit: mm or inch
B61804E2/05
Remarks
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Parameter No.
Format
0432
Real number
0433
Real number
0435
Real number
0437
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
Undefined
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
0439
Real number
Undefined
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
Real number
Real number
Integer
80
0443
Real number
Undefined
0444
Real number
0445
0446
0447

drilling
Unit: mm or inch
tapping (machining method 3:
Rigid tapping with pecking)
Unit: mm or inch
Clearance (C1) of Yaxis pattern

machining (machining method 1)
Unit: mm or inch
Unit: mm or inch
Finishing allowance (TS) of
Yaxis
pattern
machining
(machining method 1)
Unit: mm or inch
Cant use.
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
Real number
80

tapping
ta
ing
Unit: mm or inch
Cutting depth D1
(Percentage of the tool diameter)
Real number
Integer

Unit: mm or inch
Cant use.
2.
0442

Unit: mm or inch
Cant use.
Real number
Real number
0441
2.
Real number
0438
0440
Description
Real number
0434
0436
Initial value

Unit: mm or inch
Unit: mm or inch
Finishing allowance (TS) of
Yaxis
pattern
machining
(machining method 2)
Unit: mm or inch
Cutting depth D1
(Percentage of the tool diameter)
279
Remarks
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Parameter No.
Format
Initial value
0448
Real number
Undefined
2.
0449
0450
0451 to 0459
Description
mm specification
inch specification
0.5
mm specification
0.02
inch specification
Real number
Real number
Undefined
Remarks
Cant use.
Real number
0.08
B61804E2/05
Clearance
(CD)
in
longitudinal direction of the
and clearance (C1) in
circumferential direction of
tool for Yaxis contouring
Unit: mm or inch
Finishing allowance
Yaxis
Y
axis contouring
Unit: mm or inch
the
tool
the
the
(TS)
of
Cant use.
e. System parameters related to color display (for Yaxis machining)

Standard setting value
No
Parameter No.
Description
Value
Color
0570
Green
Machining path of Yaxis machining (center drilling)
0571
Green
Machining path of Yaxis machining (drilling)
0572
Green
Machining path of Yaxis machining (tapping)
0573
Green
Machining path of Yaxis machining (pattern machining)
0574
Green
Machining path of Yaxis machining (contouring)
0575 to 0578
Undefined
Undefined
Not used
0579
Light blue
Yaxis machining parts figure
f. Parameters related to animated simulation

Parameter No.
Format
Initial value
Description
0733
Integer
Undefind
Value of the M code used for starting Yaxis machining
0734
Integer
Undefind
Value of the M code used for ending Yaxis machining
0771
Character
Undefind
Axis names and their order (Specify axis names in the

order in which they are programmed on the NC.
Example: XZCY)
280
Remarks
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
7. NC MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF)
NC MACHINE TOOL FILE (MTF)
WARNING
The initial values in the MTF (machine tool file) listed below
are different from those used for a production run. Actual
setting values vary with the machine. For details, refer to the
manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these data
values are not set appropriately for the actual machine
a. MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 1000 to 1999

Parameter No.
Format
1022
Real number
1032
Initial value
Description
0.001
mm specification
0.0001
inch specification
mm specification
inch specification
Integer
Yaxis minimum setting unit

Unit: mm or inch
Number of decimal digits of the Yaxis minimum
setting unit
1048
2
characters
YV
Yaxis command address

1st character: absolute command
2nd character: incremental command
1049
2
characters
JJ
Circular center address (designate 2 same characters) in Yaxis

direction
Method of specifying the X and Y coordinates

0: Radius for an X coordinate, radius for a Y coordinate
1: Diameter for an X coordinate, radius for a Y coordinate
(standard setting)
2: Radius for an X coordinate, diameter for a Y coordinate
3: Diameter for an X coordinate, diameter for a Y coordinate
1081
1082
Integer
Integer
Circular interpolation function

0: Two or more quadrants (Note 1)
1: One quadrant only (Note 1)
2: Specifying radius R
3: Specifying radius R (one quadrant only)
(Note 1)
The addresses specified in 1042, 1043, and 1049 become

the addresses of the center on the axes.
281
Parameter No.
Format
1084
Integer
1093
Integer
1304
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Initial value
Description
Movement sequence of sequential approach and escape along one or

two axes if the Yaxis FAPT function is used (valid only when
simultaneous approach or escape along one or two axes is specified in
system parameters 0400 to 0405)
0: Approach is always started from the XY plane.
Retraction is always started from the Zaxis.
1: End face
Approach: Tool axis (Zaxis)
Tool path (XY plane)
Escape: Tool path (XY plane)
Tool axis (Zaxis)
Side face
Approach: Tool axis (Xaxis)
Tool path (ZY plane)
Escape: Tool path (ZY plane)
Tool axis (Xaxis)
2: Reverse movement sequence of 1 above (standard setting)
3: Approach is always started from the Zaxis.
Escape is always started from the XY plane.
4000.
mm specification
160.
inch specification
Yaxis rapid traverse rate

Unit:
U it mm or iinch
h
In each process, the specifications of a canned drilling cycle

(Caxis or Yaxis) are:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
00000011
Center drilling
Drilling
Bit
1305
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
1350
Integer
(3 bits)
29
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
Bit 0
For face milling (polar coordinate interpolation), finishing of

Yaxis pattern machining, and contouring, cutter compensation
is:
0: Carried out by the FAPT. (G40, G41, or G42 is not output.)
1: Carried out by the NC. (G40, G41, and G42 are output.)
M code of the miscellaneous function for preparing for rigid tapping
282
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
b. Function table (MTF2000 to MTF2999)

Parameter
No.
Description
Remarks
2018
Outputs the block of move commands for Rapid traverse

simultaneous approach along two axes.
command,
Outputs the block of move commands for coolant on, etc.
simultaneous approach along four axes (with
Yaxis FAPT).
2019
Outputs the block of move commands for Rapid traverse

simultaneous retraction along two axes.
command,
Outputs the block of move commands for coolant off, etc.
simultaneous retraction along three axes (with
Yaxis FAPT).
2031
First motion of approach along an axis.

First motion of simultaneous approach along
one, two, or three axes as the same time (Yaxis)
2032
Second motion of approach along an axis.

Second or subsequent motion in simultaneous
approach along one, two, or three axes (Yaxis).
2033
First motion of retraction along an axis.

First motion of simultaneous retraction along one
or two axes (Yaxis).
2034
Second motion of retraction along an axis.

Second or subsequent motion of simultaneous
retraction along one or two axes (Yaxis)
2070
Beginning part of Yaxis machining (Note 1)
2071
Beginning part of Yaxis center drilling
2072
Beginning part of Yaxis drilling
2073
Beginning part of Yaxis tapping
2074
Beginning of Yaxis pattern
2075
Beginning of Yaxis contouring
2080
Not used
2081
End part of Yaxis center drilling
2082
End part of Yaxis drilling
2083
End part of Yaxis tapping
2084
End of Yaxis pattern
2085
End of Yaxis contouring
2110
Beginning of a turning process (Note 2)
2111
Beginning of a milling process (Note 3)
2212
Block in which cutter compensation for face Valid when bit 7

milling (polar coordinate interpolation), finishing of MTF1305 is
of Yaxis pattern, or Yaxis contouring is started. set to 1
2213
Block in which cutter compensation for face

milling (polar coordinate interpolation), finishing
of Yaxis pattern, or Yaxis contouring is
canceled.
283
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
NOTE
1 Data is referenced at the beginning of Yaxis machining.
If two or more Yaxis machining processes are defined
continuously, the data is not referenced for the second or
subsequent processes.
2 The data is referenced at the beginning of a turning process.
If two or more turning processes are defined continuously,
the data is not referenced for the second or subsequent
processes.
3 The data is referenced at the beginning of a milling process.
If two or more milling processes are defined continuously,
processes. The milling process can be a Caxis machining
process or Yaxis machining process.
c. Function codes
Highorder Loworder
three digits one digit
2
284
Function
3rd axis output (Y axis)
Remarks
Address specified
MTF1048
in
3rd axis auxiliary output Address specified

(circular center Y axis) MTF1049
in
Output of V0
Output when approach

or
retraction
is
simultaneously
performed along two
axes
or
when
movement is performed
along the Yaxis only
Output of Y0
Address of the first

character in MTF1048
Output of Y0
Address of the second

Output of J0
Address of the first

Output of J0
Address of the second

B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
d. Referring to a function table in a Yaxis machining process

Example)
Yaxis drilling
Point to be
referenced
Parameter
No.
Description
(1) Home position

(beginning of a
program)
2000
Feed, EOB, program number
2016
G50X_Z_Y_;
(2) Home position

Toolchange
point
2017
Movement to the toolchange point

G0X_Z_Y_;
(3) Toolchange
oint
point
(beginning of a
process)
2111
2070
Beginning of a Yaxis machining process

(Note 2)
2071
to
2075
Beginning of a Yaxis machining process:

2072 for a drilling process
2202
Coordinate system setting, tool selection

G50X_Z_Y_C_S_;
GOT;
2024
Specifying spindle speed

G97S_Mxx;
285
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Point to be
referenced
(4) Approach
First movement
from the
toolchange
point, coolant
on
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Description
Servo motor control method

2018
or
2031
2032
Simultaneous approach along four axes

Simultaneous approach along one, two, or
three axes
The number of axes along which
movement is performed is determined
by bits 3 and 4 of system parameters
400 to 404.
Spindle positioning method

2031
2032
2211
(5) to (9)
Command of
linear
movement or
rotation

three axes (Warning 1) (Warning 2)
Specifying spindle indexing (Warning 3)
When bit 1 of MTF1304 is set to 0 (canned drilling cycle

is not used)
2017
Specifying rapid traverse or cutting feed

(linear movement or rotation)

2017
2211

(linear movement)
Specifying spindle indexing
When bit 1 of MTF1304 is set to 1 (canned drilling cycle

is used)
2203
to
2206
Specifying a canned drilling cycle


2203
to
2206
2211
Specifying a canned drilling cycle

(linear movement)
Specifying spindle indexing
WARNING
1 Specify whether the approach is simultaneously performed
along one, two, or three axes.
2 Do not specify the function code of AA01 (Caxis move
command).
3 A Caxis move command is executed.
286
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
NOTE
1 The data is not referenced for the second or subsequent
process of continuous (Caxis/Yaxis) milling processes.
process of continuous Yaxis processes.
Point to be
referenced
Parameter
No.
(10) Escape
Movement to
the toolchange
point, coolant off
2019
or
2033
2034
Simultaneous escape along three axes
(11) Toolchange
point
(End of the
process)
2081
to
2085
End part of the process:

Txx00;
M1;
(12) Toolchange
point
machine zero
point
2017
Movement to the home position

G0X_Z_Y_;
(13) Home position

(end of the
program)
2001
Trailing section
Spindle stop, tool offset cancel, program
stop, EOR
287
Description
Simultaneous escape along one or two

axes
The number of axes along which the
400 to 404.
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Example)
B61804E2/05
Yaxis pattern machining
Point to be
referenced
Parameter
No.
(1) Home position

(beginning of a
program)
2000
Feed, EOB, program number
2016
G50X_Z_Y_;
(2) Home position

Toolchange
point
2017
Movement to the toolchange point

GOX_Z_Y_;
(3) Toolchange
point
(beginning of a
process)
2111
2070
Beginning of a Yaxis machining process

(Note 2)
2071
to
2075
Beginning of a Yaxis machining process:

2202
Coordinate system setting, tool selection

G50X_Z_Y_C_S_;
G0T;
2024
Specifying spindle speed

G97SMxx;
288
Description
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Point to be
referenced
(4) Approach
First movement
from the
toolchange
point, coolant
on
Parameter
No.
Description

2018
or
2031
2032
Simultaneous approach along four axes

three axes
400 to 404.

2031
2032
2211

three axes (Warning 1) (Warning 2)
Specifying spindle indexing (Warning 3)
2017

(5) to (15)
Command of
linear
movement or
rotation
2020
or
2221
(16) Escape
Movement to
the toolchange
point, coolant off
2019
or
2033
2034
Simultaneous escape along three axes
(17) Toolchange
point
(End of the
process)
2081
to
2085
End part of a process: 2084 for a pattern

machining process
Txx00;
M1;
(18) Toolchange
point
home
posision
2017
Movement to home position

G0X_Z_Y_;
(19) Home position

(end of
program)
2001
Trailing section
Spindle stop, tool offset cancel, program
stop, EOR
Specifying a movement with circular

interpolation
MTF1084 = 0, 1 (Specifying I, J, K)
MTF1084 = 2, 3 (Specifying radius R)
Simultaneous escape along one or two

axes
400 to 404.
NOTE
process of continuous (Caxis/Yaxis) milling processes.
process of continuous Yaxis processes.
3 Specify whether the simultaneous approach is performed
along one, tow, or three axes.
4 Do not specify the function code of AA01 (Caxis move
command).
5 A Caxis move command is executed.
289
7.1
SETTING MTF
PARAMETERS WHEN
THE YAXIS FAPT
FUNCTION IS
SUPPORTED
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Example of setting MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 2000 to

2999 (servo motor control method)
To use the Yaxis FAPT function, change MTF parameters, with numbers
ranging from 2000 to 2999, as shown below. (For other MTF parameters,
specify standard FANUC values.)
MTF 2016 = 4402, 1101, 0001, 0303, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004
G50 X
Z
Smax ;
G0
Txxx ;
MTF 2017 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0503, 0004
G90 G0
X
Z
Y
C
F
;
G91 G1
MTF 2018 = 5702, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000
G17 G90 G0
X
Z
Y
C
M08 ;
G18 G91 G1
G19
MTF 2019 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G0
X
Z
Y
M09 ;
G91 G1
MTF 2020 = 5202, 5102, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 4401, 000E, 1700
G90 G0
X
Z
Y
C
I
MTF 2300
G91 G3
MTF 2021 = 5202, 5102, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 000E, 1701
G90 G2
X
Z
Y
C
MTF 2301
G91 G3
MTF 2031 = 5702, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000
G17 G90 G0
X
Z
Y
C
M08 ;
G18 G91 G1
G19
MTF 2032 = 5702, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000
G17 G90 G0
X
Z
Y
C
M08 ;
G18 G91 G1
G19
MTF 2033 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G0
X
Z
Y
M09 ;
G91 G1
MTF 2034 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 2201, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G90 G0
X
Z
Y
M09 ;
G91 G1
MTF 2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000
G50 X
Z
Y
C
;
G0
Txxx ;
MTF 2203 = 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G98 G98 G81 X
Z
Y
C
R
P
F
G99
G82
MTF 2204 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L
;
K
MTF 2205 = 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G98 G98 G81 X
Z
Y
C
R
Q
F
G99
G82
290
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
MTF 2206 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000

L
;
K
MTF 2207 = 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0903, 1505, 0203
G98 G98 G84 X
Z
Y
C
R
Mxx S
G99
G84.1
MTF 2208 = 0005, 0503, 0B03, 0004
M03 F
L
;
M04
K
MTF 2212 = 5202, 5002, 5302, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000
G90 G0
G41 X
Z
Y
C
F
;
G91 G1
G42
MTF 2213 = 5202, 5002, 2002, 1101, 0001, 2201, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000
G90 G0
G40 X
Z
Y
C
F
;
G91 G1
MTF 2300 = 3301, 5501, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
K
J
F
;
MTF 2301 = 9901, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
R
F
;
291
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Machining profile
Process 1:
Process 2:
Yaxis drilling, 10 mm diameter, 30 mm deep

Yaxis pattern machining (pocketing), 16 mm diameter,
8 mm depth of cut, 2 mm finishing allowance, compensation
by the FAPT
The following NC data is output:
%;
O1000 ;
G50X200Z200YO. ;
G0X150.Z150.Y0. ;
G50X150.Z150.Y0.C0.S2000 ;
G0T0101 ;
G97SxxxxM03 ;
M08 ;
G17C90. ;
X40.Z102.Y10. ;
G98G83Z68.R0.Fxxx ;
Y10. ;
G0C270. ;
Y10. ;
G83Z68.R0. ;
Y10. ;
G0X150.Z150.Y0. ;
T0100 ;
M1 ;
292
B61804E2/05
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
G50X150.Z150.Y0.C270. ;
G0T0202 ;
G07SxxxxM03 ;
M08 ;
G19C0. ;
X84.Z30.Y8. ;
G1X40. ;
Y10. ;
Z60. ;
Y0. ;
Z30. ;
Y10. ;
Z60. ;
Y12. ;
G3Z62.Y10.K2. ;
G1Y10. ;
G3Z60.Y12.J2 ;
G1Z30. ;
G3Z28.Y10.K2 ;
G1Y10. ;
G3Z30.Y12.J2. ;
G1Z60. ;
Y10. ;
G0X84. ;
C180. ;
Z30.Y8. ;
G1X40. ;
Y10. ;
Z60. ;
Y0. ;
Z30. ;
Y10. ;
Z60. ;
Y12. ;
G3Z62.Y10.K2. ;
G1Y10. ;
G3Z60.Y12.J2. ;
G1Z30. ;
G3Z28.Y10.K2 ;
G1Y10. ;
G3Z30.Y12.J2. ;
G1Z60. ;
Y10. ;
G0X84. ;
Z150.X150.Y0. ;
T0200 ;
M1 ;
X200.Z200.Y0. ;
M5 ;
M30 ;
%
293
8. NOTES
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
NOTES
This function does not support the following:

1)
2)
3)
4)
Automatic process determination

Back machining
Machining with a vertical lathe
Machining with a fouraxis lathe
294
B61804E2/05
X. BACK MACHINING FAPT
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B61804E2/05
OUTLINE
Diagram for machine tools with 2 spindles and 1 turret.
297
1. OUTLINE
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
SPECIFICATIONS
298
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
BACK MACHINING FAPT
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1
PROGRAMMING
2.1.1
Material Data Input
(Menu No.1)
2.1.2
Part Figure Input
(Menu No.2)
Input back machining base line ZP2 as well as primary machining base
line ZP.
In case of drawing format 2:
(1) Part figure input for turning

This is the same as standard input method. Define the final part figure
without primary machining and/or back machining.
(2) Part figure input for C axis machining
When defining figures of end face hole, end face groove, and front face
milling, the following question is displayed.
POSITION . . . . . FS = (0: FRONT FACE, 1:REAR FACE)
This question indicates a face where the part figure exists.
Input FS = 0 in case of front face, input FS = 1 in case of rear face.
If you input FS = 0, input figure data as an image viewed from the front
face.
If you input FS = 1, input figure data as an image viewed from the rear
face.
For front view, draw an image viewed from the front side and express
front side figure with full lines and rear side figure with dotted lines.
299
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1.3
Home Position and
Turret Index Position
(Menu No.3)
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B61804E2/05
Input the home position (DXH, ZH) and the turret index position (DXI,
ZI) for back machining as well as those for primary machining. If those
for back machining are the same as those for primary machining, input the
same values. If a position is in the second quadrant as shown in the figure
below, input a minus value for ZH or ZI.
For those questions, initial values can be set system parameters No.206
to 221. These can be skipped based on the value of system parameter
No.0009.
2.1.4
Machining Definition
(Menu No.4)
Machining except cutting off and bar feed machining can be performed
on the rear side.
(1) Machining type selection
Specify a machining type without discrimination of primary
machining/back machining. For work regrasping on moving from
primary machining to back machining, use Sub cycle.
(2) Spindle number
The question for a spindle to be used appears on the tool data screen.
SPINDLE NO ... SN = (1: 1ST SPINDLE, 2: 2ND SPINDLE)
Input SN = 1 in case of primary machining; input SN = 2 in case of
back machining. This question is used to decide an M code for
commanding spindle rotation direction.
300
B61804E2/05
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
WARNING
That SN = 2 in any process before sub cycle for work
regrasping and SN = 1 after this process can be input but
proper machine function cannot be guaranteed.
(3) Tool data
Designate tool data for back machining as follows:
a) Center drilling/drilling
AS=0
(AS=180 in Primary machining)
b) OD cutting
Same as tool data for primary machining. A reversible tool may
be used frequently.
c) ID cutting
d) OD grooving
Same as tool data for primary machining.
301
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B61804E2/05
e) ID grooving
f) End face grooving
g) OD necking
Designate 45 degrees as tool mounting angle for OD grooving
(AS) or designate 45 degrees as that for end face grooving.
h) ID necking
Designate 45 degrees as tool mounting angle for ID grooving
(AS) or designate 45 degrees as that for end face grooving (AS).
i) OD threading
Same as tool data for primary machining
j) ID threading
AN is used if cutting is made along the groove center.

302
B61804E2/05
BACK MACHINING FAPT
2. SPECIFICATIONS
k) Face threading
Designate 0 degree as tool mounting angle for primary machining
(AS).
l) C axis machining
The following question regarding mounting direction is displayed.
SETTING DIRECTION . . . . CP = (0: SIDE, 1: FRONT
FACE, 2: REAR FACE)
For machining of rear end face, select 2.
WARNING
Machining start position
This is automatically calculated using the turret turning
position and tool mounting position. To change this value,
note the following conditions.
The path of approach or escape varies with the relation
between the work position and machining start position. In
simultaneous two axis movement, approach or escape is
performed ad shown in Fig. A unless no interference
between a work and tool exists. If interference with a work
exists, the tool bypasses the work as shown in Fig. B.
(4) Cutting direction and cutting data

Input direction is the same sa standard one.
Select CP = 2 for C axis machining of rear end face, as milling tool data
to move the cursor to machining position.
(5) Cutting condition
Input method is the same as standard one.
303
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1.5
NC Data Preparation
(Menu No.5)
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B61804E2/05
Primary machining NC data are prepared in primary machining

coordinate system, and back machining NC data, in back machining
coordinate system.
X2 axis is not drawn.
Primary machining coordinate
Back machining coordinate
Prepared back machining NC data require use of geometry offset. A tool

is selected at the machining start position in primary machining
coordinate system, geometry offset is applied at the time of approach, and
work coordinate system is shifted. When machining is completed, offset
is canceled at the time of escape, and the tool returns to the machining start
position in primary machining coordinate system. NC data to shift
coordinate system using G50 cannot be prepared.
Example
G00 X200. Z300. ;
G50 S4500 M75 ;
T100;
G96 S200 M3 ;
X104. Z5. T0101 ; *
X100. ;
G01 X97. Z2 F0.65 ;
.
.
.
G00 X200. Z300. T0000 ;
M01 ;
.
.
.
.
.
* A block which approach is not made directly from the machining start
position (X200. Z300.) to approach point (X100. Z5.) and which a
work is bypassed, is output.
304
B61804E2/05
2.1.6
Animation Drawing
(Menu No.6)
BACK MACHINING FAPT
2. SPECIFICATIONS
The layout of screen is the same as before. Milling front view is a drawing
viewed from the front side. On this screen, any figure on the rear side is
drawn with dotted lines.
In back machining FAPT, any shuck figure is not drawn.
Work regrasping from primary machining to back machining is not
drawn.
Designate an M code in MTF No.1145 with which FAPT perceives the
start of back machining. When the M code designated here is executed,
FAPT animation drawing changes into back machining mode.
305
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B61804E2/05
2.2
PARAMETERS, ETC.
2.2.1
Bit 7 for system parameter No.708 indicates whether or not back

machining is performed.
System Parameters
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
708
Bit 7 0 : Back machining is not performed.

1 : Back machining is performed.
If 708#7 = 0,
Machining is the same as former FAPT.
If 708#7 = 1,
D A question for indicating the end face position, FS = _ is added on
the figure definition screen for end face hole, end face groove, and
front face milling.
D A question for indicating a spindle to be used, SN = _ is added on
the tool data screen for machining definition.
D A question for indicating mounting angle, AS = _ is added on the
tool screen for drill and center drill.
D To the question of mounting position, CP = _ on the milling tool
data screen 2 (rear end face) can be input.
D If M code that has been designated in MTF No.1145 is executed in
animation drawing, the screen changes into back machining mode.
No.214: designates the X coordinate value of home position on the turret
1 back machining.
No.215: designates the Z coordinate value of home position on the turret
1 back machining.
No.216: designates the X coordinate value of home position on the turret
2 back machining.
No.217: designates the Z coordinate value of home position on the turret
2 back machining.
No.218: designates the X coordinate value of turret Index position on the
turret 1 back machining.
No.219: designates the Z coordinate value of turret Index position on the
No.220: designates the X coordinate value of turret Index position on the
No.221: designates the Z coordinate value of turret Index position on the
306
2.2.2
MTF
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B61804E2/05
(1) Back machining start M code

This M code is used to start animated simulation for back machining.
Set the M code value in MTF1145. Animated simulation for back
machining is started when an M code having the set value is specified
in the NC program.
(2) MTF related to workpiece coordinate system setting G codes
1) MTF1xxx
Set the following parameters for workpiece coordinate system
selection G codes.
No.
Format Initial Value
Description
1252
Integer
54
Workpiece coordinate system selection G code

for the first spindle (for back machining)
1253
Integer
55
Workpiece coordinate system selection G code

for the second spindle (for back machining)
D If 1 is specified, the corresponding G code is not output.

D During the creation of NC data, whether G54 or G55 will be
output is determined from the spindle number (SN), defined
using the tool data screen for machining definition.
2) MTF2xxx (function tables)
Set the following function tables:
Coordinate system setting and tool selection T code output for turning
(for back machining)
2068=4402, 1101, 0001, 0303, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G50 X
Z
Smax ;
G0 Txx ;
Coordinate system setting and tool selection T code output for milling
2069=4402, 1101, 0001, AA01,0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G50 X
Z
C
;
G0 Txx ;
These function tables are referenced during back machining. To
output a coordinate system selection G code, modify the setting as
required.
3) Function code
The following function code has been added:
Upper three
digits
Detailed
classification
4
307
Lowest
digit
Major
classification
Function
Outputs the G code specified with

MTF1252 or MTF1253. This G code is
not subject to modal control.
(Workpiece coordinate system selection
G code)
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B61804E2/05
(3) MTF related to additional M codes for the second spindle

1) MTF1xxx
Set the following M codes for the second spindle:
No.
Format
Initial
Value
1410
Integer
Forward rotation M code for the second spindle

1411
Integer
Reverse rotation M code for the second spindle

1412
Integer
Spindle stop M code for the second spindle

1413
Integer
Caxis connection M code for the second spindle

1414
Integer
Caxis disconnection M code for the second spindle

1415
Integer
68
Caxis clamping M code for the second spindle

1416
Integer
69
Caxis unclamping M code for the second spindle

Description
D An M code for which the corresponding parameter is set to 1

is not output.
D During the creation of NC data, whether the M code for the first
spindle or that for the second spindle will be output is
determined from the spindle number (SN), defined using the
tool data screen for machining definition.
D Threedigit integers can be used for the above M codes.
D Conventionally, the forward/reverse rotation M codes for the
second spindle have been specified using MTF1142 and
MTF1143. These MTF parameters can, however, specify only
twodigit integers. To enable the specification of threedigit
integers, MTF1410 and MTF1411 have been added. MTF1142
and MTF1143 can no longer be used.
308
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B61804E2/05
2) Function codes
The following function codes are referenced. These function codes
are the same as those used conventionally to output M codes for the
first spindle. No additional function code need be defined for the
second spindle.
Upper three Lowest digit
digits
Major
Detailed
classification
classification
2.2.3
Function
Outputs the spindle forward/reverse rotation M

code.
(Outputs the M code specified with MTF1410 or
MTF1411.)
Outputs the spindle stop M code when

reversing the spindle rotation.
(Outputs the M code specified with MTF1412.)
Outputs the spindle stop M code.

Outputs the Caxis connection/disconnection

M code.
(Outputs the M code specified with MTF1413 or
MTF1414.)
Outputs the Caxis clamping M code.

Outputs the Caxis unclamping M code.

2 (rear end face) can be designated as mounting direction of tool data for
milling (CP).
CP = _ (1: SIDE, 1: FRONT FACE, 2: REAR FACE)
In this case, tool information 2 in tool data (FLAG2) means as follows:
Tool Data
#7
#6
#5
#4
Bit 0 Rotation direction (TR)

0 : Positive rotation
1 : Inverse rotation
Bit 1, 2 Mounting direction (CP)
00: Side
01: Front face
11: Rear face
309
#3
#2
#1
#0
2. SPECIFICATIONS
BACK MACHINING FAPT
B61804E2/05
2.3
WARNINGS AND
CAUTION
WARNING
1 C axis end face machining
In a section to which part figure is defined on the rear side, C axis end face machining cannot
be performed in primary machining.
Although rear end face machining before sub cycle with work regrasping can be defined in
machining definition, machining cannot be performed in proper position using prepared NC
data.
#1: Defined machining position

#2: Machining position in case #1 machined in primary machining
In a section to which part figure is defined on the front side, C axis end face machining cannot
be performed in back machining.
C axis side machining
Be sure to perform C axis side machining in primary machining. Although side face machining
before auxiliary machining with work regrasping can be defined in machining definition,
machining cannot be performed in proper position using prepared NC data similarly to 3.1.
Machining sequence
Define the machining sequence as follows regardless of axis machining or turning:
(1) Primary machining,
(2) Sub cycle (work regrasping),
(3) Back machining
Spindle number
The question of spindle number on the tool data screen, SN = _ is used to decide an M code
for indicating spindle rotation direction. Although, SN = 2 in any process before auxiliary
machining with work regrasping or SN = 1 after this process can be defined, machine operation
is not guaranteed.
Workpiece coordinate system setting G code
Before attempting to run an NC program created using this function, ensure that the workpiece
origin offset for the workpiece coordinate system to be used has been set in the NC parameter
correctly. Failure to set the correct offset may cause damage to the blank or tool.
310
B61804E2/05
BACK MACHINING FAPT
3. EXAMPLE OF NC DATA
EXAMPLE OF NC DATA
This section shows an example output block when MTF2068 is set as

follows:
Coordinate system setting and tool selection T code output for turning (for
back machining)
2068 =
5002, 4C02, 0103, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G0 G54 Txx M8 ;
Example output
0100(BACKFAPT) ;
N001(ROUGH OF OUT.) ; . . . . . Start machining for the first spindle.
G0G54T0101M8 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Output the block specified with MTF2068.
G96S1500M3 ;
X85. ;
Z2. ;
G1X5.F0.65 ;
.
.
<Reholding of workpiece by means of miscellaneous function>
N006(ROUGH OF OUT.) ; . . . . . Start machining for the second spindle.
G0G55T0606M8 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Output the block specified with MTF2068.
G96S2000M203 ;
X65.5 ;
Z2. ;
Z0. ;
G1X1.5.F0.2 ;
.
.
311
XI. AUTOMATIC PROCESS

DETERMINATION FUNCTION
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
1. OUTLINE
OUTLINE
WARNING
For those machining processes that have been
automatically created, check the machining sequence. If
the machining sequence is invalid, the tool may collide with
the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may
occur, possibly causing damage to the machine or tool itself,
The automatic process determination function enables the operator to
create NC data by simply entering the material figure and part figure and
pressing soft keys.
This function eliminates or greatly reduces the number of data entering
operations for menu item 4 (machining definition).
This function uses tooling information, tool data, and setting data. Set
these data before using this function.
The following processes can be specified using the automatic process
determination function:
1) Turning process
Center drilling
Drilling
Outer surface roughing
Inner surface roughing
Outer surface semifinishing
Inner surface semifinishing
Outer surface finishing
Inner surface finishing
Grooving or residual machining
Cuttingoff (B option for the automatic process determination
function)
Threading
Bar feeding (B option for the automatic process determination
function)
2) Caxis process
Caxis center drilling
Caxis drilling
Caxis tapping
Caxis grooving
Face milling
Cylindrical grooving
315
1. OUTLINE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
The tools to be used are determined from tooling data and
tool data.
NOTE
1 The end surface and outer surface can be machined in
separate processes for outer surface machining.
2 For the outer and inner surface machining processes,
inverse processes can also be automatically determined (B
option for the automatic process determination function).
3 The following processes cannot be automatically
determined. Enter data manually.
Reaming
Tapping
4 Auxiliary machining processes cannot be automatically
determined.
5 Multiple processes can be specified for drilling (only for
turning) to create multitiered parts (B option for the
automatic process determination function).
6 The cuttingoff process cannot be determined when system
parameter 140 is 0.
316
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
EXECUTING AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION
317
2.1
DEFINING A NEW
PROCESS
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
If the soft key for defining machining (menu item 4) is pressed when no
process is defined yet, the KINDS OF MACHINING screen appears.
On this screen the automatic process determination function is enabled.
Pressing the rightmost soft Key changes the soft key menu. Pressing
the AUTO soft key starts (executes) the automatic process determination
function. Pressing the AUTO PROC. soft key displays the PROCESS
SETTING screen (see Chapter 3, Setting the Machining Procedure for
setting machining procedure data).
CAUTION
Pressing the AUTO soft key starts the automatic process
determination immediately without displaying the
PROCESS SETTING screen. Set machining procedure
data beforehand.
318
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
(1) Executing automatic process determination

When automatic process determination starts, the processes, tools, and
cutting areas are automatically determined from the machining
procedure data, tooling information, tool data, and material data.
(Automatic screen transition)
The automatic screen transition function can display how the material
figure changes on the screen during automatic determination. To
enable automatic screen transition, change the following system
parameter:
No.708: 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0
Speed of automatic process determination
0 : High speed (Automatic screen transition is disabled.)

1 : Low speed (Automatic screen transition is enabled.)
For Caxis processes, the change of the material figure is not displayed
but the position of the machined area is indicated by the cursor.
(2) Suspending automatic process determination
If the manual input flag is on or a necessary data item cannot be
automatically determined during automatic process determination,
processing stops at the screen displayed when a problem occurs. In
that case, enter necessary data and press the NEXT PAGE soft key to
resume processing.
(3) Ending automatic process determination
When all processes are created, processing stops displaying the tool
list on the screen. To create NC data, press the NEXT PAGE soft key
to return to the menu, then press the soft key for menu item 5. To check
or modify processes, press the CORRECTION soft key, press the
CURSOR or CURSOR soft key to position the cursor at the desired
process, then press the NEXT PAGE soft key.
319
2.2
MODIFYING A
DEFINED PROCESS
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
If the soft key for defining machining (menu item 4) is pressed when
processes are already defined, the MACHINING PLAN screen
appears. On this screen the operator can modify or add processes.
Pressing the NEW soft key on this screen displays the KINDS OF
MACHINING screen. On that screen, the automatic process
determination function is enabled.
NOTE
Note that pressing the NEW soft key deletes all existing
processes.
320
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
3. SETTING THE MACHINING

PROCEDURE
SETTING THE MACHINING PROCEDURE
Pressing the AUTO PROC. soft key displays the PROCESS SETTING
screen for setting the machining procedure. After the setting is
completed, pressing the EXEC soft key starts automatic process
determination. Manual input flags can also be set on this screen.
The PROCESS SETTING screen displays the setting data for the
machining method group number (No.000) and the machining procedure
data for the group (No.100 to 129, No.200 to 229, or No.300 to 329).
If the machining method group number is not defined, the group number
is determined by the material figure and the machining procedure data for
that group is displayed.
Round bar:
Machining method group 1
(data in No.100 to 129)
Perforated round bar: Machining method group 2
Special material:
Machining method group 3
321

PROCEDURE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
The function of each soft key is as follows:

ESCAPE:
Returns to the execution procedure menu for FAPT.
REGST.:
Registers the set data in submemory.
INSERT:
Inserts a process immediately before the process
pointed to by the cursor. Pressing this soft key
displays the soft key menu for selecting a process.
PROC. DELETE: Deletes the process pointed to by the cursor.
MANUAL FLAG: Displays the soft key menu for setting the manual
input flag for the process pointed to by the cursor.
ORIGIN PROC.: Restores the data for the edited group (returns the data
to the state before editing).
CURSOR:
Moves the cursor to delete or insert a process.
CURSOR:
Moves the cursor to delete or insert a process.
SELECT GROUP: Selects the machining method group (1 to 3).
EXEC:
Starts automatic process determination.
(1) Changing the machining method group
Pressing the SELECT GROUP soft key switches the machining
method group from 1 to 2, 2 to 3, or 3 to 1.
(2) Inserting a process
Move the cursor to the desired position using the CURSOR or
CURSOR soft key and press the INSERT soft key. The soft keys for
selecting the process type are displayed.
Pressing the soft key displays other process type soft keys. Pressing
the soft key for the desired process type inserts the new process
immediately before the process pointed to by the cursor.
Pressing the soft key exits the insert mode and returns the display
to the first soft key menu.
322
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS

PROCEDURE
NOTE
When using a cuttingoff process, set the following system
parameter to 1:
No. 140:
Whether a cuttingoff process is defined
Initial value: 0
0 : No cuttingoff process is defined
1 : A cuttingoff process is defined
323

PROCEDURE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
(3) Setting a manual input flag

Pressing the MANUAL FLAG soft key changes the soft key menu as
shown below to enable the operator to set the manual input flag for the
process pointed to by the blinking cursor.
Manual input flags are setting data No.130 to 166, No.230 to 266, and
No.330 to 366. When a manual input flag is on, automatic process
determination stops at the screen for which the flag is set, enabling data
to be input manually.
Pressing a soft key toggles it between AUTO and MANUAL.
AUTO soft keys are displayed in reverse video.
The function of each soft key is as follows:

:
Returns the display to the automatic procedure setting
screen.
xxx AREA:
Toggles between automatic and manual for
specifying the machining area, cutting area, or cutting
position.
xxx TOOL:
Toggles between automatic and manual for
specifying the tool data, start point, or passing point.
xxx COND.: Toggles between automatic and manual for
specifying the cutting conditions.
CURSOR:
Moves the cursor to set a manual input flag.
CURSOR:
Moves the cursor to set a manual input flag.
NOTE
Machining procedure data can also be set on the setting
screen.
324
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION

325
4.1
AUTOMATIC
SELECTION OF A
TOOL
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
In automatic process determination, the tool to be used is selected from

tooling information and tool data. First the tooling information is
searched to select the tool. If the tool is not found in tooling information,
the tool is then selected from tool data.
In tool selection, the process type (KP) is referenced for a turning tool and
the tool type (TP) is referenced for a milling tool. KP or TP is registered
for each tool in tooling information or tool data. Set the value of KP for
turning tools and TP for milling tools before executing the automatic
process determination function.
If the tool is not found in either tooling information or tool data,
processing stops on the tool setting screen so the operator can manually
select the tool.
326
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
CAUTION
1 For drilling, grooving, and residual machining, both tooling
information and tool data are searched for the tool, and the
optimum tool (the largest tool which can be used) is
selected. For other processes, the tool which is found first
is used. If the selected tool is not a desired one, turn the
manual flag on and select the tool manually, or change the
tool after all processes are determined.
2 If the tool is selected from tool data, the tool is automatically
added to tooling information. The data items for the added
tool are automatically set as follows: The tool selection
number (TN) is set to the smallest unused number. The tool
compensation number (TM) is set to the same number as
the tool selection number. For the other data related to
mounting, the same data as that in tool data is used.
Automatic process determination therefore cannot operate
correctly if the tool data related to mounting is incorrect.
3 When the tool is selected from tooling information, the turret
to be used is automatically selected from tooling data if
there are two or more turrets. When the tool is selected from
tool data, the turret number is normally set to 1. To set the
turret number to 2, turn on the manual input flag and
manually enter the turret number or change the turret
number after all processes are determined. When balance
cutting is performed, the turret number for the second tool
is automatically set to 2 even when the tool is selected from
tool data.
4 The tool can be selected only from tooling information or
from tool data by changing the following setting data:
No.72:
Data searched to select the tool

0 0 0 0 0 0 x x
Tooling information
Tool data
0 : searched
1 : Not searched
327
4.2
DETERMINING
INVERSE
PROCESSES
(AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
DETERMINATION
FUNCTION B
OPTION)
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
The use of inverse tools can be set in automatic process determination for
the following processes:
End surface roughing
End surface semifinishing
End surface finishing
When determining inverse processes, set the following setting data:
No.71:
Whether inverse processes are determined

00000xxx
For end surface machining
For outer surface machining
For inner surface machining
0 : Does not determine inverse processes.

1 : Determines inverse processes.
When machining procedure data is set in the following order, the
processes are determined as described below:
Machining procedure data
End surface roughing
Conditions
1) There are areas to be cut with inverse tools on the end surface, outer
surface, and inner surface.
2) The tooling information and tool data for the tools which cut the end
surface and the tooling information and tool data for the tools which
cut the outer surface are separately set.
Determined processes
Process 01 Outer surface roughing
(on the end surface with a normal tool)
(on the outer surface with a normal tool)
(on the end surface with an inverse tool)
(on the outer surface with an inverse tool)
Process 05 Inner surface roughing
(on the inner surface with a normal tool)
Process 06 Inner surface roughing
(on the inner surface with an inverse tool)
* The processes are determined so that the end surface and outer surface
are cut first with a normal tool then with an inverse tool.
328
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
CAUTION
To determine processes automatically, set a value other
than 2 (machinig below an overhang) in system parameter
101. If 2 is specified, the correct cutting area for an
overhang is not automatically determined.
No.101:
Initial value:
Data related to turning method

1
0 : Does not perform pocketing.

1 : Performs pocketing.
2 : Machines beneath overhang.
NOTE
1 For residual machining, the processes for sections a and b
in the figure below can be determined but processes using
inverse tools, such as the processes for sections c and d,
cannot be determined. Such processes should be manually
added after all processes are automatically determined.
329
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
NOTE
2 When a very small pocket is machined using a normal tool
during end, outer, or inner surface machining, an error
occurs when the inverse process is determined in the
following case: When an area is left uncut after tool angle
check is performed (Fig. a) but there is no area to be cut with
the inverse tool as a result of applying offset (Fig. b).
Shaded area:
Area left uncut after tool angle
check is performed
(area to be cut with the inverse tool)
Fig. a
Shaded area:
Area to be cut with the normal
tool after tool angle check is
performed and offset is applied
There is no area to be cut with Error!

the inverse tool.
Fig. b
NOTE
3 When the back of the area to be cut with the inverse tool
intersects with the material figure as shown below, the
process using the inverse tool is not determined.
Area to be cut
with the normal
tool
Shaded area:
Area left uncut
(area to be cut
with theinverse
tool)
Intersects with the material
figure at this point.
330
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
NOTE
4 If an area is still left uncut after the machining with the
inverse tool, no additional process for cutting that area
(shaded area in the figure below) can be automatically
determined.
Area (1) :
Cut with the normal tool
Area (2):
Cut with the inverse tool Shaded area: Left uncut
NOTE
5 The inverse process for balance cutting cannot be
automatically determined.
331
4.3
CUTTING DIRECTION
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
(1) Always from +X to X along the end surface (from X to +X for the
inverse process)
(2) If outer surface machining is set in machining procedure data without

setting end surface machining, the end surface is cut in the same way
as for the outer surface machining.
(3) When the machining procedure data is set as shown below for outer
surface finishing, the end surface is cut from the outside to the center,
then the outer surface is cut with the same tool, if there is no inner
surface (Fig. a). If there is an inner surface, the end surface and outer
surface are cut in one continuous operation (Fig. b).
Setting of machining procedure data
End surface finishing
Fig. a When there is no inner surface
Fig. b When there is an inner surface
332
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
To cut the end surface from the outside to the center and then cut the outer
surface with the same tool as shown in Fig.a even when there is an inner
surface, change the following setting data:
No.71:
x 0000000
Method of outer surface finishing
0 : Cuts as shown in Fig.a or b depending on whether there is an inner

surface.
1 : Cuts as shown in Fig.a regardless of whether there is an inner surface.
333
4.4
AREA DIVISION
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
(1) Division direction for end surface machining (normal process)

The area is divided as shown in Fig.a when there is no inner surface
and as shown in Fig.b when there is an inner surface.
Fig. a Division direction when

there is no inner surface
Fig. b Division direction when

there is an inner surface
(2) Division direction for outer surface machining (normal process)

If the end surface is cut at the same time, the area is divided as shown
in Fig.a when there is no inner surface and as shown in Fig.b when
there is an inner surface. If the end surface is separately cut, the area
is divided as shown in Fig.c regardless of whether there is an inner
surface.
Fig.a Division direction when

there is no inner surface
Fig.b Division direction when

there is an inner surface
Fig. c When only the outer surface is cut
334
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
(3) Division direction for inner surface machining (normal process)

The area is divided as shown in Fig. a and Fig. b regardless of whether
an element of the part intersects with the Zaxis.
Fig. a Division direction when an element

of the part intersects with the Zaxis
Fig. b Division direction when no element

of the part intersects with the Zaxis
(4) Division direction for grooving

The area is divided into the groove on the end surface (Fig. a), groove
on the outer surface (Fig. b), and groove on the inner surface (Fig. c).
Fig. a Groove on the end surface
Fig. b Groove on the outer surface
Note) DS and DE depend on the tool figure.
Fig. c Groove on the inner surface
335
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
(5) Cutting start point for a cuttingoff process (B option for the automatic
process determination function)
The cutting start point for a cuttingoff process is determined as shown
in Fig.a when there is no C/R (chamfer/corner R) at the cutoff section
and as shown in Fig.b when there is a C/R at the cutoff section.
Fig. a Cutting start point when

there is no C/R at the cutoff section
Fig. b Cutting start point when

there is a C/R at the cutoff section
(6) Division direction for inverse processes (B option for the automatic
process determination function)
The division direction at division point DS for an inverse process is
one of the following three types (outer surface machining is taken as
an example):
[Type 1]
Division starts at point D, proceeds toward
the subedge of the inverse tool, and intersects first with the part figure
[Type 2]
Division starts at point D, proceeds toward the
subedge of the inverse tool, and intersects with
the material figure at two or more points
[Type 3]
Division starts at point D, proceeds toward the
subedge of the inverse tool, and intersects with
the material figure at less than two points
336
B61804E2/05
4.5
RESIDUAL
MACHINING AND
THREADING
4.6
CENTER DRILLING
AND BAR FEEDING
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
In residual machining and threading, two or more sections can be

machined using the same tool.
If a center drilling process or bar feeding process is set in machining

procedure data, that process is always determined regardless of the part
figure. However, the process is not determined when no center drilling
tool or bar feeding tool is registered in tooling information or tool data.
When not using a center drilling process or bar feeding process, do not set
the process in machining procedure data, or delete the process after all
processes are determined.
The bar feeding type is automatically determined based on the setting in
the following system parameters:
Pullout
method 1
Pullout
method 2
Slidestop
method 1
Slidestop
method 2
No.152 (CAX)
Undefined
Set
Undefined
Undefined
No.153 (CAZ)
Set
Undefined
Set
Undefined
No.154 (WG)
Set
Set
Undefined
Undefined
No.155 (CEZ)
Undefined
Undefined
Set
Undefined
No.152: Clearance when the tool approaches for bar feeding (CAX)
No.153: Clearance when the tool approaches for bar feeding (CAZ)
No.154: Position at which the fingers pinch the workpiece during bar
feeding (WG)
No.155: Amount of tool retraction during bar feeding (CEZ)
NOTE
The B option for the automatic process determination
function is necessary for automatically determining the bar
feeding process.
337
4.7
MULTITIER DRILLING
(B OPTION FOR THE
AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
DETERMINATION
FUNCTION)
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
When the inner surface is machined with the automatic process

determination function, multitier drilling can be performed using drills
with different diameters.
When performing multitier drilling, set the following setting data:
No.50:
Initial value:
Minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the

inner surface tool (unit: mm)
Undefined
Set the minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the prepared
inner surface machining tool. The automatic process determination
function determines the process so that a diameter less than the set value
is machined with drills.
Fig. 1
WARNING
1 The automatic process determination function always
machines a diameter less than the set value with drills
regardless of the values in setting data No.52 and 53.
2 If the value is undefined, the automatic process
determination function determines the process so that all
inner surface are machined with the inner surface tool.
3 The automatic process determination function specifies
cutting areas so that machining for a diameter less than the
set value does not require an inner surface tool.
No.51:
Initial value:
Maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills

(unit: mm)
Undefined
Set the maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills. The
automatic process determination function machines a diameter less than
the set value with drills. Multitier drilling can be performed for a diameter
less than the set value.
338
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
Fig. 2
WARNING
If the value is undefined, the automatic process
determination function determines the process so that all
inner surfaces are machined with drills.
Setting data Nos.52 and 53 determine whether drills are used for
machining the inner surface with a diameter greater than the value in
setting data No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with
the inner surface tool) and less than the value in setting data No.51
(maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills).
The inner surface with a diameter less than the value in setting data No.50
is always machined with drills regardless of the values in setting data
No.52 and 53.
No.52 and 53 are

effective.
No.52 and 53 are

not effective.
Fig. 3
No.52:
Initial value:
Minimum allowance for drilling (unit: mm)

Undefined
Set the minimum allowance on the inner surface to be drilled. The inner
surface is drilled when the allowance is more than the set value.
339
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
Drilled when more

than the set value
Fig. 4
WARNING
If the value is undefined, drilling is not performed.
No.53:
Initial value:
Minimum lengthtodiameter ratio of the inner surface to

be drilled (unit: mm)
Undefined
The inner surface is drilled when the lengthtodiameter ratio is more

than the set value.
Set value < 1

D
Fig. 5
Drilling is performed when 1/D is more than the set value.

WARNING
1 If the value is undefined, drilling is not performed.
2 Drilling is performed only when the conditions for both
setting data No.52 and 53 are satisfied.
340
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
No.70: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Specifies how to machine the inner surface with two
or more steps using drills.
Specifies the tool selection method.
How to machine the inner surface with two or more steps using drills
0 : Performs two or more drilling steps in ascending order of drill
diameter.
1 : Performs two or more drilling steps in descending order of drill
diameter.
Specify ascending or descending order of drill diameter when machining
the inner surface in two or more drilling steps.
Tool selection method
0 : Creates the drilling process using the machinable tool selected by the
automatic process determination function.
1 : Prompts the operator to enter the tool figure on the tool data screen if a
drill suitable for the drilled diameter does not exist information or tool
data.
Set the method of selecting the tool if a drill suitable for the drilled
diameter does not exist in the tooling information or tool data when the
automatic process determination function creates a drilling process.
If a drill suitable for the diameter to be drilled does not exist when this
setting data is set to 0 (creates the drilling process using the machinable
tool selected by the automatic process determination function), an uncut
area may remain after drilling.
Uncut area may remain

if a drill suitable for the
drilled diameter does
not exist
Fig. 6
* Examples of machining
The following examples show how the drilling process or inner
surface machining process is automatically determined, depending on
the values in setting data No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can
be machined with the inner surface tool) and No.51 (maximum inner
diameter which can be machined with drills).
341
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
(1) When the value in No.50 is smaller than the value in No.51
No.51(maximum
inner diameter
which can be machined with drills)
No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool)
Fig. 7
When setting data Nos.50 and 51 are set as shown in Fig.7, the following
processes are created:
Process 01 Drilling
Drills area (1) in Fig.8.
Fig. 8
Checks setting data Nos.52 and 53 for the second area to be drilled.
Value in No.52 < d

Value in No.53 <
1
D
Fig. 9
No.52 (minimum allowance for drilling)

No.53 (minimum lengthtodiameter ratio of the inner surface to be
drilled)
342
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
When the conditions in Fig.9 are satisfied

Process 02 Drilling
Fig. 10
When the conditions in Fig.9 are not satisfied

Drilling is not performed.
Fig. 11
Checks setting data Nos.52 and 53 for the third area to be drilled.
Value in No.52 < d

Value in No.53 < 1
D
Fig. 12
No.52 (minimum allowance for drilling)

No.53 (minimum lengthtodiameter ratio of the inner surface to be
drilled)
343
AUTOMATIC PROCESS

Process 03 Drilling
B61804E2/05

Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Process 04 Inner surface machining
Fig. 15
Fig. 16
(2) When the value in No.50 is larger than the value in No.51
No.50 (maximum inner diameter

which can be machined with the inner surface tool)
No.51 (minimum inner diameter
Fig. 17
344
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
When setting data Nos.50 and 51 are set as shown in Fig.17, the following
Process 01 Drilling
Fig. 18
Checks the conditions shown in Fig. 9 for the second area to be drilled.
When the conditions in Fig. 9 are satisfied
When the conditions in Fig. 9 are not satisfied
Fig. 20
Fig. 19
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
345
Uncut area
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
(3) When a value is set in No.50 but No.51 is undefined
No. 50 (minimum inner

diameter which can be
machined with the inner
surface tool)
Fig. 23
When setting data No. 50 is set as shown in Fig. 23, the following
Process 01 Drilling
Fig. 24
Process 02 Drilling
Fig. 25
346
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
Checks the conditions shown in Fig.12 for the third area to be drilled.
Process 03 Drilling
(4) When a value is set in No.51 but No.50 is undefined
No. 51 (minimum inner diameter

Fig.30
No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the

inner surface tool): Undefined
347
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
When setting data No.51 is set as shown in Fig.30, the following

Process 01 Drilling
Process 02 Drilling
Fig. 31
Fig. 32

Process 03 Drilling
Fig. 33

Process 04 Inner
surface machining
Fig. 34
348
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
(5) When both No.50 and No.51 are undefined
Fig.35
No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner
surface tool): Undefined
No.51 (maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills):
Undefined
The following processes are created:
Process 01 Drilling
Fig.36
Fig.37
349
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
[Warnings and Note]

WARNING
1 Setting data No.52 (minimum allowance for drilling) and
No.53 (minimum lengthtodiameter ratio of the inner
surface to be drilled) are effective for machining a diameter
greater than the value in setting data No.50 (minimum inner
diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool)
and less than the value in setting data No.51 (maximum
inner diameter which can be machined with drills).
2 If setting data No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be
machined with the inner surface tool) is set to a value larger
than that set in setting data No.51 (maximum inner diameter
which can be machined with drills), an uncut area may as
shown in Figs.21 and 22.
NOTE
If an uncut area remains after machining using a drill with a
tip, that area is not cut in later processes that are
automatically determined.
Not cut with automatic process determination

Fig.38
350
B61804E2/05
4.8
AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
DETERMINATION
FOR A CLOSED
FIGURE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
If the part figure is closed, the automatic process determination function

may not correctly operate.
Example 1)
When the start point of the part figure has a larger X coordinate than
the end surface
If the part figure starts from F, the outer surface

machining process is not correctly determined.
Example 2)
When the start point of the part figure is the same as the cuttingoff
start point
If the part figure starts from the cuttingoff start point,

the cuttingoff process is not correctly determined.
351
4.9
MACHINING FOR
WHICH AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
DETERMINATION
CANNOT BE USED
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
B61804E2/05
The automatic process determination function cannot be used when

machining includes the following:
Combshaped turret
Backward machining
352
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
SETTING DATA
See Section 1, Setting Data List in Appendix 1.
353
5. SETTING DATA
XII. DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING
B61804E2/05
DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING
The double side machining function enables to prepare two NC programs

by only one editing operation so that the frontside NC program has been
executed, and then the direction of blank is changed and then the
rearside NC program is executed.
i. The definition of blank figure and part figure is same as the ordinary
way of standard system. When you do the work reversing, switch it
according to the parameter.
ii. The part figure is defined by the final part figure with the single stroke
drawing by using symbolic key.
iii. To rotate the part figure to X axis and to process the back side from the
front, the process definition and NC data preparation are done.
iv. Automatic processing decision can be used.
v. NC data output only of the front side or the back side can be done.
357
1. SYSTEM PARAMETER
B61804E2/05
SYSTEM PARAMETER
The work reversing processing becomes effective by setting an

undermentioned parameter.
System parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
104
Bit 2 Parameter bit concerning work reversing

0 : The conversation system becomes two axis lathes usually.
1 : The work reversing processing definition becomes possible.
D Back Machining FAPT cannot be used.
358
B61804E2/05
2. DEFINITION OF BLANK FIGURE
DEFINITION OF BLANK FIGURE
Position ZP of reference line of the first processing. And position ZP2

of the reference line of a second processing are inputs.
In the help screen, it is drawn to the guide chart like Fig. 2.
[For drawing format 2]
Fig. 2
359
3. DEFINITION OF PART FIGURE
B61804E2/05
DEFINITION OF PART FIGURE
The method of defining part figure with the single stroke drawing by
using symbolic key is the same as standard system. There are following
remarks and a restriction matters.
a. Do not define it as shown in the figure below.
D The line crosses. (Fig. 3. (a))
D There are same lines on one line. (Fig. 3 (b))
D One point comes in contact. (Fig. 3 (c))
Fig. 3 (a)
Fig. 3 (b)
Fig. 3 (c)
b. Please define the figure to become the end point as same place the start
point.
c. Please make a head and the last element an arrow element. Do not
specify Chamfer or Round element for a head or last element.
d. The position of start point and the end point exerts the effect on the
definition of the processing area. The position of start point and the
end point becomes the division point of the processing area division
in Automatic process decision. Therefore, it is necessary to specify
start point and the end point after previous is foreseen to some degree.
(Please refer to 5.2.5 and 5.3.4)
360
B61804E2/05
4. HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS
HOME AND INDEX POSITIONS
Home and index positions of the First process and the second process can
be set.
361
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
PROCESSING DEFINITION
362
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
5.1
OUTLINE
i. The definition of the processing assumes the definition of a Secondary

processing after the end First processing to be a principle.
ii. The First processing and Secondary processing are switched with the
softkey.
363
5.2
DEFINITION BY
MANUAL
B61804E2/05
The definition of the First processing side is as it is. In the definition of

the Secondary processing side, blank figure and the part figure draw in
shape that the reverse to X axis symmetry for draw on the First processing
side. Definition method on the Secondary processing side is shown as
follows. When the
part part finishes defining for First processing.
(Refer to Fig. 5.2 (a))
The process list screen is displayed as shown in Fig. 5.2 (b).
Fig. 5.2 (a)
Fig. 5.2 (b)
It will change into soft key like the under figure, if softkey of a right
edge is pushed.
Fig. 5.2 (c)
364
B61804E2/05
If 2ND CHCK is pushed, it will become the following screen.
Fig. 5.2 (d)
The process for a Secondary processing is defined from this state.

Definition method is same as the First processing. In the following
explanations, outside rough cutting process is advanced to the example.
5.2.1
Define the tool data by means of the ordinary way.
Tool Data Screen
Fig. 5.2.1
365
5.2.2
Cutting Area Screen
B61804E2/05
The coordinate value of the point which the cursor shows displays the
coordinate value in the coordinate system of Secondary processing.
Fig.5.2.2
Do not specify the cutting area by stepping over the start and end points
of the part figure.
Example
For instance, the shaded portion cannot be specified for a cutting area
when the part figure started from a point.
5.2.3
Define the cutting condition by the same way of standard system.
Cutting Condition
Screen
366
B61804E2/05
5.3
AUTOMATIC
PROCESSING
DECISION FUNCTION
WARNING
For those machining processes that have been
automatically created, check the machining sequence. If
the machining sequence is invalid, the tool may collide with
the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may
occur, possibly causing damage to the machine or tool itself,
First of all, the cutting area of the First processing and Secondary
processing are divided. Next time, the process for the First processing is
decided automatically according to the processing procedure data. The
process on a Secondary side is continuously decided.
5.3.1
Processing Area
Division Screen
When soft key AUTO PROC is pushed, on the kinds of machining

screen, the screen is switched to decide the first and second processing
area used for automatic process definition function.
Fig. 5.3.1 (a)
367
B61804E2/05
Specify the first and second processing areas using the cursor and arrow
keys on the MACHINING AREA DIVISION screen as same way as the
CUTTING AREA DEFINE screen. The arrows of , , , can be
used on this screen.
Fig. 5.3.1 (b)
The position of DC1 becomes the starting point of the part figure
definition. The dividing direction of DC1 can be changed. However, the
position cannot be changed. DC2 can change both positions and
directions of division.
When the specifies dividing point as shown in Fig. 5.3.1 (b).
The area of the First processing and a Secondary processing will divided
as shown in Fig. 5.3.1 (c).
First
processing
area
Secondary
processing
area
Fig. 5.3.1 (c)
If the NEXT PAGE is pushed in Fig. 5.3.1 (b), the screen switches to
the PROCESS SETTING screen.
368
B61804E2/05
5.3.2
Process Setting Screen
D The processing procedure data becomes common to the First

processing and a Secondary processing.
D When BACK PAGE is pushed, it will return to the screen of Fig.
5.3.1 (b).
5.3.3
The machining list screen is displayed while Automatic processing

decision.
The display of EXECUTING blinks while processing. Each data input
screen of the processing definition is not displayed. However, the screen
is displayed and the processing stops temporarily in the screen specified
to be going to input data with the manual and the screen where the
undefined data exists. Can be display each screen of the processing
definition by setting system parameter.
Automatic Processing
Decision
System parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
708
Bit 6 Each screen of Automatic process decision

1 : Displays.
0 : Does not display.
369
#1
#0
5.3.4
Process Area Division
B61804E2/05
i. Part figure definition and relation of DC1

Automatic processing decision judges that DC1 to DC2 in the
clockwise area for the First processing and DC2 to DC1 in the area for
Secondary processing.
First
processing area
Secondary
process
area
Fig. 5.3.4 (a)
It is necessary to specify start point on the drawing upper. At the part

figure definition to make the process without uselessness.
ii. Definition method of DC1 and DC2
The division as shown below cannot be defined.
EXAMPLE A.
The direction of division is same as that of element.
Fig. 5.3.4 (b)
370
B61804E2/05
EXAMPLE B.
Secondary processing area is overhang.
Fig. 5.3.4 (c)
371
6. NC DATA PREPARATION
B61804E2/05
NC DATA PREPARATION
WARNING
specified in NC data are verified by machining simulation or
tool path check, if the data relating to the actual tool offset
and workpiece shift is incorrect, the tool may collide with the
The distribution of the program number is as fouraxis lathe system.

(Odd number: First processing. Even number: Secondary processing)
After when the First processing (Fig. 6 (a)) ends, being drawn to the
material and the part figure again, animation on the Secondary processing
side will start. (Fig. 6 (b))
Fig. 6 (a) (First processing)
372
B61804E2/05
6. NC DATA PREPARATION
Fig. 6 (b) (Secondary processing)
373
7. MACHINING TIME
DISPLAY SCREEN
B61804E2/05
MACHINING TIME DISPLAY SCREEN
After preparing NC data, the soft key will change as follows so that the
machining time can be checked.
Fig. 7 (a)
When MACHN. TIME softkey is pressed, the MACHINING TIME

screen is displayed as follows.
Fig. 7 (b)
These kinds of machining time can be checked: first processing,

secondary processing, and sum of first and secondary processing time.
374
B61804E2/05
8. SYSTEM PARAMETER
SYSTEM PARAMETER
The initial values of home and index positions are set the system
parameters.
No.206: X coordinate of first processing home position
No.207: Z coordinate of first processing home position
No.210: X coordinate of first processing index position
No.211: Z coordinate of first processing index position
No.214: X coordinate of secondary processing home position
No.215: Z coordinate of secondary processing home position
No.218: X coordinate of secondary processing index position
No.219: Z coordinate of secondary processing index position
375
9. NOTES
NOTES
376
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
9.1
9. NOTES
The tool data used for this function is the same as that of standard system.
TOOL DATA
9.2
TOOLING
INFORMATION
9.3
RELATION WITH
BACKSIDE
MACHINING FAPT
9.4
RELATION WITH
4AXIS LATH
The tooling information used for this function is the same as that of
standard system.
If parameter for the doublesided machining function is valid, the

backsided machining function cannot be performed.
While the doublesided machining function is valid the family program
which has been made using the backsided machining function cannot be
used.
If this family program is used, define the machining processing newly.
If MTF parameter Nos.1050, 1055 are set to 2axis lath, the double
sided machining function can be performed. If these MTF parameter are
4axis lath, this function cannot be used.
The functions described in this part is not available when using

16TA CAP II, 16TTA CAP II, 16TB CAP II, 15TFB, or
15TTFB.
377
XIII. ANIMATED SIMULATION

FUNCTION II
ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION II
B61804E2/05
1. OUTLINE
OUTLINE
The animated simulation function is used to execute actual machining

simulation by displaying blanks, chuck figures, tailstock figures, and tool
figures on the CRT screen.
When the user selects the screen used for animated simulation and starts
operation of the NC in machine lock mode, the user can view a blank
being cut by the tools that are changed each time a T code is issued.
In addition, the animated simulation function II has the following features
to perform further real simulation.
(1) Turning can be simulated with gradation.
(2) Simulation can be performed by expanding the Caxis cylindrical
grooving.
(3) The screen is divided into four parts each time the phase angle is
changed during machining of a Yaxis side face. The results of the
previous machining simulation are scrolled.
(4) The user can check the machining path for all the processes from
Caxis machining to Yaxis machining with the threedimensional
wire frame display.
2. FLOW OF ANIMATED
SIMULATION
B61804E2/05
FLOW OF ANIMATED SIMULATION
Main menu screen

6 (INPUT)
Animated simulation screen
Animated simulation
parameter screen
Chuck
Tailstock
Executing an M code automatically switches

between the following screens:
Turning screen
Caxis screen
Caxis cylindrical grooving screen
Yaxis screen
Sets the gradation to on or off.
Tool holder
Standard chuck
data screen
Standard tailstock
data screen
Tool holder number

list screen
Special chuck
data screen
Special tailstock
data screen
Tool holder
data screen
D With any of the above screens, pressing the [END] soft key returns
control to the previous screen.
D Regardless of which screen is currently displayed, pressing the
[MENU SCREEN] soft key returns control to the main menu screen.
For details of how to set a chuck, tailstock, tool holder, and
animated simulation parameters, see Section 3.6, Checking
NC Data.
B61804E2/05
3. OPERATION PROCEDURE
FOR ANIMATED SIMULATION
OPERATION PROCEDURE FOR ANIMATED SIMULATION
Select 6 from the main menu screen.

A blank is drawn on the screen. The blank is automatically scaled up or
down such that the entire figure can be safely displayed on the screen.
NOTE
When the value of system parameter 750 is 1, the blank is
displayed in the full screen.
As blank data, data for D and L input from menu 1, SELECTION OF
MATERIAL & SETTING OF BLANK SIZE is used.
(1) Adjust machine conditions.
D Set the coordinate system so that the correct workpiece coordinate
of a tool can be given when starting the program. Alternatively,
move the tool to the start point of the program.
D Search for the beginning of the NC program.
D Set machine lock mode.
(2) Press the [CHECK START] soft key.
START is displayed at the bottom right of the screen.
(3) Start NC operation.
When a T code is issued, an image of the tool is displayed and the user
can view a blank being cut.
SCREENS
ANIMATED SIMULATION SCREENS
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
SCREENS
4.1
ANIMATED
SIMULATION OF
TURNING
(1) When menu 6 is selected, a blank viewed on the XZ plane is drawn.

Drawing based on the XC plane is not performed.
(2) Either the interference check function or tool path plotting function is
enabled. To use the interference check function, the [INTER CHECK]
soft key must be set to on before executing animated simulation.
(3) This screen is used only for drawing animated simulation of turning.
When C or Yaxis animated simulation begins, this screen is
switched to another screen.
(4) Up to 160 tools, consisting of 128 turning tools and 32 milling tools,
can be used for the animated simulation of turning.
SCREENS
B61804E2/05
4.2
ANIMATED
SIMULATION WITH
GRADATION
(1) When gradation is set to on with the parameter screen, animated

simulation with gradation is performed. Only drawing based on the
XZ plane is performed.
(Valid only for a singlepath lathe)
(2) Half of the blank is drawn with gradation and the other half is filled
in.
(When the drawing format is reversed, the display is reversed.)
(3) For drawing with gradation, the drawn image cannot be enlarged or
shrunk, and the tool path display is disabled.
(4) Drawing with gradation is enabled for a bar, tube, and special blank.
(5) When the [INTER CHECK] soft key has been set to on before
executing animated simulation, an interference check is performed
during animated simulation.
(6) This screen is used only for drawing animated simulation of turning.
When C or Yaxis animated simulation begins, this screen is
switched to another screen.
B61804E2/05
SCREENS
4.3
CAXIS ANIMATED
SIMULATION
(1) After executing an M code set in system parameter No. 741, executing
the tool selection T code switches to the Caxis machining screen.
(For cylindrical grooving, an M code set in system parameter No. 742
is referenced.)
This screen is displayed in the same way for animated simulation with
gradation.
(2) The right half of the screen is used to display Caxis cylindrical
grooving, the lower left quarter is used to display Caxis end face
machining and Caxis side face machining other than cylindrical
grooving, and the upper left quarter is used for threedimensional
display.
(3) Cutting is represented with a filledin cross section (a circle) of the
tool tip. Rapid traverse drawing is represented with a dotted line,
regardless of whether the tool path is set to on or off.
(4) Even when a portraitmode lathe is being used, drawing is displayed
in landscape mode.
SCREENS
B61804E2/05
4.4
YAXIS ANIMATED
SIMULATION
(1) After executing an M code set in system parameter No. 741, executing
the tool selection T code causes switching to the Yaxis machining
screen. This screen is displayed in the same way for animated
simulation with gradation.
(Yaxis side face drawing is updated when the phase angle is
changed.)
(2) The right half of the screen is used to display Yaxis side face
machining, the lower left quarter is used to display Yaxis end face
machining, and the upper left quarter is used to display
threedimensional line drawing.
(3) For Yaxis side face machining, the screen is further divided into four
pieces. Each time the phase angle is updated, machining display is
scrolled.
(The latest machining result is always displayed at the bottom of the
screen.)
(4) Cutting is represented with a filledin cross section of the tool tip.
Rapid traverse drawing is represented with a dotted line, regardless of
whether the tool path is set to on or off.
10
B61804E2/05
SCREENS
4.5
INTERFERENCE
CHECK FUNCTION
(1) The interference check is performed only while animated simulation

of turning is being executed.
(2) If a tool tip and a chuck or tailstock interfere with each other during
simulation, an interference alarm is issued.
(3) Set the interference check to on or off with the [INTER CHECK] soft
key before executing animated simulation. This soft key is
automatically locked when animated simulation starts. When the
interference check is set to on, the [TOOL PATH] soft key is
automatically set to off and locked even if it has been set to on.
11
SCREENS
B61804E2/05
4.6
ANIMATED
SIMULATION FOR
TWOPATH LATHE
(1) Animated simulation is performed for the first and second turrets. (For
a twopath lathe, animated simulation with gradation is not
supported.)
(2) Normally, the first turret is displayed at the top of the screen and the
second turret is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Setting bit 1 of
system parameter No. 705 to 1 enables the position of the turrets to be
reversed.
(3) When the interference check function is on, interference between the
first and second turrets is checked, as well as interference between a
turret and a chuck or tailstock.
(4) For Caxis animated simulation, drawing is performed in the same
way as for a singlepath lathe.
12
B61804E2/05
SCREENS
4.7
The following soft keys are displayed on the animated simulation screen.
SOFT KEYS
When gradation is turned off
CHECK
START
ORIGINAL
PARAM- TOOL
ETER
PATH
DRAWING INTER
RANGE
CHECK
END
INTER
CHECK
END
When gradation is turned on
CHECK
START
ORIGI- ROTATE AROUND SECTI- PARAMNAL

ON
ETER
[CHECK START] . . . . . . . Starts the animated simulation function.

[ORIGINAL] . . . . . . . . . . . Restores the blank to the premachining
figure.
[PARAMETER] . . . . . . . . . Enables to set parameters related to
animated simulation.
[TOOL PATH] . . . . . . . . . . Enables or disables the tool path display.
[DRAWING RANGE] . . . . Enlarges or shrinks a figure.
[INTER CHECK] . . . . . . . Enables or disables the interference check
function.
(This key is not displayed when bit 5 of
system parameter No. 701 is set to 0 so that
the interference check is not performed.)
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returns to the main menu screen.
[ROTATE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotates a figure.
[AROUND] . . . . . . . . . . . . Applies gradation to an entire figure.
[SECTION] . . . . . . . . . . . . Applies gradation to half of a figure and
draws a cross section of the other half of the
figure.
NOTE
The [ROTATE], [AROUND], and [SECTION] soft keys are
disabled during C or Yaxis animated simulation.
13
B61804E2/05
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
System parameters used for animated simulation are as listed below.

These system parameters are used to set M codes for switching between
animated simulation mode for turning and animation simulation mode for
C or Yaxis machining.
By specifying the M codes that are set using these parameters, before the
tool change command in the NC program, animated simulation mode can
be switched automatically.
No.
Format
Initial value
Description
740
Integer
Undefined
Value of the M code for turning
(NOTE)
741
Integer
Undefined
Value of the M code for Caxis machining

excluding cylindrical grooving (for switching
to the Caxis animated simulation screen)
742
Integer
Undefined
Value of the M code for cylindrical grooving

(for switching to the animated simulation
screen for cylindrical grooving)
743
Integer
Undefined
Value of the M code for Yaxis machining (for

switching to the Yaxis animated simulation
screen)
771
Character Undefined
Axis name list (must be set when Yaxis

animated simulation is performed)
NOTE
The setting of this parameter can be omitted when only
turning is performed. However, it cannot be omitted when
turning is performed after C or Yaxis machining.
14
B61804E2/05
6. SUPPLEMENT
SUPPLEMENT
(1) Outputting an M code for switching between C and Yaxis

machining screens
When using the new animated simulation function with 16TC CAP
II and 16iTA CAP II, M codes are required to switch between the
animated simulation screens for turning, Caxis machining, Caxis
cylindrical grooving, and Yaxis machining.
Define an MTF function table so that the M codes are output before
the tool change command for each machining process.
Specify function codes in those MTF function tables to be referenced
at the start or end of each Caxisrelated process, as described below,
such that the M code indicated by the M code number for the start of
Caxis machining or cylindrical grooving, which is set using system
parameters, is output.
For turning and Yaxis machining, define each existing function table
at the start of machining, such that the corresponding M codes are
output.
Examples
Assume that an M code for switching to the Caxis animated
simulation screen is to be output at the start of Caxis machining.
1. Set system parameter No. 741 to 22.
2. When Caxis machining is executed at one time, specify the
following function codes in MTF No. 2200. To switch to the
Caxis animated simulation screen for each Caxis machining
process, specify the following function code in MTF Nos. 2220 to
2224.
Start of Caxis center drilling
NO.2220 = 0168, 0100, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
M22 FEED;
This setting outputs an M code block, M22, used to switch to the
Caxis animated screen at the start of Caxis center drilling.
15
6. SUPPLEMENT
B61804E2/05
MTF
Parameter No.
Description
Remarks
2220
Only for 16TC CAP II and 16iTA CAP II
2221
Start of Caxis drilling
2222
Start of Caxis tapping
2223
Start of Caxis grooving
2224
Start of Caxis notching
2225
Start of Caxis cylindrical grooving
2230
End of Caxis center drilling
2231
End of Caxis drilling
2232
End of Caxis tapping
2233
End of Caxis grooving
2234
End of Caxis notching
2235
End of Caxis cylindrical grooving
2070
Start of Yaxis process
2071
Start of Yaxis center drilling
2072
Start of Yaxis drilling
2073
Start of Yaxis tapping
2074
Start of Yaxis grooving/pocketing
2075
Start of Yaxis optional figure
(2) Drawing of a tool tip figure using animated simulation is performed

within a rectangle having the following size:
Vertical size: approximately 45 mm
Horizontal size:approximately 36 mm
(3) If two or more of the following conditions overlap, animated
simulation may not follow the operation of the NC program.
D Simultaneous machining has been performed using balance cut.
D The holder displayed on the screen is too large.
D An extremely high feedrate is set for NC program operation.
In this case, the following symptoms can be observed.
D The tool path is not displayed correctly.
D Part of a figure can not be cut.
In such cases, correct the setting as follows:
D Make the size of the holder figure smaller.
D Scale down the drawing.
D Make the feedrate in the NC program operation slower.
16
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
A. SETTING DATA,
SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
WARNING
A. SETTING DATA,
A.1
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(1) Auto process setting data

Automatic process setting means that processes are determined by
setting data.
To specify setting data, press the DATA SET soft key on the initial
screen, enter 2, then press the INPUT key. Data items (except data 900
to data 902) are used to determine processes automatically. The
following table describes the setting data.
SETTING DATA
TABLE
Data No.
Format
Initial value
Description
Remarks
0000
Integer
0001
Real number
Not defined Not used
0002
Real number
0003
Real number
Drilling coefficient 1
When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) does not exceed the value of
data 3, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 1.
0004
Real number
101
Drilling coefficient 2
When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) is greater than the value of data
3 and does not exceed the value of data 4, a workpiece is machined in
drilling method 2. When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) is greater
than the value of data 4, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 3.
0005
Integer
0010
Real number
3.
Center drilling depth (D)
0011
Real number
0.
Finishing width allowance for grooving (TW)
0012
Real number
0.
Finishing depth allowance for grooving (TB)
0020
Real number
1.
Coefficient 1 of Caxis drilling

When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) does not exceed the value of
0021
Real number
101
Coefficient 2 of Caxis drilling When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter)

is greater than the value of data 20 and does not exceed the value of
When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) is greater than the value of data
21, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 3.
0022
Real number
0023
Real number
100.
% of upperlimit for a prepared hole for Caxis tapping
0024
Real number
80.
% of lowerlimit for a prepared hole for Caxis tapping
0030 to
0049
Integer
0050
Real number
Not defined Minimum inner surface diameter that can be machined
Option B
0051
Real number
Not defined Maximum diameter of a workpiece that can drilled
Option B
Selects a machining group (1 to 3).

1: Data items 100 to 166 in the 1st group are used.
2: Data items 200 to 266 in the 2nd group are used.
3: Data items 300 to 366 in the 3rd group are used.
If this value is not defined, one of the following groups is specified
according to the blank figure.
Round bar: Group 1
Drilled round bar: Group 2
Special blank: Group 3
Not defined Caxis center drilling depth (D1)
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Data No.
Format
Initial value
0052
Real number
Not defined Minimum drilling allowance
Option B
0053
Real number
Not defined Lengthtodiameter ratio for the section to be drilled
Option B
0054
Real number
Not defined Coefficient for calculating the diameter of a prepared hole for Caxis
tapping (thread catch rate)
If this value is not defined, 1.082532 is specified.
Maximum prepared hole diameter
= D P C (value of data 22/100)
Minimum prepared hole diameter
= D P C (value of data 22/100)
D: Nominal diameter, P:
Pitch, C: Value of data 54
0055 to
0069
Real number
Not defined Not defined
0070
Eightdigit
binary
00000000
Description
Bit
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
Remarks
Option B
Flags for multitier drilling

Bit 0 Method for drilling a hole having two or more tiers
0 : Multiple drilling in the order: minor diameter to major diameter
1 : Multiple drilling in the order: major diameter to minor diameter
Bit 1 Change of the tool selection method
0 : The effective tool selected by automatic process setting is used
for drilling.
1 : When the drill suitable for a machining diameter is not found in
tooling information or tool file, the input of the tool data is
requested on the tool data screen.
0071
Eightdigit
binary
00000111
Bit
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
Option B
Flag for automatic setting of mirrorimage machining Bit 0 End facing

Bit 1 Outer surface machining
Bit 2 Inner surface machining
0 : No mirrorimage machining is specified.
1 : Mirrorimage machining is specified.
Flag for outer surface finishing
Bit 7 When the following order is specified for the machining
procedure data: 1) End face finishing 2)
Outer surface finishing,
0 : Machining continues from end face to the outer surface when
the workpiece has an inner surface.
1 : The end face and outer surface are machined in separate
cycles when the workpiece has an inner surface.
0072
Eightdigit
binary
00000000
Bit
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
Flag for automatic tool setting

Bit 0 Tooling information
Bit 1 Tool file
0 : Retrieved
1 : Not retrieved
0073 to
0099
Eightdigit
binary
00000000
Not used
Option B
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Machining procedure data

Data No.
Format
Initial value
Description
0100 0200 0300
Integer
Not defined Specifies the 1st machining process.
Remarks
0101 0201 0301
Specifies the 2nd machining process.
Drilling
0102 0202 0302
Specifies the 3rd machining process.
End face roughing
0103 0203 0303
Specifies the 4th machining process.
0104 0204 0304
0105 0205 0305
End face finishing
0106 0206 0306
10
0107 0207 0307
11
0108 0208 0308
12
End face grooving
0109 0209 0309
13
Outer surface grooving
0110 0210 0310
14
Inner surface grooving
0112 0212 0312
15
Residual outer surface machining
0111 0211
0311
16
Residual inner surface machining
0113 0213 0313
17
Front face threading
0114 0214 0314
18
Outer surface threading
0115 0215 0315
19
Inner surface threading
0116 0216 0316
30
End face center drilling
0117 0217 0317
32
End face drilling
0118 0218 0318
34
End face tapping
0119 0219 0319
36
Caxis end face grooving
0120 0220 0320
31
Specifies the 21st machining process.
Side face center drilling
0121 0221 0321
33
Specifies the 22nd machining process. Side face tapping
0122 0222 0322
35
Specifies the 23rd machining process.
Side face drilling
0123 0223 0323
37
Caxis side face grooving
0124 0224 0324

to
to
to
0129 0229 0329
Not defined Specifies from the 25th to the 30th

machining processes.
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
A. SETTING DATA,
Correspondence between settings and machining

Fro turning
1:
Center drilling 2: Drilling
2:
Drilling
3:
End facing roughing
4:
5:
6:
End face semifinishing
7:
8:
9:
End face finishing
10 : Outer surface finishing
11 : Inner surface finishing
12 : End face grooving
13 : Outer surface grooving
14 : Inner surface grooving
15 : Residual outer surface machining
16 : Residual inner surface machining
17 : Front face threading
18 : Outer surface threading
19 : Inner surface threading
20 : Cuttingoff
21 : Bar feed
For Caxis machining
30 : End face center drilling
31 : Side face center drilling
32 : End face drilling
33 : Side face drilling
34 : End face tapping
35 : Side face tapping
36 : Caxis end face grooving
37 : Caxis side face grooving
38 : Front face milling
39 : Cylindrical grooving
NOTE
Be sure to specify that Caxis machining is executed after
turning finishing.
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Manual input data flags

Data No.
Format
Initial value
Description
0130 0230 0330
Eightdigit
binary
00000000
For center drilling
0131 0231 0331
00000000
For drilling
0132 0232 0332
00000000
For end face roughing
0133 0233 0333
00000000
For outer surface roughing
0134 0234 0334
00000000
For inner surface roughing
0135 0235 0335
00000000
For end face semifinishing
0136 0236 0336
00000000
For outer surface semifinishing
0137 0237 0337
00000000
For inner surface semifinishing
0138 0238 0338
00000000
For end face finishing
0139 0239 0339
00000000
For outer surface finishing
0140 0240 0340
00000000
For inner surface finishing
0142 0242 0342
00000000
For end face grooving
0141 0241 0341
00000000
For outer surface grooving
0143 0243 0343
00000000
For inner surface grooving
0144 0244 0344
00000000
For residual outer surface machining
0145 0245 0345
00000000
For residual inner surface machining
0146 0246 0346
00000000
For front face threading
0147 0247 0347
00000000
For outer surface threading
0148 0248 0348
00000000
For inner surface threading
0149 0249 0349
00000000
For cuttingoff
0150 0250 0350
00000000
For bar feed
0151 0251 0351

to
to
to
0156 0256 0356
00000000
Not used
0157 0257 0357
00000000
For front face milling
0158 0258 0358
00000000
For cylindrical grooving
0159 0259 0359
00000000
For end face center drilling
0160 0260 0360
00000000
For side face center drilling
0161 0261 0361
00000000
For end face drilling
0162 0262 0362
00000000
For side face drilling
0163 0263 0363
00000000
For end face tapping
0164 0264 0364
00000000
For side face tapping
0165 0265 0365
00000000
For Caxis end face grooving
0166 0266 0366
00000000
For Caxis side face grooving
00000000
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Meaning of each flag

#6
0
#7
0
#5
0
#4
0
#3
0
#2
0
#1
#0
Bit 0 Specifies whether a tool is manually selected and whether the machining
start point and passing point are manually specified.
0 : The correct tool is automatically selected from the tooling
information.
1 : A tool is manually selected. The cursor temporarily stops moving
automatically to each field on the tool data screen, so the operator can
manually enter a tool number, machining start point, and passing
point.
Bit 1 Specifies whether cutting conditions are manually entered.
0 : Cutting conditions are automatically set.
1 : The cursor temporarily stops moving automatically to each field on
the cutting condition screen, so the operator can manually enter
cutting conditions.
Bit 2 Specifies whether a cutting direction and cutting area are manually
specified.
0 : A cutting direction and cutting area are automatically specified.
1 : The cursor temporarily stops moving automatically to each field on
the cutting direction and area screen, so the operator can manually
enter a cutting direction and cutting area.
(2) FAPT I/O interface data
Data No.
Format
Initial value
Description
0900
Integer
Reader/punch interface number (1 to 3)
0901
Integer
10
Specifies a baud rate.
Integer
Option B
Setting
Baud rate
50
100
110
150
200
300
Setting
10
11
Baud rate
0902
Remarks
600 1200 2400 4800 9600
Specifies the number of stop bits and the use of the DC code.
1: One stop bit and the DC code is used.
2: Two stop bits and the DC code is used.
5: One stop bit and the DC code is not used.
6: Two stop bits and the DC code is not used.
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.2
SYSTEM
PARAMETER TABLE
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0000
Integer
Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
0001
Integer
Sets output code of system parameter, MTF and setting data. Only
1: ISO
2: EIA
15TF/
15TTF
0002
Integer
Sets sequence number output of NC tape

1 :
Sequence number is not output.
0 :
Output every process.
1 or over : Output every block (increment)
0003
Integer
Increment every process (If this value exceeds the increment

in a process, the initial value of the next process is set to be
larger than the final value of the previous process.)
0004
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
01100000
0005 to
0007
Character
Not
defined
0008
Integer
0009
Description
Waiting time until going to the next screen after entering the
answers to all questions.
1 : No waiting time
0 : Until the soft key NEXT PAGE is pressed.
N : n second
0, 1
00010000 Specify to skip a particular question.
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 6
00010
0, 1
00011110
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Real number
Designation of index position

Designation of home position
Designation of machining start point
Designation of Yaxis index and home positions
Selection of drawing format
Selection of standard surface roughness
0 : Non skip
1 : Skip
Skip of question on surface rughness

0 : Non skip
1 : Skipped
Bit
0011
Remarks
7
0
6
0
5
0
All surface roughness

Surface roughness to C
Surface roughness to G
Surface roughness to N
Surface roughness to R
1.
mm specification
25.4
inch specification
10
System variable (Do not change the setting

by yourself.)
yourself )
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0012
Real number
1000.
mm specification
12.
inch specification
Description
Remarks
System variable (Do not change the setting

by yourself.)
yourself )
0013
Real number
Setting of display time of initial graphic

0 : Initial graphic display is always displayed.
n : Initial graphic display is cleared, if its display lasts n second.
0014
Real number
6.4
Move amount of cursor at a time when expansion or

contraction is done by DRAWING RANGE key. This value is
specified by a multiplier of 1.6 mm inclusive.
0015
0, 1
00010001
Set the I/O unit of family program, material file, and tooling file.
Bit
7
0
6
0
5
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
Bit 0 Input unit

Bit 4 Output unit
0 : Memory cassette
1 : Submemory
0016
Character
Undefined Set the name of material file to be automatically loaded.
0017
Character
Undefined Set the name of tooling information to be automatically loaded. Within 15

characters.
0018
Character
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
0019
0, 1
00000000
Setting of CRT when a figure is drawn vertically

0 : Horizontal drawing display.
1 : Vertical drawing display.
Bit
7
0
Bit 0
Bit 1
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
Setting for menu No.4, 5 and 6.

Setting for menu No.1, 2, 4, 5 and 6
0020
0, 1
00000000 Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
0049
0, 1
00000000
Single step of bar feed process

0 : Not stopped
1 : Stopped
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
Process start
Just before escape
0050
0, 1
00000000 Single step of center drilling process
(Refer to parameter No.49)
0051
0, 1
00000000 Single step of drill process, reamer process and tapping
process
0052
0, 1
00000000 Single step of rough cutting process
11
Within 15
characters.
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
Format
APPENDIX
Initial
value
B61804E2/05
Description
Remarks
0053
0, 1
00000000 Single step of semifinish cutting process
0054
0, 1
00000000 Single step of finish cutting process
0055
0, 1
00000000 Single step of grooving process
0056
0, 1
00000000 Single step of Threading process
0057
0, 1
00000000 Single step of cutting off process
0100
Integer
0 : Absolute command NC data

1 : Incremental command NC data
0101
Integer
0 : Pocketing is not performed.

1 : Pocketing is performed.
2 : Lower part of overhang is machined.
0102
Integer
0 : Tool nose angle is not checked.

1 : Tool nose angle is checked.
0103
Integer
0 : Nose R is not compensated.

1 : Nose R is compensated.
2 : Nose R is compensated, and overshoot check is done.
0104
0, 1
00000000
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
4
0
3
0
Questions of XS and ZS is
0 : Skipped
1 : Not skipped
Questions of firsttime override of rough cutting is
0 : Skipped
1 : Not skipped
Doublesided machining function
0 : Not used
1 : Used
At rough machining
0 : Machining is performed under an overhanging
portion.
1 : Machining is not performed under an overhanging
portion.
At semifinish and finish machining
0 : Machining is performed under an overhanging
portion.
1 : Machining is not performed under an overhanging
portion
Regarding data display
0 : 1 or 1/10000 in unit
1 : 0.1 or 1/100000 in unit
12
Parameter
No.
0105
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Format
0, 1
Initial
value
01011100
Description
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Constant surface speed control

0 : Not used
1 : Used
Coolant
0 : Not used
1 : Used
Cutter compensation cancel
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Approach
0 : Simultaneous 2 axes
1 : Simultaneous 1 axis
Escape
Rotating direction of spindle when cutting is made by
the turret on the front side.
Rotating direction of spindle when cutting is made by
the turret on the opposite side.
0 : By MTF No.1130.
1 : By MTF No.1131.
Setting screen for passing point
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
0106
0, 1
01011100
Tapping process parameter

0107
0, 1
01011100
Bar feed process parameter

0108
0, 1
01011100
Center drilling process parameter

0109
0, 1
01011100
Drilling process parameter

0110
0, 1
01011101
Roughing process parameter

0111
0, 1
01011101
Semifinishing process parameter

0112
0, 1
01011101
Finishing process parameter

0113
0, 1
01011101
Grooving process parameter

0114
0, 1
00011100
Threading process parameter

0115
0, 1
01011101
Cutting off process parameter

0116
Real number
2.
0.08
Remarks
Overrun in drilling a penetration hole in the

automatic process
rocess sspecification
ecification
inch specification Unit: mm or inch
mm specification
13
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0117
Real number
0.5
mm specification
0.02
inch specification
0.1
mm specification
0.04
inch specification
0.01
mm specification
0.0004
inch specification
1.
mm specification
0.04
inch specification
0118
0119
0120
Real number
Real number
Real number
B61804E2/05
Description
Finishing allowance in X axis of roughing
Unit: mm or inch
Allowance in X axis of semifinishing
Unit: mm or inch
Final cutting depth of threading
Unit: mm or inch
Return relief of roughing and drilling
Unit: mm or inch
0121
Real number
2.
Cutting depth D1 (multiple of the drilling diameter) of one drilling

process (machining methods 2 and 3)
0122
Real number
5.
Drawing depth D2 (multiple of the drilling diameter of drilling

(machining) method 3)
0123
Real number
0.
0124
Real number
1.
mm specification
0.04
Stub rate of drilling (machining method 3)

and feed rate of return relief during necking
inch specification Unit: mm/rev or inch/rev
0125
Real number
0.6495
Inner threading
Constant to obtain threading depth from pitch
(Threading depth) = (Pitch) (Parameter No.0125)
0126
Real number
45.
Threading
Boundary value of ordinary thread/face thread
0127
Real number
3.
Cutting edge protection angle (degree)
0128
Real number
2000.
0129
Real number
1.5
0130
Real number
0.0005
Maximum spindle speed (rpm)

Grooving dwell time (rev)
mm specification
System constant (R4TOLR) (Do not

change the setting by yourself.)
yourself )
0.0000197 inch specification

0131
Real number
0.0005
mm specification
System constant (R4TOLR) (Do not

yourself )

0132
Real number
0.01
mm specification
System constant (R4TOLT) (Do not

yourself )

0133
Real number
0.001
System constant 4 (R4 TOLP) (Dont change this setting at

random.)
14
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0134
Real number
0.000573
0135
Real number
3.
0136
Integer
0140
Integer
Specification of cuttingoff process.

0 : Cuttingoff process is not defined.
1 : Cuttingoff process is defined.
0141
Real number
0.
mm specification
0.
0142
Real number
5.
0.2
0143
Real number
1.
0.04
0144
Real number
0.
0.
Description
System constant 5 (R4 TOLA) (Dont change this setting at
random.)
Cuttingoff point of cuttingoff machining

(CO).
Specify
S
ecify the distance from the inner
inch specification diameter of the part
Unit: mm or inch
Machining condition change point (CR) of
cuttingoff machining.
Specify
cuttingoff
S
ecify the distance from the cutting
off
inch specification point.
Unit: mm or inch
mm specification
Drawing amount (RA) of cuttingoff

machining.
Specify
S
ecify the distance from the machining
inch specification condition change point.
Unit: mm or inch
mm specification
Outer diameter beveling amount on the

cuttingoff.
blank side cutting
off.
mm specification
0150
Integer
0151
Integer
0152
Real number
0153
0154
0155
Real number
Real number
Real number
0.4
Clearance amount (CAX) at the time of bar

approach.
feed tool a
roach.
10.
mm specification
10.
mm specification
0.4
Clearance amount (CAZ) at the time of bar

approach.
feed tool a
roach.
20.
mm specification
0.8
Position at which the fingers grip the work

by bar feed (WG).
20
mm specification
0.8
inch specification
Spindle speed at bar feed (S1)
0156
Real number
100
0157
Real number
1000.
40.
Bar feed return amount (CEZ) of the tool

Unit: mm or inch
Feed rate (F1) for putting fingers on the

work by bar feed.
inch specification Unit: mm/min or inch/min
mm specification
15
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0158
Real number
3000.
0159
Real number
B61804E2/05
Description
120.
Feed rate (F2) for positioning on the work

by bar feed.
1000.
mm specification
40.
mm specification
Feed rate (F3) of tool after positioning on

the work by bar feed.
0160
Real number
3.
Dwell time when the chuck is opened or closed in bar feed.

(Second)
0170
Real number
2.
mm specification
0.08
0171
0172
0173
Real number
Real number
Real number
0174
Real number
0175 to
0179
Real number
0180
Real number
0181
Real number
0.04
Return relief amount during machining of a

groove by the pecking
ecking motion U
0.5
mm specification
0.02
inch specification
0.1
mm specification
1.
Real number
Real number
Real number
Constant for obtaining the depth of a thread from the pitch of

outer surface threading
(Depth) = (pitch) (parameter No.174)

2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
2.
2.
2.
0.08
0185
Real number
Zaxis allowance at intermediate finishing
0.7578
0.08
0184
Zaxis finishing allowance at roughing

Unit: mm or inch
0.08
0183
mm specification
0.004
0.08
0182
Cutting depth per cut of machining a

groove by the pecking
ecking motion D
2.
0.08
Clearance amount of center drilling C

Unit: mm or inch
Clearance amount of Drilling (machining

methods 1, 2, and 3) C.
Secondary clearance amount of drilling
(machining method 3) C1.
mm specification
Clearance amount of roughing in the

Xaxis
X
axis direction CX
mm specification
Clearance amount of roughing in the

Zaxis
Z
axis direction CZ
mm specification
Clearance amount of semifinishing in the

Xaxis
X
axis direction CX.
mm specification
16
Remarks
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0186
Real number
2.
0.08
0187
Real number
2.
0.08
0188
Real number
2.
0.08
0189
Real number
2.
0.08
0190
0191
0192
0193
0194
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
Description
Clearance amount of semifinishing in the
Xaxis
X
axis direction CZ.
mm specification
Clearance amount of finishing in the

Xaxis
X
axis direction CX.
mm specification
Clearance amount of finishing in the

Zaxis
Z
axis direction CZ.
mm specification
Clearance amount of grooving or necking

C
mm specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
0195
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Clearance amount of threading CS

Unit: mm or inch
Clearance amount of threading CE
Unit: mm or inch
Clearance amount of cutting off C1
Unit: mm or inch
Second clearance for inner surface

machining CZ2
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
5.
Clearance amount of threading CT

Unit: mm or inch
Clearance amount (C1) of tapping
0196
Real number
Speed override at return of reaming (1.010.0)
0197 to
0199
Real number
0200
Integer
0201
Integer
0202
Real number
0203
Integer
Undefined Unusable (Data unchangeable)

2
Set the drawing type.
17
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0204
Integer
B61804E2/05
Description
Sets the position of parts as viewed from the advancing
direction of the definition of parts figure.
(1)
1 : Right side
1 : Left side
(when drawing format is 1 or 2)
(2)
1 : Right side
1 : Left side
(when drawing format is 3 or 4)
However, if vertical drawing display is available, right and left
should be reversed.
0205
Integer
Set the standard surface roughness by the number of the finish

symbols.
0206
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0207
Real number
0208
Real number
0209
Real number
0210
Real number
0211
Real number
0212
Real number
0213
Real number
0213
Real number
Xcoordinate value of the machine datum

(for head 1 with the 4axis lathe). (1st
process in doublesided machining)
Undefined inch specification
Unit: mm or inch
Zcoordinate value of the machine datum
(for head 1 with the 4axis lathe). (1st
process in doublesided machining)
Unit: mm or inch
Xcoordinate value of the machine datum
4axis
(for head 2 with the 4
axis lathe).
Undefined inch specification Unit: mm or inch
Zcoordinate value of the machine datum
(for head 2 with the 4
4axis
axis lathe).
lathe)
Xcoordinate value of the turret turn
position (for head 1 with the 4axis lathe).
(1st process in doublesided machining)
Unit: mm or inch
Zcoordinate value of the turret turn
position (for head 1 with the 4axis lathe).
(1st process in doublesided machining)
Unit: mm or inch
Xcoordinate value of the turret turn
4axis
position
osition (for head 2 with the 4
axis lathe).
4axis
position
axis lathe).
4axis
position
axis lathe).
18
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
0214
Real number
0215
Real number
0216
Real number
0217
Real number
0218
Real number
0219
Real number
0220
Real number
0221
Real number
0222
Real number
0223
Real number
0224
Real number
0225
Real number
Initial
value
Description
Xcoordinate value of machine origin on

back working side (for tool rest 1 in 4axis
doublesided
lathe) (2nd process
rocess in double
sided
Undefined inch specification machining)
Unit: mm or inch
Zcoordinate value of machine origin on
lathe) (2nd process
rocess in double
doublesided
sided
Undefined inch specification machining)
Unit: mm or inch
Xcoordinate value of machine origin on
lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
Zcoordinate value of machine origin on
back working side(for tool rest 2 in 4axis
lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
Xcoordinate value of turret turning
position on back working side (for tool rest
1 in 4axis
4 axis lathe)
(2nd process
rocess in
Undefined inch specification doublesided machining)
Unit: mm or inch
Zcoordinate value of turret turning
1 in 4axis
4 axis lathe)
(2nd process
rocess in
Undefined inch specification doublesided machining)
Unit: mm or inch
Xcoordinate value of turret turning
2 in 4axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
Zcoordinate value of turret turning
2 in 4axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
Ycoordinate value of machine origin (for
4axis
head 1 in 4
axis lathe)
Ycoordinate value of machine origin (for
head 2 in 4
4axis
axis lathe)
Ycoordinate value of turret turning
4axis
position
osition (for tool rest 1 in 4
axis lathe)
osition (for head 2 in 4
4axis
axis lathe)
position
19
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
0226
Real number
0227
Real number
0228
Real number
0229
Real number
0230
Integer
Number of times final finishing is repeated in a multiple thread

cutting cycle (valid for the Series 16)
0231
Integer
Length of incomplete thread in a multiple thread cutting cycle

(valid for the Series 16)
0300
Initial
value
Description
Remarks
Ycoordinate value of machine origin on

back working side (for head 1 in 4axis
lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
Ycoordinate value of machine origin on
back working side (for head 2 in 4axis
lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
position on back working side (for head 1
in 4axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
position on back working side (for head 2
in 4axis lathe)
Unit: mm or inch
0, 1
00100100
Caxis center drilling process parameter

Bit
6
0
0
0
Bit 1
Coolant
0 : Not used
1 : Used
Bit 2 Cancellation of tool compensation
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Bit 3,4 Approach
11, 10: Simultaneous 3 axes
Bit 5 Return relief (X, Z axis)
Bit 7 Passing point setting screen
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
Process parameter on center drilling
0301
0, 1
00100100 Caxis drill processing process parameter
(Refer to the parameter 300)
0302
0, 1
00100100 Caxis tapping processing process parameter
0303
0, 1
00100100 Caxis groove processing process parameter
0304
0, 1
00100100 Caxis face milling process parameter
20
For Caxis
machining
Parameter
No.
0305
0306 to
0308
0309
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Format
Initial
value
Description
Remarks
0, 1
00100100 Caxis drill working process parameter
(see parameter 300)
0, 1
0, 1
00000000
Parameter for Caxis/Yaxis machining

Bit
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
For Caxis/
Yaxis
machining
Bit 0
Specifies whether the values for a machining plane are

specified.
0 : Not specified
1 : Specified
Bit 1 Feed mode
0 : Safe feed mode
1 : Effective feed mode
Note) Bit 0 is valid only Caxis.Bit
0310
0, 1
00000000
Single step process for Caxis center drilling

Bit
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
Head of process
Before approach
Before escape
0 : Not stop
1 : Stop
0311
0, 1
00000000 Single step process for Caxis drilling process
(Refer to parameter 310)
0312
0, 1
00000000 Single step process for Caxis tapping
0313
0, 1
00000000 Single step process for Caxis grooving
0314
0, 1
00000000 Single step process for Caxis face milling
0315
0, 1
00000000 Single step process for Caxis drill process
(see parameter 310)
0316 to
0319
For Caxis
machining
0, 1
0320
Real number
0.
Dwell time (sec) of drill processing
0321
Integer
80
Cutting speed override (% to special tool) when the tool Caxis/

material is Special.
Yaxis
0322
Integer
80
Feed amount override (% to special tool) when the tool material Caxis/
is Special
Yaxis
0323
Real number
0.
Coordinates values at Caxis zero point
0330
Real number
2.
mm specification
0.08
Clearance amount of Caxis center drilling

C1.
21
Caxis/
Yaxis
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
Format
0331
Real number
0332
Real number
APPENDIX
Initial
value
Real number
2.
2.
0.08
0334
Real number
0335
Real number
Real number
2.
2.
0.08
0337
Real number
0338
Real number
Real number
2.
1.
0.04
0340
Real number
2.
0.08
0341
Real number
2.
0.08
0342
Real number
2.
0.08
0343
Real number
2.
0.08
0344 to
0362
Real number
0363
Real number
0364
0365
Real number
Real number
Clearance amount of Caxis drilling

mm specification

mm specification

mm specification
0.08
0339

mm specification
0.08
0336
Description
0.08
0333
B61804E2/05
Cutting depth of Caxis drilling (machining

method 2) D1.
mm specification
Return relief amount of Caxis drilling

(machining method 2) U.
mm specification

mm specification

mm specification

mm specification
Cutting depth of Caxis drilling (machining

method 3) D1.
mm specification

2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
Clearance amount of Caxis tapping C1.

Unit: mm or inch
Clearance amount of Caxis tapping C2.
Unit: mm or inch
Depth of cut for Caxis tapping (machining

method 3: Containing peck
eck rigid ta
tapping)
ing)
inch specification Unit: mm or inches
22
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
0366
Real number
0367
Real number
Initial
value
Description
Remarks

2.
0.08
0368
Real number
0369
Real number
0370
Real number
2000.
0371
Real number
1.0
0.5
Tool direction clearance of Caxis

grooving CD and notching clearance of
Caxis grooving C1.
inch specification
Unit: mm or inch
mm specification
Finishing allowance
notching
mm specification
in
Caxis
front

Max. rpm of tool (rpm)
Caxis/
Yaxis
Extension amount for approach/escape along a tangent line or

circle in Caxis milling or Yaxis contouring
0.1
0372
Real number
0.2
Cutting rate toward a diameter for Caxis face milling
0373
Real number
0.5
mm specification
0.02
0400
0, 1
00100100
For Caxis
machining
Finishing allowance of Caxis face milling

(in the Z axis direction)
Yaxis center drilling process parameter
Bit
0
0
Bit 1
Coolant
0 : Not used
1 : Used
Bit 2 Cancellation of tool compensation
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Bit 3,4 Approach
Bit 5,6 Return relief
11, 10: Simultaneous 3 axis
Bit 7 The prompt relating to the passing point is:
0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.
0401
0, 1
00100100 Yaxis drilling process parameter
(refer to the parameter No.400)
0402
0, 1
00100100 Yaxis tapping process parameter
0403
0, 1
00100100 Yaxis pattern machining process parameter
0404
0, 1
00100100 Yaxis contouring process parameter
23
For Yaxis
machining
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
0405 to
0409
0410
Format
APPENDIX
Initial
value
B61804E2/05
Description
Remarks
0, 1
0, 1
00000000
For Yaxis
machining
Single step of Yaxis center drilling process

Bit
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
Process start
Just before escape
0 : Not stopped
1 : StoppedBit
0411
0, 1
00000000 Single step of Yaxis drilling process
0412
0, 1
00000000 Single step of Yaxis tapping process
0413
0, 1
00000000 Single step of Yaxis pattern machining process
0414
0, 1
00000000 Single step of Yaxis contouring process
0415 to
0419
0420
0, 1
Real number
2.
0.08
0421
Real number
0422
Real number

2.
0.08
0423
Real number
2.
0.08
0424
Real number
0425
Real number
Real number
2.
2.
0.08
0427
Real number
2.
0.08
0428
Real number
2.
0.08
0429
Real number
Clearance amount of Yaxis drilling

(machining method 1) C1
mm specification

mm specification
0.08
0426
Clearance amount of Yaxis center drilling

C1
mm specification

mm specification

mm specification
Cutting depth of Yaxis drilling (machining

method 2) D1
mm specification
Return relief amount of Caxis drilling

(machining method 2) U
mm specification
24
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0430
Real number
2.
0.08
0431
Real number
2.
0.08
0432
Real number
2.
0.08
0433
Real number
2.
0.08
0434
Real number
0435
Real number
0436
0437
Real number
Real number
0438
Real number
0439
Real number
0441
Real number
Integer
0443
Real number
0444
Real number
0446
Real number
Real number

mm specification
Cutting depth of Yaxis drilling (machining

method 3) D1
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
Clearance amount of Yaxis tapping C1

Unit: mm or inches
Clearance amount of Yaxis drilling C2
Unit: mm or inches
Cutting depth of Yaxis tapping

(machining method 3: Rigid tapping with
pecking) D1
inch specification
Unit: mm or inches

2.
Clearance of Yaxis pattern machining

mm specification
0.08

0.5
mm specification
2.
80
mm specification
Finishing allowance of Yaxis pattern

machining TS (machining method 1)
Cutting depth D1 (Percentage of the tool diameter)

2.
0.08
0445

mm specification
mm specification
0.02
0442

mm specification
2.
0.08
Real number
Description
0.08
0440
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05

mm specification
0.08

0.5
mm specification
2.
0.02
mm specification
Finishing allowance of Yaxis pattern

machining TS (machining method 2)
25
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0447
Integer
80
0448
Real number
0449
Real number
Real number
2.
0.5
0.02
0451 to
0459
Real number
Description
Remarks
Cutting depth D1 (Percentage of the tool diameter)
0.08
0450
B61804E2/05
Clearance CD in the longitudinal direction

and clearance C1 in the circumferential
direction of the tool for Yaxis contouring
inch specification
Unit: mm or inches
mm specification
Finishing allowance of Yaxis contouring

TS
mm specification
0700
0, 1
0701
0, 1
00000000
Bit
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
1
0
0
0
When interference alarm sounded:

0 : Stop drawing
1 : Continue drawing
Animation drawing in manual operation mode
0 : Disable
1 : Enable
Center line is
0 : Drawn
1 : Not drawn
Interference check is
0 : Executed
1 : Not executed
By executing M30, blank is
0 : Not redrawn
1 : Redrawn
The setting of parameters for drawing is
0: Possible
1: Prohibited
26
Parameter
for
animation
drawing
Parameter
No.
0702
Format
Initial
value
0, 1
00001000
Description
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
0, 1
00000000
Bit
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 7
Remarks
0
Questioning for maximum spindle speed

0 : is not performed
1 : is performed (for each process)
The direction of spindle revolution for each tool
0 : can not be set (The spindle rotating direction
follows the system parameters
(No.107 to 115) per process.)
1 : can be set
(Ignore the system parameter
No.107 to 115 setting.)
Initial value of maximum spindle speed
(Valid it bit 0 is 1)
0 : become the value of system parameter No.128
1 : become undefined data
In machining definition, the tool figure data:
0 : Cannot be set.
1 : can be set.
Special threading is:
0 : Not carried out. (A conventional triangular thread is
formed.)
1 : Carried out. (A square or trapezoidal thread is
formed.)
The second clearance specified for inner surface
machining is rendered:
0 : Invalid.
1 : Valid.
The depth of center drilling is measured from:
0 : The tool shoulder.
1 : The tool tip.
The method of cutting depth of drilling
0 : Cutting depth is specified by incremental
programming
1 : Cutting depth is specified by absolute programming
Bit 1
0703
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
6
0
3
0
1
0
0
0
One process end, return point of turret

0 : Return to next machining start point
1 : Return to this machining start point
Prompting order for input of blank figure dimensions
0 : D, D0, and L
1 : L, D, and D0
Input of surface roughness 0 is
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
When the function to determine processes
automatically is used, a drill having the same diameter
as the inner surface:
0 : Cannot be used
1 : Can be used.
27
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
0704
Format
APPENDIX
Initial
value
0, 1
00000000
Description
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 6
Bit 7
0, 1
00000000
Bit
Bit 1
Bit 5
Bit 6
5
0
Remarks
0
When operating both turrets simultaneously using the

process editing function, the waiting
0 : not output before T code cancel
1 : output before T code cancel
At the start of new process when the spindle revolution
direction is different between new and old processes,
the spindle stop M code is
0 : not output
1 : output
Auto collision avoidance function is
0 : used repeatedly
1 : used once
For each cutting area, the T code specifying tool offset
is:
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Before cutting with a minor cutting edge is started for
grooving, the T code of the second tool offset number
is:
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Specifies whether a blank figure (BWF) is filled in on the
machining definition screen.
0 : Not filled in
1 : Filled in
(For the 5900 and 5F00 systems, a blank is not filled in
regardless of the setting of bit 6.)
Specifies whether a machining area (CAF) is
linedrawn.
0 : Not linedrawn
1 : Linedrawn
Bit 1
0705
B61804E2/05
6
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
0
0
In the animation drawing,

0 : Upper tool is turret 1
1 : Lower tool is turret 1
Specifies the following when the T code cancellation
command is executed during foreground simulated
animation.
0 : The pictorial tool stops.
1 : The pictorial tool continues moving.
When another module requests the right to use
graphics exclusively during simulated machining,
0 : The right is not released.
1 : The right is released.
28
Parameter
No.
0706
Format
0, 1
designation
Initial
value
Description
Remarks
00000000 Next tool and rigid tapping parameter

Bit
Bit 5
Bit 7
0, 1
00000000
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
Calling the next tool from turret 1

0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
Calling the next tool from turret 2
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
Format of the rigid tapping cycle
0 : A normal rigid tapping cycle is output.
1 : An interpolation rigid tapping cycle is output.
Bit 6
0707
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Designation of balance cutting process

Bit
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
4
0
3
0
Outside diameter roughing

Outside diameter semifinishing
Outside diameter finishing
0 : Not made to the balanced cutting process.
1 : If the condition is satisfied, it can be made to the
balanced cutting process.
Setting of surface speed control for balance cut B during
outer surface rough machining
0 : Constant surface speed control is not used. (G97)
1 : Constant surface speed control is used. (G96)
Setting of balance cut approach during outer surface
rough machining
0 : The waiting M code is not output before approach.
1 : The waiting M code is output before approach
(waiting for spindle rotation to be reached).
Balanced cutting type of outside diameter roughing
0 : Set the initial value of the prompt on the tool data
screen to the value of system parameter No.755 so
that type B is selected.
1 : Set the initial value of the prompt on the tool data
screen to 0 so that type A is selected.Bit
29
TT only
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
0708
Format
APPENDIX
Initial
value
0, 1
00000000
Description
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
0709
B61804E2/05
0, 1
10000000 Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 7
1
0
Remarks
0
Common data to be restored when the power is turned

on
0 : System parameters
1 : Family data
Specifies whether process names are automatically
inserted for each process when an NC data is created.
0 : No process name is automatically inserted.
1 : Process names are automatically inserted.
Specifies whether the initial screen display function is
used.
0 : Not used
1 : Used
Input/output format of material data and tooling
information
0 : Binary
1 : ISO/EIA
Initial screen at Power up.
0 : FAPT side
1 : NC side
Automatic process setting screen display
0 : Highspeed type (The screen is skipped.)
1 : Conventional type (The screen is not skipped.)
Specify whether back machining is performed.
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
When the cutting end point is on a blank
0 : The tool retracts to the minimum diameter of the
blank.
1 : The tool retracts in the Z axis direction.
Prompt for CUTTING ANOTHER AREA BY SAME
TOOL? ... CN=
0 : Displayed on the cutting condition setting screen.
1 : Displayed on the CN setting screen.
On the machining procedure setting screen,
0 : The machining procedure data cannot be
registered in submemory.
1 : The machining procedure data can be registered n
submemory.
0710
Integer
Defined priority on turret during automatic collision prevention 15TTF

function
only
0 : Defined by the operator
1 : The turret 1 always has the priority
2 : The turret 2 always has the priority
0711
Integer
100
One time override value during outer diameter rough

machining
0712
Integer
Magnification of the cutting feedrate when the constant surface

speed is set for balance cut B (Setting range: 1 to 100) If the
value set for the parameter falls outside the setting range, it is
clamped to magnification 1).
0713 to
0728
Integer
30
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0729
Integer
Description
Display language switching parameter
1: Japanese
4: French
7: Norwegian
10: Dutch
2: English
5: Swedish
8: Danish
11: Italian
3: German
6: Finnish
9: Chinese
12: Spanish
(Otherwise English display)
Remarks
The
optional
ROM
is
required for
Swedish
and
the
languages
beyond it.
15TTF
only
0730
Integer
100
Initial value of waiting M code
0731
Integer
200
Initial value of waiting M code which is inserted automatically

in ACA
0732
Real number
Undefined Value of the M code for inverting a workpiece

Value of the M code for starting Yaxis machining
0733
Real number
Undefined Value of the M code for ending Yaxis machining
Only for the

5710 and
5800 and
5E00
0734
Real number
Undefined Value of the M code for ending Yaxis machining
Only for the

5710 and
5800 and
5E00
0735
Real number
0736 to
0738
Integer
0739
Integer
Undefined Password for protecting a file
0740
Integer
Undefined M code number for the start of turning

Setting of this parameter can be omitted when only turning is
performed. However, it cannot be omitted when turning is
performed after C or Yaxis machining.
0741
Integer
Undefined M code number for the start of Caxis machining (switching to Only for the
the Caxis animated simulation screen)
5900 and
5F00
systems
0742
Integer
Undefined M code number for the start of cylindrical grooving (switching Only for the
to the cylindrical groove animated simulation screen)
5900 and
5F00
systems
0743
Integer
Undefined M code number for the start of Yaxis machining (switching to Only for the
the Yaxis animated simulation screen)
5900 and
5F00
systems
0744 to
0748
Integer
0749
Integer
0750
Real number
500
Initial value of the waiting M code for each machining path Only for TT
when using balance cut B.
Graphic scale constant
31
Only for the

5900 and
5F00
systems
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0751
Real number
3.
mm specification
0.1
inch specification
3.
mm specification
0.1
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
5.
mm specification
0.2
inch specification
0.2
mm specification
0.008
inch specification
0752
0753
0754
0755
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
B61804E2/05
Description
Remarks
Tip width of the drilling tool.

Unit: mm or inch
Tip width of the grooving tool.
Unit: mm or inch
Parameters
for
animated
drawing
Tip width of the threading tool.

Unit: mm or inch
Tip width of the generalpurpose tool.
Unit: mm or inch
Initial value of the fine chamfering amount.
Unit: mm or inch
0756
Real number
120
Max. angle in which fine chamferring is performed. (Setting

range 0< Angle to 180)
0757
Real number
1.5
Delay amount of tool 2 with respect to tool 1 during balance 15TTFB

cutting (type B), Unit: rev
only
0758 to
0768
0, 1
0769
Real number
0770
Character
Undefined File name of the sub cycle file using the automatic loading
0771
Character
Undefined Axis names and their order (Specify the axis names in the order
in which they are programmed on the NC. Example: XZCY)
0771 to
0776
0.8

Max.
15
characters.
0, 1
NOTE
The undefined character parameter is indicated with the D
code. To return to undefined data after setting data at the
undefined parameter No.0016, 0017, input two or more SP
codes. In this case, instead of the D code, a space is
displayed on the CRT. To change the undefined parameter
to undefined data, input
32
DEL
and
INPUT
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
System Parameter Table Concerning Color Display

Parameter
Initial value
No.
Color
Details
0500
Light blue
Fixed picture for drawing format setting.
0501
Light blue
Fixed picture for blank figure and base line setting.
0502
Yellow
Not used.
0550
White
Axis.
0551
Blue
Lines that indicate blank figure.
0552
Red
Lines that indicate machining figure.
0553
White
Threading area when machining is defined by menu No.4.
0554
Blue
Center drilling tool path.
0555
Blue
Drilling, reaming or tapping path.
0556
Green
Outsidediameter rough machining tool path.
0557
Green
Insidediameter rough machining tool path.
0558
Green
Outsidediameter semifinish machining tool path.
0559
Green
Insidediameter semifinish machining tool path.
0560
Light blue
Outsidediameter finish machining tool path.
0561
Light blue
Insidediameter finish machining tool path.
0562
Violet
Grooving and necking tool path.
0563
Yellow
Threading tool path.
0570
Green
Machining path for Yaxis machining (center drilling)
0571
Green
Machining path for Yaxis machining (drilling)
0572
Green
Machining path for Yaxis machining (tapping)
0573
Green
Machining path for Yaxis machining (patten machining)
0574
Green
Machining path for Yaxis machining (contouring)
0575 to
0578
Undefined
Undefined
0579
Sea blue
0580
Green
Machining path for Caxis machining (center drilling)
0581
Green
Machining path for Caxis machining (drill)
0582
Green
Machining path for Caxis machining (tap)
0583
Green
Machining path for Caxis machining (groove)
0584
Green
Machining path for Caxis machining (notching)
0585
Green
Machining path for Caxis machining cylindrical groove
0586
Yellow
Line representing a pending machining profile (pending mode)
Not used.
Yaxis machining parts figure
33
Format
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
Initial value
No.
APPENDIX
Color
B61804E2/05
Details
0587 to
0589
Not defined
0590
Sea blue
0600
Red
0601
Green
0602
Red
0603
Green
Message from system.
0604
Yellow
Mount message concerning BC, EF, etc.
0605
Green
File name displayed at input/output of family program.
0606
Green
Menu display.
0607
Red
Misinput data display.
0608
Red
(1: KILL 0: CONT) message.
0609
Yellow
0610
Light blue
0611
*White
Wink 3 (wink of parameter No. during parameter setting).
0612
Yellow
Wink 4 (wink of process No. at menu No.4 aprocess list).
0613
Yellow
Cursor that indicates range of machining area and enlargement.
0614
Red
0615
Yellow
Lowest question symbol name.
0616
White
Symbols of messages other than that currently under question at

question message (key word).
0617
White
Keyin data (data displayed at right to key word).
0618
Violet
1stline main title and page No.
0619
White
1stline subtitle and message currently under question

(principally main question).
0620
Green
2ndline message.
0621
Green
Fixed messages (messages other than questions that invariably

appear on that page and their accompanying messages).
(Example) 1. CYLINDER display at material select picture.
0622
Green
Fixed messages for one page (groups of messages that appear

several times on one page, such as process list).
0623
Green
Question message.
0624
Light green
0625
Yellow
Caxis machining parts figure.

Edition No. display at initial screen.
Not used.
JCL message (input message displayed when AUXILIARY key is
pressed at initial screen and data is input upon request).
Wink 1 (wink of menu No. at menu display and of symbol name at

request picture).
Wink 2 (wink of EXECUTING).
Error message.
Not used.
Question key word and relevant data.
34
Format
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
Initial value
No.
Color
0626
Violet
0627
Light blue
Details
Format
PRESS SOFT KEY message (with picture fixed).

Messages accompanying the message currently under question.
(Example)
Accompanying message displayed when EE data is

entered at groove shape input: (0: LAST 1: NEXT)
0628
Light blue
Already keyedin data and numeric data

(Example 1) Color of element symbol displayed on the 2nd line
at machining figure definition picture.
(Example 2) Parameter data and coordinate data display.
0629
Violet
Main title with no page No.

(Example)
PARAMETER & DATA SET when DATA SET key
is pressed at initial picture.
0650
Green
Not used.
0651
Green
Scale value display S =
0652
White
T code display T
0653
Red
O No. display O
0654
Yellow
NC data.
0655
White
Coordinate display X, Y.
0656
Yellow
Cutting time display CUTTING =.
0657
Yellow
Rapid feed time display RAPID =.
0660
Green
Color of blank of animated simulation

Do not change
(For the 5900 and 5F00, the colors used for the setting
animated simulation cannot be changed.)
Integer
0661
Blue
Color of chuck of animated simulation

(For the 5900 and 5F00, the colors used for
Integer
0662
Blue
Color of tail stock of animated simulation

Integer
0663
Purple
Color of center line of animated simulation

Integer
0664
White
Color of tool holder of animated simulation

Integer
0665
Red
Color of tip of turret 1

Integer
0666
Red
Color of tip of turret 2 (TTF only)

Integer
35
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
Initial value
No.
APPENDIX
Color
B61804E2/05
Details
Format
0667 to
0669
Undefined
7
Undefined
White
Not used
Do not change
the data
0670
White
Color of the data programmed on the initial Do not change

screen data setting screen
the data
0671
White
CAF (Machining area) drawing color
0672 to
0689
Undefined
Undefined
Not used
Color
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Violet
Light Blue
White
Setting value
NOTE
Negative symbol () means inverted display.
36
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.3
MACHINE TOOL FILE
(MTF) TABLE
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
Description
1000
8
Characters
F16
File name (NC name)
1001
Integer
Zaxis command inversion

1 : Normal output
1 : Inverted output of Zaxis command value
1002
Integer
Reference to the NC data output format corresponding to the case when

there is no move at approach or return relief.
0 : Not referred.
1 : Referred.
1010
Real number
9999.999
mm specification
999.9999
inch specification
Maximum command radius of arc interpolation

Unit: mm or inch
1011
Real number
0.02
1020
Real number
0.001
mm specification
0.0001
inch specification
0.001
mm specification
0.0001
inch specification
0.001
mm specification
0.0001
inch specification
0.0001
mm specification
0.000001
inch specification
0.0001
mm specification
0.000001
inch specification
1021
1022
1023
1024
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
1025
Real number
0.001
1026
Real number
1.0
1030
Integer
mm specification
inch specification
mm specification
inch specification
mm specification
inch specification
mm specification
inch specification
1031
1032
1033
Integer
Real number
Integer
Z axis minimum setting unit.

Unit: mm or inch
X axis minimum setting unit
Unit: mm or inch
Yaxis minimum setting unit
Unit: mm or inches
Feed per revolution and screw lead (F code)
Minimum setting unit: mm/rev or inch/rev
Highprecision screw lead (E code)
Minimum setting unit: mm/rev or inch/rev
Least input increment of dwell time (sec)

37
Number of decimal digits of the Z axis minimum setting

unit
Number of decimal digits of the X axis minimum setting
unit
Number of decimal digits of the Yaxis minimum setting
unit
Number of decimal digits of the minimum setting unit of
feed per
er revolution and screw lead (F code)
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1034
Integer
mm specification
inch specification
B61804E2/05
Description
highprecision
high
recision screw lead (E code)
1035
Integer
Number of digits below decimal point of dwell time
1036
Integer
Setting of the number of digits below decimal point of S code. Applicable to

S 3digit and S 4digit output.
1037
Integer
1040
2
Characters
ZW
Zaxis command address

1st character: Absolute command
2nd character: Incremental command
1041
2
Characters
XU
Zaxis command address

1042
2
Characters
KK
Circular center address (Designate 2 same characters) in Zaxis direction
1043
2
Characters
II
Circular center address (Designate 2 same characters) in Xaxis direction
1044
2
Characters
FF
Feedrate and thread lead command address (Designate 2 same characters)
1045
2
Characters
EE
Highprecision thread lead command address

1st character: For normal screw
2nd character: For face screw
1046
2
Characters
UU
Dwell command address (Designate 2 same characters)
1047
2
Characters
RR
Circular radius R specification address (Designate 2 same characters)
1048
2
Characters
YV
Yaxis command address

1st character: absolute command
2nd character: incremental command
1049
2
Characters
JJ
Circular center address in Yaxis direction (designate 2 same characters)
1050
Integer
Number of turrets (1 or 2)
1 : 2spindle lathe
2 : 4spindle lathe (1 spindle/2 turrets)
1051
Integer
No.1 turret position

1 : Turret on this side
1 : Turret on the counter side
1052
Integer
No.2 turret position

1 : Turret on this side
1 : Turret on the counter side
1053
Integer
No.1 turret selection M code (1 is set, if not used)
1054
Integer
No.2 turret selection M code (1 is set, if not used)
38
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1055
Integer
1060
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Description
Setting of turret types
0 : Normal 2spindle lathe
1 : 2spindle lathe with reversible
Xaxis (Chasing tool type turret, etc.)
2 : 4spindle lathe
0, 1
10000000 Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 6
Bit 7
5
0
4
0
Specifies whether or not to output G50 at home position.

0 : Output
1 : Not output
Specifies whether or not to output the shift from home position to
index position.
0 : Output
1 : Not output
Specifies whether or not to output the shift from index position to
home position.
0 : Output
1 : Not output
Specifies whether the value is output for each axis during approach.
0 : Not output when there is no travel.
1 : Output even when there is no travel, for all axes.
In a threading process, the G code of multiple thread cutting cycle is:
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
Specifies whether or not to use G code for fixed cycle at tapping in
turning.
0 : Not use
1 : Use
1061 to
1064
Real number
1070 to
1073
Real number
1080
Integer
1.
Program number
1 : Provided
2 : Output with main program and subprogram format.
1081
Integer
Method of specifying the X and Y coordinates

0 : Radius for an X coordinate, radius for a Y coordinate
1 : Diameter for an X coordinate, radius for a Y coordinate
(standard setting)
2 : Radius for an X coordinate, diameter for a Y coordinate
3 : Diameter for an X coordinate, diameter for a Y coordinate
1082
Integer
Circular interpolation function

0 : Two or more quadrants
1 : One quadrant only
2 : Specifying radius R
3 : Specifying radius R (one quadrant only)
The addresses specified in 1042, 1043, and 1049 become the addresses of
the center on the axes.
1083
Integer
Specification of threading cycle (canned cycle G92)

1 : None
0 : Straight threading only
1 : Taper threading is possible
39
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1084
Integer
B61804E2/05
Description
Simultaneous oneaxis moving sequence (Effective when simultaneous
one axis is specified by system parameters No.0107 to 0115.)
0 : Xaxis moves first in approach, while the
Zaxis moves first in escape at all times.
1 : Inner diameter, end face
Approach: Zaxis Xaxis
Escape: Xaxis Zaxis
Outer diameter
Approach: Xaxis Zaxis
Escape: Zaxis Xaxis
2 : Reverse procedure of set values in 1 (Standard setting)
3 : Zaxis moves first in approach, while Xaxis moves first in escape at
all times.
Movement sequence of sequential approach and escape along one or two
axes if the Yaxis FAPT function is used (valid only when simultaneous
approach or escape along one or two axes is specified in system parameters
0400 to 0405)
0 : Approach is always started from the XY axes. Escape is always
started from the Zaxis.
1 : End face
Approach: Tool axis (Zaxis)
Tool path (XY plane)
Escape: Tool path (XY plane)
Tool axis (Zaxis)
Side face
Approach: Tool axis (Xaxis)
Tool path (ZY plane)
Escape: Tool path (ZY plane)
Tool axis (Xaxis)
2 : Reverse movement sequence of 1 (standard setting)
3 : Approach is always started from the Zaxis. Escape is always started
from the X, Y axes.
1085
Integer
1090
Real number
4000.
mm specification
160.
inch specification
4000.
mm specification
160.
inch specification
1.
mm specification
1.
inch specification
4000.
mm specification
160.
inch specification
1091
1092
1093
Real number
Real number
Real number
Constant surface speed control

0 : Not provided
1 : Provided (G96 directly output)
2 : Provided (G97 output, then
G96 output)
G50X_ Z_ S_ ;
G97S_M03; (Dummy rotation)
G00X_ Z_ ; (Approach)
G96SX_ ; (Constant surface speed)
40
Zaxis rapid feed rate

Unit: mm/min or inch/min
Xaxis rapid feed rate (radius value)
Unit: mm/min or inch/min
Maximum value of highprecision screw lead (E code)
((1.0
1.0 when no E code is sspecified)
ecified)
Unit: mm or inch
Yaxis rapid traverse rate
Unit: mm or inch
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1100
Integer
Number of digits of sequence number (N) command
1101
Integer
Specification of zero suppress of F code

0 : Zero suppress is done (Leading zero are not output.)
n : F code is output in n digits at all times.
1102
Integer
Number of digits of S code command number
1103
Integer
Not used
1104
Integer
Number of digits of T code tool selection number
1105
Integer
Number of digits of T code tool offset number
1106
Integer
T code value to be output after all process ends (Required for returning to a
specified tool number.
This parameter is set to 1, if this function is not required.)
1107
Integer
Decimal point input function

0 : Not provided
1 : Provided
(If this parameter is set to 1, address P is not assignable to parameter
No.1046.)
1110
Integer
1st stage selection M code in spindle revolution (1, if not used)
1111
Integer
2nd stage selection M code in spindle revolution (1, if not used)
1112
Integer
3rd stage selection M code in spindle revolution (1, if not used)
1113
Integer
4th stage selection M code in spindle revolution (1, if not used)
1114
Real number
50
Minimum spindle speed of 1st stage (rpm) (1, if not used)
1115
Real number
5000
Maximum spindle speed of 1st stage (rpm) (1, if not used)
1116
Real number
1.0
Minimum spindle speed of 2nd stage (rpm) (1, if not used)
1117
Real number
1.0
Maximum spindle speed of 2nd stage (rpm) (1, if not used)
1118
Real number
1.0
Minimum spindle speed of 3rd stage (rpm) (1, if not used)
1119
Real number
1.0
Maximum spindle speed of 3rd stage (rpm) (1, if not used)
1120
Real number
1.0
Minimum spindle speed of 4th stage (rpm) (1, if not used)
1121
Real number
1.0
Maximum spindle speed of 4th stage (rpm) (1, if not used)
1122
Real number
0.01
Change ratio of S code output
1130
Integer
M code value in normal revolution of spindle (1, if not used)
1131
Integer
M code value in reverse revolution of spindle (1, if not used)
1132
Integer
M code value in spindle stop (1, if not used)
1133
Integer
M code value with coolant on (1, if not used)
1134
Integer
M code value with coolant off (1, if not used)
1135
Integer
30
M code value in program end (1, if not used)
1136
Integer
Output M01 at completing a process. When 1 is set, it is not output.
Description
41
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1137
Integer
98
M code for subprogram call (1, if not used)
1138
Integer
99
M code for subprogram end (1, if not used)
1139
Integer
1140
Integer value
M code for override cancel ON (for the balance cut FAPT, type B) (When not
in use: 1)
1141
Integer value
M code for override cancel ON (for the balance cut FAPT, type B) (When not
in use: 1)
1142
Integer
M code for clockwise rotation of the 2nd spindle (for back machining)
(Not used: 1)
1143
Integer
M code for counterclockwise rotation of the 2nd spindle (for back machining)
(Not used: 1)
1144
Integer
Cannot be used. (Do not change the data.)
1145
Integer
M code for starting back machining (Not used: 1)
1146 to
1149
Integer
Cannot be used. (Do not change the data.)
1200
Integer
Rapid traverse G code
1201
Integer
Cutting feed G code
1202
Integer
Circular interpolation (CW) G code
1203
Integer
Circular interpolation (CCW) G code
1204
Integer
32
Threading G code
1205
Integer
92
Canned cycle G code
1206
Integer
90
Not used
1207
Integer
94
Not used
1210
Integer
97
Constant surface speed control off G code
1211
Integer
96
Constant surface speed control on G code
1220
Integer
Absolute command mode G code
1221
Integer
Incremental command mode G code
1222
Integer
G code for metric input
1223
Integer
G code for inch input
1224
Integer
Not used
1225
Integer
Not used
1230
Integer
40
Tool nose radius compensation cancel G code
1231
Integer
41
Tool nose radius compensation (left side) start G code
1232
Integer
42
Tool nose radius compensation (right side) start G code
Description
42
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1240
Integer
Dwell G code
1241
Integer
28
Not used
1242
Integer
29
Not used
1243
Integer
30
Not used
1244
Integer
50
Coordinate system setting G code
1245
Integer
70
Not used
1246
Integer
71
Not used
1247
Integer
72
Not used
1248
Integer
73
Not used
1249
Integer
74
Not used
1250
Integer
75
Not used
1251
Integer
76
Not used
1252
Integer
54
First spindle side workpiece coordinate system select G code
1253
Integer
55
Second spindle side workpiece coordinate system select G code
1260
Integer
98
Per minute feed G code
1261
Integer
99
Per revolution feed G code
1262
Integer
G code for return to the initial point (only for 5E00, 5710 series)
1300
Two characters
CH
Caxis command address

1301
Real number
0.001
1302
Integer
1303
Real number
4000.
1304
0, 1
00000011
Description
Caxis lease input increment (Deg)

No. of digits to the right of decimal point of Caxis least input increment.
Caxis rapid traverse rate (Deg/min)
Drilling canned cycle in each process (Caxis/Yaxis)
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
Drilling
Center drilling
1305
Specified with 0 or
1 (8 bits)
00000000 Bit 7
0
Bit 0
Bit 1
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
IN front notching, finishing of Yaxis pattern machining, and

contouring, cutter compensation is carried out by:
0 : FAPT (G40, G41, and G42 are not output.)
1 : NC (G40, G41, and G42 are output.)
Specifies whether the radius command for cylindrical interpolation is
output with a decimal point.
0 : No decimal point
1 : With a decimal point
43
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1306
Integer
Method of Caxis control

0 : Servo motor control method
1 : Spindle positioning method
1307
Integer
When controlled axes are simultaneous 2 axes.

0 : XZ axes are simultaneous 2 axes.
1 : XCaxis or ZCaxis are simultaneous 2 axes.
1308
Integer
Command method at the time of spindle positioning

0 : Half fixation angle indexing
1 : Arbitrary angle indexing
1309
Real number
1.
mm specification
0.01
inch specification
mm specification
inch specification
1310
Integer
Description
Feed rate (feed per minute)

Minimum setting unit: mm or inch
feed rate per
er minute
1311
Real number
0.01
No use
1312
Integer
No use
1313
Integer
M code of forward tool rotation
1314
Integer
M code of reverse tool rotation
1315
Integer
Milling start M code
1316
Integer
Cutting start M code
1317
Integer
Orientation M code
1318
Integer
Spindle positioning release M code
1319
Integer
Spindle indexing M code
1320
Real
1321
Real number
29
M code for preparation of rigid tapping (Only 5700 series. 1 for other series)
1322 to
1339
Integer
1340
Integer
Specifies whether the Caxis is parallel to the X or Yaxis.

0 : Xaxis
1 : Yaxis
1341
Integer
Specifies the number of decimal places of data specified for the Caxis.
0 : That specified in the least input increment for the Xaxis in MTF 1030
1 : That specified in the least input increment for the Zaxis in MTF 1031
1342
0, 1
designation (8 bit)
Undefined Indexing angle
1343
1344 to
1349
Integer
1350
Integer
(8 digit)
29
M code of the miscellaneous function for preparing for rigid tapping (valid for
series except 5700 series)
44
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1351
Integer
68
1352
Integer
69
1353
Integer
Cutting along the X axis in the interpolation rigid tapping cycle
1354
Integer
Cutting along the Y axis in the interpolation rigid tapping cycle
1355
Integer
Tool calling M code
1360
Integer
83.
Drilling cycle dwell off Front face
1376
Integer
85.
Boring cycle Front face
1377
Integer
89.
Boring cycle Side face
1380
Integer
107.
Cylindrical interpolation start/cancel
1381
Integer
112.
Polar coordinate interpolation start
1382
Integer
113.
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel
1383
Integer
384
G code for an interpolation rigid tapping cycle
1384
Integer
380
G code for canceling an interpolation rigid tapping cycle
1390
Integer
Output format of canned cycle R code

0 : absolute,
1 : incremental
1391
1
characters
Canned cycle repetitive code
1392
2
characters
RR
II
Address specifying the difference in radius of the thread for a multiple thread
cutting cycle (High order: 5710, low order 5E00)
1393
2
characters
PP
KK
Address specifying the thread height for a multiple thread cutting cycle (High
order: 5710, low order 5E00)
1394
2
characters
QQ
DD
Address specifying the depth of the first cut for a multiple thread cutting cycle
(High order: 5710, low order 5E00)
1395
2
characters
PP
AA
Address specifying a tool angle for a multiple thread cutting cycle (High order:
5710, low order 5E00)
1396
2
characters
PP
PP
Address specifying the cutting method for a multiple thread cutting cycle
1397
2
characters
RR
RR
Address specifying a finishing allowance for a multiple thread cutting cycle

Description
NOTE
Parameter numbers other than listed above may also
appear on the CRT. These parameters are employed the
system.
Dont change them.
45
A. SETTING DATA,
A.4
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
FUNCTION TABLE
(MTF 2000S)
The parameter numbers 2000s of the MTF (Machine Tool File) are used
as a function table to be referred to when NC data is prepared by the
Symbolic FAPT. When a parameter number of 2000s is referred to, NC
data of the format in accordance with the function code set therein is
prepared. The format of NC data can be altered by changing the function
code to be set in and after the parameter number 2000.
A.4.1
Each parameter in and after the MTF parameter number 2000 is provided
with the following meaning:
Outline
NOTE
For details of the parameters to be referenced by the Yaxis
FAPT function, see Part IX.
Parameter No.
Meaning
Remarks
2000
The leader part of NC data is prepared.
FEED, EOR, program No., etc.
2001
The trailer part of NC data is prepared.
M30, EOR, etc.
2002
The beginning part of center drilling process
2003
The beginning part of drilling process
2004
The beginning part of rough machining process
2005
The beginning part of medium finish machining process
2006
The beginning part of finish machining process
2007
The beginning part of grooving process
2008
The beginning part of threading process
2009
The end part of center drilling process
Tool offset cancel, M01, etc.
2010
The end part of drilling process
2011
The end part of rough machining process
2012
The end part of medium finish machining process
2013
The end part of finish machining process
2014
The end part of grooving process
2015
The end part of threading process
2016
Setting of coordinate system and output of tool selection T code G50, Txxxx, etc.
2017
Output of rapid traverse, cutting feed move command block
G01 X_ Z_ F_ ;
2018
Output of approach two axes at a time move command block
Rapid traverse
coolant ON, etc.
move
command,
2019
Output of relief two axes at a time move command block
Rapid traverse move

coolant OFF, etc.
command,
2020
Output of circular interpolation move command block
In case of I or K command.
46
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter No.
A. SETTING DATA,
Meaning
Remarks
2021
Output of circular interpolation move command block
In case of radius R command.
2022
Threading command block output
Tapping process retapping command

when threading cycle is not used and
MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 0
2023
Output of threading cycle command block
In case of the threading cycle used.
2024
Output of spindle speed command block
rpm command
2025
Output of spindle range changeover block
The spindle range is changed over.
2026
Output of a threading command block
When no threading cycle is used
2027
Output of dwell command block
2028
Constant surface speed control ON
2029
Unused.
2030
Output of spindle maximum speed clamp value command block
2031
1st motion for approach in one axis at a time
2032
2nd motion for approach in one axis at a time
2033
1st motion for return relief in one axis at a time
2034
2nd motion for return relief in one axis at a time
2035
Starting part of cuttingoff processing
2036
Starting part of bar feed processing
2040
End section of cuttingoff processing
Tool offset cancel, MDI, etc.
2041
End section of bar feed processing
Tool offset cancel, MDI, etc.
2045
Output of a specific cedeFor model TT only
For model TT only
2046
Simultaneous 2axis approach move command of bar feed
M05;
G00X_ Z_ ; etc.
2047
Simultaneous 1axis approach 1st motion
M05;
G00X_ ; etc.
2048
Simultaneous 1axis approach 2nd motion
M05;
G00Z_ ; etc.
2049
Move command to the work gripping position in bar feed
G98G01Z_ F_ ; or
G98G01X_ F_ ;
2050
Dwell command when the chuck of bar feed is to be opened.
M_ ;
G04U_ ; etc.
2051
Move command for work feeding in bar feed.
G01Z_ F_ ; etc.
2052
Dwell command when the chuck of bar feed is to be closed.
M_ ;
G04U_ ;
2053
Move command 1 after work feeding in bar feed.
G01Z_F_ ; or
G01X_ F_ ;
2054
Move command 2 after work feeding in bar feed
G00Z_ ;
47
G50S_ ;
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter No.
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Meaning
Remarks
2055
Starting section for reaming
2056
Starting section for tapping
2057
Ending section for reaming
2058
Ending section for tapping
2059
Command block outputs for tapping cycle (G84) and reverse Tapping process relief cutting
tapping cycle (G84.1)
command when canned cycle is used
and MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 1
2060
Command block 1 for a multiple thread cutting cycle
2061
Command block 2 for a multiple thread cutting cycle
2065
Outputs the T code specifying tool offset for each cutting area.
TXXXX;
Outputs the T code specifying the second tool offset for grooving
2066
Block for preparing the next tool
2067
Block for cutting with balance cut B
2068
Setting of the coordinate system for turning and T code output
(Back machining)
2069
Setting of the coordinate system for milling and T code output
(Back machining)
2070
Beginning part of Yaxis machining (CAUTION 1)
2071
Beginning part of Yaxis center drilling
2072
Beginning part of Yaxis drilling
2073
Beginning part of Yaxis tapping
2074
Beginning of Yaxis pattern
2075
Beginning of Yaxis contouring
2080
Not used
2081
End part of Yaxis center drilling
2082
End part of Yaxis drilling
2083
End part of Yaxis tapping
2084
End of Yaxis pattern
2085
End of Yaxis contouring
2100
Start of main program
2101
End of main program
2102
Start of subprogram
FEED, O_ , etc.
2103
End of subprogram
M99, M30, FEED, etc.
2104
Subprogram call block
M98P_ ;
2110
Beginning of a turning process (CAUTION 2)
2111
Beginning of a milling process (CAUTION 3)
48
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter No.
Meaning
A. SETTING DATA,
Remarks
2200
Start part of Caxis machining
2201
End part of Caxis machining
2202
Setting of coordinate system for Caxis machining, Tool selection

T code output
2203
Drill cycle (G81, G82)

Command block output Part 1
G81 is output when the dwell time is 0
2204
Drill cycle (G81, G82)

G82 is output when the dwell time is

other than 0
2205
Peck drilling cycle (G83),

Highspeed peck drilling cycle (G83.1),
Machining type
2: G83.1
3: G83
2206
Peck drilling cycle (G83),

Highspeed peck drilling cycle (G83.1),
2207
Tapping cycle (G84),

Reverse tapping cycle (G84.1),
2208
Tapping cycle (G84),

Reverse tapping cycle (G84.1),
2209
2210
2211
Spindle indexing command block output
2212
Block in which cutter compensation for front milling (polar Valid when bit 7 of MTF 1305 is set to
coordinate interpolation) or finishing of Yaxis pattern/contouring 1
is started
2213
Block in which cutter compensation for front milling (polar

coordinate interpolation) or finishing of Yaxis pattern/contouring
is canceled
2214
Cylindrical interpolation start block
2215
Cylindrical interpolation cancellation block
2216
Boring cycle block (G85, G89) 1
2217
Boring cycle block 2
2220
(Only for 5900 and 5F00 systems)
2221
Start of Caxis drilling
2222
Start of Caxis tapping
2223
Start of Caxis grooving
2224
Start of Caxis notching
2225
Start of Caxis cylindrical grooving
In the case of reverse screw: G84.1 is

output
49
A. SETTING DATA,
Parameter No.
APPENDIX
Meaning
B61804E2/05
Remarks
2230
End of Caxis center drilling
2231
End of Caxis drilling
2232
End of Caxis tapping
2233
End of Caxis grooving
2234
End of Caxis notching
2235
End of Caxis cylindrical grooving
2240
Caxis interpolation tapping cycle block (1)
2241
Caxis interpolation tapping cycle block (2)
2242
Block for canceling a Caxis interpolation tapping cycle
2243
Yaxis interpolation tapping cycle block (1)
2244
Yaxis interpolation tapping cycle block (2)
2245
Block for canceling a Yaxis interpolation tapping cycle
2300
Output of the special function code
Number of codes that can be set: 10
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
CAUTION
1 Data is referenced at the beginning of Yaxis machining.
If two or more Yaxis machining processes are defined
continuously, the data is not referenced for the second or
subsequent processes.
2 The data is referenced at the beginning of a turning process.
If two or more turning processes are defined continuously,
processes.
3 The data is referenced at the beginning of a milling process.
If two or more milling processes are defined continuously,
processes. The milling process can be a Caxis machining
process or Yaxis machining process.
50
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.4.2
Function Code
A. SETTING DATA,
Hexadecimal number of 4 digits set to the MTF 2000s is called a function

code, which represents the format of NC data to be output when each
function table is referred to.
(1) Structure of Function Code
The function code of 4 digits is divided into the least significant one
digit, and the most significant three digits; the function represented by
that code is roughly classified by the least significant three digits; the
function represented by that code is roughly classified by the least
significant one digit, and the details of that function are specified by
the most significant three digits.
1
4
Function code of 4 digits
Least significant 1 digit
(major classification)
Most significant 3 digits
(detailed classification)
(2) Major Classification of Function Codes

Least significant 1 digit
of function code
Function
Special function
Output of move command
Output of G code
Output of F, S, or T code, etc.
Output of special code
Output of M code (set to MTF 1130s)
Output of special M code

(range selection or turret selection)
Output of code of value 0
Output of optional M code

(M code other than major classification 5, and 6)
Output of optional S code
Output of optional T code
Referencing of an optional function table
Canned word output
51
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(3) Detailed classification of function code

The detailed classification of function code is as follows:
(a) Special function
When the least significant 1 digit (major classification) is 0 ...
***0;
Most significant 3
digits (detailed
classification)
0
other than
(= a)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
No operation
Feed output
Remarks
Output a x 20 feeds
(b) Output of move command

***1;
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
First axis output (Z axis)
Second axis output (X axis) Address set to MTF 1041
First auxiliary output

(circular center Z axis)
Address set to MTF 1042
Second auxiliary output

(circular center X axis)
Screw lead output

(F code)
Address set to MTF 1044. However, if the setting

value of MTF 1092 is not exceeded, the output is
made with lead (E code)
Highprecision screw lead Address set to MTF 1045

(E code)
Dwell command output
Circular radius value output Address set to MTF 1047
Third axis output
Output of W0
Output is made only in the case of Z direction of

simultaneous 2 axes or simultaneous 1 axis in
approach and escape
Output of U0
Output is made only in the case of X direction of

simultaneous 2 axes or simultaneous 1 axis in
approach and escape
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1392. Thread radius
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1393. Thread height
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1394. Depth of the first cut
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1397. Finishing allowance
52
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
(c) Output of G code

***2;
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
G code output (G00) set to Output of G code of MTF 1200 1207

MTF 1200
CAUTION
G code output (G01) set to
The G code of MTF 1200 1207, MTF 1210
MTF 1201
1211, MTF 1220 1225, and MTF 1230 1232 is
model
d l managed
d for
f each
h group. Thus,
Th
when
h the
th
function code specifying these G code is referred
MTF 1202
to, the G code is output only when it is different
f
from
th
the G code
d output.
t t Al
Also, thi
this G code
d iis nott
output when 1 is set to MTF 1200 1251.
MTF 1203

MTF 1204

MTF 1205

MTF 1206

MTF 1207
G code output (G97) set to G code output of MTF 1210 1211

MTF 1210

MTF 1211

MTF 1230

MTF 1231

MTF 1232
G code output set to MTF G code output of MTF 1220 1225

1220
G code output set to MTF

1221

1222

1223

1224

1225
53
A. SETTING DATA,
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
APPENDIX
Function
B61804E2/05
Remarks

MTF 1240
CAUTION
The G code of MTF 1240 1251 is not modal
MTF 1241
managed.
Thus, when the function code
specifying
if i these
th
G code
d is
i referred
f
d to,
t the
th G code
d
is always output. Also, this G code is not output
MTF 1242
when 1 is set to MTF 1240 1251.

MTF 1243

MTF 1244

MTF 1245

MTF 1246

MTF 1247

MTF 1248

MTF 1249

MTF 1250

MTF 1251
G code set to MTF1252 or G code for selecting a back machining coordinate

MTF1253 is output
system
MTF 1200 (G00) or 1201 The G code of MTF 1200 and 1201 are output in the
(G01) is output
case of rapid traverse move and cutting feed (line),
respectively.
MTF 1202 (G02) or 1203 The G code of MTF 1202 and 1203 are output in the
(G03) is output
case of CW circular and CCW circular, respectively.
G codes of MTF 1220 and The G codes of MTF 1220 and 1221 are output in the
1221 are output
case of absolute command and incremental
command, respectively.
Output MTF 1231 (G41) or MTF 1231 for left side cutter compensation MTF 1232
1232 (G42)
for right side cutter compensation
G codes of MTF 1202 and The G codes of MTF 1203 and 1202 output in the
1203 are output
case of CW circular and CCW circular, respectively.
G codes of MTF 1222 and The G codes of MTF 1222 and 1223 are output in the
1223 are output
case of mm input and inch input, respectively.
54
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
The selected G code is XC plane: G17

output.
ZX plane: G18
CZ plane: G19
G codes of MTF 1260 and MTF 1260 at every minute feed, MTF 1261 at every
1261 are output
revolution feed
Initial point return G code is The G98 is output only in the case of B, C of G code
output
system
G81 or G82 is output
G83 or G83.1 is output
G84 or G84.1 is output
G7.1 is output.
The G code set in MTF

1381 is output.

1382 is output.

1376 and 1377 is output.
The G code (G98) set to G codes of MTF 1260 1261 are output.
MTF 1260 is output
CAUTION
The G codes of MTF 1260 1261 are modal
The G code (G99) set to
managed.
Thus, when the function code
MTF 1261 is output
specifying these G code output. Also, this G code
is not output when 1 is set to MTF 1260 1261.

MTF 1383 is output

MTF 1384 is output
The G code for cylindrical interpolation is output.
(d) Output of F, S, and T codes

***3;
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
Tool offset cancel T code It depends on the setting of process parameter of

output
system parameter whether the T code is actually
output.
T code output
Tool offset start
S code (rpm) output
It is output only when the change rate from the speed

output immediately before exceeded the setting
value of MTF 1122.
55
A. SETTING DATA,
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Function
Remarks
Maximum speed clamp It is output only when the MTF 1085 has the constant
value S code output
surface speed control function and the constant
surface speed control function is used in the process
parameter (system parameter 0108 0114).
Surface speed command S

code output
F code output
Output of program number It is not output when 0 is set to MTF 1080.
Final T code output
Output of subprogram call The subprogram number (PXXXX) is output by the

P code
subprogram call program (M98PXXXX).
R code output
For canned cycle
Q code output
For canned cycle
L code output
For canned cycle
P code output
For canned cycle
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1395. Tool angle (valid for the Series 15 only)
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1395. Tool angle (valid for the Series 16 only)
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1396. Specified cut method (valid for the
Series 15 only)
F code output
It is output only in the case of cutting feed. It is

compared with the modal value and is output only
when it is a different value.
The T code set to the MTF 1106 is output. No output

is made when 1 has been set.
Interpolation rigid tapping cycle
Outputs
the
address
specified in MTF1398
1
T code output
Interpolation rigid tapping cycle
Outputs
the
address
specified in MTF1399
1
Preparing the tool used in the first process.
B code output
Outputs
the
address
specified in MTF1400.
Preparing the tool used in the next process.
B code output
Outputs
the
address
specified in MTF1400.
T code output
Output the tool number (TN).
T code output
Output the tool offset number (TM).
56
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
(e) Output of special code

***4;
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
EOB output (;)
One block of NC data is output. However, the block

with EOB only is not output.
EOR output (%)
The EOR (%) is output.
/..... EOB output
One block of NC data with/(optional skip) is output.
NC data output
Valid for an address indicating other than the

amount of travel
NC data output cancel
Valid for an address indicating other than the

amount of travel
(f) M code output (set at the MTF 1130 1139)

***5;
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
Spindle forward revolution The M codes of MTF 1130 or 1131 are output
M code output (M03 or corresponding to the spindle revolution direction set
M04)
by the process parameter (system parameter 0108
0113) and turret position MTF 1051.
The spindle stop M code When the spindle revolution direction is reversed the
(M05) is output on spindle M05 (MTF 1132) is output. Nothing is output when the
reverse revolution
direction of revolution does not change.
Spindle stop M code output The M code set to the MTF 1132 is output. Also, the
(M05)
M03 M05 are modal managed and the M code
which is the same as the modal value is not output.
Coolant on M code output The M code of MTF 1133 is output. However, this
(M08)
applies to the coolant use process only (by
designation of process parameter).
Coolant off M code output The M code of MTF 1134 is output. Also, the M08 and
(M09)
M09 are modal managed and it is output only when
it is different from the modal value.
Program end
output (M30)
code The M code set to the MTF 1135
Optional stop
output (M01)
code The M code set to the MTF 1136
Subprogram call M code The M code set to the MTF 1137

output (M98)
Subprogram return M code The M code set to the MTF 1138

output (M99)
MTF 1139 (unused)
57
Cautions) When 1 is set to the MTF 1130 1139,

its M code is not output.
A. SETTING DATA,
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
APPENDIX
Function
B61804E2/05
Remarks
Tool calling M code
M code specified in MTF1355
Milling machining M code The M code set to the MTF 1315 and 1316. It is
or turning machining M selected by machining type.
code output
Spindle stop M code output The M code set to the MTF 1132. It is output when the
milling machining is executed from the turning
machining or the turning machining is executed from
the milling machining.
Spindle indexing M code The M code set to the MTF 1319

output
Orientation M code output
Spindle positioning release The M code set to the MTF 1318

M code output
The M code set in MTF

1321 is output.
Outputs
the
Caxis M code specified in MTF1351
clamping M code (M68).
Outputs
the
Caxis M code specified in MTF1352
unclamping M code (M69).
The M code set to the MTF 1317
(g) Output of special M code (range selection, turret selection)

***6;
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
Spindle range selection M The M code (MTF 1110 1113) corresponding to the
code
selected range is output. Also, the M code of MTF
1110 1113 is modal managed.
Turret selection M code The M code of MTF 1054 1056 is output. Currently
output (unused)
it is not used.
58
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(h) Value 0 code output

***7;
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
Z0 output
The first character

address of MTF 1040
W0 output
The second character

address of MTF 1040
X0
The first character

address of MTF 1041
U0

address of MTF 1041
R0
The first character

address of MTF 1042
R0

address of MTF 1042
R0
The first character

address of MTF 1043
R0

address of MTF 1043
F0
The first character

address of MTF 1044
F0

address of MTF 1044
F0
The first character

address of MTF 1045
F0

address of MTF 1045
C0 output
The first character

address of MTF 1300
H0 output

address of MTF 1300
59
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(i) Arbitrary M, S, T code output

When the significant 1 digit (major classification) is 8, 9, A.
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
M code value
M code output
S code value
S code output
T code value
T code output
Function
Remarks
NOTE
With the function codes of major classes 8, 9 and A, the M,
S, T code specified by the first 3 digits of the function code
is output. The value of the M, S, T code to be output is
specified by a 3digit hexadecimal number.
8: M code
9: S code
0: T code
output M, S, T code value
(hexadecimal number)
Example)
The function code to output S100 is specified as follows.
0
Indicateds that the address to be

output is S.
Expresses the value to be output
100 in a hexadecimal number.
60
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
(j) Fixed word output

The least significant 1 digit (major classification) is F ... ***F
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
0
Function
Only address characters are output
Subsequent to address characters, the

following 1word value is output.
1
to
7
to
F
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Remarks
a: ASCII code of output address
b: Output digit number

(a)
(b)
8
to
F
(b)
Subsequent to address characters, the

following 2word value is output.
b:
b8:
Total output digit number

No. of digits past the decimal point
Example 1)
If the function code is set to 503F, 0064, the following is output as NC
data output.
P100
Example 2)
Set No. MTF 2200 as follows.
2200 = 0705, 504F, 1F40, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
NC data at the Caxis machining head part is output as follows.
M98P8000;
CAUTION
1 Any other function code than those listed in this table is
undefined. Any other code than them must not be set to the
function table.
2 Difference between CC01 and 0107, between DD01 and
1107.
If the latter parameter is referred to, W0 and U0 are output
always. Besides, for the former parameter, W0 and U0 are
output only when it is the symmetry axis resulting from
division.
61
A. SETTING DATA,
A.4.3
Size of Function Table
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
The function table of MTF 2000s is fixed in size, that is, the number of
function codes which can be set for each parameter number is fixed.
The number of the function codes which can be set to MTF 2000s is equal
to the number of those displayed on the picture, and a larger number of
function codes cannot be specified any longer. When all of the allowable
number of function codes are not used, 0000 should be set to the
remaining ones.
The number of function codes which can be set to MTF 2000s is listed in
the following table.
Parameter Number of Parameter Number of Parameter Number of
No.
function
No.
function
No.
function
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
10
10
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
10
10
9
8
7
7
10
8
7
4
10
7
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
4
10
10
10
10
6
6
2040
2041
6
6
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2065
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
6
6
6
6
10
10
10
6
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
10
10
10
10
10
2110
2111
10
10
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
10
6
10
10
4
10
4
10
4
10
4
4
10
10
10
10
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
(Example)
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X
Z
C
R
P
F
G18 G99 G82
G19
62
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
Example of Setting
2000 = 0300, 0104,
FEED %
2001 = 0205, 0004,
M05 ;
2002 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2003 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2004 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2005 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2006 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2007 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2008 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2009 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2010 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2011 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2012 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2013 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2014 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2015 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2016 = 4402, 1101,
G50 X
2017 = 5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
2019 = 5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
2020 = 5202, 5102,
G90 G02
G91 G03
2021 = 5202, 5102,
G90 G92
G91 G03
2022 = 5802, 5202,
G98 G90
G99 G91
2023 = 0502, 1101,
G92 X
63
0004, 0603,
;
0
0703, 0004,
TXXXX ;
0000, 0000,
0004,
;
0505,
M30
0000,
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000

0004, 0104, 0004, 0300, 0000
;
%
;
FEED
0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000

0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
0605,
M01
0605,
M01
0605,
M01
0605,
M01
0605,
M01
0605,
M01
0605,
M01
0001,
Z
1101,
X
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0303,
Smax
0001,
Z
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0004, 0002,
;
G00
AA01, 0503,
C
F
0103, 0004
TXXXX ;
0004, 0000
;
1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000

X
Z
C
M08 ;
1101, 0001, 0000, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
X
Z
M09 ;
1101, 0001, AA01, 4401, 3301, 0503, 0004
X
Z
C
I
K
F
;
1101, 0001, AA01, 9901, 0503, 0004
X
Z
C
R
F
;
0402, 1101, 0001, 6601, 0004
G32 X
Z
F
;
E
0001, 4401, 6601, 0004, 0000
Z
I
F
;
E
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
2024 = 0002, 0105, 0004, 0006, 0004, 1002, 0203, 0005, 0004,
G00 M05 ;
MXX ;
G97 S
M03 ;
M04
2025 = 0002, 0205, 0004, 0006, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G00 M05 ;
MXX ;
2026 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2027 = 4002, 8801, 0004, 0000
G04 U
;
2028 = 0105, 0004, 0006, 0004, 1102, 0403, 0005, 0004, 0000,
M05 ;
MXX ;
G96 S
M03 ;
M04
2029 = 1002, 0203, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G97 S
;
2030 = 4402, 0303, 0004, 0000
G50 Smax ;
2031 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
C
M08 ;
G91 G01
2032 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
C
M08 ;
G91 G01
2033 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
M09 ;
G91 G01
2034 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
M09 ;
G91 G01
2035 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2036 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2040 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ;
M01 ;
2041 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ;
M01 ;
2045 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
2046 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
;
G91 G01
2047 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
;
G91 G01
2048 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
;
G91 G01
2049 = 7002, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G98 G90 G00 X
Z
F
;
G91 G01
2050 = 0000, 0000, 4002, 8801, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
G04 U
;
2051 = 7002, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G98 G90 G00 X
Z
F
;
G91 G01
2052 = 0000, 0000, 4002, 8801, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
G04 U
;
64
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
2053 = 7002, 5202, 5002,

G98 G90 G00
G91 G01
2054 = 7102, 5202, 5002,
G99 G90 G00
G91 G01
2055 = 0100, 0000, 0000,
FEED
2056 = 0100, 0000, 0000,
FEED
2057 = 0003, 0004, 0605,
TXX00 ;
M01
2058 = 0003, 0004, 0605,
TXX00 ;
M01
2059 = 5802, 6302, 1101,
G98 G84 X
G99 G84.1
1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000

X
Z
F
;
1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
X
Z
F
;
0000, 0000, 0000
0000, 0000, 0000
0004,
;
0004,
;
0001,
Z
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
R
F
;
FS15 format
2060 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2061 = 4B02, 1101, 0001, E101, E201, E301, 6601, 0D03, 0F03, 0004
G76 X
Z
I
K
D
F
A
P
;
FS16 format
2060 = 4B02, 0E03,
G76 P
2061 = 4B02, 1101,
G76 X
2065 = 0103, 0004,
TXXXX ;
2100 = 0603, 0004,
0
;
2101 = 0703, 0004,
TXXX ;
2102 = 0100, 0603,
FEED 0
2103 = 0205, 0004,
M05 ;
2104 = 0705, 0803,
M98 P
2110 = 0000, 0000,
Not used
2111 = 0000, 0000,
Not used
2200 = 0100, 0004,
FEED ;
2201 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2202 = 4402, 1101,
G50 X
2203 = 5802, 6002,
G98 G98
G99
2204 = 0004, 0000,
;
65
0E401
R
0001,
Z
0000,
0004,
;
E101,
R
0000,
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000

E201, E301, 6601, 0004, 0000, 0000
P
Q
F
;
0000, 0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000

0505,
M30
0004,
;
0805,
M99
0004,
;
0000,
0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000

;
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
0204, 0505, 0004, 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000
/;
M30 ;
FEED
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000

1105,
M05
0605,
M01
0001,
Z
6102,
G81
G82
0000,
0004, 1005,
;
MXX
0004, 0000,
;
AA01, 0004,
C
;
1101, 0001,
X
Z
0000
0004, 4102, 8107, 0004, 0000

;
G28 H0
;
0000
0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G00 TXXXX ;
AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503, 0B03
C
R
P
F
L
K
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
2205 = 5802,
G98
G99
2206 = 0004,
;
2207 = 5802,
G98
G99
2208 = 0503,
F
B61804E2/05
6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503, 0B03

G98 G83 X
Z
C
R
Q
F
L
G83.1
K
0000, 0000
6002, 6302, 1101,

G98 G84 X
G84.1
0B03, 0004, 0000
L
;
K
2209 = 0102, 5702, 0107, 8107,
G1
G17 W0 M0
G18
G19
2210 = 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000
G107 C
;
G7.1
2211 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2212 = 5202, 5002, 5302, 1101,
G90 G00 G41 X
G91 G01 G42
2213 = 5202, 5002, 2002, 1101,
G90 G00 G40 X
G91 G01
2214 = 6502, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G112 ;
G12.1
2215 = 6602, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G11.3 ;
G13.1
0001, AA01, 0903, 1505, 0203, 0005

Z
C
R
Mxx S
M03
M04
0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000

;
G107 C
;
G7.1
0001, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000

Z
C
F
;
0001, AA01, 0503, 0004, 0000, 000
Z
C
F
;
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2300 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2301 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2302 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2303 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2304 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2305 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2306 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2307 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2308 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2309 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
66
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.4.4
Reference of Function
Table
In the process of making up the NC data which commands the machinings

of (1) to (19), the parameters 2000s are referred to as follows:
Point to be Referred to
(1) Home position (start of program)
(2) Home position

Exchange point of tool
(3) Tool change point (start of process)
Parameter
No.
Description
2000
Feed, EOR, program No.
2016
G50X_ Z_ ;
2017
Move to the tool exchange point

G00X_ Z_ ;
2002 to
2008
or
2035
or
2036
In case of the beginning part of process, or rough machining of

outer diameter, 2004 is referred to.
2016
G50X_ Z_ S;
G00T_ ;
2024
or
2028
Output of spindle speed G97S_M03;

Constant surface speed ON
G97S_ M03;
67
A. SETTING DATA,
Point to be Referred to
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
B61804E2/05
Description
The first move from the tool exchange point.

Coolant ON
(4) Approach
(5) (11) (13) (15)

Linear move
(5), (10)
Spindle range switch
2018
or
2031
2032
In case the machining process except for the bar feed process
2018 is referred to for 2 axes atatime, 2031 and 2032 are
referred to for 1 axis atatime. At the same time whether it is axis
2 or axis 1, it is according to the system parameter setting No.108
115 of bit 3.
2046
or
2047
2048
In case of bar feed process 2046 is referred to for 2 axes

atatime, 2047 and 2048 are referred to for 1 axis atatime.
At the same time whether it is axis 2 or axis 1, it is according to
the system parameter setting No.107 of bit 3.
2017
Rapid traverse, cutting feed (linear) move command.
2025
2024
When constant surface speed control is not performed:

No. of spindle revolution output
2030
2025
2028
When constant surface speed control is performed

Spindle max. speed clamp
Constant surface speed ON
According to MTF 1110 to 1121 setting

(12) Circular move
2020
2021
Circular interpolation move command. 2020 is referred to when

MTF 1082 = 0, 1 (I, K command) and 2021 is referred to when
MTF 1082 = 2, 3 (radius R command).
(16) Escape
2019
2033
2034
Move command to tool exchange point. Coolant OFF. 2019 is

referred to for 2 axes atatime, 2033 and 2034 are referred to
for 1 axis atatime. At the same time whether it is axis 2 or axis
1, it is according to the system parameter setting No.107 115 of
bit 4.
2009 to
2015
or
2040
or
2041
The end part of process.

In case of outer diameter rough machining, 2011 is referred to.
TXX00; M01;
(17) Tool change point (end of process)
(18) Tool change point

Machine datum
2017
Move to home position G00 X_ Z_ ;
(19) Home position (end of program)
2001
Trailer part Spindle stop, tool offset cancel, program stop, EOR
68
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Reference of Function Table in Bar Feed Process

(Example) In the case of bar feed
1) Pullout system 1
Point referenced
Parameter
No.
Descriptions
2000
Feed, EOR, and program number
2016
G50 X_ Z_ ;
(2) Home position

Tool exchange point
2017
Movement to the tool exchange point

G0 X_ Z_ ;
(3) Tool exchange point (start of process)
2036
Start part of bar feed process
2016
Coordinate system setting and tool selection

G50 X_ Z_ S_ ;
G0 T_ ;
(4) Approach
First movement from the tool exchange point Coolant on

2046 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2047 and
2048
Simultaneous 1 axis
Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the
setting of bit 3 of system parameter No.107.
(5) Linear move
2049
Shift command to the position for grasping workpiece

G98 G1 Z_ F_ ; or
G98 G1 X_ F_ ;
69
A. SETTING DATA,
Point referenced
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
B61804E2/05
Descriptions
(6) Dwell
2050
Dwell command on opening chuck
(7) Linear move
2051
Shift command of work feed

G1 Z_ F_ ;
(8) Dwell
2052
Dwell command on closing chuck
(9) Linear move
2053
Shift command1 after work feed

G1 Z_ F_ ;
or
G1 X_ F_ ;
(10) Linear move
2054

G0 Z_ ;
(11) Escape
Shift command to tool exchange point Coolant off

2019 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2033 and
2034
Simultaneous 1 axis
(12) Tool exchange point (end of process)
2041
End part of bar feed process

TXX00 ;
M1 ;
(13) Tool exchange point

Home position
2017
Shift to the home position

G0 X_ Z_ ;
2001
Trailer part
Spindle stop and tool offset cancel
Program stop and EOR
70
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
2) Pullout system 2
Point reference
Parameter
No.
Descriptions
2000
2016
G50 X_ Z_ ;
(2) Home position

Tool exchange point
2017

G0 X_ Z_ ;
2036
2016

G50 X_ Z_ S_ ;
G0 T_ ;
(4) Approach

2046 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2047 and
2048
Simultaneous 1 axis
(5) Linear move
2049
Shift command to the position for grasping workpiece

G98 G1 Z_ F_ ;
or
G98 G1 X_ F_ ;
71
A. SETTING DATA,
Point reference
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
B61804E2/05
Descriptions
(6) Dwell
2050
Dwell command on opening chuck
(7) Linear move
2051
Shift command of work feed

G1 Z_ F_ ;
(8) Dwell
2052
Dwell command on closing chuck
(9) Linear move
2053

G1 Z_ F_ ;
or
G1 X_ F_ ;
(10) Escape

2019 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2033 and
2034
Simultaneous 1 axis
2041

TXX00 ;
M1 ;

Home position
2017

G0 X_ Z_ ;
2001
Trailer part
72
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
3) Slide stop system 1
Point referenced
Parameter
No.
Descriptions
2000
2016
G50 X_ Z_ ;
(2) Home position

Tool exchange point
2017

G0 X_ Z_ ;
2036
2016

G50 X_ Z_ S_ ;
G0 T_ ;
2024
or

G97 S_ M03 ;
2028
When constant surface speed control is performed: G96 S M3;
It follows the setting of bit 0 of system parameter number 107.
73
A. SETTING DATA,
Point referenced
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
(4) Approach
B61804E2/05
Descriptions
2024 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2027 and
2028
Simultaneous 1 axis
(5) Point referenced
2050
Dwell command when opening chuck
(6) Linear move
2051
Shift command to work feed

G1 Z_ F_ ;
(7) Dwell
2952
Dwell command when closing chuck
(8) Linear move
2054
Shift command after work feed 2

G0 Z_ ;
(9) Escape

2019 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2033 and
2034
Simultaneous 1 axis
2041

TXX00 ;
M1 ;

Home position
2017

G0 X_ Z_ ;
2001
Trailer part
74
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
4) Slide stop system 2
Point referenced
Parameter
No.
Descriptions
2000
2016
G50 X_ Z_ ;
(2) Home position

Tool exchange point
2017

G0 X_ Z_ ;
2036
2016

G50 X_ Z_ S_ ;
G0 T_ ;
2024
or

G97 S_ M3 ;
2028
When constant surface speed control is performed:

G96 S_ M3;
It follows the setting of bit 0 of system parameter number 107.
(4) Approach

2024 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2027 and
2028
Simultaneous 1 axis
75
A. SETTING DATA,
Point referenced
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
B61804E2/05
Descriptions
(5) Dwell
2050
Dwell command when opening chuck
(6) Dwell
2052
Dwell command when closing chuck
(7) Escape

2019 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2033 and
2034
Simultaneous 1 axis
2041

TXX00 ;
M1 ;

Home position
2017

G0 X_ Z_ ;
2001
Trailer part
Reference of Function Table in Caxis Machining Process

(Example) In the case of C axis drilling
76
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Point referenced
Parameter
No.
A. SETTING DATA,
Descriptions
2000
2016
G50 X_ Z_ ;
(2) Home position

Tool exchange point
2017

G0 X_ Z_ ;
2200
Start part of process (NOTE 1)
2202

G50 X_ Z_ C_ S_ ;
G0 T_ ;
2024
Tool speed command

G97 S_ M?? ;
(4) Approach

In the case of servo motor control system
2018 or
Simultaneous 3 axes
2031 and
2032
Simultaneous 2 axes, Simultaneous 1 axis

Select the Simultaneous 3 axes, 2 axes, or 1 axis depending on
the setting of bit 3 and 4 of system parameter numbers 300 to 304.
In the case of spindle positioning system
2031
2032
Simultaneous 2 axes and Simultaneous 1 axis (CAUTION 1) and

(CAUTION 2)
2211
Spindle identification command (NOTE 2)
CAUTION
1 Set the simultaneous 1 axis or simultaneous 2 axes (XZ
C).
2 Never set the function code of AA01 (Caxis shift
command).
NOTE
1 If the Caxis machining process has been defines
continuously, the second process and thereafter cannot be
referenced.
2 Perform the shift command of Caxis.
77
A. SETTING DATA,
Point referenced
(5) (9)
Line or rotation shift
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
B61804E2/05
Descriptions
In the case of MTF No.1304 bit 1 = 0 (when no drilling canned cycle is used)
2017
Rapid traverse and cutting feed (line or rotation) shift commands

2017
Rapid traverse and cutting feed (line) shift commands. Spindle

identification comman
2211
In the case of MTF No.1304 bit 1 = (the drilling canned cycle is used)
2203 to
2206
Drilling canned cycle command (line or rotation shift)

2203 to
2206
2211
(10) Escape
Drilling canned cycle command (Linear move)
Spindle identify command

2019 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2033 and
2034
Simultaneous 1 axis
setting of bit 5 of system parameter No.300 to 304.
2201
End part of process

TXX00 ;
M1 ;

Home position
2017

G0 _ Z ;
2001
Trailer part
78
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(Example) In the case of face milling
Point reference
Parameter
No.
Descriptions
2000
2016
G50 X_ Z_ ;
(2) Home position

Tool exchange point
2017

G0 X_ Z_ ;
2200
Start part of process (NOTE 1)
2202

G50 X_ Z_ C_ S_ ;
G0 T_ ;
2024
Spindle speed command

G97 S_ M?? ;
(4) Approach
First move from the tool exchange point Coolant on

2018 or
Simultaneous 3 axes
2031 and
2032
Simultaneous 2 axes, Simultaneous 1 axis

Select the Simultaneous 3 axes, 2 axes, or 1 axis depending on
the setting of bit 3 and 4 of system parameter No.304.
(5), (7), (10), and (12)

Linear move
2017
Rapid traverse and cutting feed (line) shift commands (NOTE 2)
79
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
NOTE
1 When the Caxis machining process has been continuously
defined, the second process and thereafter are not
referenced.
2 The polar coordinate interpolation is started before the point
(5) of line shift.
Point referenced
(6), (8), (9), and (10)
Circular move
Parameter
No.
2020 or
2021
(13) Escape
Description
Circular interpolation shift command (NOTE 3)
MTF 1082 = 0, 1 (I and J commands)
MTF 1082 = 2, 3 (Radius R command)
2019 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2033 and
2034
Simultaneous 1 axis
2201
End part of process

TXX00 ;
M1 ;

Home position
2017

G0 X_ Z_ ;
2001
Trailer part
NOTE
3 Cancel the polar coordinate interpolation after the point (11)
of circular shift
80
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Output of NC data for use in tapping processing

1) When MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 1, an NC format with the G codes for
a canned cycle is output.
1 or 0
1060
1
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
In this case the NC format output will conform to the settings of MTF
2059.
2059=5702, 5802, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000
G17 G98 G84 X
Z
R
F
;
G18 G99 G84.1
G19
With the above setting the tapping processing NC format output would
be G17 G99 G84 Z_ R_ F_ ;
2) When MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 0, an NC format with the G codes for
a threading processing is output.
1 or 0
1060
0
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
In this case the NC format output will conform to the settings of MTF
2022 for retapping and MTF 2059 for relief cutting.
2022=5802, 5202, 0402, 1101, 0001, 6601, 0004
G98 G90 G32 X
Z
F
;
G99 G91
E
2059=0205, 0004, 0001, 0005, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M05 ;
Z
M04 ;
M03
With the above settings the tapping operation NC format output would be
either:
(1) Where spindle rotation direction ... SD = 0 (forward rotation)
G97 S_ M03;
.
.
G99 G32 Z_ F_ ; . . . . . retapping
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stop spindle
Z_ M04; . . . . . . . . . . . . return relief
In contrast,
(2) Where spindle rotation direction ... SD = 1 (reverse rotation)
G97 S_ M04;
.
.
G99 G32 Z_ F_ ; . . . . . retapping
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stop spindle
Z_ M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . return relief
81
A. SETTING DATA,
A.4.5
Referencing an
Optional Function
Table
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameters MTF 2300 to MTF 2399 are listed in the function table
specifying special function codes. Special NC data items can be output
to any block according to the table.
(1) Function table specifying special function codes
Parameter No.
Meaning
Remarks
2300
Output of special Maximum number of the codes that can

function codes
be specified: 10
2301
Same as above
Same as above
2303
Same as above
Same as above
2304
Same as above
Same as above
2305
Same as above
Same as above
2306
Same as above
Same as above
2307
Same as above
Same as above
2308
Same as above
Same as above
2309
Same as above
Same as above
(2) Function code

The following function code is added to reference the optional
function table:
(a) Referencing the optional function table
3 highorder
1 loworder
digits
digit
(detailed
(major
classification) classification)
0
82
Function
The function table specified by

the 1word hexadecimal number
listed in the following table is
referenced to output NC data.
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
When the loworder digit (major classification) of the function code is E,

the subsequent 1word hexadecimal numbers correspond to the
parameters in the function table as follows:
No. of parameter in
the function table
1word
setting
2000
2001
2002 to
2008
2009 to
2015
2016
2017 and
2018
2019
2020 and
2021
High order
00
01
02
03
04
05
05
06
Low order
00
00
00 to 06
00 to 06
00
04
00 and 01
2002
2023
2024 and
2025
2026
2027
2028 to
2030
2031 and
2032
2033 and
2034
High order
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
05
05
Low order
00
00
00 and 01
00
00
00 to 02
2035 and
2036
2040 and
2041
2045 to
2054
2055 and
2056
2057 and
2058
2059
2100 to
2104
2200
High order
0E
0F
10
02
03
16
0D
11
Low order
00 to 02
00 to 02
00 to 09
00
00 to 04
00
2201
2202
2203 to
2210
2211
2212 to
2213
2300 to
2309
High order
12
13
14
15
05
17
Low order
00
00
00 to 07
00
07 and 08
00 to 09
No. of parameter in
the function table
1word
setting
No. of parameter in
the function table
1word
setting
No. of parameter in
the function table
1word
setting
07 and 08 07 and 08
83
02 and 03 05 and 06
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
The meanings of the highorders bits of the specified word for referencing
the optional function table are as follows.
00: LEADER PART
01: TRAILER PART
02: PROCESS START
03: PROCESS END
04: FROM
05: LINEAR INTERPOLATION
06: CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
07: THREAD CUTTING
08: THREAD CUTTING CYCLE
09: SPINDLE
0A: TURRET
0B: DWELL
0C: CSS CONTROL (spindle control)
0D: SUB PROGRAM (start and end of a subprogram)
0E: SPECIAL PROC. START
0F: SPECIAL PROC. END
10: BAR FEED MOTION
11: CAXIS PROCESS START
12: CAXIS PROCESS END
13: CAXIS PROCESS FROM
14: CAXIS PROCESS FIXED CYCLE
15: SPINDLE OPERATION
16: FIXED CYCLE FOR LATHE
17: OPTIONAL BLOCK OUTPUT Newly added
(3) Setting example
Example 1) G65P1000L1;
M1;
Assume that the above NC data for a miscellaneous machining call and
optional stop is output to the next block after block number 0.
Specify the following for the MTF function table:
MTF 2000= 0300, 0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 000E, 1700, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED %
;
0
:
MTF2300
MTF 2300= 472F, 0041, 504F, 03E8, 4C1F, 0001, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000
G
65
P
1000 L
1
;
M1 ;
The following special NC data be output:

%;
O
G65P1000L1;
M1;
84
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
Example 2
When the following is specified, another function table can be
referenced from the referenced function table.
MTF 2000= 0300, 0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 000E, 1700, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED %
;
0
:
MTF2300
MTF 2300= 0605, 0004, 000E, 1701, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,0000
M01 ;
MTF2301
MTF 2301= 000A, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
T0000 ;
(4) Notes
NOTE
Do not have a table reference itself. Also, do not reference
the referencing table again from the referenced table.
If a table is referenced in this way, the output of the same
function table continues until memory is full, then the
following message is output and processing stops.
WARNING! CHECK INPUT DATA
When this message is displayed, check and correct the
function table and output the NC data again.
Example 1)
Setting in which a table references itself
MTF 2300= 0605, 0004, 000E, 1701, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M01 ;
MTF2300
The table references itself.
Example 2)
Setting in which a referencing table is referenced again from the
referenced table
MTF 2300= 0605, 0004, 000E, 1701, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M01 ;
MTF2301
MTF 2301= 0028, 0004, 000E, 1702, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M02 ;
MTF2302
MTF 2302= 0038, 0004, 000E, 1700, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M03 ;
MTF2300
The referencing table is referenced
again from the referenced table.
85
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.5
ERROR MESSAGES
A.5.1
Errors Common to All
Screens
Message
CAN
NOT
FUNCTION
USE
Meaning
Remedy
THIS A certain function can not be used because

of incorrect using condition.
DATA IS NOT CORRECT
An error is included in any one of input data. The data indicated by the cursor includes an
error. Input correct data.
KEY IN AGAIN
Input data is wrong.
Input correct data for each question.
KEY IN DATA
Necessary data is not entered.
Input correct data for each question.
LACK OF NECESSARY DATA Necessary data is not set.
Set necessary data.
SYSTEM PROGRAM ERROR Program fails due to any reason.
Reexamine the program.
THIS IS A NULL AND VOID Invalid soft key is pressed.

KEY NOW.
(Example) ELEMENT DELETE soft key is
pressed to delete the start point element
during setting of multiple face milling figure.
(The start point element can not be deleted
according to the specification.)
WARNING! CHECK INPUT 1) Incremental command is continued for 1) Specify an absolute value halfway not to
DATA
over 50 elements at defining a part figure.
continue an incremental value for over 50
elements.
2) Program fails due to any reason.
2) Reexamine the program.
86
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
A.5.2
Errors at Defining
Figures (Menu 2)
Message
Meaning
Remedy
END POINT OR GROOVE At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, Check the end point or the groove direction.
DIRECTION
IS
NOT an error exists at the end point or in the
CORRECT!
groove direction and the figure can be
correctly defined.
END POINT OR NECK At the entry of neck corner, an error exists Check the end point value or neck width.
WIDTH IS NOT CORRECT!
and in the end point value specification or the
neck width and the figure can not be correctly
defined.
END POINT,
QUANTITY
CORRECT!
PITCH OR At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, Check the end point, pitch or quantity
IS
NOT any one of the end point, pitch or quantity is
incorrect.
GROOVE WIDTH OR PITCH At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, Increase the pitch value to larger than the
IS NOT CORRECT!
the pitch value is smaller than the groove groove width.
width.
KEY IN REPEAT NO.
Figure elements are tried to copy without Input the repetition number.
entering the repetition number.
LAST ELEMENT IS NOT At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove,

ARROW!
the last element is not the arrowed element.
LAST
END
UNDEFINED!
POINT
IS Pattern figure is tried to enter before the end Set the end point of the last element.
point value of the last element is defined.
THE
LAST
FIGURE At setting multiple face milling figures, the Define the end point value of the last figure,
ELEMENT HAS NO END end point value of the last figure is not then input the next figure data.
POINT.
defined.
TOO
MANY
SYMBOL
ELEMENT 1) At the entry of part figure, the number of Decrese the number of elements.
external elements exceeds the limited
number.
2) At the entry of part figure, the number of
internal elements exceeds the limited
number.
87
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.5.3
Errors at Machining
Definition (Menu 4) and
NC Data Preparation
(Menu 5)
Message
Meaning
Remedy
ERROR!! I CANT RUN ANY

FURTHER.
CHECK THE DEFINED TOOL
OR CUTTING AREA.
Normal machining fails because of incorrect Reexamine the machining definition.

definition of cutting area, tool to be used, etc.
(Refer to CHAPTER VII, 2.11 Error when NC
data is prepared.)
ERROR!! NOT EDIT
Machining process is not edited on TTF

process edit screen.
FINISH ALLOWANCE IS NOT Zero or a negative value is ontered as a Input a positive value.
finishing allowance in face milling.
CORRECT.
INPUT A POSITIVE DATA.
REGISTER
ERROR
PROGRAM NC data cannot be stored in the NC

machining memory because of any one of
the following reasons.
1) The program No. is already stored in the
NC machining memory.
2) The NC machining memory capacity is
insufficient.
3) Key signal does not go up. (Protected)
4) Background edit function is used by the
system other than FAPT.
1) Delete the program No. (NC data) stored

in the machining memory, or change the
program No.
2) Delete unnecessary programs to make a
space.
3) Go up the key signal.
4) Stop the other systems use of
background edit function, or wait until that
system ends using the background edit
function.
A.5.4
Errors at Animation
Drawing (Menu 6)
Message
Meaning
Remedy
INTERFERENCE
ALARM During checking NC data by using the Recheck the NC data.
(HD1 & CHUCK/TAIL STOCK) animation drawing function, interference
occurs between the turret 1 and the chuck or
tail stock.
INTERFERENCE
ALARM During checking NC data by using the Recheck the NC data.
(HD2 & CHUCK/TAIL STOCK) animation drawing function in FS15TTF,
interference occurs between the turret 1 and
the chuck or tail stock.
INTERFERENCE
(HD1 & HD2)
ALARM During checking NC data by using the Recheck the NC data, or modify the NC
animation drawing function in FS15TTF, data, by using the automatic collision
interference occurs between the tools of the preventive function (option).
turrets 1 and 2.
88
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
A.5.5
Errors at Accessing
the Submemory
Message
Meaning
Remedy
FILE MEMBER OVERFLOW
Files are tried to store exceeding the Delete unnecessary

submemory capacity.
necessary files.
files,
then
FILE OVERFLOW
1) The submemory is used over 100%.

1) Delete the files stored in the
submemory, then store necessary files.
2) One program becomes too large to store
in the main memory file area.
2) Delete the figure elements and
machining processes to make the
program small.
IF YOU WANT TO REPLACE Protected file is tried to delete.

THIS
FILE,
KEY
IN
PASSWARD PLEASE.
Contact the machine tool builder.
IF YOU WANT TO REPLACE Protected file is tried to replace.

THIS
FILE,
KEY
IN
PASSWARD PLEASE.
Contact the machine tool builder.
NOT FOUND FILE

SAME
FILE
REGISTERED
store
Specified file is not found in calling the file

name from the submemory.
ALREADY The file name tried to store in the Change the file name, or delete the same
submemory has already been stored.
name file.
SUB
MEMORY
INITIALIZED
NOT Submemory is disturbed.
Initialize the submemory.
89
A. SETTING DATA,
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.5.6
Others
Message
Meaning
COLLATING ERROR
(M: MEMORY I: INPUT)
ILLEGAL FORMAT
DETECTED
Remedy
The data read from an external unit is

collated with the data on the main memory,
but not matched.
DATA The data input from an external unit is

different from the specified format.
I/O NOT READY
Input/output unit is not prepared. The

following reasons are considerable.
1) The unit is not powered.
2) Baud rate is incorrect.
3) In the case of reading from a cassette
tape, a reading file is not recorded on the
tape.
LOCKED PARAMETER
Data is tried to enter a locked parameter.
NOT FOUND ID. NO.
When the tool information contents are Check the tool ID No.
copied, the tool ID No. specified as a copy
source is not found.
THIS TOOL HAS ALREADY At tooling one by one on the tooling data
REGISTERED
screen, the tool ID No. already tooled is
specified.
TV ERROR INCLUDING
TV error is included in the read tape.
90
B. RESTRICTIONS ON EACH SYSTEM
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
RESTRICTIONS ON EACH SYSTEM
The following tables list the functions and parameters not supported by
the models/series.
Model
Series
FANUC Series 16TA CAP II

5700
FANUC Series 16TTA CAP II
(1) Unsupported functions

Heading
Unsupported function
III 3.2.2 Part figure input (Input method with Trapezoidal groove definition
figure)
III 3.2.6 Batch input functions for chamfering Corner R batch input
and corner R
III 3.2.7 Pattern figure input function
Corner necking (*1)
III 3.2.8 Function for defining the center of an All functions

arc according to a given single
coordinate
III 3.4
Machining Definition
All functions (*2)
III 3.5.6 Outputting the NC data of a multiple All functions

thread cutting cycle
III 5.1
Balance Cutting Process
Tool specification method (*3)
IV 2.5
File Data Input/Output Function
All functions
VII 1.13 Outputting NC data in the FS 15/16 All functions

Format
VIII 1.4 Milling in Multiple Planes
All functions
VIII 1.5 CAxis Machining with a Machining All functions

Plane Specified
VIII 2.
MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4) All functions (*2)
AUTOMATIC
PROCESS All functions (*4)
IX
YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
All functions
*1 The automatic thread depth specification function for corner type 3 cut
by necking (necking for threads) is not supported.
*2 Menu 4 (machining definition) has a different definition screen layout.
See Appendix B.1 for details.
91
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
*3 Balance cutting uses different tool specification methods. See

Appendix B.1 for details.
*4 Details of the automatic process determination function vary. See
Appendix B.1 for details.
(2) Setting data
The setting data has been changed because the automatic process
determination function has been improved. See Appendix B.2 for
details.
(3) System parameters
It is impossible to use the parameters that cannot be specified under
Data setting and the parameters listed below, although they are
described in the manual.
Parameter No.
Data type
0671
Integer
Description
Machining area (CAF) drawing color
0702
0, 1
Bit 5
2nd clearance of inner process is

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
0703
0, 1
Bit 7
For the automatic process determination function, use of a drill bit with the
same diameter as the bore is
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
0704
0, 1
Bit 3
Tool offset T code on each cutting area

0 : Not output
1 : Output
2nd tool offset T code before sub cutting of grooving
0 : Not output
1 : Output
On the machining definition screen, a blank figure (BWP) is
0 : Not filled in
1 : Filled in
On the machining definition screen, a machining area (CAF) is
0 : Not filled in
1 : Filled in
Bit 4
Bit 6
Bit 7
0705
0, 1
Bit 6
When another module requests the right to use graphics exclusively

during simulated machining, the right is
0 : Not relinquished
1 : Relinquished
0708
0, 1
Bit 4
The material and tooling information input/output format is

0 : Binary
1 : ISO/EIA
92
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(4) It is impossible to use the MTFs that cannot be specified under Data
setting, the MTFs described in VII 1.13, and the MTFs listed below,
although they are described in the manual.
Parameter numbers 2000 to 2999
Parameter No.
Description
2209
Beginning of cylindrical interpolation
2210
2214
2215
Function code
Function
code
6
Function
Remark
G7.1 is output.
G code for cylindrical interpolation is output.
93
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.1
MACHINING
DEFINITION FOR
5700 SERIES
B.1.1
Following is the configuration which defines the machining process.
Machining Definition of
Turning
94
B61804E2/05
B.1.1.1
APPENDIX
soft key 4 in the menu screen.
Selection of kinds of
machining
Fig. B.1.1.1 (a)
The major types of machining required for machining are displayed on the
soft keys below the screen as shown above.
Press CENTER HOLE: the soft key display changes to the menu for
center hole drilling. (See Fig. B.1.1.1 (b)).
Press TURN: the soft key display changes to the menu for turning. See
Fig. B.1.1.1 (c).
Press GROOV THREAD: the soft key display changes to the menu for
grooving and thread cutting. See Fig. B.1.1.1 (d).
Press CAXIS: the soft key display changes to the menu for Caxis
machining. See Fig. B.1.1.1 (e).
at the leftmost end under the conditions shown in Fig.
Press key
B.1.1.1 (b) to (e) above, and the soft key display shown in Fig. B.1.1.1
(a) above is selected.
Press key
at the rightmost end: the soft key display changes in the
following sequence:
(b)(c)(d)(e)(b) ....
Fig. B.1.1.1 (b)
[CENTER DRILL] . . .
[DRILLING] . . . . . . . .
[REAMER] . . . . . . . . .
[TAP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . .
95
Press this key for center drilling

Press this key for drilling
Select to perform reaming
Select to perform tapping
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Fig. B.1.1.1 (c)
[ROUGH O.D.] . . . .
[SFIN O.D.] . . . . . .
[FIN O.D.] . . . . . . . .
[ROUGH I.D.] . . . . .
[SFIN I.D.] . . . . . . .
[FIN I.D.] . . . . . . . . .
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . .
Press this key for roughing of outer figure

Press this key for semifinishing of outer figure
Press this key for finishing of outer figure
Press this key for roughing of inner figure
Press this key for semifinishing of inner figure
Press this key for finishing of inner figure
Fig. B.1.1.1 (d)
[GROOVE NECK] . . . Press this key for grooving (rough grooving or

rough grooving and finishing are carried out by
a single tool) or necking.
[ROUGH GROOVE] . . Press this key for rough grooving
[FIN GROOVE] . . . . . Press this key for grooving finishing
[CUT OFF] . . . . . . . . . Press this key for corner cutting (When the
system parameter No.140 is 0, this soft key is
not displayed.)
[THREADING] . . . . . . Press this key for thread cutting
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . . Press this key for sub cycle
Fig. B.1.1.1 (e)
[CAXIS C.DRIL] . . . Press this key for Caxis center drilling

[CAXIS DRILL] . . . . Press this key for Caxis drilling
[CAXIS TAP.] . . . . . . Press this key for Caxis tapping
[CAXIS GROOV.] . . . Press this key for Caxis grooving
[CAXIS F.MILL] . . . . Press this key for face milling
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . . Press this key for sub sycle
[CAXIS S.MILL] . . . Press this key for cylindrical grooving
For example, press Rough O.D. when the soft key in Fig. B.1.1.1 (c)
is displayed; Roughing of outer figure will have been selected in
process No.1.
96
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
B.1.1.2
Process change and
correction
Fig. B.1.1.2 (a)
When Menu No.4 is selected again after completion of machining

definition, the screen shown above will appear.
[NEW] . . . . . . . . . . . Press this key when reinstructing the process
from the start after all processes are cancelled.
[CORRECTION] . . . Press this key to modify or change part of the
process.
When CORRECTION is depressed, following screen appears.
Fig. B.1.1.2 (b)
Each time Cursor or Cursor is depressed when the above screen

appears, the position of the cursor of the process No. on the process table
moves up and down.
Press Cursor or Cursor to select an arbitrary Process No., and
correct the machining contents.
Also in this screen, the process can be inserted, deleted and replaced.
(Sample Insertion)
PROC 01: DRILLING
PROC 04:
97
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(1) Press Cursor or Cursor to select the Process No. to be inserted.

(For example, select process 03).
(2) Select the machining contents to be inserted (for example, press
TURN and press ROUGH I.D.).
The results are as follows.
PROC 01: DRILLING
PROC 03: ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE (INSERTION)
PROC 05:
(Sample Deletion)
(1) Press CURSOR or CURSOR to select the process No. to be
deleted.
(2) Press PROC DELETE.
(Replacement)
(1) Insert a new machining process, then delete the old one, or
(2) Delete the old one, then insert a new machining process.
B.1.1.3
Output of only single
process
B.1.1.4
Tool data
Only one process can be corrected if required after all processes are
prepared, and only NC data of its process can be output.
Press CORR. & OUT when the screen in Fig. B.1.1.2 (a) appears: the
screen as shown in Fig. B.1.1.2 (b) will appear.
Select the process to be output independently as NC data, using Cursor
* or Cursor *, and press NEXT PAGE.
If the working process is specified on the process chart screen, the screen
changes and the tool information required for working definition is
prompted.
Tool data is displayed on the lefthand side of the screen and the tool
picture is displayed on the righthand side of it. (The tool picture is
displayed if the optional animationdrawing function is available. To
display the tool picture, press the soft key CHECK.)
98
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
The following prompts are displayed.

Turret No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool selection number . . . . . .
Tool offset number . . . . . . . . .
Tool management number . . .
TL = (NOTE 1)
TN = (NOTE 2)
TM =
ID = (NOTE 3)
NOTE
1 The turret No. prompt is displayed if there are more than 1
tool resets. The number of tool rests is to be set in No.MTF
1050.
2 Input an integer consisting of up to two digits as TN and TM.
3 The tool management number (ID) to be input must have
been registered in the tool data (see VI2.1). If a tool
management number (ID) not registered in the tool data is
input, a message No tool management number is found.
is displayed. if DEL, INPUT is keyed in, the registered
tool management number is deleted from the tooling
information.
When using a tool already registered in the tooling information, the other
data is automatically displayed if the tool selection number (TN) is input.
At new registration, the tool configuration data and setting data registered
in the tool data are displayed if the tool management number (ID) is input.
(1) Turning Tools
Tool Configuration Data Display (Display Only; Not Alterable)
(Center drill)
Tool type
Tool tip angle
Drill diameter
TP; center drill

AN;
DD;
(Drill)
Tool type
Tool tip angle
Drill diameter
TP; drill
AN;
DD;
(Reamer)
Tool type
Tool diameter
Cutter length
Biting length
TP; reamer
DT;
LT;
LE;
(Tap)
Tool type
Tool diameter
Cutter length
Biting length
Pitch
TP; tap
DT;
LT;
LE;
PT;
99
APPENDIX
(Groove/Neck/Cut off)
Tool type
Tool tip radius
Cutter angle
Tool tip angle
Tool tip width
(Thread)
Tool type
Cutter angle
Tool tip angle
(General)
Tool type
Tool tip radius
Cutter angle
Tool tip angle
Cutter protective angle
(Finger)
Tool type
B61804E2/05
TP; grooving/necking
RN;
AC;
AN;
WN;
XN;
ZN;
TP; thread
AC;
AN;
XN;
ZN;
TP; general
RN;
AC;
AN;
AP;
XN;
ZN;
TP; finger
XN;
Setting Data Prompts (Settable/Alterable)

Setting angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS = (NOTE 1)
Setting position . . . . . . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
Spindle rotating direction . . . . SD = (0 = CW, 1 = CCW) (NOTE 2)
Holder number . . . . . . . . . . . . HL = (NOTE 3)
NOTE
1 The setting angle (AS) follows the system parameter
No.200 drawing format. Not displayed if the center drill, drill,
finger tool.
2 The spindle rotating direction prompt is displayed when
system parameter No.702 bit 1 = 1.
3 The holder number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
Set the
animationdrawing tool holder number.
100
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
(2) CAxis Tools

Tool Configuration Data Display (Display Only; Not Alterable)
(Center drill)
Tool type
Tool material
Tool diameter
Cutting diameter
Cutter length
Tool tip angle
TP; Caxis center drill

MT;
DT;
DS;
LT;
AT;
(Drill)
Tool type
Tool material
Tool diameter
Cutter length
Tool tip angle
TP; Caxis drill

MT;
DT;
LT;
AT;
(Tap)
Tool type
Tool material
Tool diameter
Cutter length
Biting length
Pitch
TP; Caxis tap

MT;
DT;
LT;
LE;
PT;
(End mill)
Tool type
Tool material
Tool diameter
Cutting diameter
Cutter length
Number of tools
TP; Caxis end mill

MT;
DT;
DS;
LT;
NT;
Setting Data Prompts (Settable/Alterable)

Setting direction . . . . . . CP = (0: side working; 1: end working)
Setting position . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
Rotation direction . . . . . TR = (0: clockwise; 1: counterclockwise)
Holder number . . . . . . . HL = (NOTE)
NOTE
The holder number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
When creating an NC data, interference is checked or offset is calculated

according to the tool configuration. Note that a correct NC data is not
output unless tool data is input accurately.
If tooling information has already been created, the other data is
automatically displayed when the tool management number (TN) is
input. If there are no changes, press NEXT PAGE to proceed to the next
screen.
101
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
To add or change data, move the cursor with CURSOR X, CURSOR

Y and input the data.
For tool configuration data, just the tool data of the set tool management
number (ID) is displayed, so it is impossible to change data directly.
When proceeding to the next screen by pressing NEXT PAGE, the set
data is registered as tooling information. Also if a tool management
number having a tool type not compatible with the current process has
been input, a message This tool does not fit the current process. is
displayed.
ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . Return to the menu screen.
PAGE BACK . . . . . . Return to the last screen (working process
list screen).
CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . Displayed if the optional animation
drawing function is available. The tool
picture is displayed according to the
currently displayed data. If this key is
pressed after changing tooling information,
the tool picture is displayed anew according
to the changed data.
TOOL DATA . . . . . . A tool data list is displayed.
TOLING INFOR. . . . A tooling information list is displayed.
NEXT ID . . . . . . . . . . Displayed if the optional automatic process
decision function is available. Select the
tool of the next ID number in which the
working process type (KP) is set.
NEXT PAGE . . . . . . . Proceed to the next page.
In the 2tool rest type, the tool configuration picture is inverted if the
turret number is changed. Also the following screen is displayed in the
balance cut process.
In the diagram, the upper picture is the tool for cutter No.1 and the lower
picture is the tool for cutter No.2.
(Cautions about Tool Picture)
1. The chip only is displayed if the holder has not been defined for the
tool.
2. It is impossible to change the chip or holder scale value.
102
B61804E2/05
B.1.1.5
Machining start position
APPENDIX
When all tool data are input, the system asks you the machining start
position as follows.
XAXIS . . . . . . . DXO =
ZAXIS . . . . . . . ZO =
NOTE
By the establishment of system parameter (No.0009), the
questions on the machining start position can be skipped.
B.1.1.6
Passing point
(1) This function designates the passing point of a tool when approaching
to the work from the machining start position, and the passing point
of a tool when returning to the next machining start position after
completion of the machining.
Fig. B.1.1.6 (a)
PASSING POINT FOR APPROACH:

1ST POINT . . . . . . . . . XA1 =
ZA1 =
2ND POINT . . . . . . . . XA2 =
ZA2 =
Designate the passing point of tool when approaching to the work from
the machining start position at the time of machining start.
PASSING POINT FOR ESCAPE:
1ST POINT . . . . . . . . . XE1 =
ZE1 =
2ND POINT . . . . . . . . XE2 =
ZE2 =
Designate the passing point of tool when escaping from the work up to
the next machining start position upon completion of machining.
When no data is defined, the axis in question does not move.
For example, in the absence of input on Zaxis coordinate value after
inputting some data to Xaxis coordinate value, the tool moves to the
specified position only for Xaxis, and Zaxis does not move.
103
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Fig. B.1.1.6 (b) Designation of passing point
Set the number of simultaneous moving axes in a motion from the

machining start position to (XA1, ZA1) and the number of simultaneous
moving axes in a motion from (XE2, ZE2) to the next machining start
position using system parameter Nos.107 to 115 bits 3, 4.
NOTE
The conversation screen of the established passing point
can be skipped by each type of machining. (By setting
system parameter No.107 to 115)
104
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.1.1.7
Cutting direction
When the OD cutting or ID machining process is specified, you are

requested to enter the cutting direction.
Specify the direction to the question regarding the cutting direction CD
=.
At this time, it can be entered not only from the ten key pad but also from
the Software key.
Cutting direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD =
Negative direction of X axis

Positive direction of X axis
Negative direction of Z axis
Positive direction of Z axis
When the X axis negative direction is selected in OD cutting, the cutting

conditions for facing are automatically set. Also, the facing part is
automatically selected for the machining area. When the direction other
than the X axis negative direction is selected, cutting conditions for OD
machining are set.
In the case of ID machining, cutting conditions for ID cutting are set
whatever direction nay be selected.
105
B.1.1.8
Cutting conditions
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
The cutting conditions are automatically set and displayed according to

the kinds of selected materials. Change only the desired items, while
monitoring the CRT screen. If you want to change the feedrate to 75%
of the displayed value, for example, multiply the displayed value by 0.75
as follows.
(Examples) F1 =
INPUT
The cutting conditions and meanings of the system questions are

described below according to machining data.
(1) Center drilling conditions
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C =
Clearance quantity (mm)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D =
Depth of cut (mm)
SPINDLE SPEED . . . . N =
Spindle speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F =
Feedrate (mm/rev)
(2) Drilling conditions

Cutting conditions for drilling comprise type 1, 2 and 3 according to
the movement of a drill.
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
702 is 1)
or
702 is 0)
SPINDLE ROTATION . . . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
106
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C =
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . Z =
Clearance (mm or inch)

Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
702 is 1)
or
702 is 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C1 = Secondary drilling clearance
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point (mm or
inch)
702 is 1)
or
702 is 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth
(mm or inch)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D2 = Secondary drilling depth
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch)
107
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05

FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F2 = Feed rate for second pass
CAUTION
D1 and D2 in Machining method 2 and Machining method
3
As shown in figure 7 and figure 8, D1 and D2 in
machining method 2 and machining method 3 are input as
positive values.
Associated parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
702
Bit 7 Specification of depth of cut

0 : Specifies with an incremental value
1 : Specifies with an absolute value
108
#1
#0
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
(3) Reaming
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C =
CUTTING POINT . . . . Z =
SPINDLE SPEED . . . . N =
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F =
Amount of clearance (mm or inches)

181 [same as drilling])
Cutting endpoint coordinate
(CAUTION 1)
Spindle speed (rpm)
Feed rate (mm/rev)
Workpiece face
Where LE value is either 0

or undefined
F2 = F1(value contained in system parameter No.196)
Where LE value is significant
(4) Tapping
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Speed of rotation (rpm)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Amount of clearance (mm or inches)
195)
(CAUTION 1)
109
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
1 A value is assigned to Z in accordance with the system of
coordinates on this screen. Where the Z axis is plotted as
shown in the figure on the right the value of Z will always be
negative.
Whatever the drawing format the right hand end of the Z axis
is always positive on the Machining definition screen of
menu No.4. Specifications of the machining start points and
intermediate points are all made in accordance with this
system of coordinates. The cutting points are also therefore
specified in accordance with the same coordinate system.
(5) Roughing conditions of inner figure

(6) Roughing conditions of inner figure
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
FINISH ALLOWANCE . . . . . . . . TX = Finish allowance in Xaxis
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Return Amount quantity
(mm or inch)
(m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
(CAUTION 2)
1ST OVERRIDE . . . . . . . % = Displayed in case of outside
diameter roughing.
Refer to the item (11).
110
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
(7) Semifinishing conditions of outer figure

(8) Semifinishing conditions of inner figure
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F = Feedrate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
(CAUTION 2)
(9) Finishing conditions of outer figure

(10) Finishing conditions of inner figure
(mm or inch)
(mm or inch)
(m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate for (mm/rev or inch/rev
(CAUTION 2)
111
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(11) Grooving/necking machining conditions

PECKING ON/OFF . . . . . PE = Yes/No of pecking 1 machining
(Yes = 1, No = 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D =
Cutting amount per cutting on

pecking 1 machining
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U =
Return escape amount per cutting

on pecking 1 machining
(mm or inch)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C =
Clearance amount (mm or inch)
FINISH ALLOWANCE . . TW = Finish amount in width direction

(mm or inch)
TB = Finish amount in depth direction
(mm or inch)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . . . V =
Cutting feed rate

(m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = Rough machining feed rate

F2 = Finish machining feed rate
MAX RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . N =
Maximum spindle speed (rpm)
Pecking machining operation

The pecking operation on grooving rough machining is as follows:
112
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
NOTE
There are no questions, TW, TB, or F2 in the case of
necking. There are no questions on pecking 1 machining
in grooving finish machining and necking machining.
(12) Threading conditions
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . CT =
CS =
CE =
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D =
DL =
CUTTING SPEED . . . . V =
Clearance quantity (mm or inch)

Clearance quantity (mm or inch
Clearance quantity (mm or inch)
Final depth of cut (mm or inch)
Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min)
CAUTION
2 Whether the inquiry of MAXIMUM RPM is made or not
depends on the status of bit 0 of system parameter No.702.
0 : The inquiry is not made.
(The maximum spindle speed depends on the value set
in parameter No.128.)
1 : The maximum spindle speed is set every process.
Setting of system parameter No.128 is neglected.
However, the system does not ask this maximum spindle
speed if the process is set in such a way as the constant
surface speed function is not used in system parameters
No.107 115.
A value of system parameter No.128 is output in these
processes. Also, the question of the maximum spindle
speed is omitted when cutting another position by using
the same tool.
(13) 1st override for outside diameter roughing
For outside diameter roughing, override can be applied to the 1st depth
of cut and feed rate.
In the machining definition of outside diameter roughing, the system
asks the override value on the cutting condition screen. Answer this
question, key in the override value. It is possible to omit the question
on the override value on the cutting condition screen by advance
setting to skip the override value and question on the override value
in the system parameter.
113
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(a) Parameter
(i) System parameter No.104 (Initial value = 0)
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
Bit 1 Designation of 1st override value question skipping for 1st override value
for outside diameter roughing depth of cut
0 : Skip
1 : No skip
(ii)System parameter No.711 (Initial value = 100)
Set the 1st override for outside diameter roughing depth of cut.
Not defined: 100%
n: n%
CAUTION
However, the override setting is up to 10 to 100%.
When other values than this range are set, the override
value is 100%.
(b) Explanation of operation
(i) When skipping the question on the override value:
Set bit 1 of system parameter No.104 to 0 and the override value
to No.711.
In this setting, the system does not ask the override value on the
cutting condition screen for the outside diameter roughing
definition but with the system parameter No.711 value as the
override value, the 1st override processing for outside diameter
roughing is carried out automatically.
(ii)When no skipping the question on the override value:
Set bit 1 of system parameter No.104 to 1: the system asks the
following on the cutting condition screen for the outside
diameter roughing definition.
1st override ... % =
NOTE
For New, the system parameter No.711 value is set as the
initial value.
For Modifications, the value set so far is displayed.
Answer this question, key in the override value.
When the value on the display is acceptable, key in INPUT
only.
NOTE
Even when the 1st override value for outside diameter
roughing depth of cut is changed, the system parameter
No.711 value remains unchanged.
114
B61804E2/05
B.1.1.9
Cutting area definitions
APPENDIX
The cursors (D) are displayed along the parts figure to specify the cutting
area.
A blank figure (dotted line) and machining figure (solid line) will be
drawn on the CRT screen, the system asks you the dividing directions.
(1) Machining area
Designate the cutting area of parts figure from the start point to end
point by flickering cursors on the CRT screen. One cursor shows the
start point, while the other shows the end point of the cutting area.
shift the cursor along the parts figure for selecting the start point and
end point.
(2) Movement of cursor

Depress
CURSOR
FORWRD
or
CURSOR
BACK
key.
The cursor shifts along the parts figure, each time the above key is
pressed.
(3) Division
After designating the start point and end point, input the dividing
direction of the blank to define the cutting point.
Depress arrow key when the system asks you the following questions.
DIVIDING DIRECTION ... DS = Dividing direction at start point
DIVIDING DIRECTION ... DE = Dividing direction at end point
115
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(4) Example of division

Assume a line is drawn in the arrow direction from the flickering
cursor when each arrow key is depressed. The portion bounded by the
lines in these arrow directions, blank figure, and parts figure are
machined. A residual blank figure, which may be kept unmachined
after the cutting area has been lathed out, will be displayed, on the CRT
screen. Since Symbolic FAPT can display drawings of these residual
blank figures one by one, you can check the remaining cutting quantity
very easily.
It is possible that a part of blank cannot be machined by any means
because of tool figures. In such a case, the system automatically
checks the relation between tool figure and parts figure, and displays
such an unmachined pocket on the CRT screen. Accordingly, you can
machine the pocket by using another tool.
116
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
(5) Designation of cutting of residual pocket
A pocket may be produced, depending upon parts figure and tool figure
as illustrated above. In such a case, designate the area to cut such a pocket
only by using a reversible tool.
It should be carefully noted that if a reversed tool is not properly

positioned or if tool figure data is not appropriate, the pocket area cannot
always be input.
After the cutting area has been designated, the designated cutting area is
lathed out from the blank figure by the tool. The, the system asks you to
check if another portion is to be cut by the same tool or not.
CUTTING ANOTHER AREA
BY SAME TOOL? . . . CN =
(1: YES 0: NO)
117
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Answer this question by one of the following operations.

. . . . In case of YES.
INPUT
1
(Another position is cut by the same tool)
.
.
.
.
In case of NO.
INPUT
0
(Not cut by the same tool)
After answering all questions, the CRT screen returns to the process list
which asks you the kind of machining.
If you want to prepare NC data after defining the kind of machining,
depress [NEXT PAGE] key in response to the system question about the
kind of machining.
[NEXT PAGE]
B.1.2
Cut off Machining, Bar
Feed
B.1.2.1
Cut off machining
Setting of tool data
When the system parameter No.140 is defined as Definition for cut off
machining, on the screen which defines the type of machining, by
displaying as cut off, the cut off machining can be selected.
Fig. B.1.2.1 (a)
Input the tool data. Use the grooving tool.

CAUTION
When defining cut off machining tool, set the data so that the
cutting direction is in the minus X axis direction.
118
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
Definition of cutting
conditions
Fig. B.1.2.1 (b)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 = . (mm or inch)

Specify the clearance in X axis direction from the blank figure.
FINISH ALLOWANCE: . . . . . . . TZ = . (mm or inch)
Specify the finish allowance at the parts side during cuttingoff
operation.
CUT OFF POS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CO = . (mm or inch)
Specify the cutoff position with the work inner diameter or the
distance from the work center.
COND.RESET POS: . . . . . . . . . . CR = . (mm or inch)
Specify the position for changing the machining conditions with the
distance from the cutoff position.
RETURN AMOUNT: . . . . . . . . . RA = . (mm or inch)
Specify the pullout amount of a tool in X axis direction from the
machining condition change position.
CUTTING SPEED: . . . . . . . . . . . V1 = . (m/min or feet/min)
V2 = . (m/min or feet/min)
FEED RATE: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F1 = . (mm/rev or inch/rev)
V2 = . (mm/rev or inch/rev)
119
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Designate the cutting speed for a b and b c in Fig. B.1.2.1 (c) below
with V1, the feed rate with F1, c d cutting speed with V2 and the
feedrate with F2.
Fig. B.1.2.1 (c)
The value of CO, CR, RA is designated in system parameter as Number

141, 142 and 143 respectively.
Definition of cutting start

position
Fig. B.1.2.1 (d)
120
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
STARTING POINT OF CUTTING OFF: SP

Designate the cuttingoff start position, using the cursor on the screen.
The cursor moves every time soft keys CURSOR and CURSOR
are depressed.
The cursor moves forward or backward along the parts figure. If the
cutting start position is designated, using the cursor, press INPUT key
or soft key NEXT PAGE, and define its point as the cutting start
position.
The cursor just after this screen is displayed is blinking where
Xcoordinate value on the figure element at the leftmost side of part
figure is maximum. The tool path for cutting off when the cutting start
position is designated at this point is illustrated below. (Fig. B.1.2.1 (e))
Fig. B.1.2.1 (e)
Further, the cutting path when one previous element figure is designated
as the cutting start position with the cursor moved is illustrated below.
(Fig. B.1.2.1 (f))
Fig. B.1.2.1 (f)
121
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Designate the chamfering of outer diameter at the cutoff (blank) side,

using system parameter No.144. When the blank side chamfering is
designated, the blank side chamfer is inserted after cuttingoff. (Fig.
B.1.2.1 (g))
Fig. B.1.2.1 (g)
B.1.2.2
Bar feed
(1) On the KINDS OF MACHINING screen, press TURN to display the

software keys for defining the bar feed process.
(2) The bar feed amount is the distance between the work edge left after
cuttingoff and the work edge defined by the blank figure. This
amount is automatically calculated by the system.
Work end face after cutting off

Fig. B.1.2.2 (a)
NOTE
The bar feed process cannot be seen by the animation
drawing.
122
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Tool data setting
Fig. B.1.2.2 (b)
VIRTUAL TOOL POS: . . . . . . . . . . XN =

SETTING POSITION: . . . . . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
Input the virtual tool position and the setting position. For the virtual tool
position setting, refer to the following figures.
Fig. B.1.2.2 (c)
Setting of cutting
conditions
Fig. B.1.2.2 (d)
Fig. B.1.2.2 (e)
The cutting condition screen initially asks you to input the type of
machining.
Type . . . . . . . . BT =
Type 1:
Pullout method 1
Type 2:
Pullout method 2
Type 3:
Slidestop method 1
Type 4:
Slidestop method 2
Changing the type value alters the contents of the prompt accordingly.
123
APPENDIX
(1) Pullout method 1

Clearance . . . . . .
Grip position . . . .
Recess amount . .
Feed rate . . . . . . .
B61804E2/05
CAZ=approach clearance (mm)

WG = work grip position (mm)
CEZ= tool recess amount (mm)
F1 = feed rate (for gripping) (mm/min)
F2 = feed rate (for pulling or positioning)
(mm/min)
F3 = feed rate (for relief) (mm/min)
(2) Pullout method 2

Clearance . . . . . . CAX=approach clearance (mm)
Grip position . . . . WG = work grip position (mm)
Feed rate . . . . . . . F1 = feed rate (for gripping) (mm/min)
F2 = feed rate (for pulling or positioning)
(mm/min)
F3 = feed rate (for relief) (mm/min)
124
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
(3) Slidestop method 1

Clearance . . . . . . CAZ=approach clearance (mm)
Recess amount . . CEZ= tool recess amount (mm)
Speed . . . . . . . . . S1 = spindle speed (rpm)
Feed rate . . . . . . . F2 = feed rate (for feeding) (mm/min)
(4) Slidestop method 2

Speed . . . . . . . . . S1 = spindle speed (rpm)
125
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.1.3
Machining Definition of
Caxis Machining
B.1.3.1
Specification of Caxis
machining definition
In menu 4 Machining Definition, press soft key CAXIS

MACHINING.
1) Kind of Caxis machining specification
When CAXIS MACHINING button is pressed, the soft key for
selecting the kind of Caxis machining is displayed.
NOTE
For the spindle positioning method (MTF1306 = 1), the
FACE MILLING and CYLINDRICAL GROOVING software
keys are not displayed.
2) Tool data for Caxis machining

After setting the type of machining, the setting screen of tools to be
used is displayed.
Tool data and the tool picture are displayed respectively on the left and
right of the screen. (The tool picture is displayed if the optional
animation drawing function is available. To display the tool picture,
press the soft key CHECK.)
The following prompts will be displayed.
TURRET NO. . . . . . . . . . . TL = (NOTE 1)
TOOL SELECT NO. . . . . TN =
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM =
TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . . . ID = (NOTE 2)
126
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
NOTE
1 The turret number prompt is displayed if there are more than
1 tool rests. The number of tool rests is to be set in
No.MTF1050.
2 The tool ID number (ID) to be input must have been
registered in tool data. If a tool ID number (ID) not registered
in tool data is input, a message This ID is not registered in
tool data. is displayed. Also if a tool ID number having a tool
type not compatible with the present process is input, a
message The tool type of this ID is not compatible with the
present process. is displayed. The registered tool ID
number is deleted from the tooling information if keyed in as
DEL INPUT.
When using a tool which has already been registered in the tooling
information, the other data is automatically displayed if the tool selection
number (TN) is input.
In new registration, the data of the tool configuration and that of setting
which have been registered in the tool data are displayed if the tool ID
number (ID) is input.
(Center Drill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER
CUT WIDTH
CUT LENGTH
NOSE ANGLE
TP; Caxis center drill

MT;
DT;
DS;
LT;
AT;
(Drill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER
CUT LENGTH
NOSE ANGLE
TP; Caxis drill

MT;
DT;
LT;
AT;
(Tap)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER
CUT LENGTH
PECK LENGTH
PITCH
TP; Caxis Tap

MT;
DT;
LT;
LE;
PT;
(End mill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER
CUT WIDTH
CUT LENGTH
CUT COUNT
TP; Caxis End mill

MT;
DT;
DS;
LT;
NT;
127
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Prompts on data of setting (Settable/Alterable)

SETTING DIRECTION . . . . . CP = (0: Side machining,
1: End machining)
SETTING POSITION . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
ROTATE DIRECTION . . . . . TR = (0: Forwards, 1: Backwards)
HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . HL =
(NOTE)
NOTE
The holer number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
3) Machining start position
When all tool data are input, the screen asks the machining start
position.
X coordinate values . . . . . . DXO =
Z coordinate values . . . . . . ZO =
4) Cutting conditions for Caxis machining
The cutting conditions required for a particular type of machining are
requested according to the type of machining selected.
(a) Center sink conditions
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool revolution
(mm/rev)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Infeed amount (mm)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance quantity 1 (mm)
(b) Drilling conditions (Machining method 1)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N
Tool speed (rpm)
(mm/rev)
DWELL ON/OFF . . . . DW =1 with dwell at hole bottom, 0
without dwell
(c) Drilling conditions (Machining method 2)
(mm/rev)
RETURN AMOUNT . U = Return amount (mm)
128
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
(d) Drilling conditions (Machining method 3)

(mm/rev)
(e) Tapping conditions
(f) Grooving, milling and cylindrical groove conditions
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FR = Feed amount per blade in the tool
diameter revolution (mm/rev)
FEED RATA . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool revolution
(mm/rev)
(g) Face milling conditions
(1) Screen and questions
i) There are no particular changes to Part figure definition on menu
2. Use a symbolic key to define the part figure shape in the same
way as before. If CP = 2 (on the line) is given in response to Cut
on which side (relative to the direction of the element)? (CP), then
the same machining will result, regardless of whether roughing
or finishing is selected. (Machining on the line.)
ii) If Face milling is selected at Machining definition on menu 4,
(1) Machining type TP and (2) Finishing allowance TS are
added to the question about cutting conditions.
(2) Cutting conditions
i) Machining type
Select the required machining type in response to
TP = (1: ROUGH 2: FINISH 3: ROUGH FINISH)
on the cutting conditions screen.
TP = 1: Roughing only
TP = 2: Finishing only
TP = 3: Roughing, then Finishing
If 1 or 3 is keyed in for TP, a further question will appear to ask for
the finishing allowance (TS).
ii) Finishing allowance
In response to TS =
enter a number representing the allowance for finishing that the
roughing process needs to leave. This must always be a positive
number. The following error message is displayed if a negative
number is input.
INCORRECT FINISHING ALLOWANCE.
ENTER A POSITIVE NUMBER
129
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
The default value for finishing allowance TS is set by system

parameter 368.
Finishing allowance for Caxis face milling
Default: 0.5 mm or 0.02 inch

(3) Machining method
i) The machining position is offset from the defined component
shape by an amount equivalent to the finishing allowance.
TS
Defined
component
shape
TS
TS
Part
removed by
roughing
TS
Tool
position for
roughing
TS
ii) Finishing (TP = 2)

Machining proceeds as before.
iii)Roughing then finishing (TP = 3)
After roughing, the machine returns in the X axis before starting
finishing.
5) Specification of cutting position for Caxis machining
The cutting position is specified next after completing the
specifications on the cutting condition screen.
POS =
(1: Yes, 0: No)
Use the cursor to specify the shape to be cut.
The cursor flashes to indicate shapes which can be cut.
Press CURSOR or CURSOR , or key in 0 to move the cursor.
When the cursor indicates the shape that you wish to cut, press NEXT
PAGE or key in 1 to specify this shape.
When the shape has been specified, you will be asked whether the
same tool is to be used for cuts at other positions.
Use this tool to cut at another position tool . . . . . . CN =
(1: Yes, 0: No)
If you key in 1 in response, the cutting conditions screen reappears.
If you key in 0 in response, you return to the screen for selecting the
type of machining.
130
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.1.3.2
1) Center drilling
Explanatory drawing of
cutting conditions
Dotted line:
Solid line:
2) Drilling
a) Machining method 1
b) Machining method 2
131
Rapid
traverse
Cutting
feed
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
c) Machining method 3
3) Diagram showing conditions for Caxis tap machining

a) Blind hole
b) Through hole
132
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
4) Grooving
a) Side (Zaxis direction)
b) Side (Caxis direction)
c) End face
133
B.1.3.3
Blind hole and through
hole
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(1) The blind hole and through hole settings

The blind hole and through hole settings in the C axis component
shape definition are only used in tapping machining. All other hole
machining is restricted to through holes.
(2) Details of blind hole and through hole settings
The effects of blind hole and through hole settings are shown below
for different hole machining processes.
Indicates the position of the tip of the tool.
(1) Center sink machining
(2) Drilling
(3) Blind hole tapping
(4) Through hole tapping
The tool stops with a clearance of C2

before the depth of the hole.
134
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
B.2
AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
SPECIFICATION FOR
5700 SERIES
B.2.1
Outline
B.2.2
Operation
The automatic process specification is a function in which NC data are

prepared just by inputting the blank figure and parts figure.
The function was named so because the specification of machining
process in menu number 4, Machining definition, or cutting direction
or cutting area are decided automatically in the given order. With this
function, inputs in menu number 4 are decreased greatly.
Processing with this function are done based on tooling information or
setting data, so these data must be set in advance.
Processes prepared with this function can, of course, be checked or
corrected by manual operation.
The Caxis machining process is also automatically processed, (10TF
only).
(1) The screen MACHINING DEFINITION (type of machining) is

displayed and the software key AUTO is displayed on the screen
when the menu number 4 is selected. Press this software key to start
the automatic process setting function.
Also, if a process has already been prepared, select the menu number
4 and then the screen for MACHINING DEFINITION (machining
plan) appears.
Press the software key NEW and then the software key AUTO is
displayed.
[AUTO]
135
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(2) Press the AUTO and then the PROCESS SETTING screen is
displayed. The data being displayed at this point includes the
machining method group number (No.000) and the description of
machining procedure data of that group (No.100 130, No.200 230,
No.300 330).
If the machining method group number of setting data is undefined at
this time, the machining procedure data of group number set by blank
figure is displayed.
(3) Press the software key EXEC if the machining method group and
machining procedure data displayed on the screen are proper.
(4) Input the machining group number for the MG = question when
modifying the machining method group.
(5) Move the cursor by the software key CURSOR to modify the
description of machining procedure data when modifying the
description of machining procedure data.
The meaning of software key used for modifying operation is as follows:
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . Set the cursor to the position where
machining procedure is deleted or
inserted.
[PROC DELETE] . . . . . . . . . It deletes the process where the cursor is
blinking.
[INSERT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert a new process before the process
where a cursor is blinking.
i) When this software key is pressed, the software key for setting the
type of process appears.
ii) The software key for setting the type of process changes cyclicly
by pressing the software key .
iii) Press the software key of process type inserted to allow a new
process to be inserted.
iv) Press the software key to allow the insertion mode to be
released.
136
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
[ESCAPE] . . . Press this key to return to the menu screen. At this time,
the details where correction has been made remain on the
main memory but are not registered on the sub memory.
[EXEC] . . . . . Automatically create the process according to the
machining procedure data displayed.
137
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(6) When the processing begins, various data and tooling information,
material data set in the setting data will automatically decide
machining processes, tools, and machining area. The screen will
display how the material shape changes according to the automatic
specification. (The screen proceeds automatically.)
For the Caxis processing, the change of blank material being cut
is not displayed, but the machining area is indicated by the cursor.
(7) After preparing all machining process, the screen will display the
list of the process, and stops. Press the [NEXT PAGE] soft key to
continue it to NC data preparation. To check or to correct data,
select correction mode in menu number 4, press the [CURSOR
FORWRD] or [CURSOR BACK] soft keys to the necessary
machining process, and press the [INPUT] key or the [NEXT
PAGE] soft key.
138
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
B.2.3
Setting
B.2.3.1
Setting data
Preset the data used in automatic process specification, via the setting
screen. To display the setting screen, first press the DATA SET soft key,
and then key in 2 INPUT.
(1) Machining order data (100 129, 200 229, 300 329)
Set data to indicate what order the machining is to be done.
The setting of the machining process is done with numbers. The
numbers and the machining processes correspond as follows:
1. CENTER DRILLING
2. DRILLING
3. ROUGH FACING
4. ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE
5. ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE
6. SEMIFINISHING FACING
7. SEMIFINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE
8. SEMIFINISHING OF INNER FIGURE
9. FINISHING FACING
10. FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE
11. FINISHING OF INNER FIGURE
12. GROOVING FACING
13. GROOVING OF OUTER FIGURE
14. GROOVING OF INNER FIGURE
15. NECKING OF OUTER FIGURE
16. NECKING OF INNER GIGURE
17. THREADING FACING
18. THREADING OF OUTER FIGURE
19. THREADING OF INNER FIGURE
Above are turning processes.
20 to 29 are not used.
30. FACE CENTER DRILLING
31. SIDE CENTER DRILLING
32. FACE DRILLING
33. SIDE DRILLING
34. FACE TAPPING
35. SIDE TAPPING
36. CAXIS FACE GROOVING
37. CAXIS SIDE GROOVING
Above are Caxis machining.
FAPT performs automatic specification of machining process according
to the order set here. Machining processes not set here cannot
automatically be prepared.
139
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Table B.2.3.1(a) Machining order data

No.
Format
Initial value
Descriptions
100
200
300
Integer
Undefined
1st machining process setting
101
201
301
Integer
2nd machining process setting
102
202
302
Integer
3rd machining process setting
103
203
303
Integer
4th machining process setting
104
204
304
Integer
105
205
305
Integer
106
206
306
Integer
10
107
207
307
Integer
11
108
208
308
Integer
12
109
209
309
Integer
13
110
210
310
Integer
14
111
211
311
Integer
15
112
212
312
Integer
16
113
213
313
Integer
17
114
214
314
Integer
18
115
215
315
Integer
19
116
216
316
Integer
30
117
217
317
Integer
32
118
218
318
Integer
34
119
219
319
Integer
36
120
220
320
Integer
31
21st machining process setting
121
221
321
Integer
33
22nd machining process setting
122
222
322
Integer
35
23rd machining process setting
123
223
323
Integer
37
124
224
324
Integer
Undefined
125
225
325
Integer
Undefined
126
226
326
Integer
Undefined
127
227
327
Integer
Undefined
128
228
328
Integer
Undefined
129
229
329
Integer
Undefined
140
Remarks
(NOTE)
Turning
(NOTE)
Caxis
machining
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
NOTE
Set the initial value and machining procedure
correspondence described on the previous page.
(2) Manual input flag data (Nos.130 166, 230 266, 330 366)
These data will have no meaning unless the machining process is set
in the machining procedure data.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
MPP
#2
MCD
#1
MCC
#0
MTS
MTS Set whether or not to perform manual tool selection

1 : Tool selection is done manually.
The automatic proceeding of the tool data question screen will halt, so
tool number must be input manually.
0 : Tool selection is done automatically.
The appropriate tool will be selected from the tooling information.
MCC Set whether or not to manually input cutting conditions.
1 : Cutting conditions are input manually.
The automatic proceeding of cutting conditions question screen will
halt, so input cutting conditions manually.
0 : Cutting conditions are set automatically.
MCD Set whether or not to manually set cutting direction and area.
1 : Cutting direction and area are set manually.
0 : Cutting direction and area are decided automatically.
MPP Set whether or not to input the passing point manually
1 : Automatic processing of the passing point screen will halt, so passing
point can be input manually.
0 : Processings are automatically prepared without the passing point
defined.
141
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Table 3.1(b) Manual input flag data

No.
Format
Initial Value
Remarks
130 230
330 Bit specification
00000000
CENTER DRILL
131 231
00000000
DRILLING
132 232
00000000
ROUGH FACING
133 233
00000000
ROUGH OF OUTER FIG
134 234
00000000
ROUGH OF INNER FIG
135 235
00000000
SEMIFINISH OF FACING
136 236
00000000
SEMIFINISH OF OUTER
FIG
137 237
00000000
SEMIFINISH OF INNER
FIG
138 238
00000000
FINISH FACING
139 239
00000000
FINISH OF OUTER FIG
140 240
00000000
FINISH OF INNER FIG
141 241
00000000
GROOVE FACING
142 242
00000000
GROOVE OF INNER FIG
143 243
00000000
GROOVE OF OUTER FIG
144 244
00000000
NECK OF INNER FIG
145 245
00000000
NECK OF OUTER FIG
146 246
00000000
THREAD FACING
147 247
00000000
THREAD OF INNER FIG
148 248
00000000
THREAD OF OUTER FIG
149 249
to
to
158 258
349
to
358
159 259
00000000
FACE CENTER DRILLING
160 260
00000000
SIDE CENTER DRILLING
161 261
00000000
FACE DRILLING
162 262
00000000
SIDE DRILLING
163 263
00000000
FACE TAPPING
164 264
00000000
SIDE TAPPING
165 265
00000000
CAXIS FACE GROOVING
166 266
00000000
CAXIS SIDE MACHINING
142
Unused
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
The above setting data are divided into three groups.

1st group: Uses data of number 100 166.
2nd group: Uses data of number 200 266.
3rd group: Uses data of number 300 366.
This means that three types of machining processes can be preset. The
value of setting number 0 decides data of which group are to be used.
(3) Machining method decision data
No.0
Group selection (1 3)
Initial value 1 (Setting data of the 1st group is used.)
When this value is undefined, the group is decided from
the blank shape. When the blank is a bar, grout 1 is
selected, when it is a pipe, group 2 is selected, and when
it is of special blank, group 3 is selected.
No.1
Not used
No.2
Not used
No.3
Coefficient 1 for drilling

Initial value: 1
If (Drilling depth)/(Drilling diameter) is equal to or less
than the setting value of No.3, machining is done by
method 1.
No.4
Coefficient 2 for drilling

Initial value: 101
If (Drilling depth)/(Drilling diameter) is larger than
number 3 and equal to or less than the setting value of
No.4, machining is done by method 2. If larger than
No.4, machining is done by method 3.
No.5
Unused.
No.10
Presetting of center boring depth D

Initial value: Undefined
No.11
Presetting of finishing margin TW of the grooving width

No.12
Presetting of finishing margin TB of the grooving width

No.20
Coefficient 1 on Caxis drilling

Initial value 1
If (Drilling depth)/(Drilling diameter) is less than the
value of setting value No.2, cutting method 1 is used.
No.21
Coefficient 2 on Caxis drilling

Initial value 1
If (Drilling depth)/(Drilling diameter) is larger than the
value of No.20 and less than the value of No.21, cutting
method 2 is used. If it is larger than the value of No.21,
cutting method 3 is used.
No.22
Preset value of D1 in Caxis center drilling

143
B.2.3.2
Tool data and tooling
information
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
The tool to be used is automatically selected from the tool data. As a

means of selection, the process type (KP) registered in the tool data per
tool is referred to. The value of KP of each tool must always be set before
executing the automatic process decision function. It is possible to set 3
types of KP per tool.
KP Process type
1 Center boring
2 Drilling
3 End roughing
4 Outside diameter roughing
5 Inside diameter roughing
6 End intermediate finishing
7 Outside diameter intermediate finishing
8 Inside diameter intermediate finishing
9 End finishing
10 Outside diameter finishing
11 Inside diameter finishing
12 End grooving
13 Outside diameter grooving
14 Inside diameter grooving
15 Outside diameter necking
16 Inside diameter necking
17 Front threading
18 Outside diameter threading
19 Inside diameter threading
Tooling information is automatically created anew if the tool is
automatically selected. All the previously created tooling information is
deleted.
As the tool selection number (TN) and the tool offset number (TM) of the
data of the tooling information created anew, the executedprocess
number is set as it is. For example, the tool selection number of the tool
used in process 01 becomes 01. As other setting data, the data existing
in the tool data is used as it is. The automatic process decision is not
executed well, therefore, unless setting data is set accurately in the tool
data.
The turret number is not automatically set if there are more than 1 tool
rests. It is to be set manually by the operator.
144
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.2.4
Cautions and Notes
NOTE
Facing is always done from the +X direction to the X
direction.
Rough machining
Finishing
CAUTION
If outer figure machining is set to the machining procedure
data without setting the facing, machining will be done
regarding the face as the outer figure.
Rough machining
Finishing
145
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
Finishing of Outer Figure
If machining processes are set in the machining procedure
data in the order of FINISHING FACING and FINISHING
OF OUTER FIGURE, the outer diameter part is cut by using
the same tool after cutting the end face from the outside to
the center as shown in Fig. B.2.4 (a) when there exists no
inner diameter part.
When an inner diameter part exists, cutting is done
continuously at the end face part through outer diameter
part as shown in Fig. B.2.4 (b)
Fig. B.2.4 (a)
Fig. B.2.4 (b)
CAUTION
If the pocket machining leaves some remainder, tool is
automatically changed, and the remainder will not be cut.
The remainder must be cut later, preparing the machining
process manually by monitoring the screen.
146
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
NOTE
1 Multiple neckings and threadings can be done, if the same
tool is used.
2 In necking, (a) and (b) of the following figure can be
machined, but (c) or (d) where back handed tools are
required, cannot be machined. In these cases, add
machining process manually, after automatic machining
process decision.
Fig. B.2.4 (c)
NOTE
Cannot be used for chaser turret.
CAUTION
If a center drilling process is set as a machining procedure
data, a center drilling process is always prepared
irrespective of the part shape. However, the center drilling
process is not generated, if the center drilling tool is not
loaded into tooling data, even if center drilling is included in
Machining procedure data of setting data. When the
center drilling process is not required, do not set a center
drilling process on the machining procedure data. Or delete
the center drilling process as required after preparing all the
processes.
147
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
NOTE
When a drilling tool with the diameter equal to the inside
diameter width is used, no inside diameter machining is
performed even when inside diameter machining operation
has been set in the machining procedure setting.
In Fig. B.2.4 (d) example, no inside diameter machining
process itself is generated.
In Fig. B.2.4 (e) example, inside diameter machining is
generated, but it is only in the region where the starting point
is A and the end point is B.
Fig. B.2.4 (d)
Fig. B.2.4 (e)
NOTE
When the starting point of inside diameter cutting is on the
outside diameter of meterial as shown in Fig. B.2.4 (f) below,
the operation is as follows.
(a)When Drill I.D is set in the machining procedure data,
drilling process is prepared, but no inside diameter
machining is prepared.
(b)If drilling is not set in the machining procedure data,
inside diameter machining is executed.
Fig. B.2.4 (f)
148
Revision Record
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE
(Series 15MODEL B, Series 16 CAP II) OPERATORS MANUAL (B61804E2)
04
03
02
Aug., 94
Dec., 93
Sep., 93
Addition of Series 16TB
Addition of IX. YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION
Addition of XII. DOUBLE SIDED MACHINING
Addition of APPENDIX B. RESTRICTIONS ON EACH

SYSTEM
Total revision
Addition of 16TC CAP II, 18TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II,
and 18iTA CAP II
Addition of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Addition of WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE
Addition of Following functions

D Function for automatically setting area division points
05
D Function for preparing the next tool
Aprr., 98
A
98
D Output function for interpolation rigid tapping

D G85/G89 boring cycle
D Infeed machining in Caxis face milling process
01
D Back machining FAPT
Dec., 90
D Double sided machining

D Animated simulation function II

Edition
Date
Contents
Edition
Date
Alteration of MTF parameters

Contents

B 63945en 02 v2004 07 26 100

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

B 63945en 02 v2004 07 26 100

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Convertional Automatic Programming

Function II for Lathe

II. EXPLANATION FOR CRT/MDI PANEL

III. PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT

BLANK AND DRAWING (DRAWING AND BLANK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Machining Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Specifying the Direction and Area of Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Function for Automatically Setting Area Division Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Cutting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Setting the Tool Data and Tooling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Drawing a Cutting Area and Painting a Blank Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

NC DATA PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Preparations of NC Data and Registrations of Machining Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Precautions to be Taken with Background Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Display of Machining Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Process Editing Function (Only with 2path Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Special Block Output to both Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Outputting the NC Data of a Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

CHECKING NC DATA (ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Flow of Animation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Starting an Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Setting of Parameters for Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Setting of Chuck Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Setting of Tailstock Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Setting of Tool Holder Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Enlargement and Reduction in the Animated Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Related System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Input/Output of Graphic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

4. SUB CYCLE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

SETTING OF SUB CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

INPUT/OUTPUT OF SUB CYCLE FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

DEFINITION OF SUB CYCLE PROCESS IN DEFINITION OF MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

PROCESS EDITING OF SUB CYCLE (2PATH LATHE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

OUTPUT OF NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

CAUTIONS AND NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

5. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION (2PATH LATHE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

BALANCE CUTTING PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

SPECIFICATION METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

USING THE AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

PROCESS EDITING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

RELATED PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL FOR BALANCE CUT B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

CAUTION AND NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

6. AUTO COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION (15TTFB ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

IV. VARIOUS FILE AND DATA

MAIN MEMORY AND SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND COLLATION OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

INPUT/OUTPUT WITH SUBMEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V. SETTING AND DISPLAY OF DATA

MATERIAL DATA AND MATERIAL FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. TOOL DATA AND TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

TOOL DATA, TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

DISPLAY AND SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VI. AUXILIARY JOBS

VII. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS OF Symbolic FAPT

SKIP FUNCTION OF PAGE AND QUESTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. CAUTIONS FOR USING Symbolic FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

TOOL FIGURE AND SETTING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VIII. CAXIS FAPT FUNCTION

2. MACHINING DEFINITION (MENU 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

SPECIFICATION OF CAXIS MACHINING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .